Sm-Deutz Fahr Agrotron k90 k100 k110 k120 Profiline Tractor

SAME DEUTZ-FAHR DEUTSCHLAND GmbH
WORKSHOP MANUAL
WORKSHOP MANUAL
SAME DEUTZ-FAHR DEUTSCHLAND GmbH

Deutz-Fahr Strasse 1
D-89415 Lauingen
Tel.: (09072) 997-0 Fax: (09072) 997-300
introduction
This publication is intended for the trained technician who must operate on our tractors.
It contains all general information relating to our tractor range, and in particular it highlights the inspection, overhauling
and adjustment procedures as well as the main instructions for dismantling and reassembling operations.
The workshop manual is a natural summary for the mechanic who has attended the vocational training and specializa-
tion courses, which are held every year at our Service School, to permit him to perform a precise and qualified work on
tractor.
Its contents are therefore an exhaustive reference book for the experienced mechanic who desires to refresh his me-
mory on the sequence of the operations to be done. It is then good practice for every authorized dealer mechanic to
have at his disposal this publication, so that it may be consulted quickly when necessary.
We wish to thank in advance for the cooperation all thos people, who will let us have their suggestions in order to make
this publication more complete.
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this workshop manual is to provide instruction for repair technicians and
a practical guide to improving the quality of repairs.
This manual enables repair technicians to acquire a thorough knowledge of the
machine, indicating the correct methods for fault diagnosis, for working in safety and for
accurate dimensional checks and visual inspections. The instructions also indicate the
products to use, the tightening torques and the adjustment data.
The technical material contained in this manual is reserved to Authorised Dealers and
Service Centres who will be duly informed of any technical changes to the machines in
question through the issue of documents regarding modifications, updates and
supplements for optional equipment.
All technicians and their colleagues are expressly forbidden from reproducing any part
of this manual in any form or from communicating the contents to third parties without
the express written permission of the Manufacturer, who remains the sole owner of this
document with all rights reserved in accordance with applicable laws.
00-1
GENERAL SAFETY RULES
SAFETY NOTES
To ensure that machines entrusted to Authorised Service Centres for repair or overhaul continue to function
correctly, it is very important that all repair work is carried out in the prescribed manner.
The procedures for checks and repairs indicated in this manual are safe and effective.
Some of the operations described require the use of special tools and equipment; these tools have been
specifally designed for the intended purpose and may be ordered directly from the Manufacturers.
DO NOT USE MAKESHIFT TOOLS; not only is there a risk of personal injury, but such tools are rarely suited
to the purpose for which they are used.
To prevent injury to operators, the symbols and are used in this manual to indicate the safety
precautions required. The warnings accompanying these symbols must always be adhered to carefully.
In potentially hazardous situations, always give priority to personal safety and take the necessary actions to
eliminate the danger.

1 - Even if you have a thorough knowledge of the machine as regards its
components, operation and controls, always take particular care when
carrying out the following operations; Remember that the machine you are
working on is in need of repair or overhaul and consequently may not
always behave as expected.
2 - Before starting work, clean the machine thoroughly to remove all mud,
dust and road dirt. Also clean the cab to remove all traces of oil, snow and
ice from the access steps and grab rails.
3 - When climbing up to or down from the cab, always ensure you maintain
three points of contact at a time (foot or handholds) in order to keep your
balance and prevent accidental falls.
4 - Always take special care when carrying out fault diagnosis operations;
these operations often require two persons, who must never stand in front
of the wheels when the engine is running.
5 - When carrying out checks and repairs, wear close-fitting clothing, safety
goggles and protective gloves that are suitable for the task (cleaning,
draining fluids, repairs).
When working near moving parts, long hair should be gathered up and
secured safely under a cap to prevent the risk of entanglement and sever
injury.
6 - Do not allow anyone who is not directly involved in the work to come near
the machine; ensure that they remain at a safe distance.
7 - Keep well clear of moving parts; when the engine is running, some moving
parts are not easily visible and therefore present a risk of entanglement,
even if protected by safety guards.
8 - Ensure that the area is well ventilated before starting the engine in order to
avoid the formation of dangerous concentrations of toxic gases; always
connect suitable fume extraction equipment to the exhaust pipe.
9 - Under no circumstances start the engine with the safety guards removed;
all repair and adjustment operations must be carried out with the engine
stopped.
00-3
10 - Do not top up fuel, oil or coolant levels when the engine is running.
11 - Never smoke and ensure there are no naked flames nearby when topping
up fuel or oil. Always remove the battery from the machine before
recharging.
12 - Before checking or removing the battery, stop the engine and remove the
key from the starter switch.
13 - Remove the battery and recharge in a well-ventilated area where the
temperature exceeds 0°C.
14 - When checking or recharging the battery, do not smoke or allow naked
flames in the vicinity as the hydrogen gas given off by the battery is highly
explosive.
15 - The liquid (electrolyte) contained in the battery is very harmful if it comes
into contact with the skin and the eyes; for this reason, always wear gloves
and safety goggles with side shields when checking or topping up the
battery.
Should any electrolyte accidentally come into contact with your skin, wash
the affected parts immediately with plenty of water; if electrolyte comes
into contact with your clothing, this should be removed as soon as
possible.
In case of accidental ingestion of electrolyte, drink plenty of water, milk or
vegetable oil and take antacids such as magnesium, bicarbonate, etc. and
seek medical attention immediately.
16 - Before working on the electrical systems, always disconnect the battery
terminals.
IMPORTANT!
Always disconnect the negative terminal (--) first and then the positive
terminal (+); when re-connecting the battery on completion of the work,
first connect the positive terminal (+) and then the negative(--).
17 - Before carrying out any arc welding (permitted only on implements
attached to the machine) always disconnect the battery terminals and
unplug all the connectors of the electronic control units and the alternator.
18 - When topping up lubricants, always wear suitable protective gloves.
19 - Do not wear clothing contaminated by engine or hydraulic oil; prolonged
contact with the skin can be harmful and may cause allergic reactions.
20 - Used engine oil and hydraulic oil must be disposed of in a proper manner;
recover used lubricants and dispose of them in accordance with the
applicable regulations.
21 - Before carrying out any work on the hydraulic or pneumatic systems,
discharge all residual pressure from the circuits.
22 - Before carrying out any work on the hydraulic system or engine, allow the
oil and engine coolant to cool down.
23 - When removing and refitting certain assemblies, it will be necessary to
support the machine; use stands, jacks or blocks capable of supporting
the weight and arrange them in a triangular pattern to prevent the machine
from overturning.
00-4
24 - To lift heavy components, use a hoist or crane. Check that

wire ropes, chains or fibre slings are not worn and that hooks are not
damaged.
25 - Always use lifting equipment of suitable capacity for the weight of the
components to be removed. Ensure lifting equipment is attached
correctly.
26 - When lifting or supporting an assembly or component, manoeuvre the
parts slowly and carefully to avoid oscillation or collision with other
components.
27 - Never work on components suspended from a hoist or crane.
28 - When removing the retaining bolts of a component that could fall, always
leave two opposing bolts in place for safety; before removing these last two
bolts, attach the component to suitable lifting equipment or position
support blocks.
29 - Any oil or fuel spilled during removal or dismantling operations should be
cleaned up as soon as possible to prevent the risk of slipping and fire.
30 - When refitting electrical wiring looms and wires, ensure that they are
properly secured with their original retaining straps or brackets to prevent
the possibility of damage caused by vibration.
31 - Never insert your fingers or hands to check the alignment between fixing
holes in components; always use a suitable dowel of soft material.
32 - When refitting assemblies or components, always use the specified
tightening torques; the tightening torques indicated in the paragraphs
regarding assembly/refitting operations have been determined through
experimentation and must be scrupulously adhered to.
33 - When refitting parts that are subject to vibration or that rotate at high
speed, take particular care when carrying out final installation checks.
00-5
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR REMOVAL AND REFITTING OPERATIONS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR REMOVAL AND REFITTING

OPERATIONS
★ When removing or refitting parts, always take the following safety

precautions.
1. PRECAUTIONS FOR REMOVAL OPERATIONS

• Unless otherwise indicated, lower the working equipment until it rests on
the ground.
• After disconnecting hydraulic and fuel system pipes, always fit plugs to the
open ends of the pipes to prevent ingress of impurities.
• Before removing a cylinder, fully retract the piston and secure it in this
position using a retaining strap.
• Use containers of sufficient capacity when draining oil, coolant or fuel.
• Before removing a part from the machine, check for alignment markings
indicating the correct assembly position. If necessary, make new markings
to ensure correct assembly.
• When unplugging electrical connectors, always grip the connectors firmly
to avoid pulling on the wires.
• Where necessary, label wires and pipes before removal to avoid confusion
when reconnecting.
• Check the number and thickness of any shims removed and keep them
together in a safe place.
• To lift the machine or any of its main components, use lifting equipment of
suitable capacity.
• When using eyebolts for lifting components, first check that they are not
bent or damaged; screw them fully home and then turn the bolt so that the
eye is aligned with the lifting hook.
• Before removing a part, clean the surrounding area and, after removing the
part, cover it to protect it from dirt and dust.
2. PRECAUTIONS FOR REFITTING OPERATIONS

• Tighten nuts and screws to the specified tightening torques.
• When refitting flexible pipes and wires, take care not to twist or tangle
them.
• Always fit new seals, O-rings, cotter pins and safety stop rings; make sure
that the ends of the cotter pins are separated and bent back so that the pin
cannot be withdrawn from the hole.
• Ensure that circlips are correctly installed in their seatings.
• When applying threadlocking compound, first clean the part removing all
oil and grease, then cover the thread evenly applying a few drops of the
compound.
00-6
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR REMOVAL AND REFITTING OPERATIONS
• When applying sealant, first clean the surface removing all traces of oil and
grease and check for dirt or indentations, then apply the sealant evenly
making sure that it forms a continuous film around any fixing holes.
• Clean all parts, removing dirt, oxidisation, carbon deposits, burrs and
indentations.
• Coat all moving parts with a thin film of engine oil.
• When reconnecting electrical connectors, first remove all traces of oil, dust
and water from the inside of the connector and then push the two halves
together firmly; connectors with locking tabs should be pushed together
until the tab engages the keeper..
• Bolt down flanged fittings evenly, tightening the screws gradually in a
crosswise pattern.
3. PRECAUTIONS TO BE TAKEN ON COMPLETION OF REMOVAL/REFITTING OPERATIONS
• If coolant has been drained from the engine, refit the drain plug and add
new coolant to the correct level. Start the engine to circulate the coolant
and then check the level again and top up.
• After removing hydraulic components, top up the hydraulic oil to the
specified level. Start the engine to circulate the oil in the hydraulic circuits
and then recheck the level and top up as necessary.
• After having removed a variable displacement pump, connect the drain
pipe and fill the pump casing with oil through the filler hole provided.
• Grease stub axle housings, cylinder pivot mountings and drive shafts
thoroughly after assembly.
00-7
LIFTING INSTRUCTIONS
LIFTING INSTRUCTIONS
Components weighing over 25 kg or of significant size must be supported and removed using suitable lifting
equipment with wire rope or polyester slings.
In the paragraphs regarding removal and refitting operations, the weight of the component or assembly to be lifted is
indicated with the symbol
WIRE ROPES - SLINGS

• Use wire ropes or polyester slings of suitable capacity for the parts to be lifted, referring to the following tables:
WIRE ROPES POLYESTER SLINGS

(standard twisted «S» or «Z» type) (eye-and-eye - simple loop)
Capacity (kg) Capacity (kg)
Ø rope Width
mm 60° 90° mm 60° 90°
8 650 620 500 25 500 400 860 700

10 1000 1740 1420 50 1000 800 1730 1410
12 1450 2500 2050 62 1250 1000 2160 1760
14 2000 3460 2820 75 1400 1120 2420 1980
16 2600 4500 3670 100 2000 1600 3460 2820
18 3300 5710 4660 150 2500 2000 4330 3530
NOTE. Lifting capacities are calculated with a safety coefficient.

• The lifting hook should be attached to the central part of the rope or sling; if the hook is attached near the ends of the
rope/sling, this could cause the load to slip during lifting.
• Never lift a heavy load using a single rope; always use two or more symmetrically arranged ropes.
Suspension of a load from a single rope could cause the load to start rotating and consequently cause the rope
strands to untwist or the load to slip; this could lead to serious injury.
• Never lift a heavy load when the two legs of the ropes form a wide angle.
The permitted load (kg) decreases in inverse proportion to the angle of suspension; the table below indicates how the
permitted load varies according to the angle of suspension for two Ø 10 mm ropes each with a load capacity of 1000
kg.
2000
1900
1700
2000
Load capacity: kg
1400
1000
1000
500
30° 60° 90° 120° 150°

Angle of suspension: ␣
00-8
HOW THE MANUAL IS STRUCTURED
HOW THE MANUAL IS STRUCTURED
SECTION 00 Contains the general safety rules, information on how to use and update
the manual, the symbols used, the products required, the standard
tightening torques and a conversion table for units of measurement.
SECTION 10 Contains technical descriptions and information regarding the

mechanical and hydraulic operation of machine components, the
designations of the various components, hydraulic diagrams and general
technical data.
SECTION 20 Contains the user guides for the software needed to configure the
machine and the engine and to read any fault diagnosis.
SECTION 30 Contains the methods, checks and adjustments regarding the external
components; the operations dealt with in this section do not require
removal of the various assemblies that form the tractor frame and cab.
SECTION 40 Contains information and diagrams regarding the machine's electrical

and electronic systems
CAUTION!
The manual does not contain information and instructions regarding the engine and transmission, which can be found in
the following manuals:
Spanish
Engine DEUTZ 2012 0312 0361
English
French
German
5871 956 001 German
Gearbox ZF T7100KT
5871 956 002 English
0298 6877 German
0298 6878 English
Rear axle 7100
0298 6879 French
0298 6880 Spanish
00-9
HOW TO CONSULT THE MANUAL
HOW TO CONSULT THE MANUAL
1. Removal and refitting of assembled units

(1) For the removal or refitting of assembled units, the sequence of operations and the methods to be applied are
described in the removal procedure; if the refitting sequence of operations is the exact reverse of the removal
procedure, it is not described.
(2) All special techniques that apply only to the refitting procedure are indicated by the symbol 1 ; this same
symbol appears at the end of each major step in the removal procedure to indicate the parts for which special
techniques are to be applied during refitting.
Example: REMOVAL OF UNIT :......................................... Operation heading
: ............................................................................. Safety rules to be observed when carrying out the
procedure described.
1 - Remove part (1):...................................................... Step of the procedure
★: ................................................................................. Technique or important information regarding the
removal operation
2 - Disconnect (2) ......... 1 : ...................................Indicates the existence of special information
regarding refitting of the component in question
.......... ,: ............................................................... Recover oil, liquid or fuel and the quantity to be
recovered
Example:REFITTING UNIT:................................................ Operation heading
• Refitting is the reverse of removal
1 :.......................................................................Technique to be applied during refitting.

★: ................................................................................. Technique or important information regarding the
refitting operation.
• .......... ,: ............................................................. Filling with oil or liquid with quantity
2. During removal and refitting operations, in addition to the general safety rules, you must also observe the specific
«SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR REMOVAL AND REFITTING OPERATIONS».
Always adhere to these precautions.
3. List of special tools

(1) For details regarding the type, code numbers and quantity of all the tools (T1, T2, etc.) specified in the operating
procedures, see the heading «SPECIAL TOOLS».
4. Tightening torques
1 - In the operating procedures, the symbol denotes a specific tightening torque that has been determined
experimentally and that must be adhered to.
2 - If the symbol does not appear, the torque values to be used are those indicated in the table in Section 00 of this
manual.
00-10
HOW TO USE AND UPDATE THE MANUAL
HOW TO USE AND UPDATE THE MANUAL
1. UPDATING THE MANUAL

All additions, corrections or amendments to the manual will be sent to the Authorised Service Centres.
Before starting any repair or overhaul operations, check that you have the most recent updates as these may contain
supplementary data not present in previous issues.
2. INSERTING UPDATES
1- Check the number of the page and insert it in the appropriate section of the manual following the consecutive
order of the page numbers. Example:
30 5
Progressive page number

Number of assembly described
2 - Supplementary pages: indicated with a hyphen (-) and consecutive number after the page number. Example:
30-5
30-5-1
Added pages
30-5-2
30-6
NOTE. The contents of supplementary pages are structured so that there is no overlap with existing pages.
3 - Updated pages: indicated by a consecutive number in a circle; this symbol appears below the page number.
Example:
30-5
30-5-1 Existing page
30-5-1 Update page
30-5-2 Existing page
NOTE. All supplementary and updated pages are indicated in the manual page list; a revised page list is
sent with each update and supersedes the previous list.
3. SYMBOLS USED IN THE MANUAL

For greater clarity, important information pertaining to operator safety and to critical stages in the working
procedures is highlighted by the symbols shown in the following table.
Graphic Graphic
symbols Meaning Notes symbols Meaning Notes
Safety rules to be applied during Pa r t s mu st b e c o a t e d w i t h
operation Greasing adhesive, lubricant, etc.
Safety Points at which oil, water or fuel
Operation requiring special safety
measures due to internal pressure Oil, water must be added and quanti ty
required
Operations requi ring speci al
★ Warning
technical or other precautions to
ensure compliance with standard Drain
Points from which oil, water or fuel
must be drained with quantity
values
Weight of main assemblies.
Weight Ch o o se l i f t i n g r o p es / s l i n g s Tightening Parts requiring special tightening
carefully; supports required, etc. torque torque during refitting or assembly
00-11
TIGHTENING TORQUES
TIGHTENING TORQUES
1. BOLTS AND NUTS

The tightening torques for certain specific components and special tightening methods are indicated in the
relative assembly paragraphs.
★ The tightening torques indicated below refer to bolts and nuts assembled without lubrication and, where applicable,
with anaerobic threadlocking compound.
The values apply to tightening on steel or cast iron components; for soft materials such as aluminium, copper, plastic,
sheet metal or panels, the indicated tightening torques must be reduced by 50%.
SCREW CLASS
SCREW SIZE 8.8 10.9 12.9

Nm lb.ft. Nm lb.ft. Nm lb.ft.
M6x1 8,0 – 8,8 5.9 – 6.5 11,8 – 13,0 8.7 – 9.6 13,8 – 15,2 10.2 – 11.2
M8x1.25 19,4 – 21,4 14.3 – 15.8 28,5 – 31,5 21.0 – 23.2 33,3 – 36,9 24.5 – 27.2
M10x1.5 38,4 – 42,4 28.3 – 31.2 56,4 – 62,4 41.6 – 46.0 67,4 – 74,4 49.7 – 54.8
M12x1.75 66,5 – 73,5 49.0 – 54.2 96,9 – 107 71.4 – 78.9 115 – 128 84.8 – 94.3
COARSE THREAD
M14x2 106 – 117 78.1 – 86.2 156 – 172 115,0 – 126,8 184 – 204 135.6 – 150.3
M16x2 164 – 182 120.9 – 134.1 241 – 267 117.6 – 196.8 282 – 312 207.8 – 229.9
M18x2.5 228 – 252 168.0 – 185.7 334 – 370 246.2 – 272.7 391 – 432 288.2 – 318.4
M20x2.5 321 – 355 236.6 – 261.6 472 – 522 347.9 – 384.7 553 – 611 407.6 – 450.3
M22x2.5 441 – 487 325.0 – 358.9 647 – 715 476.8 – 527.0 751 – 830 553.5 – 611.7
M24x3 553 – 611 407.6 – 450.3 812 – 898 598.4 – 661.8 950 – 1050 700.2 – 773.9
M27x3 816 – 902 601.4 – 664.8 1198 – 1324 882.9 – 975.8 1419 – 1569 1045.8 – 1156.4
M8x1 20,8 – 23,0 15.3 – 17.0 30,6 – 33,8 22.6 – 24.9 35,8 – 39,6 26.4 – 29.2
M10x1.25 40,6 – 44,8 29.9 – 33.0 59,7 – 65,9 44.0 – 48.6 71,2 – 78,6 52.5 – 57.9
M12x1.25 72,2 – 79,8 53.2 – 58.8 106 – 118 78.1 – 87.0 126 – 140 92.9 – 103.2
M12x1.5 69,4 – 76,7 51.1 – 56.5 102 – 112 75.2 – 82.5 121 – 134 89.2 – 98.8
FINE THREAD
M14x1.5 114 – 126 84.0 – 92.9 168 – 186 123.8 – 137.1 199 – 220 146.7 – 162.1
M16x1.5 175 – 194 129 – 143 257 – 285 189.4 – 210.0 301 – 333 221.8 – 245.4
M18x1.5 256 – 282 188.7 – 207.8 375 – 415 276.4 – 305.9 439 – 485 323.5 – 357.4
M20x1.5 355 – 393 261.6 – 289.6 523 – 578 385.5 – 426.0 611 – 676 450.3 – 498.2
M22x1.5 482 – 532 355.2 – 392.1 708 – 782 521.8 – 576.3 821 – 908 605.1 – 669.2
M24x2 602 – 666 443.7 – 490.8 884 – 978 651.5 – 720.8 1035 – 1143 762.8 – 842.4
00-12
TIGHTENING TORQUES
2. FITTINGS
★ The tightening torques indicated below refer to fittings assembled on any material.
End fittings
straight “T” end fittings “L” end fittings 90° end fittings
Thread size Wrench Torque Wrench Torque Wrench Torque Wrench Torque
Nm ±10% Nm ±10% Nm ±10% Nm ±10%
17 14 14 14 14 14
M10x1.25 14 14
19 14 17 14 17 14
M12x1.25 19 30 17 30 17 30 17 30
M14x1.5 19 40 19 40 19 40 19 40
METRIC THREADS
M16x1.5 22 48 22 48 22 48 22 48
M18x1.5 24 58 24 58 24 58 24 58
M20x1.5 27 65 27 65 27 65 27 65
M22x1.5 30 73 30 73 30 73 30 73
M26x1.5 36 95 36 95 36 95 36 95
M27x2 36 100 36 100 36 100 36 100
M33x2 41 160 41 160 41 160 41 160
M42x2 50 250 50 250 50 250 50 250
M48x2 60 305 60 305 60 305 60 305
17 13
G 1/8” 14 13 14 13 14 13
19 13
19 37
G 1/4” 19 37 19 37 19 37
22 37
THREADS IN INCHES
G 3/8” 24 53 24 53 24 53 24 53
27 73
G 1/2” 27 73 27 73 27 73
30 73
G 3/4” 36 100 36 100 36 100 36 100
41 160
G 1” 41 160 41 160 41 160
46 160
G 1 1/4” 50 250 50 250 50 250 50 250
G 1 1/2” 60 305 60 305 60 305 60 305
00-13
TIGHTENING TORQUES
3. PLUGS
Hex plugs Threaded plugs with hex socket head
Torque Torque
Thread size Wrench Nm ±10% Wrench Nm ±10%
M6x1 10 10 – –
M8x1 13 12 – –
M10x1 13 14 5 14
M10x1.25 13 14 – –
M10x1.5 13 14 – –
M12x1.25 17 30 – –
M12x1.5 17 30 6 30
M12x1.75 17 30 – –
M14x1.5 19 40 6 40
M14x2 19 40 – –
METRIC THREADS
M16x1.5 22 48 8 48
M16x2 22 48 – –
M18x1.5 17 58 10 58
M18x2.5 17 58 – –
M20x1.5 19 65 – –
M22x1.5 – – 12 73
M24x1.5 22 80 12 80
M24x2 22 80 – –
M27x2 22 100 – –
M28x1.5 – – 17 110
M30x1.5 22 130 – –
M32x1.5 – – 19 150
M35x1.5 – – 22 180
M40x1.5 – – 24 225
G 1/8” 14 13 – –
THREADS IN INCHES
G 1/4” 19 37 – –
G 3/8” 22 53 – –
G 1/2” 19 73 – –
G 5/8” 22 85 – –
G 3/4” 22 100 – –
G 1” 22 160 – –
00-14
TIGHTENING TORQUES
4. FITTINGS WITH SEAL AT 37°
Thread size Wrench Torque Thread size Wrench Torque

Nm ±10% Nm ±10%
7/16” - 20 14 13 1 3/16” - 12 36 138
1/2” - 20 16 19 1 5/16” - 12 38 155
9/16” - 18 17 28 1 5/8” - 12 50 215
3/4” - 16 22 47 1 7/8” - 12 60 290
7/8” - 14 27 76 2 1/2” - 12 75 345
32 110
1 1/16” - 12
36 110
5. FITTINGS FOR PIPES WITH BANJO UNION

★ These tightening torques refer to tightening the fitting with new copper sealing washers.
Unions for Unions for Unions for
one-way fittings three-way fittings four-way fittings
Thread size Wrench Torque Wrench Torque Wrench Torque

Nm ±10% Nm ±10% Nm ±10%
M8x1 – – 12 14 – –
M8x1.25 13 14 – – – –
M10x1 – – 14 20 14 20
M10x1.25 13 20 – – – –
M12x1.25 17 30 – – – –
M12x1.5 – – 17 30 17 30
M14x1.5 19 40 19 40 19 40
M16x1.5 22 48 22 48 22 48
M18x1.5 22 58 24 58 24 58
M20x1.5 27 65 – – – –
M22x1.5 – – 27 73 27 73
M24x1.5 32 80 – – – –
M26x1.5 – – 32 95 32 95
M28x1.5 36 110 – – – –
M30x1.5 – – 36 130 36 130
M35x2 41 180 – – – –
M38x1.5 46 200 46 200
M42x2 50 250 – – – –
M45x1.5 – – 55 280 55 280
M50x2 60 320 – – – –
M52x1.5 – – 60 320 60 320
M65x2 – – 75 450 75 450
00-15
THREADLOCKERS, ADHESIVES, SEALANTS AND LUBRICANTS
THREADLOCKERS, ADHESIVES, SEALANTS AND

LUBRICANTS
FUNCTION DESIGNATION DESCRIPTION
Loctite 222 Anaerobic product suitable for low-strength locking of retaining, adjustment and precision
Colour: opaque fasteners.
fluorescent purple All traces of lubricant must first be removed using the specific activator.
Anaerobic product that prevents loosening of all types of nut and bolt; used in place of
Loctite 242
THREADLOCKER
conventional mechanical locking systems.

Colour: fluorescent
Used for medium-strength locking.
blue
All traces of lubricant must first be removed using the specific activator.
Loctite 243 Alternative product to 242 ; oil tolerant and so can be used on lightly lubricated surfaces
Colour: opaque
without prior use of activator.
fluorescent blue
Anaerobic product for high-strength locking of bolts and studs that do not normally require
Loctite 270 disassembly.
Colour: fluorescent
Parts must be heated to approximately 80°C for removal.
green
All traces of lubricant must first be removed using the specific activator.
DEGREASERS AND
Product used for degreasing and cleaning parts prior to application of Loctite anaerobic
Loctite 703
products; after drying, promotes uniform curing of threadlockers
ACTIVATORS
Product used for specifically for treatment of passive metals prior to use of slow-cure
anaerobic threadlockers (series 5 and 6).
Loctite 747
Can also be used to increase cure speed at low temperatures or in applications where there
are large gaps between the parts.
Super-rapid anaerobic sealant for sealing between rigid metal faces; can eliminate the need
Loctite 510 for conventional gaskets as it can fill gaps up to 0.4 mm.
Colour: Red Does not shrink and therefore fasteners do not need re-tightening to specified torque values
after curing.
Loctite 542 Anaerobic product used as a liquid sealant for threaded fittings up to 3/4” gas; rapid curing
Colour: Brown and parts may be disassembled with ordinary tools.
(for faces and fittings)
Anaerobic sealant and locking compound used for sealing cooling and industrial fluid
Loctite 554 circuits.
Colour: Red
Slow curing, also suitable for use on non-ferrous alloys
SEALANTS
Anaerobic sealant and locking compound used for sealing pipes and threaded fittings up to
Loctite 572 2" in diameter.
Colour: White
Very slow curing on most metal surfaces.
Thixotropic anaerobic product used for sealing joints between metal faces.
Loctite 573 Ensures total contact between surfaces with maximum tolerance of 0.10 mm, filling
Colour: Green microvoids caused by flatness errors.
Very slow curing on most metal surfaces and requires prior application of an activator.
Anaerobic product used as a liquid thread sealant for large diameter threaded fittings (up to
Loctite 576 2").
Colour: brown Very slow curing; also suitable for non-ferrous alloys and parts requiring subsequent
removal.
00-16
THREADLOCKERS, ADHESIVES, SEALANTS AND LUBRICANTS
FUNCTION DESIGNATION DESCRIPTION
Cyanoacrylate instant adhesive suitable for bonding a wide range of acidic and porous
Loctite 401 materials including, ceramics, wood, rubber and plastic (excluding polyolefin).
ADHESIVES
INSTANT
Colour: colourless Curing takes place in a few seconds as an effect of the condensed humidity present on the
surfaces to be bonded, and is independent of environmental conditions.
Loctite 495 Cyanoacrylate instant adhesive suitable for bonding a rubber, plastics and metal in any
Colour: colourless combination.
Silastic 738 One-part silicone adhesive/sealant, non dhrinking, ready for use.
(Dow Corning) Cures on exposure to air to form a rubbery solid and obviates the need for conventional seals
SEALANTS
Colour: milky
SILICONE
on flexible joints, filling gaps greater than 1 mm.

white
One-part silicone adhesive/sealant, shrinking, ready for use.

Dirko Transparent Cures rapidly when exposed to humidity in the air to form a rubbery solid; resistant to high
Colour: transparent
temperatures.
POLYURETHANE
SEALANTS
Polyurethane prepolymer based adhesive/sealant, high viscosity, suitable for permanent,

Betaseal HV3 high-strength flexible bonding.
(Gurit Essex)
Slow curing, used for bonding glass to frames, wire mesh, metal plates, etc. surfaces must be
Colour: Black
degreased with primer.
Loctite 601 Anaerobic, fast-curing, high-strength adhesive.

Colour: fluorescent Suitable for sealing and retaining cylindrical assemblies with gap clearances of up to 0.10
green mm; used for retaining rotors, gears, bearings, pulleys, bushes etc. on shafts.
RETAINING COMPOUNDS
Loctite 638 Anaerobic structural adhesive, quick-curing, very high strength; suitable for bonding
Colour: fluorescent
cylindrical parts in non-ferrous alloys.
green
Anaerobic structural adhesive, quick-curing, high-strength; suitable for bonding cylindrical

Loctite 648 parts, permanent retention of threaded parts, sealing of refrigeration systems, retention of
Colour: fluorescent
bearings, etc.
green
Alternative to Loctite 601 in high-temperature applications.
Loctite 986/AVX Anaerobic sealant/retaining compound for metal cylindrical parts.

Colour: fluorescent Slow-curing, high-strength, heat-resistant and resistant to chemical pressure.
red Parts must be first treated with an activator.
Grease Multi-purpose Lithium grease used for lubrication of seals, to prevent oxidization and to
(NLGI 2 EP
ASTM D217: 265/295) facilitate assembly operations.
LUBRICANTS
Molikote Anti-wear compound, contains Molybdenum bisulphate, used neat or diluted with engine oil
(Dow Corning) for assembly of main engine bearings.
Vaseline Neutral pH compound used to protect battery terminals against oxidization and corrosion.
Engine oil Used to dilute Molikote anti-wear lubricant during assembly of main engine bearings.
10W - 30
00-17
CONVERSION FACTORS
CONVERSION FACTORS
CONVERSION FROM BRITISH TO METRIC UNITS CONVERSION FROM METRIC TO BRITISH UNITS
inch x 25.40 = mm mm x 0.0394 = inch
foot x 0.305 m x 3.281 = foot
=m
yard x 0.914 m x 1.094 = yard
Eng.miles 1.609 = km km x 0.622 = Brit.miles
Sq.in. x 6.452 = cm² cm² x 0.155 = Sq.in.
Sq.ft. x 0.093 m² x 10.77 = Sq.ft.
= m²
Sq.yard x 0.835 m² x 1.197 = Sq.yard
Cu.in. x 16.39 = cm³ cm³ x 0.061 = Cu.in.
Cu.ft. x 28.36 m³ x 0.035 = Cu.ft
= m³
Cu.yard x 0.763 m³ x 1.311 = Cu.yard
Imp.gall. x 4.547 litres x 0.220 = Imp.gall.
US gall. x 3.785 litres x 0.264 = US gall.
= litres
pint x 0.568 litres x 1.762 = pint
quart x 1.137 litres x 0.880 = quart
US.gpm x 3.785 = ,/min ,/min x 0.2642 = US.gpm
oz. x 0.028 kg x 35.25 = oz.
= kg
lb. x 0.454 kg x 2.203 = lb.
lb.ft. x 0.139 = kgm kgm x 7.233 = lb.ft.
lb.in. x 17.87 = kg/m kg/m x 0.056 = lb.in.
psi x 0.070 = kg/cm² kg/cm² x 14.22 = psi
lb./Imp.gall x 0.100 kg/, x 10.00 = lb./Imp.gal.
= kg/,
lb./US.gall x 0.120 kg/, x 8.333 = lb./US.gal.
lb./cu.ft. x 16.21 = kg/m³ kg/m³ x 0.062 = lb./cu.ft.
lb.ft. x 1.356 = Nm Nm x 0.737 = lb.ft.
psi x 1.379 = bar bar x 14.503 = psi
00-18
CONTENTS
SECTION 10
CONTENTS
1. TRANSMISSION ................................................................. 1 3. FRONT AXLE HYDRAULIC SUSPENSION...................... 33

• INTRODUCTION.................................................................. 1 • 3.1 FRONT SUSPENSION
• 1.1 POWER SHUTTLE TRANSMISSION............................ 2 CONTROL VALVE ....................................................... 34
• • 1.1.1 MAIN COMPONENTS .......................................2
4. FRONT AXLE..................................................................... 39
• • 1.1.2 TRANSMISSION HYDRAULIC SYSTEM ...........5
• • 1.1.3 GEARBOX..........................................................6
5. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM ...................................................... 40
• • 1.1.4 MAIN CLUTCH ..................................................8
• • 1.1.5 HYDRAULIC GEARBOX AND • 5.1 HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM ............................................ 41
SHUTTLE DISTRIBUTION VALVE .....................9 • 5.2 GEAR PUMP FOR
• • 1.1.6 CLUTCH ENGAGEMENT AND SOLENOID TRANSMISSION ZF 7100 ........................................... 43
VALVE OPERATION SCHEMATIC...................12
• 5.3 VARIABLE DISPLACEMENT PUMP........................... 44
• • 1.1.7 TRANSMISSION ELECTRONIC SYSTEM
SCHEMATIC ....................................................13 • • 5.3.1 HYDRAULIC PUMP......................................... 47
• • 5.3.2 LOAD SENSING VALVE, PRESSURE
• 1.2 REAR AXLE ................................................................ 15
CUT-OFF VALVE ............................................. 49
• 1.3 REAR PTO.................................................................. 17 • 5.4 STEERING GEAR PUMP............................................ 57
2. BRAKING SYSTEM........................................................... 19 • 5.5 POWER STEERING.................................................... 58
• 2.1 BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER ..................................... 20 • 5.6 AUXILIARY SERVICES DIRECTIONAL
CONTROL VALVE ....................................................... 59
• 2.2 BRAKING DEVICE..........................................................
• • 5.6.1 CONTROL VALVE TYPES ............................... 60
• 2.3 TRAILER BRAKING SYSTEM .................................... 22 • • 5.6.2 LIFT CONTROL SECTION............................... 62
• • 2.3.1 HYDRAULIC TRAILER BRAKING
(ITALY VERSION).............................................22
• • 2.3.2 HYDRAULIC TRAILER BRAKING
(EXPORT VERSION) .......................................24
• • 2.3.3 AIR TRAILER BRAKING
(ITALY VERSION).............................................26
• • 2.3.4 AIR TRAILER BRAKING
(EXPORT VERSION) ........................................27
• • COMPRESSOR ........................................................28
• • ANTIFREEZE PUMP .................................................29
• • PRESSURE LIMITING VALVE...................................30
• • TRAILER BRAKING VALVE (2-WAYS)......................31
• • TRAILER BRAKING VALVE (1 WAY).........................32
10-i
1. TRANSMISSION INTRODUCTION
1. TRANSMISSION
INTRODUCTION
• The tractors in this series are equipped with a POWER SHUTTLE transmission.
Shifting between forward and reverse is managed entirely by the electronic control unit without the operator having
to use the clutch pedal.
This managment is made possible by the presence of a proportional solenoid valve that directly controls the central
clutch.
• The transmission can be divided into the following sections:

A. Power Shuttle transmission
B. Rear axle
C. Rear PTO
D- Grounspeed PTO
B A
D0030280
10-1
1. TRANSMISSION 1.1 POWER SHUTTLE TRANSMISSION
1.1 POWER SHUTTLE TRANSMISSION
1.1.1 MAIN COMPONENTS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
12
11
D0030130
10 9 8
1. Four-wheel drive control solenoid valve 5. Transmission oil low pressure sensor 9. Speed sensor for odometer (nAb)
2. Transmission in neutral sensor 6. Engine speed sensor (nLse) 10. Rear PTO control valve
3. Gearbox in neutral locking solenoid valve 7. Gearbox output shaft speed sensor (nLsa) 11. Rear PTO engagement solenoid valve
4. Proportional solenoid valve for clutch control 8. Clutch revs sensor (nHK) 12. Rear PTO speed selector lever
10-2
21
13
14 15
A View A
20
19
D0030300
17 16
18
13. Left brake cylinder

14. FIELD" mode solenoid valve
15. ROAD" mode solenoid valve
16. Mechanical gearbox control rod
17. Transmission in neutral sensor
18. Right brake cylinder
19. Differential lock control valve
20. Differential lock solenoid valve
21. "FIELD/ROAD" position sensor
10-3
22
28 23
D0030310
27 26 25 24
22. Power lift shaft

23. Right axle housing
24. REAR PTO
25. Groundspeed PTO
26. Rear PTO speed sensor
27. Gearbox oil level indicator
28. Left axle housing
10-4
1. TRANSMISSION
1.1.2 TRANSMISSION HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

The transmission hydraulic system is supplied by a gear pump driven from a lateral power-take-off.
The gear pump supplies pressurised fluid for the following uses:
• hydraulic gearbox control valve
• 4WD control solenoid valve
• rear PTO control solenoid valve
• differential lock control solenoid valve
• FIELD/ROAD" mode solenoid valves
• lubrication of gearbox, differential, rear PTO
3 4 5
17 16 2
7
6
15
Y8
14 13 8
10
12
11
D0030140
1 - Lubrication circuit pressure 8 - Four wheel drive 14 - Differential lock

relief valve clutch solenoid valve solenoid valve
2 - Cooler 9 - Pressurised filter 15 - Gearbox control valve
3 - Gearbox lubrication 10- Gear pump 16 - ”FIELD” mode solenoid valve
4 - Differential lubrication 11 - Suction line filter 17 - ”ROAD” mode solenoid valve
5- Rear PTO lubrication 12 - Safety valve for cold
6 - Main clutch starting
7 - Proportional solenoid valve 13 - PTO solenoid valve
10-5
1.1.3 GEARBOX
DESCRIPTION
• The drive from engine (1) is transmitted through hydraulically-controlled gearbox (2), main clutch (3), 4-speed
mechanical gearbox (4) and creeper (8) to pinion (5) and power take-off (7), that transfers drive to the front axle.
2 3 4
4ª 3ª 2ª 1ª
1
ST FE
E
5
ST
7
NO LL
8 D0012600
COMPONENTS
1. Engine
2. Hydraulically-controlled 4-speed gearbox (3 forward and 1 reverse)
3. Main clutch
4. 8-speed mechanical gearbox (4 field and 4 road)
5. Pinion
6. 4WD engagement clutch
7. Power take-off for front axle drive
8. Creeper unit
10-6
1. TRANSMISSION
4 9
1 2 3
5 6 7 8 10 11 12 13
14
22 21
20
19
17 18 15
16
D0012661
1. Flywheel damper 9. Mechanical gearbox 17. Creeper unit synchronizer

2. Housing 10. 3rd and 4th speed synchronizer 18. Creeper unit driven shaft
3. Input shaft 11. 1st and 2nd speed synchronizer 19. Four-wheel drive output shaft
4. Hydraulically-controlled gearbox 12. Field/road synchronizer 20. Reverse gear driven shaft
5. Clutch “A” 13. Rear PTO drive shaft 21. Clutch “C”
6. Clutch “B” 14. Pinion 22. Clutch “D”
7. Clutch housing 15. 4WD control clutch
8. Main clutch 16. Creeper unit
10-7
1.1.4 MAIN CLUTCH
The main clutch of the POWER SHUTTLE transmission is an oil-bath multiplate unit with hydraulic control.
Clutch operation is entirely automatic and is controlled by an electronic control unit which receives signals from the clutch
pedal position sensor.
The system has a clutch control solenoid valve that directs pressurised fluid to the clutch in accordance with the pedal
position.
2
ECU
4
3
D0030150
1. Clutch pedal
2. Clutch pedal position sensor
3. Electronic transmission control unit
4. Transmission gear pump
5. Proportional solenoid valve for clutch control
6. Main clutch
10-8
1. TRANSMISSION
1.1.5 HYDRAULIC GEARBOX AND SHUTTLE CONTROL VALVE
The function of the hydraulic gearbox control valve is to pilot and control the engagement of the gears in the hydraulically-
controlled gearbox.
The hydraulic gearbox control valve controls the engagement of the H, M and L gears and the travel direction.
This control valve also supplies hydraulic fluid for lubrication of the mechanical gearbox, the rear differential and the rear
PTO drive shaft.
Y1
P2
H2
Y3
R
6
7
G1
Reset valve
Y4 8
R1
H1-H2
Ø 2,8
Pressure Ø 0,7 Y2
control valve P1
5
A
2
P3
Reducing valve
p= 10 bar C
Ø 2,4
3
Ø 2,8
P4 B
Pilot pressure valve

p= 18 bar
Y8 D0030160
Trasmission lubrification Control and lubricating pump
10-9
A. GEARBOX CONTROL VALVE
PRESSURE TEST POINTS
2
5
3 6
D0012640
7 8
Range Function Thread size Pressure
1 General pressure M10x1 18 bar

2 Pilot pressure M10x1 10 bar
3 Clutch pressure B M10x1 18 bar
4 Clutch pressure C M10x1 18 bar

5 Clutch pressure A M10x1 18 bar
6 Pressure Pg to clutches M18x1 18 bar
7 Clutch pressure D M10x1 18 bar

8 Engagement pressure M10x1 18 bar
10-10
MAIN COMPONENTS
P3 P2
P4
P1
Y4
Y3 R1
Y2 G1
Y1
H1 H2 D0012620
G1 Clutch selection valve

H1 Engagement valve for B/C or A/B clutches
H2 Forward, reverse and neutral selection valve
P1 Pressure modulating valve
P2 Engagement valve
P3 Pilot pressure regulating valve (10 bar)
P4 General pressure regulating valve (18 bar)
R1 Null shift valve
Y1 Pilot solenoid valve for valve H2 (MRV electr. REV)
Y2 Pilot solenoid valve for valve H1 (GV1 valve TRANSM.1)
Y3 Pilot solenoid valve for valve H2 (MVV electr. FWD)
Y4 Pilot solenoid valve for valve G1 (GV2 valve TRANSM.2)
10-11
1.1.6 CLUTCH ENGAGEMENT AND SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION SCHEMATIC
Direzione avanti
A B A B A B
D C D C D C
Albero di
Albero uscita
ingresso
A B
MARCIA L MARCIA M MARCIA H
D C
A B
2
5
POSIZIONE FOLLE
3 6
D C
D0012595 D0012640
RETRO MARCIA 7 8
Solenoid valve operation when shifting from L to H gear (L→ M→ H)

Forward travel
HML control Reverse travel
L M H
Y1 ●
Y2 ● ●
● = Solenoid valve energised
Y3 ● ● ●
Y4 ●
Clutch A B C D
Test point 5 3 4 7
Solenoid valve operation when shifting from H to L gear (H→ M→ L)

Forward travel
Solenoid valve Reverse travel
H M L
Y1 ●
Y2 ●
● = Solenoid valve energised
Y3 ● ● ●
Y4 ● ●
Clutch C B A D
Test point 4 3 5 7
10-12
1. TRANSMISSION
1.1.7 TRANSMISSION ELECTRONIC SYSTEM SCHEMATIC
COMPONENTS
A1 Transmission electronic control unit (EST57)
EST-45
A2.1 Range selector lever (L M H S)
ED 11
ED 8
29
44 57 ADM 5
A2.2 Shuttle control lever (FORWARD/REVERSE)
EU 1 38 11 ADM 6
30 50 AIP7
ED 12
ED 6
ED 7
67
22
54
32
AIP8
AIP 3
A3 Gearbox control valve
ED 1 63 55 AIP 4
ED 2 65 A1 10 AIP2
ED 3 20 18 EUPR A5 Diagnostics
EDM 1 31 56 AIP 1 H3
ER 1
EF 7
39
17 5 ADM 4 A12
A6 Display
EF 6 40
EF 5 16
EF 4 62 14
15
SD 1
SDDK
A6
A11 Proportional solenoid valve for main clutch control
H5
A12 Gearbox in neutral locking solenoid

A5
A13 “FIELD/ROAD” selection solenoid valve
A2.2
B10 F/S
B1 Engine speed sensor (nLse)
+
A2.1 -
B3 Hydraulic gearbox output speed sensor (nAb)
A12 B4 Transmission input speed sensor (nLsa)
B11 B13 K1
A11 S4 B9 Clutch speed sensor (nHk)
PEDALE B14
S6 A13
A3 FRIZIONE
B10 Clutch pedal position sensor
B11 Temperature sensor
B3 B9 B4
MOTORE
B13 Clutch proximity sensor
ENDOTERMICO
FRIZIONE TRASMISSIONE
B14 “FIELD/ROAD” position sensor
B1
F1 Fuse
F2 Fuse
K1 Interlock starter relay 70A
1 F1 2 KL.30
(+)
1 F2 2
S4 Mechanical gearbox neutral sensor
KL.15
(+)
1 S6 Transmission oil low pressure sensor (18 bar)

B13 P S6
B9 3 B4 3 B3 3 B1 3 2
A5
2 2 2 2 44 45 23 68 66 29
ED8 VP1 VPE1 VPE2 ED9 ED11
4 15
1 1 1 1 VMG2 SDDK
17
EF7
40
EF6
A6 X2:D
62
EF4
16 X2:A
EF5 14
3 SD1
VMG1
37 AU
49 57 C
ER2 ADM5 Y2(GV1) X2:C
11 F
B10 TH 38
EU1 A1 ADM6
8 E
Y4(GV2)
VPS2 (+)
S37 24
VMGA1
H
B11 A3
A2.1 T
39
ER1
AIP3
32 D
Y3(MVV)
TIPP + 55 B
67 AIP4 Y1(MVR)
VP TIPP - ED6 12 A
22 VPS1 (+)
FE/ST ED7
30 ED12 56 1
A2.2 V
63
ED1
AIP1
13 2
FK
A11
65 VPS1 (+)
VP N ED2
20
R ED3
50 1
AIP7 FK
B14 1
AIP8
54 2
(+) A13
2 18 3
EUPR
3
4 25
CAN_H
26 10 1
CAN_L AIP2 Y7
27
CAN_T
2
(+) A12
EDM1 VM1 VM2
KL.30 31 01 02
87 85
1
K1 S4
30 86
2
KL.50a KL.50
Mot. avv. Blocco. avv.
D0030170
10-17
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
1. TRANSMISSION 1.2 REAR AXLE
1. TRANSMISSION
1.2 REAR AXLE
DESCRIPTION
The rear axle receives drive from pinion (4) and transmits drive through differential (5) and final drive reduction units (2) to
rear wheels (1).
The rear axle is equipped with an electro-hydraulically controlled differential lock (6) and two hydraulically operated brakes
(3).
2 3 4 3 2
1
1
6 5
D0012670
COMPONENTS
1. Wheels
2. Final drive reduction unit
3. Brake
4. Pinion
5. Differential
6. Differential lock
10-13
1. TRANSMISSION 1.2 REAR AXLE
COMPONENTS
1 1
2 3 4
9
10 9 8 7
D0012690
12 11
1. Brake control device 9. Brake device

2. Central axle housing 10. Half-shaft
3. Differential lock 11. Bevel crown wheel
4. Ring gear 12. Differential
5. Axle housing
6. Half-shaft
7. Planet carrier
8. Planet gear
10-14
1. TRANSMISSION 1.3 REAR PTO
1.3 REAR PTO
DESCRIPTION
The rear PTO provides drive for external implements at a preselected rotation speed.
The rotary drive is taken directly from the engine and then reduced through a 4-speed gearbox with manual speed
selection.
The PTO is engaged by way of an electro-hydraulically controlled clutch and in addition also a Ground speed PTO can be
supplied that turns at a speed directly proportional to the rotation speed of the rear wheels with a fixed ratio between the
PTO shaft and rear wheel speeds.
3 2
4
5
9
6
10
7
8
750 rpm a c 1400 rpm

540 rpm b d 1000 rpm
Off On
D00.30180
1. Clutch 6. 1000 rpm driven shaft

2. Synchronizer 7. 1400 rpm driven gear
3. 540 rpm driven gear 8. Groundspeed PTO shaft
4. 750 rpm driven gear 9. Groundspeed PTO engagement
5. PTO shaft 10. 4WD output shaft
10-15
1. TRANSMISSION 1.3 REAR PTO
COMPONENTS
4-SPEED VERSION 4-SPEED AND SYNCRO PTO VERSION
1 2
3
4
10
11
12
5
6
7
D0030190 13 14
1. PTO input shaft 8. 1000 rpm driven gear

2. PTO clutch 9. 1400 rpm driven gear
3. PTO output shaft 10 - Groundspeed PTO driving gear
4. Power take-off 11. Four-wheel drive output shaft
5. Synchronizer 12. Groundspeed PTO engagement device
6. 750 rpm driven gear 13. Engagement control lever
7. 540 rpm driven gear 14. Groundspeed PTO output shaft
10-16
2. BRAKING SYSTEM
2. BRAKING SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION
The braking system is comprised of 2 braking devices (one for each rear wheel) operated by two hydraulic master cylinders
by way of mechanical controls.
Each master cylinder supplies fluid to the brake on one side (left or right) thereby allowing the operator to brake on one side
only and thus reduce the steering radius.
2
5 3
6
4
8
7
D0030200
1. Brake fluid reservoir 7. Left brake

2. Right master cylinder 8. Left master cylinder
3. Brake microswitches (no. 2)
4. Brake pedal
5. Rear axle
6. Right brake
10-19
2. BRAKING SYSTEM 2.1 BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
2.1 BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
1
2
3
D0004520
1. Bleed screw CHARACTERISTICS

2. Master cylinder casing Piston diameter: 23.81 mm (0.938 in.)
3. Push-rod Piston stroke: 30 mm (1.182 in.)
Maximum operating pressure: 120 bar (1740 psi)
10-20
2. BRAKING SYSTEM 2.2 BRAKE
2.2 BRAKE
5
1
A-A
A A
7
D0004530
1. Piston 5. Support
2. Plunger 6. Rod
3. Adjustment nuts 7. Parking brake control lever
4. Lever
10-21
2. BRAKING SYSTEM 2.3 TRAILER BRAKING SYSTEM
2.3 TRAILER BRAKING SYSTEM
The tractor may be equipped with one of the four following trailer braking systems:
1. hydraulic trailer braking (Italy version)
2. hydraulic trailer braking (Export version)
3. air trailer braking (Italy version)
4. air trailer braking (Export version)
2.3.1 HYDRAULIC TRAILER BRAKING (ITALY VERSION)
Freno a mano
2
Y
N
P B 1
T E D0033860
1. Trailer brake quick-coupler connected to the valve

• When quick coupler (1) is connected to the valve and brake pedals are not pressed, pressure of 12.5 bar (181.3
psi) is available at port B.
• This pressure is supplied constantly to the trailer to release the parking brake.
• When the operator engages the parking brake, solenoid valve (2) is energised; this action cancels the pressure at
port B.
• The pressure at port B is directly proportional to the pressure present in the tractor braking circuit (Y).
2. Quick coupler disconnected from valve.

• When quick coupler (1) is not connected to the valve there is no pressure at port B.
In this condition, the pressure at port B remains null regardless of the pressure present in the tractor braking
circuit.
10-22
HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM
D0033870
FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
Port P - Oil supply to valve • Maximum operating pressure at port N:
Port N - To auxiliary services control valves 200 bar (2900 psi)
Port B - To trailer brake • Minimum constant pressure at port B:
Port T - Return 10.5÷14.5 bar
Port Y - Connection to tractor braking system • Maximum pressure at port B:
120÷140 bar
Port LS - Load Sensing signal
• Oil delivery flow rate:
20÷80,/min (5.3 -- 21.14 US.gpm)
10-23
2.3.2 HYDRAULIC TRAILER BRAKING (EXPORT VERSION)
Y
N
P B
T
D0033880
• When quick coupler (1) is connected to the valve and the brakes are not activated, there will be no pressure at port B.
• When the operator applies the tractor brakes, the pressure in the brake circuit Y drives the braking valve and the
pressure at port B increases proportionally to the pressure in the tractor braking circuit.
10-24
LS
T
HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM
N T
E B
LS
D0033890
Port P - Oil supply to valve CHARACTERISTICS

Port N - To lubrication line • Maximum operating pressure at port N:
Port B - To trailer brake 200 bar (2900 psi)
Port Y - Connection to tractor braking system • Minimum constant pressure at port B:
Port T - Return 0 bar (0 psi)
• Maximum pressure at port B:
120÷140 bar
• Oil delivery flow rate:
20÷80,/min (5.3 -- 21.14 US.gpm)
10-25
2.3.3 AIR TRAILER BRAKING (ITALY VERSION)
3
E 4 5
2
6
1
10
11
9 8
D0033900
COMPONENTS 7. Trailer braking valve

1. Compressed air accumulator 8. Circuit pressure sensor
2. Air compressor 9. Circuit pressure indicator
3. Engine 10. Brake master cylinder
4. Antifreeze pump 11. Brake
5. Pressure limiting valve
(7.8 bar (113 psi)
6. Quick-coupler for trailer
10-26
2.3.4 AIR TRAILER BRAKING (EXPORT VERSION)
3
E 4 5
2
1 6
Rosso
Giallo 5
7 Nero
8
G
10 9
11 12
D0033910
1. Compressed air accumulator 7- Trailer braking valve (2-way)

2. Air compressor 8. Trailer braking valve (1-way)
3. Engine 9. Circuit pressure sensor.
4. Antifreeze pump 10. Circuit pressure indicator
5. Pressure limiting valve 11. Brake master cylinder
(7.8 bar (113 psi) 12. Brake
6. Quick-coupler for trailer
10-27
COMPRESSOR
3
a
D0012880
a. Compressor lubrication CHARACTERISTICS

b. Compressor lube oil return Bore: 75 mm
c. Port 0 - Air inlet Stroke: 36 mm
d. Port 2 - Air discharge Displacement: 159 cm³
1. Cylinder head Max. pressure.: 18 bar
Drive shaft end float: 0.2÷0.6 mm
2. Cylinder
3. Drive shaft
10-28
ANTIFREEZE PUMP
1 2
D0034030
Port 1 - From compressor

Port 2 - To limiting valve
Port 7 - From antifreeze reservoir
10-29
PRESSURE LIMITING VALVE
1 21
1-2
DIAGRAM
7,8±0,2 bar
1 21
0
12 + 2 bar
22 3 1-2
D0004690
Port 1 - From antifreeze pump CHARACTERISTICS

Port 3 - Excess pressure vent Cut-out pressure: 7.8±0.2 bar (113±2.9 psi)
Port 21 - To compressed air accumulator Cut-in pressure: 0.6÷1 bar (8.7 – 14.5 psi)
Relief valve setting: 12 +0 2 bar (174 +0 29 psi)
10-30
TRAILER BRAKING VALVE (2-WAY)
41 42 1
DIAGRAM
3
1
41
42
P2 (bar)
9
Pressione di mandata
7
2
)
,42
6
41
f (P
)
5 42
f(
1
2=
2 =
P4
4 P4
)
P 41
3 f(
2=
2 P4
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30
P41/P42 (bar) D0004760
Pressione idraulico di comando
a. Parking brake control lever Port 1 - From compressed air accumulator

b. Air vent screws Port 2 - To trailer brake
Port 41 - From left brake
Port 42 - From right brake
10-31
TRAILER BRAKING VALVE (1-WAY)
4
2
1
D0004710
Port 1 - From compressed air accumulator

Port 2 - To trailer brake
Port 4 - Pilot from delivery line to trailer (2-way braking)
10-32
3. HYDRAULIC FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION 2.3 TRAILER BRAKING SYSTEM
3. HYDRAULIC FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION
DESCRIPTION
The function of the hydraulic front suspension system is to absorb impacts when travelling over rough terrain and to keep
the tractor body on an even keel on the road.
The system comprises:
• swinging axle support arm (1)
• position sensor (2)
• 2 suspension cylinders (3)
• front suspension control valve (4)
• electronic control unit (5)
4
5
2
1
D0030340
10-33
3. HYDRAULIC FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION 3.1 FRONT SUSPENSION CONTROL VALVE
3.1 FRONT SUSPENSION CONTROL VALVE
FUNCTION
In addition to the primary function of enabling front axle suspension by charging the hydraulic-pneumatic accumulators
that constitute the elastic elements of the system, the front suspension control valve also serves to control raising and
lowering of the front axle.
2 3
SPB SPA1
BL1
LS
BL4 3 A
A
RV1
DBV
SPA2
P DIAGRAM
SPA1 SPA2
WV1
1.40 L
1.40 L
WV1
ERV BL3
A B A
BL1
S
P
X
RV1
DBV
T
RV2
WV2 SPB 250 bar
AV
0.75L
6 WV2
BL2
B RV3 BL4
LS
View A D0030290
1. Relief valve (setting 250 bar) 4. Pressure discharge valve

2. Accumulator 5. Cylinder extension control solenoid valve
3. Accumulator 6. Cylinder retraction control solenoid valve
10-34
OPERATION
1. When the suspension is deactivated
c 3
2
SPA1 SPA2
ERV BL3
A B A
WV1 BL1
S
P
4
X
RV1
DBV
T
RV2 250 bar

AV
SPB
BL2
B RV3 BL4
WV2
LS
a 1 b
D0030360
• When the suspension is deactivated, the electronic control unit energises solenoid valve (1), sending signal LS to the
priority valve via port LS.
• This allows the pressurised oil from pump (2) to flow to lines a and b and one-way valve (3) opens allowing oil in line
c to be returned to tank.
• Piston (4) is consequently pushed upwards to its stroke-end position, thereby returning the system to fixed axle
condition.
• The suspension is deactivated by the operator by means of a switch.
10-35
2. When the operator activates the system
c 5
2
SPA1 SPA2
ERV BL3
S
A B A BL1 P
4
X
WV1
RV1
DBV
T
RV2 250 bar

AV
SPB
BL2
B RV3 BL4
WV2
LS
a 1 b D0030350
• When the operator presses the switch to activate the suspension, the electronic control unit energises solenoid
valves (1) and (5).
• This allows pressurised oil from pump (2) to flow to lines a and c and, because of the section difference between the
two sides of piston (4) against which the same pressure is imparted, piston (4) starts to extend.
• At the same time, the oil compresses the membranes of the accumulators and the pressure in lines a and b increases.
• When the position sensor detects that the suspension has attained the levelling position, the electronic control unit
de-activates solenoid valves (1) and (5) and the part of the system containing the precharged accumulators is isolated
from the rest of the system.
10-36
3. When the system is active

• When the tractor is in motion and the wheels encounter an obstacle, the front axle is pushed upwards.
• This causes the pressure P2 to increase (accumulators 6 are compressed) while pressure P1 decreases (accumulator
3 is decompressed).
• The pressure balance is thus altered and the system (which is closed) acts to restore the original condition
SPA1 SPA2
A B
ERV
A
WV1
BL3
BL1
S P
P2 X
RV1
DBV
T
P1 RV2 250 bar

AV
SPB
B
BL2
RV3 BL4
WV2
LS
S
D0031190
S max
P2 max
S,P2
S min
t
P1
P1 min
t urto t smorzamento t
D0002410
10-37
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
4. FRONT AXLE
4. FRONT AXLE
★ The figure shows the suspended axle version
2 1
3
4
5
View Z
A 0 2
=
42° 0 2
55° 0 2
=
2
A
D0030380
CHARACTERISTICS COMPONENTS
Track (A): 1660 mm 1. Differential lock engagement connection
Toe-in: A --0 2 2. Steering angle sensor connector.
Total ratio (pinion revs/wheel revs): 15,857/1 3. Filler and oil level plug for differential
4. Differential drain plug
5. Filler, level and drain plug for final drive
10-39
5. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
5. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION
The tractors in this series are equipped with LS hydraulic system, with variable displacement pump for services (auxiliary
control valves, trailer hydraulic braking system, etc.) and fixed displacement hydraulic system for the steering circuit.
The LS hydraulic circuit utilizes a variable displacement piston pump capable of supplying oil for services in response to the
effective demand.
In this system, when the engine is running at maximum speed and no hydraulic actuators are in operation, the pump
effectively only circulates the oil that is dispersed through internal leakage in the devices connected to the system (just a
few litres per minute), thus saving energy and fuel.
In addition, the flow rate of the variable displacement piston pump is greater than the potential demand of any single
service, so that there will always be sufficient flow to satisfy several services simultaneously.
10-40
Y
2. Fro
1 4 3. Hy
SPA1 SPA2 B 6
4. St
1.40 L
1.40 L
WV1 F 2 0 1 b a
ERV BL3
S
A
BL1
A B A P 5. Lif
X
RV1
DBV R
T L 6. Au
250±10
250±10 barbar 250±10 bar
RV2
5
SPB 250 bar 7. Au
3
AV
0.75L
WV2
BL2 8. Lif
RV3 BL4
B
B 7 9. Ma
A F 2 0 1 b a
LS 10. Tra
180 +10 bar
11. Tra
180 +10 bar
P T 12. Au
13. Au
A 8
UP DOWN 14. Po
H
S 15. St
30 R 16. Fil
Wärmetauscher
17. Fil
9 18. Pu
31 32 19. Fil
11
4 bar 20. Tra
B
E 21. Fil
10 22. Pin
Y
P 23. Br
29
33 34 24. Fil
B
A F 2 0 1 b a
12 25. Ma
28 19 va
18 bar 26. Ma
27 27. 4W
28. Ge
B
13 29. Co
A F 2 0 1 b a
26
X P Y R 30. Co
25 31. Tra
24 32. Lu
23 22 33. Dif
18 B
14 34. Re
35. Dif
25 bar
36. Re
15 37. “F
20
38. “R
S L1 L
21 17 16
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
5. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 5.2 GEAR PUMP FOR TRANSMISSION ZF 7100
5. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
5.2 GEAR PUMP FOR TRANSMISSION ZF 7100
P1 P2
P2 P1
25 bar
L
D0033930
Port L: suction Displacement: 25 cc/rev (68 ,/min)
Port P1: lubrication delivery Maximum pressure: 25 +0 10 bar
Port P2: transmission delivery
10-43
5. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 5.3 VARIABLE DISPLACEMENT PUMP
5.3 VARIABLE DISPLACEMENT PUMP
A A
B
b
HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM
X
1
B
c
S L1 L D0033940
CONNECTIONS COMPONENTS
a. Port L - To gearbox 1. Load Sensing valve
b. Port X - From auxiliary control valve or services 2. Pressure cut-off valve
c. Port B - To auxiliary services control valve
d. Port S - From reservoir
FUNCTION
Port L: return
Port X: LS signal
Port S: suction
Port B: delivery
10-44
6
5
4
3 7
8
9
2
1
16
15
14
13 12 11 10
A-A
D0033950
COMPONENTS
1. Drive shaft 9. Cover
2. Oil seal 10. Bearing
3. Swash plate return spring 11. Valve plate
4. Swash plate 12. Pistons (no.9)
5. Control rod 13. Piston retaining ring
6. Control piston 14. Piston shoe
7. Cylinder block 15. Taper roller bearing
8. Spacer 16. Pump housing
10-45
1 2 3 4 5 6
12 11 10 9 8 7
B-B D0000540
COMPONENTS
1. Load Sensing valve spool 7. Adjuster nuts
2. Choke 8. Spring cover
3. Collar 9. Pressure control valve springs
4. Load Sensing valve springs 10. Collar
5. Spring cover 11. Choke (Ø 0.6 mm) (0.024 in)
6. Adjuster nuts 12. Pressure control valve spool
10-46
5.3.1 HYDRAULIC PUMP
FUNCTION
• The rotation and torque of the pump shaft are converted into hydraulic energy and the flow of pressurised oil is
regulated in accordance with the demand from the various actuators.
• It is possible to vary the pump delivery by changing the angle of the swash plate.
5
3 A 4
2
6 B 7
D0033960
CONSTRUCTION
• Cylinder block (4) is fixed to shaft (1) by broached fitting B and shaft (1) is supported by the front and rear bearings.
• The end of piston (5) is spherical; piston shoe (6) is staked to form a single assembly. Piston (5) and shoe (6) together
form a ball joint.
• Swash plate (3) has a flat surface A against which piston shoes (6) slide with a circular motion.
• Pistons (5) stroke axially within their bores in cylinder block (4).
• The rotation of cylinder block (4) pressurises the oil in the cylinder bores; the positions of the inlet and outlet ports are
determined by slots in valve plate (7).
The oil is drawn into the bores and forced out through the slots in valve plate (7).
10-47
OPERATION
1. Operation of the pump
1 - Cylinder block (4) rotates with shaft (1) and piston 3 A 6 S 4 C
shoes (6) slide on flat surface «A».
Swash plate (3) can swing within arc «B»; angle
«α» between the axis of shaft (1) and axis X of 1
x
swash plate (3) can be changed to alter the stroke
of the pistons. Angle «α» is known as the «swash a
plate angle».
2 - When axis X of swash plate (3) is at an angle «α» to
shaft (1) and consequently to cylinder block (4),
surface «A» acts as a cam for piston shoes (6).
Consequently, as the shaft rotates, pistons (5)
stroke within their bores in cylinder block (4),
thereby creating a difference between volumes C
and D which causes oil to be drawn in and forced B D
out in quantities equal to this difference (D -- Fig. 1
C=delivery).
In other terms, as cylinder block (4) rotates the
volume of chamber D is reduced causing the oil to
be delivered while the volume of chamber C is
increased, thereby causing oil to be drawn in. (Fig.
1 shows the condition of the pump on completion
of the suction stage in chamber D and the delivery
stage in chamber C).
3 - When axis X of swash plate (3) is parallel to the 3 4 C
axis of cylinder block (4) (swash plate angle
«α»=0), the difference between volumes C and D
inside cylinder block (6) is zero and no oil is
pumped (Fig. 2).
(In reality, swash plate angle «α» is never truly
equal to 0).
x
4 - Pump delivery is therefore directly proportional to
swash plate angle «α»
2. Pump delivery control

• When the pump runs at a given speed, the
quantity of oil delivered to the work ports is
regulated by angle «α» of swash plate (3). Fig. 2 D
The swash plate is maintained in the maximum D0000530
displacement position by spring (10) in contrast 8

with the positioning piston, which defines angle 2 3 C
«α». 10
• When the pump operates below the maximum
pressure, angle «α» is set in such a way that the
difference between pump discharge pressure
and LS signal pressure assumes a specific value
(control pressure differential).
• When the pump operates at maximum pressure,
angle «α» is set in such a way as to guarantee the
flow rate without exceeding maximum pressure.
This means that angle «α» is set to a slightly lower
value than that requested by the LS signal.
Fig. 3 D D0033970
10-48
5.3.2. LOAD SENSING VALVE, PRESSURE CUT-OFF VALVE
2
1
PLS = PA
3 8
4 6 PP
PA
5
7
D0033980
COMPONENTS
1. Load Sensing valve spool
2. Load sensing valve spring
3. Pressure cut-off valve spool
4. Pressure cut-off valve spring
5. Swash plate return spring
6. Control piston
7. Directional control valve
8. Work port
10-49
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
Controls the angle of the pump swash plate
• The swash-plate angle of the pump (and consequently the pump displacement), is controlled in such a way that
pressure difference ΔPR between pump discharge pressure PP and delivery pressure PLS to the load at the work
port of the control valve is maintained at a constant value. (ΔPR = Pump discharge pressure PP -- Delivery pressure
to load PLS).
• If pressure difference ΔPR falls relative to the pressure setting of the LS valve, the swash plate angle will increase.
If pressure difference ΔPR rises, the swash plate angle will decrease.
★ For more detailed information on this mechanism, see the description of the «HYDRAULIC PUMP».
Distributore
T PLS
Mandata pompa PP
Pistone di
posizionamento
α
Valvola TP
Valvola LS
D0004840
10-50
LOAD SENSING VALVE (LS)
FUNCTION
• The LS valve controls the pump delivery according to the stroke of the directional control valve lever, i.e., according
to the demand for oil flow from the actuators.
• Valve LS detects the demand from the actuators by way of pressure difference ΔPR between pump discharge
pressure PP and pressure PLS at the outlet of the directional control valve; this enables the valve to regulate delivery
Q of the main pump.
(PP, PLS and ΔPR, are respectively: the pump discharge pressure, the pressure of the Load Sensing signal and the
pressure difference between these two values).
• In other terms, the LS valve detects pressure difference ΔPR generated by the flow of oil passing through the
passages uncovered by the spool, and regulates pump delivery Q so as to maintain a constant pressure drop.
This means that the pump delivery is proportional to the demand from the directional control valve.
OPERATION
The operation of the pump can be described in four main stages:
a. When the directional control valve is in neutral position
b. When a control lever is operated
c. When the flow rate stabilises
d. When the system enters the “saturation” condition
10-51
a. When the directional control valve is in «NEUTRAL» position
b 1 d e a 2
PP T PLS
PEN
PP Min Max
7
X
M 5 6
D0004850
• The pressure PLS of the LS signal from the control valve outlet port, enters chamber a of the LS valve; the pump
delivery pressure PP enters the chamber b on the opposite side.
• The position of spool (1) is determined by the combination of the force created by pressure PLS plus the force exerted
by spring (2) and by the force exerted on the opposite side of the spool by pressure PP.
• Before the engine is started, control piston (6) is pushed to the right by spring (5) (position corresponding to the
maximum swash plate angle).
• When the engine is started, if all the control valve spools are in «NEUTRAL», pressure PLS of the LS signal remains
at 0 bar (0 psi) as no fluid is delivered from the control valve outlets and the signal is connected to tank.
At the same time, pump delivery pressure PP increases as there is no demand from the work ports.
When the force exerted by pressure PP in chamber b balances the force exerted by spring (2), spool (1) moves to the
right and allows fluid at pressure PP to flow into chamber X of piston (6) by connecting passages c and d.
• The force exerted by the fluid pressure on piston (6) overcomes the force of spring (5). The control piston is thus
pushed to the left, i.e. towards the minimum swash plate angle position.
• Pump delivery pressure PP stabilizes around the value of approximately 22 bar (319 psi), which corresponds to the
standby pressure.
10-52
b. When a control lever is operated
b 1 d e a 2
PP T PLS
7 8
PEN
PP Min Max
f
X
M 5 6
D0004860
• When a control valve lever is shifted from the NEUTRAL position, this generates an LS signal corresponding to
pressure PLS.
• The LS signal pressure in chamber a causes the spool to shift to the left, thereby connecting passages d and e.
Chamber X is depressurised and spring (5) causes the swash plate to move to the maximum displacement angle.
• System balance conditions are restored when pressure ΔPR exerts on spool (1) the difference in force due to spring
(2) and hence passages c and d are reconnected to each other.
10-53
c. When the flow rate stabilises
d 1 2
c
d
PP T PLS
g
PEN
PP
X
M 5 6
D0004870
• When the pump delivery matches the demand from the directional control valve, pump delivery pressure PP present
in chamber b of the LS valve balances the combination of the forces exerted by pressure PLS of the LS valve in
chamber a and by spring (6).
On reaching a state of balance, piston (1) stops in an intermediate position.
• In this condition, the passage connecting chamber c to chamber d remains partially open, thereby maintaining the
pressure in chamber d.
An oil flow enters control piston (6) at a sufficient pressure to balance the force exerted by spring (5).
• The stability of this equilibrium is ensured by a stabilised flow from flow restrictor g.
• The force of spring (2) is adjusted in such a way that piston (1) is balanced when
PP -- PLS = ΔPR = 22 bar (319 psi).
• In practice, pump delivery is made proportional to the aperture of the auxiliary control valve, maintaining the pressure
difference ΔPR = 22 bar (319 psi).
• This condition remains unaltered until there is a change in the operating conditions (e.g. a change in engine speed, reduction
or increase in the demand for flow or pressure, etc.).
10-54
d. When the system enters the “saturation” condition
b 1 d e a 2
PP T PLS
7 8
PEN
PP Min Max
f
X
M 5 6
D0004880
• When the engine speed is reduced while one or more hydraulic actuators are in operation, pump delivery is also
reduced. Consequently the swash plate angle is changed to increase pump delivery.
• When the pump reaches its maximum displacement and can therefore no longer increase the flow rate, the difference
between pump pressure PP and pressure PLS of the LS valve (differential pressure ΔPR) decreases ("saturation"
condition).
• Pressure PLS in chamber a of the LS valve becomes almost equal to the pump pressure PP and the control piston (1)
shifts to the left under the combined action of pressure PLS and spring (2).
The piston thus closes passage c and opens the connection between passages d and e.
• The pressurised oil in chamber X of the control piston (6) flows through passages d and e and into the return chamber
of the pump; consequently the pressure in chamber X of control piston (6) becomes equal to the return pressure.
• Control piston (6) is therefore shifted to the right by the action of spring (5), to the position corresponding to the
maximum swash plate angle.
10-55
PRESSURE CUT-OFF VALVE (TP)
FUNCTION
• The pressure cut-off valve determines the maximum pump delivery pressure.
PP T PLS
PEN
PP
Min Max
D0004890
OPERATION
• The pressure cut-off valve senses the pump delivery pressure and, on reaching the maximum pressure setting,
reduces pump delivery to zero, bypassing the action of the LS valve.
• Pump delivery is then regulated at the minimum value to ensure internal lubrication of the main auxiliary services
pump and maintenance of maximum pressure in the hydraulic system.
10-56
5. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 5.4 STEERING GEAR PUMP
5.4 STEERING GEAR PUMP
D0033990
Port L: suction Displacement: 11 cc/rev
Port P: delivery Maximum pressure: 180 bar
10-57
5. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 5.5 POWER STEERING
5.5 POWER STEERING
L R
T P
L R
250±10 bar 250±10 bar
180 +10 bar
P T
D0030250
Port P: delivery Displacement: 125 cc/rev
Port T: return Maximum pressure: 180÷190 bar
Port R: right steering Relief valve: 240÷260 bar
Port L: left steering
10-58
5. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 5.6 AUXILIARY SERVICES CONTROL VALVE
5.6 AUXILIARY SERVICES CONTROL VALVE
FUNCTION
The function of the auxiliary services control valve is to control the flow of pressurised oil to the auxiliary services and the
rear lift.
This control valve is of the parallel circuit Load Sensing type.
2 4 7 4 6 4 6
R
Y
P
DOWN
a
1 b
1 b
0
0
UP
H
2
F
F
1 P R R A A B A B Y
3 5
D0034000
REAR AXLE
DESCRIPTION
• The pressurised oil from variable displacement pump (1) enters the inlet section (2) (or trailer braking valve) from
where it is distributed to the spool sections through internal passages.
• All the spools (6), when operated, generate a pressure signal (Load Sensing signal) that is equal to the pressure
demand from each load.
The highest of these pressure signals, selected by bistable valves (4), is sent to the variable displacement pump
through port Y of the control valve.
• On the lift control element (7) there is an antishock valve (5) (on the "raise" control side), which serves to prevent any
excessive pressure surges caused by jolting of the implement.
• Maximum working pressure is regulated by relief valve (3) located on the control valves support.
10-59
5.6.1 CONTROL VALVE TYPES

4-WAY VERSION
HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 4 6 10 7 8
R
Y
P
DOWN
S
a
b
b
1
1
0
0
UP
H
2
F
F
R
A
B
A
B
9
12 11 3 5 9 9
11 9 10 D0034010
1. LH end cover 7. Valve section n° 2

2. Manifold 8. RH end cover with LS signal outlet
3. Relief valve 9 Check valve (mechanically operated)
4. Lift control valve section 10. Spacer
5. Antishock valve 11. Spacer
6. Valve section n° 1 12. Pilot valve for electrically operated sections
10-60
8-WAY VERSION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11
HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM
13 12
12 12 1 2 12 3 12 4 6 8 12 9 10
R
Y
P
DOWN
S
a
a
b
b
1
1
0
0
UP
H
2
2
F
F
F
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
D0034020
13 11 11 5 7 11 11
1. LH end cover with pilot valve for electrically operated 7. Control valve section n° 3
sections 8. Control valve section n° 4
2. electrically operated section n° 1 9. RH end cover with LS signal outlet
3. electrically operated section n° 2 10. Check valve (mechanically operated)
4. Manifold 11. Spacer
5. Lift control section 12. Pilot valve for electrically operated sections
6. Antishock valve
10-61
5.6.2 LIFT CONTROL ELEMENT
DESCRIPTION
• The lift control element is a 1-way hydraulic control valve operated by two proportional solenoid valves.
• The control incorporates an antishock valve that protects the hydraulic circuit against pressure surges caused by
jolting of the implement during work and transport.
HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM
P Y R
A
P Y R
1 2 3 4 5 7
A R
D0004920
11 10 9 8 6
COMPONENTS
1. UP control solenoid valve 7. DOWN control solenoid valve
2. Check valve 8. Flow control spring
3. Check valve spring 9. Flow control spool
4. Antishock valve 10. Spring
5. Antishock valve spring 11. UP control spool
6. DOWN control spool
10-62
OPERATION
1. When the lift control is in neutral position
• The oil from the pump enters chamber a and from here flows into passage b.
• At the same time, the oil flows into chamber c of the flow control valve (1) through passage d.
• This causes the spool to shift to the right until the connecting passage between chamber a and passage b is closed.
• The pressure in chamber e caused by the weight of the implement mounted on the linkage (e.g.: plough), keeps check
valve (2) closed, thereby ensuring that the lift maintains its position.
• Chamber e is thus a closed chamber that prevents any uncontrolled movement of the lift.
• The pressure in chamber e also acts on antishock valve (3) that eliminates any pressure surges caused by jolting of
the implement during work or transport.
.
e 3
A R
c b d a 1 D0004930
10-63
2. When the lift is raised

• When the lift is raised, the electronic lift control energises solenoid (4) which moves spool (5) to the right.
• The oil in passage b can therefore flow through check valve (2) into chamber e and from there to the lift cylinders.
• At the same time, the pressure present in passage b can flow into chamber a and line f and from there through
passage g into chamber h of flow control valve (1).
• As the oil pressure is the same on both sides of the spool, the spool is shifted by the force of spring (6) and the oil can
flow from chamber a into passage b.
e 2
4 5
A R
i D0004940
b 1 g a 6 h
10-64
3. When the lift is lowered

• During lifting or when the lift is stationary, spool (8) is pushed to the right by spring (9).
• As a result, the passage between chambers m and n is closed and the pressure in chamber p pushes spool (10) to the
right.
• When the lift is lowered, the lift electronic control unit energises solenoid (7) that moves spool (8) to the left.
• The oil in chamber n can flow into chamber m and the pressure in chamber p is reduced.
• The equilibrium between the forces generated by the pressure values in chambers e and p on spool (10) is thus lost
and spool (10) is shifted leftward allowing flow between chamber e and chamber m, which is connected to the return
circuit.
• As a result, the oil in the lift cylinders is directed to the drain circuit and the lift is lowered.
• As the solenoid is of the proportional type, the more current supplied, the further spool (8) shifts to the left, thereby
allowing more oil to flow and the lift to descend more rapidly.
• The electronic control obtains float position by energising solenoid valve (7) and holding it fully open.
• In this condition, the oil in the lift cylinders is sent to the drain circuit so that the lift is free to move up and down and
follow the contours of the terrain.
10 e n m 9 8
A R
p
7
A R
D0004950
10-65
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
CONTENTS
SECTION 20
CONTENTS
1. DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS................................ 1 5. ALARMS ...................................................87

• 1.1 ALL ROUND TESTER ............................................1 • INTRODUCTION..........................................................87
• 1.2 “SERDIA 2000 LEVEL III” SOFTWARE ..................7 • 5.1 ALARMS DISPLAYED ON THE INFOCENTER ....88
• 1.3 EDS EST45 SOFTWARE........................................8 • 5.2 HLHP CONTROL UNIT ALARMS ........................99
• 5.3 ENGINE CONTROL UNIT ALARMS...................171
2. CONNECTING THE TESTER TO THE • 5.4 TRANSMISSION CONTROL UNIT ALARMS .....195
ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS ............. 9 • 5.5 ARMREST ALARMS ..........................................277
• 2.1 CONNECTING ART® TO THE HLHP CONTROL • 5.6 CANBUS ALARMS ............................................287
UNITS ....................................................................9
• 2.2 CONNECTING A LAPTOP COMPUTER WITH 6. ENGINE CONTROL UNIT
“SERDIA 2000” SOFTWARE TO TESTER PROGRAM ..............................297
THE ENGINE CONTROL UNIT ............................10 • 6.1 ACCESS AND COMMUNICATION ....................297
3. INTRODUCTION TO THE • 6.2 CONTROL UNIT SELECTION............................305
• 6.3 MEASUREMENT VALUES.................................308
TRACTOR ELECTRONIC SYSTEM ....... 11
• 6.4 PARAMETERS ...................................................320
• 3.1 ELECTRONIC SYSTEM .......................................11
• 6.5 FAULTS MEMORY ............................................323
• 3.2 CANBUS SYSTEM...............................................12
• 6.6 EXTRA................................................................325
• 3.3 TRANSMISSION CONTROL UNIT.......................20
• 6.7 ACTIVITIES ........................................................327
• 3.4 INFOCENTER.......................................................21
• 6.8 WHAT TO DO IF...? ...........................................331
4. COMMISSIONING THE TRACTOR ........ 23
• 4.1 INTRODUCTION ..................................................23
• 4.2 RENEWING THE ENGINE
CONTROL UNIT...................................................23
• 4.3 RENEWING THE TRANSMISSION
CONTROL UNIT...................................................32
• 4.4 RENEWING THE HLHP CONTROL UNIT
(VALID UP TO SOFTWARE SC.0038.AC) ............49
• 4.5 RENEWING THE HLHP CONTROL UNIT
(VALID UP TO SOFTWARE SC.0038.AD) ............64
• 4.6 RENEWING THE ARMREST CONTROL UNIT.....81
20-i
1. DIAGNOSIS TOOLS 1.1 ALL ROUND TESTER
1. DIAGNOSIS TOOLS
1.1 ALL ROUND TESTER
To enable correct fault analysis, facilitate the procedure of putting the tractor into service and check correct operation of
theelectrical components used in the lift systems, front axle suspension and ASM, the service technician is provided with
an instrument called All Round Tester (abbreviated to ART throughout the manual).
Using the ART, the technician can:
- display errors (faults) that have occurred;
- execute the sensor calibration or set-up procedures;
- display data detected by the electronic control units (e.g. status of the sensors) responsible for managing the various systems.
The ART communicates with the tractor's electronic control units via one or more of the diagnostic sockets installed on the
tractor.
The ART is supplied with a number of different connection cables, which are to be selected in accordance with the type of
tractor and the procedures indicated in the shop manuals or on the CD provided in the tester kit.
1.1.1 DESCRIPTION OF THE KIT
The ART is supplied to Authorised Workshops in a carrying case containing:
1
9 2
7 8
4
6 5 3
F0057690
Range Code Description Qty

5.9030.730.6/30 Case, complete 1
1 5.9030.730.0 All Round Tester 1
Diagnostic cable for BOSCH EHR4 rear hydraulic lift 1
2 5.9030.681.3/10 Diagnostic and programming cable for Electronic regulator, original type 1
Diagnostic cable of SBA system, original type 1
3 5.9030.681.7 Adapter cable for radar connector 1
4 5.9030.681.5 Adapter cable for wheel speed sensor connector 1
5 5.9030.681.4 Cable for diagnostic socket 1
6 0.011.6178.4 Adapter cable for diagnostic socket on armrest 1
7 0.011.5445.4 Cable for connection to diagnostic socket in engine, gearbox, and lift control units zone 1
8 0.010.2154.2 EPROM port box 1
9 307.1056.8/60 CD ROM 1
CAUTION
To enable connection of the ART to the tractor electronics, a further adapter cable is required: P/N 0.012.6655.4
(not supplied with the kit). The cable can be purchased from the parts service.
20-1
1.1.2 NOTES ON CORRECT USE

The ART is protected against battery polarity inversion, and positive or negative voltage surges (1 msec).
Do not attempt to connect the ART to non-dedicated sockets, and do not use trailing connections or extension
cables.
The display features permanent backlighting in order to ensure visibility in all light conditions.
A knob on the side allows adjustment of the contrast. If no information appears on the display it may be that the knob is
positioned in such a way that data displayed on the screen are not visible.
The tester operates correctly at temperatures between 0 and 40 °C, and should be switched off every 30 minutes to
maximise its service life.
Before disconnecting the ART from the diagnostic socket, turn the starter key to the “O” (OFF) position.
1.1.3 DESCRIPTION OF THE TESTER
F0057700
The ART includes:

1 - Liquid crystal display featuring permanent backlighting
2 - 16-key alphanumeric keypad
3 - Contrast adjustment knob.
To adjust contrast. If no information appears on the display it may be that the knob is positioned in such a way that
data reading field on the screen is not visible.
4 - Parallel port (used to connect the ART to systems with electronic control units that do not have microprocessors).
5 - Serial port (used to connect the ART to systems with electronic control units incorporating microprocessors).
20-2
1.1.4 GENERAL NOTES ON CONNECTING AND POWERING UP THE TESTER

To connect the tester to the tractor electronic system proceed as follows:
1 - Stop the engine and remove the key from the starter switch;
2 - connect the ART to a diagnostic socket;
3 - insert the key in the starter switch and turn it to “I” (ON).
When the ART powers up, a page appears showing an S + L + H T E S T E R

internal test run by the instrument to check the battery - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
charge. If the voltage registers less than 10V, the ART
does not have sufficient power to connect to the control
units, whereas if the value is higher than 15V the V E R S I O N E x x x
instrument could be damaged.
After a few seconds, the tester attempts to connect to
the electronic system and displays a page (which may T E S T B A T T E R I A
vary depending on the tractor or the connector to which I N C O R S O !
it is plugged), from which the technician can choose to
connect to a given control unit and test the operation of
T E N S I O N E x x . x V
the components.
C O P Y R I G H T 1 9 9 1
E L . E N . S A S
M I L A N O
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
1.1.5 SELECTION OF THE DISPLAY LANGUAGE

The ART is able to display information in a number of different languages (factory setting: ITALIAN).
To change the display language, proceed as follows.
1 - Stop the engine and remove the key from the starter switch
2 - connect the ART to a diagnostic socket
3 - While holding down key A on the keypad, turn the starter key to “I” (ON)
4 - Enter the password 1 2 3 F.
P A S S W O R D :
20-3
5 - Press 1. C O N F I G U R A Z I O N E
M E N U
1 - S E L . L i n g u a
2 - P o r t e S e r i a l i
S C E L T A
E U S C I T A
6 - Press C and then the key corresponding to the

desired language. S E L E Z I O N E L I N G U A
In the example illustrated, pressing 2 selects English.
7 - Press E twice to exit D i s p o n i b i l i
8 - Turn the starter key to “O” (OFF) and disconnect the
ART from the diagnostic socket. 1 - I T A L I A N O
2 - E N G L I S H
3 - D E U T S C H
4 - F R A N C A I S
5 - P O R T U G U E S
6 - E S P A N O L
A T T U A L E : I t a l i a n o
N U O V A : E N G L I S H
C p e r c a m b i a r e
E U S C I T A
20-4
1.1.6 SETTING THE SERIAL PORTS

The tractor electronic systems to which the ART can be connected are different one from another and utilize different
pinouts at the diagnostic socket for interfacing purposes.
For this reason, the serial ports must first be configured so as to guarantee full compatibility of the ART with all SAME
electronic systems.
To change the serial ports configuration, proceed as follows.
1 - Stop the engine and remove the key from the starter switch
2 - connect the ART to a diagnostic socket
3 - While holding down key A on the keypad, turn the starter key to “I” (ON)
4 - Enter the password 1 2 3 F.
P A S S W O R D :
5 - Press 2. C O N F I G U R A Z I O N E
M E N U
1 - S E L . L i n g u a
2 - P o r t e S e r i a l i
S C E L T A
E U S C I T A
20-5
6 - Enable all the serial ports by pressing 1 seven times. C O N F I G . S E R I A L I

7 - Press E twice to exit.
8 - Turn the starter key to “O” (OFF) and disconnect the A t t u a l e 1 0 0 0 1 1 1
ART from the diagnostic socket. N u m . S e r . 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
N U O V A 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 - A b i l i t a P o r t e
0 - D i s a b i l i t a P .
E U S C I T A
20-6
1. DIAGNOSIS TOOLS 1.2 “SERDIA 2000 LEVEL III" SOFTWARE
1.2 “SERDIA 2000 LEVEL III" SOFTWARE

To enable correct analysis of faults, facilitate the procedure of putting the tractor into service and check correct operation
of the engine electrical components, the Technician is provided with a software application called SERDIA (P/
N.5.9030.740.4/30), to be installed on a laptop computer.
With SERDIA, the technician can:
- program the control unit;
- carry out sensor calibration or setting procedures.

The SERDIA software is supplied to Authorised Workshops in a carrying case with all the basic items needed for operation.
The case contains:
F0104210
Pos. Code Description Qty

5.9030.740.4/30 Case, complete 1
1 5.9030.740.0/10 . Installation disk 1
2 5.9030.740.2/10 . Level III interface General revision + USB cable 1
3 5.9030.741.0 Adapter cable (not included in kit) 1
Data is exchanged between the SERDIA software and the control units by way of a diagnostic socket incorporated in the
tractor wiring.
Accordingly, the SERDIA package is supplied with an interface cable that must be used on the particular model and version
of tractor being serviced.
20-7
1. DIAGNOSIS TOOLS 1.3 “EDS EST45” SOFTWARE”
1.3 “EDS EST45” SOFTWARE”

To enable correct analysis of faults, facilitate the procedure of putting the tractor into service and check correct operation
of the transmission and Infocenter, the Technician is provided with a software application called EDS (P/N. ), to be installed
on a laptop computer.
With EDS, the technician can:
- configure the control unit;
- carry out sensor calibration or setting procedures.

EDS is supplied to Authorised Workshops with the following basic items needed for operation.
The kit includes:
1
3
F0059400
Pos. Code Description Qty

5.9030.742.0 Complete English language kit 1
5.9030.742.1 Complete German language kit 1
1 5.9030.742.2 Installation disk (Ref. Wilbar 236162) 1
2 5.9030.742.3 Interface cable (Ref. Wilbar 0797-385) 1
3 5.9030.742.4 Interface cable (Ref. Wilbar KA 96-0526) 1
Data is exchanged between the EDS software and the control units by way of a diagnostic socket incorporated into the
tractor wiring.
Accordingly, the EDS software comes with different types of interface cables for the different models and versions of
tractor being serviced, which must be used as indicated in the relative workshop manuals.
20-8
2. CONNECTING THE TESTER TO THE ELECTRONIC 2.1 CONNECTING ART® TO THE HLHP CONTROL
2. CONNECTING THE TESTER TO THE ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS

This chapter describes how to connect the various diagnostic tools provided for the use of the technician.
2.1 CONNECTING ART® TO THE HLHP CONTROL UNITS

CAUTION
Before connecting the ART, switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition.
1
2
X4
F0104220
1 - Connect cable (1) (P/N 5.9030.681.4) to the ART® (2) (P/N 5.9030.730.0)
2 - Join connector (3) of cable (2) to cable (4) (P/N 0.012.6655.4) and plug connector (5) into connector X4 located
internally of the right hand side console.
3 - Check that connectors (5) and X4 are securely connected.
4 - Insert the key in the starter switch and turn it to “I” (ON) to switch on the tester.
5 - Following power up, the ART performs the battery T E S T D I S P O N I B I L I

level test. M E N U
6 - Press the key corresponding to the control unit to be
tested. 1 - A R M R E S T
CAUTION 2 - H L H P
Avoid starting the engine unless required for the
purpose of diagnosis or sensor calibration.
S C E L T A _
20-9
2. CONNECTING THE TESTER TO THE ELECTRONIC 2.2 CONNECTING THE LAPTOP COMPUTER WITH
2.2 CONNECTING THE LAPTOP COMPUTER WITH

“SERDIA 2000” SOFTWARE TO THE ENGINE CONTROL UNIT
6
3
X4
4
F0104230
1- Connect interface (1) (P/N 5.9030.740.2/10) to the USB port of the laptop computer (2).
2- Plug connector (3) of cable (4) (P/N 5.9030.741.0) into connector X4 located inside the right-hand side console.
3- Connect connectors (5) and (6).
4- With the laptop computer switched on and the Serdia program launched, put the key in the starter switch and turn it
to “I” (ON).
20-10
3. INTRODUCTION TO THE TRACTOR ELECTRONIC SYSTEM 3.1 ELECTRONIC SYSTEM
3. INTRODUCTION TO THE TRACTOR ELECTRONIC SYSTEM

3.1 ELECTRONIC SYSTEM
The tractors in this series are equipped with electronic control units for the management of various functions. Each control
unit is dedicated to the management of one or more systems.
All the control units are interconnected by means of a CANBUS network.
The control units have self-diagnostic functions and can detect and store in memory faults (alarms) regarding the
components to which they are connected.
All alarms are sent via the CANBUS to the Infocenter, where they can be displayed on a screen by the operator.
The tractor's electronic system incorporates a socket used for calibration, diagnosis and programming of the control units;
by connecting the All Round Tester ® (ART®) or a laptop computer (with the SERDIA and EDS diagnostic software
applications installed) to these sockets, the technician can program the tractor's operating characteristics in accordance
with the available options (front PTO, etc.), test the operation of the sensors and pushbutton controls, calibrate the sensors
and troubleshoot the system.
By connecting the ART® to the HLHP control unit it is possible to display the active and passive alarms of all the control
units.
The engine ECU, HLHP control unit and armrest alarms are managed by the HLHP control unit with two numerical codes
named SPN (Suspect Parameter Number i.e. possible faulty device) and FMI (Failure Mode Identifier i.e. fault code
identifier).
Transmission control unit alarms are managed using the same alphanumerical code managed by the transmission control
unit.
Through these codes and descriptive messages, the technician can troubleshoot the system and, using the options in the
test and monitor menu screens, test operation of system components.
The SERDIA program is another diagnostic instrument for the engine management system. This program allows the
technician to test the operation of engine components, as well as display any alarms detected directly by the engine control
unit.
20-11
3. INTRODUCTION TO THE TRACTOR ELECTRONIC SYSTEM 3.2 CANBUS SYSTEM
3.2 CANBUS SYSTEM

The CANBUS network is a communication system that allows information to be exchanged between two or more
electronic control units in the form of “digital messages”, i.e. suitably encoded information that is transmitted over the
network and used by the other control units.
Examples of the type of information sent over the CANBUS include the current draw of a solenoid, the engine rpm or, more
simply, the status of a pressure switch or pushbutton.
In this way it is possible to manage, electronically, a greater number of systems using a smaller number of sensors than with
a conventional system, while simplifying the wiring and making troubleshooting quicker and easier.
Each control unit is programmed so that it only reads the data related to the system it manages and ignores all other
information.
On the tractors in this series, the CANBUS interconnects the following control units:
1 - transmission control unit
2 - engine control unit
3 - armrest
4 - HLHP control unit
5 - Infocenter
6 - supplementary CANBUS socket.
The CANBUS physically consists of a twisted pair of wires, called CAN H and CAN L, on which the digital messages are
transmitted.
The digital messages are generated by a "differential" voltage system that provides a high degree of immunity to
electromagnetic interference from the surrounding environment.
The CANBUS wires interconnect the armrest and the instrument panel, thereby forming the basic network to which all the
other control units are connected in parallel.
The armrest and the instrument panel may be designated "termination" control units (i.e. they form the "terminations" of
the network). At each of these control units there is a 120 Ohm resistor connected between the wires of the CANBUS
network.
The entire network therefore has a total resistance of 60 Ohm created by the two 120 Ohm resistors in parallel.
5 3 1
ARMREST TRANSMISSION
INFOCENTER ECU
CAN CAN CAN
CONTROLLER CONTROLLER CONTROLLER
120 Ohm 120 Ohm
L H
T L H T H L
X18 11 15 14 20 28 X11 GEARBOX 27 25 26
G1
CAN-H
4
CAN-L
3
MX2 2 HLHP1 4
1 2 3 4 X3 13 12 39 40
H L L H L H
+15 ISO PLUG

CAN CAN
CONTROLLER CONTROLLER
ENGINE ECU HLHP ECU

6 MX2 CONNECTOR
D0034680
20-12
3.2.1 ENGINE CONTROL UNIT (DEUTZ EMR2)

The engine control unit is responsible for supervising operation of the engine; To do this, it receives commands given by the
operator via the hand throttle, accelerator pedal or the engine speed memory key; then, in accordance with other signals
received from the engine speed sensor (pick up), coolant temperature, fuel temperature and boost pressure sensors, it
sends a modulated voltage signal (PWM) to the fuel injection pumps actuator.
The ECU also manages the preheating system and enables the preheating device in accordance with coolant and fuel
temperature to facilitate engine starting even in extreme conditions.
By connecting the ART® to the diagnostic socket in the control units compartment, the technician can connect to the
HLHP control unit and check for the presence of active and passive alarms concerning the engine.
For a more detailed analysis of engine faults or operation, the technician must connect a laptop computer (SERDIA
program installed) to the diagnostic socket.
MX1
MX2
3 5 8 9 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 23 24 25 12 13 14 25 11 10 20 1 2 17 18
23 24
GEARBOX 1
MX1 MX2
25
26 TRASMISSION
27 ECU
40 HLHP
+30
39 ECU
F15B
7,5A
HLHP1
2
125A
FU2
F9A
3A
1 2 A B 1 2 1 2 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 2 4 1 2 3 4 26 7 32 33 31 29 30
v
B43
B37
B41
X67
t° t° p
B40
X16
X11
Y3
X4
+15
RL42 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3
12 D0034700
11
1 - Transmission control unit 7- Actuator

2 - HLHP control unit 8- Camshaft speed sensor
3 - Armrest (manual Holde pushbutton) and throttle 9- Engine coolant temperature sensor
potentiometer armrest 10 - Fuel temperature sensor
4 - Diagnostic socket 11 - Preheating device
5 - Accelerator pedal potentiometer 12 - Preheating relay
6 - Engine turbocharging pressure sensor
20-13
3.2.2 HLHP CONTROL UNIT

The HLHP control unit is designed and programmed to manage the functions of the following systems:
1 - rear lift
2 - rear PTO
3 - front PTO
4 - front axle suspension
5 - ASM
6 - Auxiliary control valves
in accordance with the operating conditions and requests received from the operator.
Using the ART® you can access the list of alarms detected by the HLHP and engine control units.
These alarms are divided into two categories:
• active alarms, i.e. all those alarms for which the cause has not yet been removed;
• passive alarms, i.e. all those alarms for which the cause has been eliminated or which simply cease without requiring
any action.
Both these types of alarm are stored in memory in the form of an SPN code (Suspect Parameter Number - possible faulty
device) and an FMI code (Failure Mode Identifier - Fault code identifier). Through these codes, the technician can trou-
bleshoot the system and, using the Test and Monitor menus, check the operation of system components.
By connecting the ART® to the diagnostic socket, the technician can access the HLHP control unit to test components,
configure the control unit and display the active and passive alarms related to the components connected to the HLHP
control unit and the alarms detected directly by the engine and transmission control units.
SISTEMA
PTO
POSTERIORE
SISTEMA SISTEMA
SOLLEVATORE PTO
POSTERIORE ANTERIORE
SISTEMA
SISTEMA SOSPENSIONE
ASM ASSALE
ANTERIORE
F0104252
DISTRIBUTORI
SERVIZI
AUSILIARI
20-14
3.2.2.1 REAR LIFT SYSTEM

The electronic system controls the movements of the lift according to the commands and the operating mode selected by
the operator using the control panel on the right console.
The operator can select five different control types:
- position control;
- draft control;
- depth/position control;
- wheelslip control;
- draft, wheelslip and depth control;
- implement locking for transport.
Furthermore, the system also automatically activates the anti-pitching control when tractor speed exceeds 8 km/h with the
lift in "locked" condition and the maximum lift height knob turned fully clockwise.
The transport lock can be activated by the operator but, for reasons of safety, it is activated automatically by the system
once three minutes have elapsed with the tractor travelling and the lift unit in stop status or when the tractor exceeds a
groundspeed of 20 km/h.
The system compares the command given by the operator with the signals received from the lift position sensor, draft
sensors, wheel speed sensor and radar, and executes the command by operating a control valve equipped with two
solenoid valves.
The control valve routes high pressure oil to two hydraulic cylinders that raise or lower the implement connected to the lift.
The control console, sensors required for system operation and lift pushbuttons on the fenders are connected directly to
the HLHP control unit.
For more detailed information on operation of the power lift, see the use and maintenance manual for the specific tractor.
HLHP1
56 55 76 69 64 35 45 53 2 28 41 1 27 51 70 77 12 14 24 62 11 22 72 29 78 42 39 40 HLHP2
1 X11
6
20
7
28 ARMREST 1
8
9
9 10
13
14
15
11
F5A
3A
X47
F15C
F2A
7,5A
15A
+15
3 2 1 3 2 1 2 3 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
DWDX
DWSX
EVDW
UPDX
UPSX
+15
EVUP
U U U
POS
+30
F F Pos
R
L
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 D0034710
1- Armrest 6- Lift position sensor

2- Lift "Down" pushbuttons 7- RH draft sensor
3- Lift 'Up' pushbuttons 8- LH draft sensor
4- Lift 'Down' control solenoid 9- Lift control console
5- Lift 'Up' control solenoid
20-15
3.2.2.2 REAR PTO SYSTEM

The electronic system controls the rear PTO in accordance with the commands given by the operator via the pushbuttons
on the right-hand console.
The operator is provided with two pushbuttons to activate the rear PTO and the AUTO PTO system.
The front and rear PTO control pushbuttons located in the cab are connected to the armrest, whereas the rear PTO speed
selector pushbutton, the control pushbuttons mounted on the fenders and all the remaining system components are
connected directly to the HLHP control unit.
The system receives the command given by the operator and activates accordingly the rear PTO and speed selector
solenoid valves that send oil under pressure to the PTO engagement clutches and the speed selector.
3.2.2.3 FRONT PTO SYSTEM

The electronic system controls the front PTO in accordance with the commands given by the operator via the pushbuttons
on the console on the right-hand side of the cab.
The command signals from the console controls are transmitted to the lift control unit, which operates the solenoid valve
that controls engagement of the front PTO.
For further details on the operation of the system, consult the specific use and maintenance manual for the tractor.
+30 +15
HLHP1 2 28 1 27 41 36 44 8 58 18 65 60
HLHP2
F15C
F2A
F5A
7,5A
15A
3A
EV EV PTO PTO
PTO1 PTO2 X48 X14 X15 X37 DX SX
1 2 1 2 2 1 3 4 2 4 2 4 2 1 2 1 2
f
3.9 Ohm
3.9 Ohm
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
D0031120
1- Left rear PTO pushbutton (on fender) 5- AUTO PTO pushbutton

2- Right rear PTO pushbutton (on fender) 6- PTO speed sensor
3- Front PTO pushbutton 7- PTO engagement solenoid valve
4- Rear PTO pushbutton (on cab) 8- Front PTO solenoid valve
20-16
3.2.2.4 FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION SYSTEM

This system, when activated by the operator by pressing the corresponding pushbutton on the armrest, automatically
controls the position of the front end of the tractor relative to the road surface.
When the operator activates the system, the control unit operates the LS signal and 'Up' control solenoid valves until the
signal received from the position sensor corresponds to the programmed value.
At this point, the control unit deactivates the solenoid valves, but the system remains active. When the axle position varies
due to tractor motion, the control unit automatically makes the necessary corrections to return the axle to the programmed
position.
The front axle suspension system thus becomes a further means to limit the pitching motion of the tractor, thereby
increasing stability and responsiveness in emergency braking.
All the control components of the system (pushbutton, position sensor, and solenoid valves) are connected directly to the
HLHP control unit, which controls operation of the solenoid valves in accordance with the signal received from the position
sensor.
The only data read via the CANBUS are the system activation signal (via the pushbutton on the armrest) and the ground
speed, which is used to activate or deactivate the system according to the tractor speed.
HLHP1 2 28 41 1 27 51 71 12 14 24 6 33 47
F15C
F2A
7,5A
15A
X30 X42 DW UP
+15 3 2 1 4 2 2 1 2 1
+30
POS
4 3 2 1
D0031130
1- Front axle 'Up' solenoid

2- Front axle 'Down' solenoid
3- Front suspension pushbutton
4- Front axle suspension position sensor
20-17
3.2.2.5 ASM SYSTEM

When activated by the operator the ASM system automatically controls the engagement and disengagement of four-wheel
drive and the differential locks.
The parameters used to determine exclusion of the differential lock and disengagement of four-wheel drive are:
- travel speed
- steering angle
- braking type
The system activation command and the signals from the brake pedals and ground speed sensors arrive at the control unit
via the CANBUS, while the steering angle sensor, the differential lock solenoids and 4WD engagement solenoid are
connected directly to the HLHP control unit.
The control unit processes the data and, according to the system status, activates or deactivates the solenoid valves
controlling engagement of four-wheel drive and the differential locks.
HLHP1 2 28 41 1 27 49 23 67 75 12 14 24 43 34 39 40
HLHP2
X11
20
28 ARMREST 1
F15C
F2A
7,5A
15A
+15
+30
2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 1 4 2 3 2 1 2 1
EVDF
EVDT
X55
V
X34
X35
4 3 2 D0034720
6 5
1- Armrest
2- 4WD engagement control solenoid
3- Differential lock solenoid
4- Steering angle sensor
5- RH brake pedal pressed sensor
6- LH brake pedal pressed sensor
20-18
3.2.2.6 AUXILIARY SERVICES CONTROL VALVE SYSTEM

This system makes it possible to manage activation of the auxiliary services control valves.
The commands imparted by the operator by means of the pushbuttons and joysticks on the armrest are transmitted via the
CANBUS to the HLHP control unit which activates the relevant control valves.
HLHP1 2 28 41 1 27 5 17 16 4 39 40
HLHP2
X11
20
28 ARMREST 1
F15C
F2A
7,5A
F5A
15A
15A
+15 +15
+30
D1 D2 D3 D4
1 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 1 4 2 3
5 4 3 2 D0034730
1- Armrest
2- Control valve n°4
20-19
3. INTRODUCTION TO THE TRACTOR ELECTRONIC SYSTEM 3.3 TRANSMISSION CONTROL UNIT
3.3 TRANSMISSION CONTROL UNIT

The engine control unit is responsible for supervising operation of the transmission; it receives commands from the
operator by way of the the shuttle lever, the range selection buttons and the clutch pedal, and, according to the signals
returned by the engine speed and torque sensors, shifts between the ranges selected with the controls by piloting the
operation of the 8 solenoid valves of the clutch actuators.
The control unit is connected to a display that provides the operator with information concerning the operating status of the
transmission (selected travel direction, selected range, etc.) and signals any alarms detected by means of the
alphanumeric codes.
By connecting the laptop PC (with EDS software installed) the Technician can connect to the transmission control unit and
display alarms associated with the transmission.
Management of transmission control unit alarms is based on two classes of alarms called active alarms and passive
alarms.
On EDS all alarms are shown in two windows that supply indications concerning the number of the alarm detected, the
status of the alarm (active or passive), the number of times the alarm has been detected and the time of transmission
operation at which the alarm occurred for the first time.
65 63 20 1 2 11 8 57 32 12 55 29 14 39 10 16 3 40 17 50 54 66 45 18 13 56 62 4 44 24 37 38 67 22 30 49 68 23 GEARBOX
X63
3
3.9 Ohm 1
17 3.9 Ohm 4
2
7.5A
3.9 Ohm
F5C
FW
F14C
1A
N
RV
+15 +30
X33
+12V 1
16 M 5
M 6
Sig 2
7.5A
X21 F16B F15A F9A

3A
3A
15 2
3
+15 +15 +15
X26
4
14 1
2
X59
2
3
4
1
EVLOCK
2
1 2
EVF
2
510 Ohm 1 3
2
1 4
EVR
160 Ohm
GEAR
X52 18 BAR TEMP NHK NLSA NLSE EVP NAB X45 X46
E F C D A B 2 1 1 2 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2
fN fN f
P
HK
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y1
lsa lse N
D0031140
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5
1 - FIELD/ROAD sensor 10 - Transmission speed sensor
2 - Neutral lock solenoid valve 11 - Transmission oil temperature sensor
3 - "FIELD" mode solenoid valve 12 - Engine oil low pressure switch
4 - "ROAD" mode solenoid valve 13 - Gear change solenoid valves
5 - Gear lever 14 - Clutch pedal position sensor
6 - Speed sensor for odometer 15 - Clutch pedal pressed proximity sensor
7 - Proportional solenoid valve 16 - Transmission display
8 - Engine speed sensor 17 - Reverse shuttle control lever
9 - Gearbox output shaft speed sensor
20-20
3. INTRODUCTION TO THE TRACTOR ELECTRONIC SYSTEM 3.4 INFOCENTER
3.4 INFOCENTER
The Infocenter control unit is designed and programmed to manage and display the essential information needed by the
operator to control the machine under different conditions of use, to show performance data in real time, and to activate an
indicator light warning of faults detected by the engine control unit.
The Infocenter comprises a single module with two integral displays which provide information in the form of text
messages and analog instruments on the engine rpm, fuel level, etc.
The instrument panel features several indicator lamps signalling the operating status of tractor systems or the presence of
faults (e.g. clogged oil filters, etc.).
The display located to the right of the Infocenter provides indications regarding the operation of the tractor (road speed,
wheelslip, rotations speeds of the front and rear PTOs) and the number of operating hours.
D0019600
20-21
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
4. PUTTING THE TRACTOR INTO SERVICE 4.1 INTRODUCTION
4. PUTTING THE TRACTOR INTO SERVICE

4.1 INTRODUCTION
This chapter contains all the information required to establish or restore correct operation of the tractor's various electronic
systems.
Whenever an electronic control unit of the tractor is changed or a calibration-sensitive electronic component replaced, the
control unit or component must be put into service as from new.
The necessary procedures must be carried out by a skilled technician, who in turn must follow the instructions in the
manual precisely.
4.2 RENEWING THE ENGINE CONTROL UNIT

The ECU is supplied as a spare part in 2 versions:
• control unit with software but without DATASET
• control unit with software and with DATASET
The DATASET is the complete set of engine data that is specific to the engine serial number.
If an engine control unit without DATASET is ordered, before changing the control unit, it is necessary to read all the engine
data (DATASET) from the old control unit and save them to a file, which is subsequently to be loaded onto the new control
unit. In this case no calibration is required.
If the control unit is faulty and it is not possible to read the complete DATASET, it will be necessary to order a control unit
with DATASET (provide the engine serial number indicated on the name plate of the control unit plate and the engine data
plate). In this case it will only be necessary carry out the procedures to set the engine operating hours and calibrate the
accelerator pedal and hand throttle.
NOTE
The accelerator pedal and handbrake calibration procedures can be carried out using either the SERDIA
program, or the ART connected to the HLHP control unit. Both procedures are described below.
4.2.1 READING AND SAVING DATA

1 - Connect a laptop computer with the SERDIA program
installed (for details see "2.2 CONNECTING THE
L AP TO P C OMP UT ER WI TH “ SE RDI A 2 000”
SOFTWARE TO THE ENGINE CONTROL UNIT").
2 - Turn the starter key to “I” (ON) and launch the SERDIA
program.
3 - From the “PARAMETER” menu, select the option
“OVERALL PROGRAMMING”.
20-23
4. PUTTING THE TRACTOR INTO SERVICE 4.2 RENEWING THE ENGINE CONTROL UNIT
4 - Click on “ECU -> file” and save the data to a floppy

disk or to the computer hard disk (c:\; d:\).
NOTE
Make sure that the file has in fact been saved.
The files are automatically saved with the following
names: 0044444.hex where the digits "44444"
correspond to the engine serial number.
4.2.2 PROGRAMMING THE CONTROL UNIT

LA P TO P CO MPU TE R WI TH “ S E RDI A 20 00”
program.
4 - Click on “PROGRAMMING” and select the file saved

previously, or procured from Technical Assistance.
5 - When the message "DATA ACCEPTED BY ECU"

appears, press Enter.
20-24
6 - At this point, carry out the procedure to set the engine

operating hours (for details, see "4.2.3 PROCEDURE
FOR SETTING ENGINE OPERATING HOURS"
starting from point 4).
4.2.3 PROCEDURE FOR SETTING ENGINE OPERATING HOURS

L AP TO P C OMP UT ER WI TH “ SE RDI A 2 000”
program.
4 - Edit parameter "3701: WORKINGHOURS", entering

in the third column the number of engine operating
hours.
5 - Click on the “SAVE IN ECU” button and when the
message “DATA ACCEPTED BY ECU” appears,
press Enter and exit the program.
20-25
4.2.4 CALIBRATION OF THE ACCELERATOR PEDAL

(USING THE SERDIA PROGRAM)
NOTE
This operation must be carried out with the engine off and
the parking brake applied.
installed (for details see «Connection of laptop
computer with "SERDIA" software to the engine
control unit»), turn the starter key to the “I” (ON)
position and start the SERDIA program.
“CALIBRATION”.
3 - Select the line containing parameter “1510:

AnalogIn1_RefLow", slightly depress the accelerator
pedal and release it, then click the "GET VALUE"
button to allow the software to acquire the value.
4 - Click “PC->ECU” then click “SAVE IN ECU” to save
the new parameter.

AnalogIn1_RefHigh" and fully depress the accelerator
pedal, and, while holding it depressed, click "GET
VALUE" to allow the software to acquire the value.
the new parameter.
20-26
4.2.5 CALIBRATION OF THE ACCELERATOR M A I N M E N U

PEDAL = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
(USING THE ART)
NOTE 1 - M o n i t o r s
This operation must be carried out with the engine 2 - C a l i b r a t i o n s
off and the parking brake applied. 3 - T e s t
1 - Connect the ART® to the connector in the RH 4 - A l a r m l i s t
compartment in the cab, select the HLHP control
unit from the “AVAILABLE TESTS” menu, then
proceed as described. (For details, see "2.1
CONNECTING ART® TO THE HLHP CONTROL
UNITS").
2 - From the "MAIN MENU" press “2 -
CALIBRATIONS”.
[ E ] E x i t
3 - Press “9 - ENGINE”. C A L I B R A T I O N M E N U
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
1 - T r a s m i s s i o n
2 - P T O
3 - A S M
4 - L i f t
5 - S u s p e n s i o n
6 - S y s t e m
7 - C A N
8 - D i s t r i b u t o r
9 - E n g i n e
[ E ] E x i t
4 - Press “1 - Accelerator pedal”. C A L I B R A T I O N S
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
1 - T h r o t t l e P e d a l
2 - H a n d G a s
[ E ] E x i t
20-27
5 - With the accelerator pedal released, press "C" to P E D A L C A L I B R

confirm the parameter.
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
6 - Fully depress the accelerator pedal and, when the
value has stabilised, press "C" to confirm the P r e s s
parameter and terminate the calibration procedure.
a c c e l e r a t o r
7 - Release the accelerator pedal and, when the value p e d a l t o m a x a n d
has stabilised, press “C” to confirm the parameter t h e n p r e s s [ C ]
and terminate the calibration procedure.
[ E ] E x i t
8 - If calibration was successful, the following message P E D A L C A L I B R
will be displayed:
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
C A L I B R A T I O N
O K P r e s s
a c c e l e r a t o r
9 - If calibration was not completed successfully, the
p e d a l t o m a x a n d
following message will be displayed:
t h e n p r e s s [ C ]
E R R O R
In this case check the accelerator pedal sensor for

possible faults or incorrect installation, then repeat
the procedure.
[ E ] E x i t
4.2.6 CALIBRATION OF THE HAND THROTTLE
(USING THE SERDIA PROGRAM)
NOTE
This operation must be carried out with the engine off and
the parking brake applied.
installed (for details see «Connection of laptop
computer with "SERDIA" software to the engine
control unit»), turn the starter key to the “I” (ON)
position and launch the SERDIA program.
“CALIBRATION”.
20-28

AnalogIn3_RefLow” and slightly depress the
accelerator pedal and release it, then click "GET
VALUE" to allow the software to acquire the value.
the new parameter.

AnalogIn3_RefHigh" and fully depress the
accelerator, and, while holding it depressed, click on
"GET VALUE" to allow the software to acquire the
value.
the new parameter.
4.2.7 CALIBRATION OF THE HAND THROTTLE M A I N M E N U

(USING THE ART) = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
NOTE
This operation must be carried out with the engine 1 - M o n i t o r s
off and the parking brake applied. 2 - C a l i b r a t i o n s
1 - Connect the ART® to the connector in the RH 3 - T e s t
compartment in the cab, select the HLHP control 4 - A l a r m l i s t
UNITS").
2 - From the "MAIN MENU" press “2 - CALIBRA-
TIONS”.
[ E ] E x i t
20-29
3 - Press “9 - ENGINE”. C A L I B R A T I O N M E N U
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
2 - P T O
3 - A S M
4 - L i f t
6 - S y s t e m
7 - C A N
9 - E n g i n e
[ E ] E x i t
4 - Press “2 - Hand Gas”. C A L I B R A T I O N S
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
1 - T h r o t t l e P e d a l
2 - H a n d G a s
[ E ] E x i t
5 - Move the throttle lever back towards the rear of the H A N D G A S C A L I B R
tractor and press "C" to confirm the parameter.
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
P u s h h a n d g a s
t o m a x a n d
t h e n
p r e s s [ C ]
[ E ] E x i t
20-30
6 - Move the throttle lever towards the front of the H A N D G A S C A L I B R

tractor and press "C" to confirm the parameter and
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
terminate the calibration procedure.
7 - If calibration was successful, the following message P u l l h a n d g a s
will be displayed:
t o m i n a n d
C A L I B R A T I O N t h e n
O K p r e s s [ C ]
8 - If calibration was not completed successfully, the

following message will be displayed:
E R R O R
In this case check the hand throttle sensor for

possible faults or incorrect installation and then
repeat the procedure. [ E ] E x i t
20-31
4. PUTTING THE TRACTOR INTO SERVICE 4.3 RENEWING THE TRANSMISSION CONTROL UNIT
4.3 RENEWING THE TRANSMISSION CONTROL UNIT

NOTE
All the control unit configuration and calibration procedures can be carried out using either the WINEDS
program, or the ART connected to the HLHP control unit.
The procedures with the ART are described below.
Whenever the transmission control unit is renewed, the technician must carry out the following operations:
1 - Model configuration
2 - Basis wheel configuration
3 - Wheel circumference configuration
4 - Maximum travel speed configuration (German market only)
5 - Clutch pedal calibration
6 - Main clutch calibration
7 - FIELD/ROAD sensor calibration
8 - Deletion
The configuration and calibration operations are necessary to program the electronic control unit with the parameters to be
used to operate the transmission correctly.
4.3.1 MODEL CONFIGURATION M A I N M E N U

NOTE = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
This operation must be carried out with the engine
off and the parking brake applied. 1 - M o n i t o r s
®
1 - Connect the ART to the connector in the RH 2 - C a l i b r a t i o n s
compartment in the cab, select the HLHP control 3 - T e s t
unit from the “AVAILABLE TESTS” menu, then 4 - A l a r m l i s t
UNITS").
TIONS”.
[ E ] E x i t
3 - Press “1 - Transmission”. C A L I B R A T I O N M E N U
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
2 - P T O
3 - A S M
4 - L i f t
6 - S y s t e m
7 - C A N
9 - E n g i n e
[ E ] E x i t
20-32
4 - Press “1 - Configuration”. T R A N S M I S S I O N
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
1 - C o n f i g u r a t i o n
2 - C a l i b r a t i o n
[ E ] E x i t
5 - Press “1 - Model Config.”. C O N F I G U R A T I O N
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
1 - T r a c t o r M o d e l
2 - W h e e l b a s e
3 - W h e e l c i r c u m f .
4 - S p e e d
[ E ] E x i t
6 - Press the button corresponding to the transmission T R A C T O R M O D E L
installed, choosing from the options available, and
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
press "E" to save the data.
Style Transmission Key
AGROTRON K90 T7115L 2 1 - K S t a n d a r d
AGROTRON K100 T7117L 3

AGROTRON K110 T7119L 4
AGROTRON K120 T7120 5
NOTE
If you select the wrong option by mistake or are not
sure of your selection, cancel the procedure by
pressing "A".
[ E ] E x i t
20-33
7 - The following messages will be displayed in

sequence:
W a i t f o r
c o m m u n i c a t i o n
C a l i b r a t i o n
i n p r o g r e s s . .
8- If the configuration procedure was completed

successfully, the following message will be
displayed:
C o n f i g u r a t i o n
s u c c e s s f u l
9 - If the configuration was not completed successfully,

one of the following messages will appear:
• Communication error between the HLHP control unit
and the transmission control unit caused by
➔ C o m m u n i c a t i o n
e r r o r
interference or problems on the CANBUS.
• Operator procedure error.
➔ A b n o r m a l
p r o c e d u r e
s t o p
• Information interpretation error.

➔ E r r o r d u r i n g
c o n f i g u r a t i o n
• The configuration was not carried out because the
engine was running.
➔ C o n f i
p o s s i
g u r a t
b l e o
i o n
n l y
i f e n g i n e
s t o p p e d
10 -Press "E" to go back to the "CONFIGURATION"

menu and then proceed with the configuration of the
basic wheel (for details, see "10 - Press "E" to go back to
the "CONFIGURATION" menu and then proceed with the
configuration of the basic wheel (for details, see starting
from point 5)." starting from point 5).
20-34
4.3.2 CONFIGURATION OF THE BASIC WHEEL M A I N M E N U

NOTE = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
1 - Connect the ART® to the connector in the RH 2 - C a l i b r a t i o n s
UNITS").
TIONS”.
[ E ] E x i t
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
2 - P T O
3 - A S M
4 - L i f t
6 - S y s t e m
7 - C A N
9 - E n g i n e
[ E ] E x i t
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
[ E ] E x i t
20-35
5 - Press “2 - Basic Wheel”. C O N F I G U R A T I O N

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
4 - S p e e d
[ E ] E x i t
6 - Press the key corresponding to the tyre fitted on the K W H E E L B A S E
tractor, choosing from the options available, and
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
press "C" to save the setting and return to the
"CONFIGURATION" menu.
Tyre
Type of tyre fitted type Key
1 - 1 6 . 9 R 3 4
16.9 R34 2 - 1 8 . 4 R 3 4
480/70 R34 16.9 R34 1
540/65 R34 3 - 1 6 . 9 R 3 8
4 - 1 8 . 4 R 3 8
18.4 R34
520/70 R34 18.4 R34 2
600/65 R34
16.9 R38
480/70 R38 16.9 R38 3
540/65 R38
[ A ] A b o r t
18.4 R38
520/70 R38 18.4 R38 4 [ C ] S t o r e
600/65 R38
NOTES
• Option "4" is only displayed for 110 and 120 HP
tractors.
• If you select the wrong option by mistake, you can
cancel it by pressing "A".
7 - Carry out the procedure for configuration of the
wheel circumference (for details, see "4.3.3
CONFIGURATION OF THE WHEEL
CIRCUMFERENCE (USING THE ART)" starting
from point 5).
20-36
4.3.3 CONFIGURATION OF THE WHEEL M A I N M E N U

CIRCUMFERENCE (USING THE ART) = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
NOTE
This operation must be carried out with the engine 1 - M o n i t o r s
off and the parking brake applied. 2 - C a l i b r a t i o n s
UNITS").
TIONS”.
[ E ] E x i t
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
2 - P T O
3 - A S M
4 - L i f t
6 - S y s t e m
7 - C A N
9 - E n g i n e
[ E ] E x i t
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
[ E ] E x i t
20-37
5 - Press “3 - Wheel Circ.”. C O N F I G U R A T I O N

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
4 - S p e e d
[ E ] E x i t
6 - Enter the value corresponding to the type of tyre W h e e l c i r c u m f .
fitted to the tractor as indicated in the table below:
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
Type of tyre fitted Value (mm)
16.9 R34 4717
16.9 R38 5024
18.4 R34 4923 A c t u a l : 5 0 5 0
18.4 R38 5238
480/70 R34 4745 N e w : 5 0 5 0
480/70 R38 5057
520/70 R34 4927
520/70 R38 5258
540/65 R34 4701
540/65 R38 5016
600/65 R34 4925
[ D ] E r a s e
600/65 R38 5507
[ E ] E x i t
NOTE
The values given in the table are purely theoretical.
The actual value must be checked each time in
accordance with the make and type of tyre fitted to
the tractor. If it is not possible to obtain the correct
wheel circumference value for a particular type of
tyre, carry out the wheel circumference calibration
procedure (for details, see "4.3.4 CALIBRATION OF
THE WHEEL CIRCUMFERENCE (WITHOUT USING
THE ART)").
NOTE
If you enter an incorrect value, you can cancel it one
digit at a time by pressing "D".
20-38
7 - The screen page is displayed and if the operation W h e e l c i r c u m f .

was not performed correctly, the technician can
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
cancel it by pressing "A" to restore the previous
value, otherwise pressing "C" confirms the new
calibration value and returns you to the
"CONFIGURATION" menu".
GERMAN MARKET ONLY A c t u a l : 5 0 5 0
8 - Calibrate the maximum travel speed (for details, see
"4.3.5 CONFIGURATION OF THE MAXIMUM N e w : 5 0 5 0
TRAVEL SPEED (GERMAN MARKET ONLY)"
FOR ALL OTHER MARKETS
9 - Press "E" to return to the "TRANSMISSION" menu
and carry out the clutch pedal calibration operation
(for details, see "4.3.6 CALIBRATION OF THE
CLUTCH PEDAL" starting from point 4). [ A ] A b o r t
[ C ] S t o r e
4.3.4 CALIBRATION OF THE WHEEL CIRCUMFERENCE (WITHOUT USING THE ART)

NOTE
This procedure can be performed every time that the tyres are changed or when the correct wheel
circumference value is not known.
IMPORTANT
To calibrate the wheel circumference the tractor must be parked on a flat asphalted surface with
markers indicating the start and the end of the path placed 100 metres apart. The tractor must be driven
over the distance at a speed greater than 2 km/h.
1 - Park the tractor near the marker indicating the start of the course, switch off the engine and turn the starter key to "O"
(OFF).
2 - With the starter key in position "O" (OFF), turn on the hazard warning lights and move the headlights control lever to
the full beam position and hold it there, then, within 4 seconds, turn the starter key to "I" (ON) and start the engine.
3 - If the procedure has been performed correctly the lnfocenter will display the message "WHEEL CALIBRATION"; at
this point, release the headlights control lever and start travelling with the tractor.
4 - When the tractor reaches the marker at the start of the course, move the headlights control lever to the full beam
position and then release it immediately. The Infocenter will display the message "Calibration in progress" with the
cursor "o" continuously moving from left to right and vice versa.
5 - On reaching the end of course marker, move the headlights control lever to the full beam position and then release it
immediately. If the procedure has been performed correctly the lnfocenter will display the message " Wheel
successfully calibrated".
NOTE
The calibration will be automatically cancelled and the Infocenter will display the message "Calibration error
value out of range" if:
a- measurement is not started within 60 seconds of the appearance of the message "WHEEL CALIBRATION";
b- measurement is not terminated within 180 seconds of starting (the tractor moves too slowly or the headlight control
lever is not operated);
c- the engine is stopped;
d- the tractor is stopped (or the travel speed falls below 2 km/h).
20-39
4.3.5 CONFIGURATION OF THE MAXIMUM TRAVEL SPEED (GERMAN MARKET ONLY)

WARNING
The maximum travel speed of the tractor varies according to the market in which it is to be used.
It is therefore the RESPONSIBILITY OF THE AUTHORISED SERVICE CENTRE to configure the parameter
correctly in accordance with the legal requirements applicable in the country of use:
- for all markets (except Germany) the maximum homologated speed 40 km/h.
- for the German market only the maximum homologated speed is 50 km/h
NOTE M A I N M E N U
This operation must be carried out with the engine = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
off and the parking brake applied.
1 - Connect the ART® to the connector in the RH 1 - M o n i t o r s
compartment in the cab, select the HLHP control 2 - C a l i b r a t i o n s
3 - T e s t
CONNECTING ART® TO THE HLHP CONTROL 4 - A l a r m l i s t
UNITS").
CALIBRATIONS”.
[ E ] E x i t
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
2 - P T O
3 - A S M
4 - L i f t
6 - S y s t e m
7 - C A N
9 - E n g i n e
[ E ] E x i t
20-40
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
[ E ] E x i t
5 - Press “4 - Speed”. C O N F I G U R A T I O N
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
4 - S p e e d
[ E ] E x i t
6 - Enter the value corresponding to the maximum V E L O C I T Y
homologated travel speed of the tractor. and then
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
press "C" to return to the "CONFIGURATION"
menu.
NOTE
0 - 2 0 k m / h
If you select the wrong option by mistake, press "A" to
cancel. 1 - 3 0 k m / h
2 - 4 0 k m / h
7 - Press "E" to return to the "TRANSMISSION" menu 3 - 5 0 k m / h
and carry out the clutch pedal calibration operation
(for details, see "4.3.6 CALIBRATION OF THE
CLUTCH PEDAL" starting from point 4).
[ A ] A b o r t
[ C ] S t o r e
20-41
4.3.6 CALIBRATION OF THE CLUTCH PEDAL M A I N M E N U

NOTE = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
1 - Connect the ART® to the connector in the RH 2 - C a l i b r a t i o n s
UNITS").
TIONS”.
[ E ] E x i t
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
2 - P T O
3 - A S M
4 - L i f t
6 - S y s t e m
7 - C A N
9 - E n g i n e
[ E ] E x i t
4 - Press “2 - Calibrations”. T R A N S M I S S I O N
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
[ E ] E x i t
20-42
5 - Press “1-Clutch Pedal”. C A L I B R A T I O N

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
1 - C l u t c h P e d a l
2 - M a i n C l u t c h
3 - F R R S
[ E ] E x i t
6 - Press "C" then slowly depress and release the
clutch pedal.
P r e s s t h e
7 - If calibration was successful, the following message c l u t c h p e d a l
will be displayed: s l o w l y t o e n d
C a l i b r a t i o n o f t r a v e l ,
s u c c e s s f u l t h e n r e l e a s e
t h e p e d a l
s l o w l y a n d
b r i n g i t
b a c k t o t h e
s t a r t i n g
p o s i t i o n
[ C ] S t a r t c a l i b .
[ E ] E x i t
8 - If the calibration procedure was not completed
successfully, one of the following messages will be
displayed:
C o m m u n i c a t i o n
• Information interpretation error.
➔ e r r o r
A b n o r m a l
➔ P r o c e d u r e
s t o p
T C U c a l i b r a t i o n
• Calibration value outside minimum or maximum
parameters.
➔ e r r o r
C o n f i g u r a t i o n
p o s s i b l e o n l y
• The configuration was not carried out because the
engine was running.
➔ i f e n g i n e
s t o p p e d
9 - Press "E" to return to the "CALIBRATIONS" menu
and carry out the main clutch calibration operation
(for details, see "4.3.7 CALIBRATION OF THE MAIN
CLUTCH" starting from point 5).
20-43
4.3.7 CALIBRATION OF THE MAIN CLUTCH M A I N M E N U

NOTE = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
To carry out the calibration of the main clutch, bring the
transmission oil temperature to about 40 °C and position 1 - M o n i t o r s
the tractor on a flat asphalt surface with at least 10 metres
2 - C a l i b r a t i o n s
of free space ahead.
Put the transmission into neutral by moving the shuttle 3 - T e s t
lever to the "NEUTRAL" position, engage third gear, 4 - A l a r m l i s t
check that the gearbox is in ROAD mode and that the
parking brake is released.
1 - Connect the ART® to the connector in the RH
compartment in the cab, select the HLHP control unit
from the “AVAILABLE TESTS” menu, then proceed as
described. (For details, see "2.1 CONNECTING ART®
TO THE HLHP CONTROL UNITS").
TIONS”. [ E ] E x i t
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
2 - P T O
3 - A S M
4 - L i f t
6 - S y s t e m
7 - C A N
9 - E n g i n e
[ E ] E x i t
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
[ E ] E x i t
20-44
5 - Press “2-Main Clutch”. C A L I B R A T I O N

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
3 - F R R S
[ E ] E x i t
6 - Press "C" and move the shuttle lever to
"FORWARD".
P r e s s t h e
7 - The tractor will move forward in jerks until the screen c l u t c h p e d a l
indicating the termination of the procedure appears. s l o w l y t o e n d
C a l i b r a t i o n o f t r a v e l ,
s u c c e s s f u l t h e n r e l e a s e
t h e p e d a l
s l o w l y a n d
b r i n g i t
b a c k t o t h e
s t a r t i n g
p o s i t i o n
[ C ] S t a r t c a l i b .
[ E ] E x i t
displayed: C o m m u n i c a t i o n
➔
• Error in the interpretation of the information by the e r r o r
transmission control unit (transmission error on A b n o r m a l
CANBUS).
P r o c e d u r e
➔ s t o p
• Calibration not performed because basic parameters
e r r o r
were not observed (engine speed, handbrake
released, and direction of the shuttle lever.
9 - Press "E" to return to "CALIBRATIONS" menu and ➔
perform the calibration of the field/road sensor (for
details, see "4.3.8 CALIBRATION OF THE FIELD/
ROAD SENSOR" starting from point 5).
20-45
4.3.8 CALIBRATION OF THE FIELD/ROAD M A I N M E N U

SENSOR = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
NOTE
To calibrate the FIELD/ROAD sensor, the engine must be 1 - M o n i t o r s
running at idle speed and the gear lever must be in neutral. 2 - C a l i b r a t i o n s
UNITS").
TIONS”.
[ E ] E x i t
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
2 - P T O
3 - A S M
4 - L i f t
6 - S y s t e m
7 - C A N
9 - E n g i n e
[ E ] E x i t
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
[ E ] E x i t
20-46
5 - Press “3-FRRS”. C A L I B R A T I O N
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
3 - F R R S
[ E ] E x i t
6 - This message will appear to indicate that the
automatic calibration procedure has been started.
7 - If calibration was successful, the following message
will be displayed W a i t f o r
C a l i b r a t i o n c o m m u n i c a t i o n
s u c c e s s f u l

displayed:
C o m m u n i c a t i o n
• Error in the interpretation of the information by the
transmission control unit (transmission error on
CANBUS).
➔ e r r o r
A b n o r m a l
p r o c e d u r e
➔ s t o p
• The calibration was not performed because the
engine was not running.
➔ e r r o r
9 - Press "E" to return to "CALIBRATIONS" menu and

perform the calibration of the field/road sensor (for
details, see "4.3.9 CLEARING ALL ALARMS").
20-47
4.3.9 CLEARING ALL ALARMS M A I N M E N U

1 - Connect the ART® to the connector in the RH = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
unit from the “AVAILABLE TESTS” menu, then 1 - M o n i t o r s
proceed as described. (For details, see "2.1 2 - C a l i b r a t i o n s
UNITS"). 3 - T e s t
4 - A l a r m l i s t
2 - From the "MAIN MENU" press “4 - ALARMS”.
[ E ] E x i t
3 - Press “9 - Deletion”. A L A R M M E
N U
= = = = = = = = = =
= = = = = =
1 - H L H P a c t
i v e
2 - H L H P p a s
s i v e
3 - E n g i n e a
c t i v e
4 - E n g i n e p
a s s i v e
5 - T r a n s m . a c t i v e
6 - T r a n s m . p a s s i v e
9 - E r a s e a l a r m
[ E ] E x i t
4 - Press “3”. E R A S E A L A R M
5 - The following message will be displayed: = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
1 - H L H P a l a r m
A l a r m a r e b e e n
2 - E n g i n e a l a r m
e r a s e d
3 - T r a n s . a l a r m
6 - Press "E" three times to return to the 4 - A r m r e s t a l a r m
"CALIBRATIONS" menu and turn the starter key to
"O" (OFF).
[ E ] E x i t
20-48
4. PUTTING THE TRACTOR INTO SERVICE4.4 RENEWING THE HLHP CONTROL UNIT (VALID UP TO SOFTWARE SC.0038.AC)
4.4 RENEWING THE HLHP CONTROL UNIT

(VALID UP TO SOFTWARE SC.0038.AC)
Each time the HLHP control unit is renewed, the operator must carry out the following operations:
1 - Initialization of the HLHP control unit
2 - Configure the system for presence of front PTO (only if installed)
3 - Enable the ASM system (only if installed)
4 - Calibrate the steering angle sensor (only with ASM)
5 - Configure the system for presence of radar (only if installed)
6 - Calibrate the low and high positions of the lift
7 - Configure the system for the presence of front axle suspension (if installed)
8 - Set the Infocenter display language
9 - Setting the Infocenter display language
CAUTION
On completion of the operations, power must be switched off and then back on from the ignition key to save the
parameter settings.
The purpose of sensor calibration is to inform the control unit of the correct limit values for the up and down movements of
the lift and of the value read by the steering angle sensor when the wheels are in the straight-ahead position.
To perform the calibration, connect the ART to the connector located in the fusebox in the cab, select the HLHP control unit
from the "AVAILABLE TESTS" menu and proceed as described below.
NOTE
Unless otherwise specified, these operations must be carried out with the engine stopped, the parking brake on and the
shuttle lever in neutral.
4.4.1 INITIALIZATION OF THE HLHP CONTROL H L H P

UNIT = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
1 - From the control unit opening menu press “0” twice.
K S T A N D A R D
S C . 0 0 3 7 . A A
g g - m m - a a a a
T R A N S M . : N o C o n f
S P E E D : 2 0 k m / h
T Y R E : 1 8 . 4 R 3 8
S U S P . : N o
A S M : N o
P T O f o r w : N o
R A D A R : N o
[ E ] E X I T
20-49
4. PUTTING THE TRACTOR INTO SERVICE 4.4 RENEWING THE HLHP CONTROL UNIT (VALID UP TO SOFTWARE SC.0038.AC)
2 - At the password prompt, press in sequence “C”,

“1”, “B”, “0”, “9”, “0”.
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
P A S S W O R D :
X X X X X X
[ E ] E x i t
3 - Press "E" once to return to the main menu. M A I N M E N U
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
1 - M o n i t o r s
3 - T e s t
[ E ] E x i t
4 - Press “0” and wait for the screen indicating that I n i t E E P R O M
control unit initialisation has been completed
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
correctly.
5 - Press “E” turn the starter key to “O” (OFF) and then
back to “I” (ON) and proceed with the calibration of
the sensors and configuration of the options.
E E P R O M h a s
b e e n i n i t i a l i z e d
w i t h d e f a u l t
p a r a m e t e r s
[ E ] E x i t
20-50
4.4.2 CONFIGURING THE SYSTEM FOR THE M A I N M E N U

PRESENCE OF THE = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
FRONT PTO (ONLY IF INSTALLED)
3 - T e s t
UNITS").
TIONS”.
[ E ] E x i t
3 - Press “2 - PTO”. C A L I B R A T I O N M E N U
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
2 - P T O
3 - A S M
4 - L i f t
6 - S y s t e m
7 - C A N
9 - E n g i n e
[ E ] E x i t
4 - Press “1-Front PTO ”. P T O
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
1 - F r o n t P T O
2 - N r . T e e t h
3 - A u t o L i m i t
[ E ] E x i t
20-51
5 - Press "1" to enable operation of the front PTO and F R O N T P T O

press "C" to save the setting.
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
NOTE
• The option "2 - AUTO PRESENT" must never be
used. 0 - N O T P R E S E N T
• If you select the wrong option by mistake, press "A" to
1 - P R E S E N T
cancel.
2 - P R E S E N T A U T O
and carry out the procedure to enable the ASM
system (for details, see "4.4.3 ENABLING THE ASM
SYSTEM (ONLY IF INSTALLED)" starting from point
3) or to configure the system for the presence of the
radar (for details, see "4.4.5 CONFIGURING THE
SYSTEM FOR THE PRESENCE OF RADAR (ONLY
IF INSTALLED)" starting from point 3) or to calibrate
the high and low positions of the lift (for details, see
[ A ] A b o r t
"4.4.6 CALIBRATION OF THE HIGH AND LOW
POSITIONS OF THE LIFT" starting from point 4). [ C ] S t o r e
4.4.3 ENABLING THE ASM SYSTEM M A I N M E N U

(ONLY IF INSTALLED) = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
compartment in the cab, select the HLHP control 1 - M o n i t o r s
unit from the “AVAILABLE TESTS” menu, then 2 - C a l i b r a t i o n s
3 - T e s t
UNITS"). 4 - A l a r m l i s t

TIONS”.
[ E ] E x i t
20-52
3 - Press “3 - ASM”. C A L I B R A T I O N M E N U
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
2 - P T O
3 - A S M
4 - L i f t
6 - S y s t e m
7 - C A N
9 - E n g i n e
[ E ] E x i t
4 - Press “1-Enabling.”. A S M
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
1 - E n a b l e
2 - D T / S t e e r
3 - D i f / S t e e r
4 - D T / S p e e d
5 - D i f / S p e e d
6 - N e w a x l e
7 - S t e e r C a l .
[ E ] E x i t
5 - Press "1" to enable the system then press "C" to A S M
save the setting and return to the "ASM" menu.
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
NOTE
0 - N O T P R E S E N T
If you select the wrong option by mistake, press "A" to 1 - P R E S E N T
cancel.
6 - Carry out the procedure to enable the ASM (for

d etail s, see "4. 4. 4 CALIBRATION OF THE
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR (WITH ASM ONLY)"
[ A ] A b o r t
[ C ] S t o r e
20-53
4.4.4 CALIBRATION OF THE STEERING ANGLE M A I N M E N U

SENSOR (WITH ASM ONLY) = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
NOTE
To carry out this calibration, start the engine and keep it 1 - M o n i t o r s
running at idle speed. 2 - C a l i b r a t i o n s
3 - T e s t
1 - Connect the ART® to the connector in the RH 4 - A l a r m l i s t
UNITS").
TIONS”.
[ E ] E x i t
3 - Press “3 - ASM”. C A L I B R A T I O N M E N U
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
2 - P T O
3 - A S M
4 - L i f t
6 - S y s t e m
7 - C A N
9 - E n g i n e
[ E ] E x i t
4 - Press “7-Steering Cal.”. A S M
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
1 - E n a b l e
2 - D T / S t e e r
3 - D i f / S t e e r
4 - D T / S p e e d
5 - D i f / S p e e d
6 - N e w a x l e
7 - S t e e r C a l .
[ E ] E x i t
20-54
5 - Turn the steering so that the front wheels are aligned S t e e r C a l

in the straight-ahead position, then press "E" to
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
save the value.
NOTE
To facilitate wheel alignment, this calibration can be
performed with the tractor in motion. A c t u a l : 5 0 5 0
N e w : 5 0 5 0
[ C ] S t o r e
6 - The following screen will appear, and if the S t e e r C a l
parameter was not set correctly you can press "A"
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
to cancel the operation, restore the previous value
and return to the "ASM" menu.
7 – Press "C" to confirm the value and return to the "
ASM " menu then press "E" to return to the
"Calibrations" menu and configure the system for A c t u a l : 5 0 5 0
the presence of radar (for details, see "4.4.5
CONFIGURING THE SYSTEM FOR THE N e w : 5 0 5 0
PRESENCE OF RADAR (ONLY IF INSTALLED)"
starting from point 3) or to calibrate the high and low
positions of the lift (for details, see "4.4.6
CALIBRATION OF THE HIGH AND LOW
POSITIONS OF THE LIFT" starting from point 3).
[ A ] A b o r t
[ C ] S t o r e
4.4.5 CONFIGURING THE SYSTEM FOR THE M A I N M E N U
PRESENCE OF RADAR (ONLY IF = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
INSTALLED)
3 - T e s t
UNITS").
TIONS”.
[ E ] E x i t
20-55
3 - Press “4 - Lift”. C A L I B R A T I O N M E N U
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
2 - P T O
3 - A S M
4 - L i f t
6 - S y s t e m
7 - C A N
9 - E n g i n e
[ E ] E x i t
4 - Press “1-Options”. P a r a m e t e r s M e n u ‘
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
1 - O p t i o n s
[ E ] E x i t
5 - Press “8”. O P T I O N S
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
1 - A u t o D r o p
2 - S e n s i t i v .
3 - E x t S e n s o r
4 - M I X m o d e
8 - R a d a r E n a b l e
9 - R a d a r K
[ E ] E x i t
20-56
6 - Press "1" to enable the radar and press "C" to save R A D A R

the setting.
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
7 - If the parameter was not set correctly, press A" to
cancel the operation, restore the previous value and 0 - N O T P R E S E N T
return to the "PARAMETERS" menu.
1 - P R E S E N T
8 - Press "C" to return to the "PARAMETERS" menu,
press "E" once and carry out the procedure for
calibration of the high and low positions of the lift (for
details, see "4.4.6 CALIBRATION OF THE HIGH
AND LOW POSITIONS OF THE LIFT" starting from
point 3).
[ A ] A b o r t
[ C ] S t o r e
4.4.6 CALIBRATION OF THE HIGH AND M A I N M E N U
LOW POSITIONS OF THE LIFT = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
NOTE
running at idle speed. 2 - C a l i b r a t i o n s
UNITS").
TIONS”.
[ E ] E x i t
3 - Press “4 - Lift”. C A L I B R A T I O N M E N U
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
2 - P T O
3 - A S M
4 - L i f t
6 - S y s t e m
7 - C A N
9 - E n g i n e
[ E ] E x i t
20-57
4 - Press “2-Calibrations”. P a r a m e t e r s M e n u ‘
5 - Unlock the lift by holding pressed the Lock key and = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
holding it down. When the frequency at which the
red LED is flashing changes, the lift is unlocked. 1 - O p t i o n s
[ E ] E x i t
6 - Press “1”. C A L I B R A T I O N
®
7 - Press “2” and the ART will display the following = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
screen:
A c t u a l : 5 0 5 0
N e w : 5 0 5 0
[ A ] A b o r t
[ C ] S t o r e
8 - Press the lift 'Down' button to lower the lift to its full C A L I B R A T I O N
depth (while the lift is being lowered, the "new" value
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
should continuously increase).
9 - When the lift has arrived at its mechanical travel
limit, press “E” to save the value.
10 - If the operation was not carried out correctly, the A c t u a l : 5 0 5 0
technician can cancel it by pressing “A” and restore
the previous value, whereas pressing “C”, will
N e w : 5 0 5 0
confirm the new setting and cause the
"CALIBRATIONS” menu to reappear.
[ D ] A b o r t
[ C ] S t o r e
20-58
11 - Press “2”. C a l i b r a z i o n i
12 - Press the lift 'Up' button to raise the lift to its full = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
height (while the lift is being raised the "new" value
should continuously decrease).
13 - When the lift has reached its upper travel limit, press
the 'Down' button until the voltage reading is A t t u a l e : 5 0 5 0
approximately 0.35V less than the value recorded at
the travel limit, then press “E” to save the value to
N u o v o : 5 0 5 0
the memory.
14 - If the operation was not carried out correctly, the
technician can cancel it by pressing “D” and restore
[ D ] A n n u l l a
[ C ] C o n f e r m a
15 - Press “E” twice to return to the "CALIBRATIONS"
menu to configure the system for the presence of
front axle suspension (for details, see "4.4.7
CONFIGURING THE SYSTEM FOR THE
PRESENCE OF FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION (ONLY
IF INSTALLED)" starting from point 3) or to set the
language on the INFOCENTER display (for details,
see "4.4.8 SETTING THE INFOCENTER DISPLAY
LANGUAGE" starting from point 3).
4.4.7 CONFIGURING THE SYSTEM M A I N M E N U

FOR THE PRESENCE OF = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
F RO N T A X L E S U S P E N S IO N (O N L Y I F
INSTALLED)
1 - M o n i t o r s
1 - Connect the ART® to the connector in the right 2 - C a l i b r a t i o n s
UNITS").
TIONS”.
[ E ] E x i t
20-59
3 - Press “5 - Suspensions”. C A L I B R A T I O N M E N U
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
2 - P T O
3 - A S M
4 - L i f t
6 - S y s t e m
7 - C A N
9 - E n g i n e
[ E ] E x i t
4 - Press “1”. S U S P E N S I O N
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
1 - E n a b l e
2 - V e l o c i t y
3 - T y p e
[ E ] E x i t
5 - Press "1" to enable the radar and press "C" to save S U S P E N S I O N
the value.
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
6 - If the parameter was not set correctly, you can press
"A" to cancel the operation, restore the previous 0 - N O T P R E S E N T
value and return to the "SUSPENSIONS" page.
1 - P R E S E N T
7 - Carry out the procedure to set the Infocenter display
language (for details, see ""4.4.8 SETTING THE
INFOCENTER DISPLAY LANGUAGE" starting from
point 3).
[ A ] A b o r t
[ C ] S t o r e
20-60
4.4.8 SETTING THE INFOCENTER M A I N M E N U

DISPLAY LANGUAGE = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
3 - T e s t

TIONS”.
[ E ] E x i t
3 - Press “6 - System”. C A L I B R A T I O N M E N U
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
2 - P T O
3 - A S M
4 - L i f t
6 - S y s t e m
7 - C A N
9 - E n g i n e
[ E ] E x i t
4 - Press “1”. S Y S T E M
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
1 - L a n g u a g e
[ E ] E x i t
20-61
5 - Press the key corresponding to the desired L A N G U A G E

language choosing from the options displayed, and
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
press "C" to save the value and return to the
"SYSTEM" menu.
0 - I t a l i a n o
6 - If the operation was not carried out correctly, press
1 - E n g l i s h
"A" to cancel, restore the previous value and return
to the "SYSTEM" menu. 2 - F r a n c a i s
3 - D e u t s c h
4 - E s p a n o l
5 - P o r t u g u e s e
[ A ] A b o r t
[ C ] S t o r e
4.4.9 CLEARING ALL ALARMS M A I N M E N U
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
3 - T e s t
2 - From the "MAIN MENU" press "4 - ALARMS".
[ E ] E x i t
3 - Press “9 - Deletion”. A L A R M M E
N U
= = = = = = = = = =
= = = = = =
1 - H L H P a c t
i v e
2 - H L H P p a s
s i v e
3 - E n g i n e a
c t i v e
4 - E n g i n e p
a s s i v e
5 - T r a n s m . a c t i v e
6 - T r a n s m . p a s s i v e
9 - E r a s e a l a r m
[ E ] E x i t
20-62
4 - Press “3”. E R A S E A L A R M
1 - H L H P a l a r m
A l a r m a r e b e e n
2 - E n g i n e a l a r m
e r a s e d
3 - T r a n s . a l a r m
6 - Press "E" three times to return to the "CALIBRA- 4 - A r m r e s t a l a r m
TIONS" menu and turn the starter key to "O" (OFF).
[ E ] E x i t
20-63
4. PUTTING THE TRACTOR INTO SERVICE 4.5 RENEWING THE HLHP CONTROL UNIT (VALID UP TO SOFTWARE SC.0038.AD)
4.5 RENEWING THE HLHP CONTROL UNIT (VALID UP TO SOFTWARE

SC.0038.AD)
Each time the HLHP control unit is renewed, the operator must carry out the following operations:
1 - Initialization of the HLHP control unit
2 - Configuration of the tractor model
3 - System configuration for presence of front PTO (only if installed)
4 - Enable the ASM system (only if installed)
5 - Calibrate the steering angle sensor (only with ASM)
6 - Configure the system for presence of radar (only if installed)
7 - Calibrate low and high positions of the lift
8 - Configure the system for the presence of front axle suspension (if installed)
9 - Set the Infocenter display language
10 - Configure the association between control valve levers and auxiliary services (for versions with 4 control valves only)
11 - Setting the Infocenter display language
CAUTION
On completion of the operations, power must be switched off and then back on from the ignition key to save the
parameter settings.
The purpose of sensor calibration is to inform the control unit of the correct limit values for the up and down movements of
the lift and of the value read by the steering angle sensor when the wheels are in the straight-ahead position.
To perform the calibration, connect the ART to the connector located in the fusebox in the cab, select the HLHP control unit
from the "AVAILABLE TESTS" menu and proceed as described below.
NOTE
Unless otherwise specified, these operations must be carried out with the engine stopped, the parking brake on and the
shuttle lever in neutral.
4.5.1 INITIALIZATION OF THE HLHP CONTROL H L H P

UNIT = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
1 - From the control unit opening menu press “0” twice.
A G R O T R O N K
S C . 0 0 3 8 . A A
g g - m m - a a a a
T R A S M . : N o C o n f
V E L O C . : 2 0 k m / h
P N E U M . : 1 8 . 4 R 3 8
S O S P . : N o
A S M : N o
P T O a n t : N o
R A D A R : N o
[ E ] U s c i t a
20-64
4. PUTTING THE TRACTOR INTO SERVICE4.5 RENEWING THE HLHP CONTROL UNIT (VALID UP TO SOFTWARE SC.0038.AD)
2 - At the password prompt, press in sequence “C”,

“1”, “B”, “0”, “9”, “0”.
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
P A S S W O R D :
X X X X X X
[ E ] U s c i t a
3 - Press "E" once to return to the main menu. M E N U P R I N C I P A L E
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
1 - M o n i t o r s
2 - C a l i b r a z i o n i
3 - T e s t
4 - A l l a r m i
[ E ] U s c i t a
4 - Press “0” and wait for the screen indicating that I n i z i a l i z . E E P R O M
control unit initialisation has been completed
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
correctly.
5 - Press “E”, turn the starter key to “O” (OFF) and then
back to “I” (ON) and proceed with the calibration of
the tractor model (for details, see"4.5.2
CONFIGURATION OF THE TRACTOR MODEL".
S o n o s t a t e
r e i m p o s t a t e l e
t a r a t u r e d i
f a b b r i c a
[ E ] U s c i t a
20-65
4.5.2 CONFIGURATION OF THE TRACTOR M E N U P R I N C I P A L E

MODEL = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
unit from the “AVAILABLE TESTS” menu, then 2 - C a l i b r a z i o n i
proceed as described. (For details, see
3 - T e s t
«Connecting ART® to the HLHP control unit»).
4 - A l l a r m i
5 - C o n f i g u r a z i o n e
[ E ] U s c i t a
2 - From the “MAIN MENU” press “5” and the ART® will M O D E L L O T R A T T O R E
display the following screen:
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
1 - K
2 - I R O N
3 - R 6
4 - X M
5 - K P r o f i l i n e
6 - I R O N H i - L i n e
7 - R 6 H i P r o f i l i n e
8 - X M H i - L e v e l
[ E ] U s c i t a
3 - Press “5” to select the model corresponding to the
tractor in use and the ART® will display the following
screen:
4 - Turn the starter key to “O” (OFF) and then back to “I”
(ON) and proceed with the calibration of the sensors
and configuration of the options.
S p e g n e r e e
r i a c c e n d e r e p e r
c o m p l e t a r e l a
c o n f i g u r a z i o n e
20-66
4.5.3 CONFIGURING THE SYSTEM FOR THE M E N U P R I N C I P A L E

PRESENCE OF THE FRONT PTO (ONLY IF = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
INSTALLED)
compartment in the cab, select the HLHP control 2 - C a l i b r a z i o n i
3 - T e s t
CONNECTING ART® TO THE HLHP CONTROL 4 - A l l a r m i
UNITS").
CALIBRATIONS”.
[ E ] U s c i t a
3 - Press “2 - PTO”. C A L I B R A Z I O N I
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
1 - T r a s m i s s i o n e
2 - P T O
3 - A S M
4 - S o l l e v a t o r e
5 - S o s p e n s i o n i
6 - S i s t e m a
7 - C A N
8 - D i s t r i b u t o r i
9 - M o t o r e
[ E ] U s c i t a
4 - Press “1-Front PTO ”. P T O
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
1 - P T O A n t e r .
2 - D e n t i S e n s .
3 - S o g l i a A u t
[ E ] U s c i t a
20-67
5 - Press "1" to enable operation of the front PTO and P T O A N T E R I O R E

press "C" to save the setting.
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
NOTE
• The option "2– - AUTO PRESENT " must never be
used. 0 - N O N P R E S E N T E
• If you select the wrong option by mistake, press "A" to
1 - P R E S E N T E
cancel.
2 - P R E S E N T E A U T O
and carry out the procedure to enable the ASM
system (for details, see "4.4.3 ENABLING THE ASM
SYSTEM (ONLY IF INSTALLED)" starting from point
3) or to configure the system for the presence of the
radar (for details, see "4.4.5 CONFIGURING THE
SYSTEM FOR THE PRESENCE OF RADAR (ONLY
IF INSTALLED)" starting from point 3) or to calibrate
the high and low positions of the lift (for details, see
[ A ] A n n u l l a
"4.4.6 CALIBRATION OF THE HIGH AND LOW
POSITIONS OF THE LIFT" starting from point 4). [ C ] C o n f e r m a
4.5.4 ENABLING THE ASM SYSTEM M E N U P R I N C I P A L E

(ONLY IF INSTALLED) = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
3 - T e s t
UNITS"). 4 - A l l a r m i

CALIBRATIONS”.
[ E ] U s c i t a
20-68
3 - Press “3 - ASM”. C A L I B R A Z I O N I
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
2 - P T O
3 - A S M
6 - S i s t e m a
7 - C A N
9 - M o t o r e
[ E ] U s c i t a
4 - Press “1-Enabling.”. A S M
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
1 - A b i l i t a z .
2 - D T / S t e r z o
3 - D i f f / S t e r z o
4 - D T / V e l .
5 - D i f f / V e l .
6 - N u o v o A s s a l e
7 - C a l . S t e r z o
[ E ] U s c i t a
5 - Press "1" to enable the system then press "C" to A S M
save the setting and return to the "ASM" menu.
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
NOTE
0 - N O N P R E S E N T E
If you select the wrong option by mistake, press "A" to 1 - P R E S E N T E
cancel.
6 - Carry out the procedure to enable the ASM (for

d etail s, see "4. 4. 4 CALIBRATION OF THE
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR (WITH ASM ONLY)"
[ A ] A n n u l l a
20-69
4.5.5 CALIBRATION OF THE STEERING ANGLE M E N U P R I N C I P A L E

SENSOR (WITH ASM ONLY) = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
NOTE
running at idle speed. 2 - C a l i b r a z i o n i
3 - T e s t
1 - Connect the ART® to the connector in the RH 4 - A l l a r m i
UNITS").
CALIBRATIONS”.
[ E ] U s c i t a
3 - Press “3 - ASM”. C A L I B R A Z I O N I
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
2 - P T O
3 - A S M
6 - S i s t e m a
7 - C A N
9 - M o t o r e
[ E ] U s c i t a
4 - Press “7-Steering Cal.”. A S M
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
1 - A b i l i t a z .
2 - D T / S t e r z o
3 - D i f f / S t e r z o
4 - D T / V e l .
5 - D i f f / V e l .
6 - N u o v o A s s a l e
7 - C a l . S t e r z o
[ E ] U s c i t a
20-70
5 - Turn the steering so that the front wheels are aligned C a l . S t e r z o

in the straight-ahead position, then press "E" to
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
save the value.
NOTE
To facilitate wheel alignment, this calibration can be
performed with the tractor in motion. A t t u a l e : 2 . 5 0
N u o v o : 2 . 4 8
[ E ] M e m o r i z z a
6 - The following screen will appear, and if the C a l . S t e r z o
parameter was not set correctly you can press "A"
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
to cancel the operation, restore the previous value
and return to the "ASM" menu.
7 – Press "C" to confirm the value and return to the "
ASM " menu then press "E" to return to the
"Calibrations" menu and configure the system for A t t u a l e : 2 . 4 8
the presence of radar (for details, see "4.4.5
CONFIGURING THE SYSTEM FOR THE N u o v o : 2 . 4 8
PRESENCE OF RADAR (ONLY IF INSTALLED)"
starting from point 3) or to calibrate the high and low
positions of the lift (for details, see "4.4.6
CALIBRATION OF THE HIGH AND LOW
POSITIONS OF THE LIFT" starting from point 3).
[ A ] A n n u l l a
PRESENCE OF RADAR (ONLY IF = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
INSTALLED)
3 - T e s t
UNITS").
CALIBRATIONS”.
[ E ] U s c i t a
20-71
3 - Press “4 - Lift”. C A L I B R A Z I O N I
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
2 - P T O
3 - A S M
6 - S i s t e m a
7 - C A N
9 - M o t o r e
[ E ] U s c i t a
4 - Press “1-Options”. M e n u ‘ P a r a m e t r i
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
1 - O p z i o n i
3 - C a l i b . P o t e n z .
[ E ] U s c i t a
5 - Press “8”. O P Z I O N I
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
1 - D i s c e s a A u t o 0 0 1
2 - S e n s i b i l . 2 5 5
3 - S e n s E s t e r n o 0 0 1
4 - M o d o M I X 0 0 1
8 - R a d a r 0 0 0
9 - C o s t R a d a r 0 1 3 0
[ E ] U s c i t a
20-72
6 - Press "1" to enable the radar and press "C" to save R A D A R

the setting.
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
7 - If the parameter was not set correctly, pressA" to
cancel the operation, restore the previous value and 0 - N O N P R E S E N T E
return to the "PARAMETERS" menu.
1 - P R E S E N T E
8 - Press "C" to return to the "PARAMETERS" menu,
press "E" once and carry out the procedure for
calibration of the high and low positions of the lift (for
details, see "4.4.6 CALIBRATION OF THE HIGH
AND LOW POSITIONS OF THE LIFT" starting from
point 3).
[ A ] A n n u l l a
4.5.7 CALIBRATION OF THE HIGH AND M E N U P R I N C I P A L E
LOW POSITIONS OF THE LIFT = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
NOTE
running at idle speed. 2 - C a l i b r a z i o n i
compartment in the cab, select the HLHP control 4 - A l l a r m i
UNITS").
CALIBRATIONS”.
[ E ] U s c i t a
3 - Press “4 - Lift”. C A L I B R A Z I O N I
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
2 - P T O
3 - A S M
6 - S i s t e m a
7 - C A N
9 - M o t o r e
[ E ] U s c i t a
20-73
4 - Press “2-Calibrations”. M e n u ‘ P a r a m e t r i
5 - Unlock the lift by holding pressed the Lock key and = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
holding it down. When the frequency at which the
red LED is flashing changes, the lift is unlocked. 1 - O p z i o n i
3 - C a l i b . P o t e n z .
[ E ] U s c i t a
®
7 - Press “2” and the ART will display the following = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
screen:
1 - A l t . M i n . 4 . 7 2
2 - A l t . M a s . 0 . 6 2
3 - V e l B l o c c o 2 0
[ E ] U s c i t a
8 - Press the lift 'Down' button to lower the lift to its full C a l i b r a z i o n i
depth (while the lift is being lowered, the "new" value
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
should continuously increase).
9 - When the lift has arrived at its mechanical travel
limit, press “E” to save the value.
10 - If the operation was not carried out correctly, the A t t u a l e : 4 . 8 0
N u o v o : 4 . 7 2
[ A ] A n n u l l a
20-74
12 - Press the lift 'Up' button to raise the lift to its full = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
height (while the lift is being raised the "new" value
should continuously decrease).
13 - When the lift has reached its upper travel limit, press
the 'Down' button until the voltage reading is A t t u a l e : 4 . 8 0
approximately 0.35V less than the value recorded at
the travel limit, then press “E” to save the value to
N u o v o : 4 . 8 0
the memory.
14 - If the operation was not carried out correctly, the
technician can cancel it by pressing “D” and restore
[ D ] A n n u l l a
15 - Press “E” twice to return to the "CALIBRATIONS"
menu to configure the system for the presence of
front axle suspension (for details, see "4.4.7
CONFIGURING THE SYSTEM FOR THE
PRESENCE OF FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION (ONLY
IF INSTALLED)" starting from point 3) or to set the
language on the INFOCENTER display (for details,
see "4.4.8 SETTING THE INFOCENTER DISPLAY
LANGUAGE" starting from point 3).

PRESENCE OF FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
(ONLY IF INSTALLED)
3 - T e s t
UNITS").
CALIBRATIONS”.
[ E ] U s c i t a
20-75
3 - Press “5 - Suspensions”. C A L I B R A Z I O N I
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
2 - P T O
3 - A S M
6 - S i s t e m a
7 - C A N
9 - M o t o r e
[ E ] U s c i t a
4 - Press “1”. S O S P E N S I O N E
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
1 - A b i l i t a 0 0 0
2 - V e l o c i t a 0 0 2
3 - T i p o 0 0 1
4 - C o n t r o l l o D T 0 0 0
[ E ] U s c i t a
5 - Press "1" to enable the radar and press "C" to save S O S P E N S I O N E
the value.
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
6 - If the parameter was not set correctly, you can press
"A" to cancel the operation, restore the previous 0 - N O N P R E S E N T E
value and return to the "SUSPENSIONS" page.
1 - P R E S E N T E
7 - Carry out the procedure to set the Infocenter display
language (for details, see ""4.4.8 SETTING THE
INFOCENTER DISPLAY LANGUAGE" starting from
point 3).
[ A ] A n n u l l a
20-76
4.5.9 SETTING THE INFOCENTER M E N U P R I N C I P A L E

DISPLAY LANGUAGE = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
3 - T e s t

CALIBRATIONS”.
[ E ] U s c i t a
3 - Press “6 - System”. C A L I B R A Z I O N I
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
2 - P T O
3 - A S M
6 - S i s t e m a
7 - C A N
9 - M o t o r e
[ E ] U s c i t a
4 - Press “1”. S I S T E M A
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
1 - L i n g u a
[ E ] U s c i t a
20-77
5 - Press the key corresponding to the desired L I N G U A

language choosing from the options displayed, and
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
press "C" to save the value and return to the
"SYSTEM" menu.
0 - I t a l i a n o
6 - If the operation was not carried out correctly, press
1 - E n g l i s h
"A" to cancel, restore the previous value and return
to the "SYSTEM" menu. 2 - F r a n c a i s
3 - D e u t s c h
4 - E s p a n o l
5 - P o r t u g u e s e
[ A ] A n n u l l a
4.5.10 CONFIGURE THE ASSOCIATION M E N U P R I N C I P A L E
BETWEEN CONTROL VALVE LEVERS = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
AND AUXILIARY SERVICES (FOR
VERSIONS WITH 4 CONTROL VALVES
1 - M o n i t o r s
ONLY)
4 - A l l a r m i
proceed as described. (For details, see
«Connecting ART® to the HLHP control unit»).
2 - From the “MAIN MENU” press “2” and the ART® will
display the following screen:
[ E ] U s c i t a
3 - Press “8”. C A L I B R A Z I O N I
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
2 - P T O
3 - A S M
6 - S i s t e m a
7 - C A N
9 - M o t o r e
[ E ] U s c i t a
20-78
4 - Press “1” D I S T R I B U T O R I
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
1 - T I P O 0 0 0
2 - T e m p o M a x 0 0 0 6 0
3 - C o m a n d i 0 0 0
[ E ] U s c i t a
5 - Press the key corresponding to the desired C O M A N D I D I S T R .
configuration choosing from the options displayed,
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
and press "C" to save the value and return to the
"SYSTEM" menu. C o m a n d i - > d i s t .
0 - 1 2 3 4 - > 1 2 3 4
1 - 1 2 3 4 - > 3 4 1 2
[ E ] U s c i t a
20-79
4.5.11 CLEARING ALL ALARMS M E N U P R I N C I P A L E

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
3 - T e s t
2 -From the "MAIN MENU" press "4 - ALARMS"”.
[ E ] U s c i t a
3 - Press “9 - Deletion”. M E N U A L L A R M I
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
1 - H L H P a t t i v i
2 - H L H P p a s s i v i
3 - M o t o r e a t t i v i
4 - M o t o r e p a s s i v i
5 - T r a s m . A t t i v i
6 - T r a s m . P a s s i v i
9 - C a n c e l l a z i o n e
[ E ] U s c i t a
4 - Press “3”. C A N C E L L A A L L A R M I
1 - H L H P
G l i a l l a r m i
2 - M o t o r e
s o n o s t a t i
c a n c e l l a t i
4 - B r a c c i o l o
6 - Press "E" three times to return to the
"CALIBRATIONS" menu and turn the starter key to
"O" (OFF).
[ E ] U s c i t a
20-80
4. PUTTING THE TRACTOR INTO SERVICE 4.6 RENEWAL OF THE ARMREST CONTROL UNIT
4.6 RENEWAL OF THE ARMREST CONTROL UNIT

Each time the armrest control unit is renewed, the operator must carry out the following operations:
1 - calibration of the hand throttle
2 - calibration of control valves n°3 and n°4 joystick
Calibration of these sensors serves to inform the control unit of the current values for the control lever travel limits, thereby
ensuring correct operation of the actuators associated with the levers.
To perform the calibration, connect the ART to the connector in the fuses compartment of the cab, then select the armrest
from the “AVAILABLE TESTS” menu and proceed as described.
NOTE: Unless otherwise specified, these operations must be carried out with the engine
stopped, the parking brake on and the shuttle lever in neutral.
4.6.1 CALIBRATION OF THE HAND THROTTLE

For details on how to perform the calibration of the hand
throttle see 4.2.6 or 4.2.7 in this chapter.
4.6.2 CALIBRATION OF THE JOYSTICK

FOR CONTROL VALVES N°3 AND N°4 M e n ù P r i n c i p a l e
1 - From menu “1. Main menu” press “3” to access the - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
main menu.
2 - Press “2”. [ 1 ] - A c c . M a n .
[ 2 ] - J o y . D i s t .
[ E ] U S C I T A
20-81
3 - Press “1”. C a l i b . J o y - D i s t
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
D I S T R I B U T O R E 3
1 - J . D . 3 M I N 9 5
2 - J . D . 3 M A X 8 2 0
3 - J . D . 3 M E D 5 1 0
D I S T R I B U T O R E 4
4 - J . D . 4 M I N 2 4 0
5 - J . D . 4 M A X 7 7 0
6 - J . D . 4 M E D 5 1 0
[ E ] U S C I T A
4 - Move the control valve joystick lever back towards J . D . 3 M I N
the rear of the tractor and, while holding the
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
position, press “E”.
1 - A t t u a l e : 9 5
2 - N u o v o : 5 0 5
[ D ] C A N C E L L A
[ E ] U S C I T A
J . D . 3 M I N
5 - If the operation was not carried out correctly, the - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
the previous value, whereas pressing “C” will
confirm the new setting and cause the system to 1 - A t t u a l e : 9 5
return to menu “3.2. Cont. Valve Joy. Calib.”.
2 - N u o v o : 9 8
[ A ] A N N U L L A
[ C ] C O N F E R M A
20-82
6 - Press “2”. J . D . 3 M A X
7 - Move the control valve joystick lever towards the - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
front of the tractor and, while holding the position,
press “E”.
1 - A t t u a l e : 8 2 0
2 - N u o v o : 5 0 5
[ E ] U S C I T A
8 - If the operation was not carried out correctly, the J . D . 3 M A X
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
confirm the new setting and cause the system to
return to menu “3.2. Cont. Valve Joy. Calib.”. 1 - A t t u a l e : 8 2 0
2 - N u o v o : 8 0 8
[ A ] A N N U L L A
9 - Press “1”. J . D . 4 M I N
10 - Move the control valve joystick lever to the right - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
and, while holding the position, press “E”.
1 - A t t u a l e : 2 4 0
2 - N u o v o : 5 0 5
[ E ] U S C I T A
20-83
11 - If the operation was not carried out correctly, the J . D . 4 M I N

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
the previous value, whereas pressing “C” will
confirm the new setting and cause system to return
to menu “3.2. Cont. Valve Joy. Calib.”. 1 - A t t u a l e : 2 4 0
2 - N u o v o : 2 4 6
[ A ] A N N U L L A
12 - Press “2”. J . D . 4 M A X
13 - Move the control valve joystick lever to the left and, - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
while holding the position, press “E”.
1 - A t t u a l e : 7 7 0
2 - N u o v o : 5 0 5
[ E ] U S C I T A
14 - If the operation was not carried out correctly, the J . D . 4 M A X
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
2 - N u o v o : 7 6 0
[ A ] A N N U L L A
20-84
15 - Repeatedly move the joystick in all directions and J . D . 3 M E D

release it so that it automatically assumes the
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
neutral position, then press “3”.
16 - Without moving the joystick, press “E”.
1 - A t t u a l e : 5 1 0
2 - N u o v o : 5 1 4
[ E ] U S C I T A
17 - If the operation was not carried out correctly, the J . D . 3 M E D
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
2 - N u o v o : 5 1 4
[ A ] A N N U L L A
18 - Without moving the joystick, press “6”. J . D . 4 M E D
19 - Without moving the joystick, press “E”. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
1 - A t t u a l e : 5 1 0
2 - N u o v o : 5 0 5
[ E ] U S C I T A
20-85
20 - If the operation was not carried out correctly, the J . D . 4 M E D

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
2 - N u o v o : 5 0 5
[ A ] A N N U L L A
20-86
5. ALARMS INTRODUCTION
5. ALARMS
INTRODUCTION
This chapter contains a list of all the alarms that can be detected by the tractor's electronic system.
To facilitate the search for alarms, the list below shows the alarms as they are displayed on the Infocenter and the
corresponding alarms displayed on the HLHP control unit.
1- List of alarms displayed on the Infocenter: this table lists in alphanumeric order all those alarms that can appear on
the central display of the Infocenter.
Each alarm is also associated with the corresponding alarm code that appears on the ART when connected to the
HLHP control unit, together with a brief description of the cause.
2- HLHP control unit list of alarms: this table lists in alphanumeric order all those alarms that are connected with the
HLHP control unit and can appear on the ART in 4.1 and 4.2 menus.
Each alarm is also associated with a brief description of the cause.
3- ECU list of alarms: this table lists in alphanumeric order all those alarms that are connected with the ECU and can
appear on the ART, when connected to the HLHP control unit, in the 4.3 and 4.4 menus.
Each alarm is also associated with a brief description of the cause and the corresponding alarm that can be displayed
using the SERDIA program.
4- Transmission control unit list of alarms: this table lists in alphanumeric order all those alarms that are connected
with the transmission control unit and can appear on the ART, when connected to the HLHP control unit, in the 4.5 and
4.6 menus.
Each alarm is also associated with a brief description of the cause and the reactions of the transmission system to the
alarm.
5- Armrest list of alarms
6- CAN BUS system alarms: this section contains some alarms that can be managed by the tractor's electronic control
units.
All alarms are classified into two types:

• Active alarms i.e. all those alarms of which the cause has not yet been removed.
• Passive alarms i.e. all those alarms for which the cause has been removed.
20-87
5. ALARMS 5.1 ALARMS DISPLAYED ON THE INFOCENTER
5.1 ALARMS DISPLAYED ON THE INFOCENTER

This table lists all the alarms related to faults that can be identified by the HLHP, engine and transmission control units.
All the alarms are displayed on the central display of the INFOCENTER on two lines; therefore, for easier identification, in
the table the alarm messages are shown divided between two lines.
The table is made up of the following columns:
• 1st line on display: first line of alarm shown on display.
• 2nd line on display: second line of alarm shown on display.
• Code on ART: alarm code as would be read connecting the ART to the HLHP control unit.
• ECU: identifies the control unit that detected the fault.
• Description: a brief description of the possible cause of the fault.
• Page: the number of the page where the checks to be carried out are indicated.
Should any alarm messages not included in this list be displayed, the control unit will display the message "Generic alarm"
followed by an identification code (which may be an SPN-FMI code or a hexadecimal code). In this case, contact the
Technical Assistance Service for further information.
Code on
1st line on display 2nd line on display ART ECU Description Page.
The control unit detects errors in the

10-Calib. friz. prin. Errore aggiornamento 10 TRANSM. main clutch calibration values 20-203
The control unit detects errors in the

11-Pedale frizione E2P Errore aggiornamento 11 TRANSM. main clutch calibration values 20-203
The control unit detects a problem with

12-Sensore temperatu- Segnale non valido 12 TRANSM. the power input to the transmission oil 20-204
ra temperature sensor.

13-Sensore temperatu- Segnale troppo basso 13 TRANSM. the power input to the temperature 20-205
ra sensor.

reading the main clutch input speed and
transmission output speed depending
14-Switch di neutra Frequenza non corretta 14 TRANSM. on the status of the start-up enabling 20-206
sensor (which signals when the
transmission is in neutral and when a
gear is selected)

18-Circuito idraulico Frequenza non corretta 18 TRANSM. reading the oil pressure and 20-207
transmission operating status
21-Velocità elevata Errore aggiornamento 21 TRANSM. The control unit detects a ground speed 20-208
higher than the permissible limit
The control unit detects that the

22-Temp. shuttle-mode Errore aggiornamento 22 TRANSM. transmission oil temperature is higher 20-208
than the permitted value when the
tractor is working in "FIELD" mode

23-Temp.transport- Errore aggiornamento 23 TRANSM. transmission oil temperature is higher 20-209
mode than the permitted value when the
tractor is working in "ROAD" mode.
24-frizione principale Velocita' elevata 24 TRANSM. The control unit detects the main clutch 20-209
running overspeed.
The control unit detects a conflict

25-Ingresso velocità Errore aggiornamento 25 TRANSM. between the information on the engine 20-210
speed via CANBUS and that read by the
rpm nLse sensor.
20-88
Code on
The control unit detects that solenoid Y4

36-EV cambio 2 non connesso 36 TRANSM. is either not connected or faulty 20-211
The control unit detects that the control

37-EV cambio 2 Corto circuito 37 TRANSM. line of solenoid Y4 is short-circuiting to 20-212
earth

38-EV cambio 2 Difetto meccanico 38 TRANSM. line of solenoid Y4 is short-circuiting to 20-213
battery positive
The control unit detects that solenoid Y2

39-EV cambio 1 non connesso 39 TRANSM. is either not connected or faulty 20-214

40-EV cambio 1 Corto circuito 40 TRANSM. line of solenoid Y2 is short-circuiting to 20-215
earth

41-EV cambio 1 Difetto meccanico 41 TRANSM. line of solenoid Y2 is short-circuiting to 20-216
battery positive
The control unit detects that the rpm

47-Sensore vel. nAB Segnale non valido 47 TRANSM. sensor nAb is disconnected or short- 20-217
circuiting to battery positive.

48-Sensore vel. nAB Segnale troppo basso 48 TRANSM. sensor nAb is short-circuiting to earth 20-218
The control unit detects unreliable

4B-Sensore vel. nAB Frequenza non corretta 4B TRANSM. information coming from the rpm sensor 20-219
nAb
The control unit detects that rpm sensor

50-Sensore vel. nHK Segnale non valido 50 TRANSM. nHk is disconnected or short-circuiting 20-220
to battery positive.

51-Sensore vel. nHK Segnale troppo basso 51 TRANSM. sensor nHk is short-circuiting to earth 20-221

52-Sensore vel. nHK Frequenza non corretta 52 TRANSM. information coming from the rpm sensor 20-222
nHk
53-Sensore vel.nLSA Segnale non valido 53 TRANSM. nLsa is disconnected or short-circuiting 20-223

54-Sensore vel.nLSA Segnale troppo basso 54 TRANSM. nLsa is short-circuiting to earth 20-224

55-Sensore vel.nLSA Frequenza non corretta 55 TRANSM. information coming from the rpm sensor 20-225
nLsa

5F-Sensore FRRS Errore aggiornamento 5F TRANSM. calibration values of the field/road 20-226
position sensor are incorrect.

60-calibrazione FRRS Errore aggiornamento 60 TRANSM. calibration values of the field/road 20-226
position sensor are incorrect
The control unit detects that the field/

61-Sensore FRRS Segnale non valido 61 TRANSM. road position sensor is shorting to a 20-227
positive feed (+5V).

62-Sensore FRRS Segnale non valido 62 TRANSM. road position sensor is shorting to 20-228
battery positive (+12V).
20-89
Code on

63-Sensore FRRS Segnale troppo basso 63 TRANSM. road position sensor is disconnected or 20-229
shorting to earth.
The control detects a conflict in the

information received from the clutch
64-Pedale frizione Frequenza non corretta 64 TRANSM. pedal position sensor and clutch pedal 20-230
depressed sensor, regarding the
position of the pedal
The control unit detects that the clutch

65-Pedale frizione Segnale troppo basso 65 TRANSM. pedal position sensor is disconnected or 20-231
short-circuiting to earth

66-Pedale frizione Segnale non valido 66 TRANSM. pedal position sensor is shorting to 20-232
battery positive

67-Alimen. Sens. AU1 Corto circuito 67 TRANSM. pedal position sensor power supply is 20-233
below the correct value

68-Alimen. Sens. AU1 Difetto meccanico 68 TRANSM. pedal position sensor power supply is 20-234
above the correct value
The control unit detects one or more

69-Pedale frizione Frequenza non corretta 69 TRANSM. threshold values of the clutch pedal 20-235
position sensor out of range.

calibration values of the clutch pedal
have not been saved correctly due to a
70-Pedale frizione E2P Errore aggiornamento 70 TRANSM. defect in the EEPROM memory 20-235
locations, or that the clutch pedal has
never been calibrated

73-Pulsante aper. friz. Segnale troppo basso 73 TRANSM. "Comfort Clutch" button is 20-236
disconnected or short-circuiting to earth

74-Pulsante aper. friz. Segnale non valido 74 TRANSM. "Comfort Clutch" button is short- 20-237
circuiting to battery positive
The control unit detects that the main

76-EV proporzionale non connesso 76 TRANSM. clutch solenoid valve is disconnected. 20-238

77-Elettrovalvola pro- Corto circuito 77 TRANSM. clutch proportional solenoid valve is 20-239
porzionale short-circuiting to earth.
The control unit detects that the forward

79-EV direz. avanti non connesso 79 TRANSM. drive solenoid Y3 is disconnected 20-240

80-EV direz. avanti Corto circuito 80 TRANSM. drive solenoid Y3 is shorting to earth 20-241
The control unit detects that the reverse

82-EV direz. indietro non connesso 82 TRANSM. drive solenoid Y1 is disconnected 20-242

83-EV direz. indietro Corto circuito 83 TRANSM. drive solenoid Y1 is shorting to earth 20-243
The control unit detects a problem

85-Leva inversore Frequenza non corretta 85 TRANSM. affecting the shuttle control lever. 20-244
The control unit detects that the current

87-Pin di codifica non draw of the main clutch solenoids and
coincidono con tipo di veicolo 87 TRANSM. forward/reverse solenoids Y1 and Y3 20-245
and the lock solenoid is abnormal.
20-90
Code on

draw of the main clutch solenoids and
89-Alimentazione VPS1 Frequenza non corretta 89 TRANSM. forward/reverse solenoids Y1 and Y3 20-246

90-Alimentazione VPS2 Frequenza non corretta 90 TRANSM. draw of the powershift solenoid valves 20-247
Y2, Y4, Y5 and Y6 is abnormal

between values read by the NLSA and
91-Frizione principale Frequenza non corretta 91 TRANSM. NHK sensors, the clutch pedal position 20-248
sensor and the position of the creeper
control lever
The control unit has detected an

92-Tensione batteria Segnale non valido 92 TRANSM. abnormally high input voltage 20-249
The control unit has detected an

93-Tensione batteria Segnale troppo basso 93 TRANSM. abnormally low input voltage 20-250

94-EV proporzionale Difetto meccanico 94 TRANSM. clutch solenoid valve is shorting to a 20-251
positive feed

95-EV direz. avanti Difetto meccanico 95 TRANSM. drive solenoid Y3 is shorting to a positive 20-252
feed

96-EV direz. indietro Difetto meccanico 96 TRANSM. drive solenoid Y1 is shorting to battery 20-253
positive

97-Programma errato Frequenza non corretta 97 TRANSM. transmission control unit software has 20-254
not been programmed correctly
The control unit detects that

98-Config.errata Frequenza non corretta 98 TRANSM. transmission configuration data have 20-254
not been programmed correctly.
The control unit detects that tractor

99-Config. veicolo Errore aggiornamento 99 TRANSM. configuration data have not been saved 20-255
correctly (CHECKSUM ERROR)
The engine control unit has detected an

Acceleratore a mano Segnale non valido 561 - 2 HLHP error in the value of the hand throttle 20-128
signal (via CANBUS).
The control unit detects a short-circuit in

Alimen. sensori 5V Segnale non valido 655 - 2 HLHP the 5V sensors power supply line. 20-163
The control unit detects a short circuit in

Alimen. sensori 8V Segnale non valido 654 - 2 HLHP 8V sensor power supply line. 20-162

B0-Sensore vel. nLSE Segnale troppo basso B0 TRANSM. sensor nLse is disconnected or short- 20-256

B1-Sensore vel. nLSE Segnale non valido B1 TRANSM. sensor nLse is short-circuiting to earth 20-257
The control detects unreliable

B2-Sensore vel. nLSE Frequenza non corretta B2 TRANSM. information from the rpm sensor nLse 20-258
The control unit detects that the "Field"

B3-FRRS EV campo non connesso B3 TRANSM. mode selector solenoid Y5 is 20-259
disconnected

B4-FRRS EV campo Difetto meccanico B4 TRANSM. mode selector solenoid Y5 is shorting to 20-260
battery positive
20-91
Code on

B5-FRRS EV campo Corto circuito B5 TRANSM. mode selector solenoid Y5 is shorting to 20-261
earth
The control unit detects that the "Road"

B6-FRRS EV strada non connesso B6 TRANSM. mode selector solenoid Y6 is 20-262
disconnected

B7-FRRS EV strada Difetto meccanico B7 TRANSM. mode selector solenoid Y6 is shorting to 20-263
battery feed

B8-FRRS EV strada Corto circuito B8 TRANSM. mode selector solenoid Y6 is shorting to 20-264
earth
The control unit detects that the gearbox

B9-EV Blocco Neutra non connesso B9 TRANSM. neutral lock solenoid Y7 is disconnected 20-265

BA-EV Blocco Neutra Difetto meccanico BA TRANSM. neutral lock solenoid Y7 is shorting to 20-266
battery positive

BB-EV Blocco Neutra Corto circuito BB TRANSM. neutral lock solenoid Y7 is shorting to 20-267
earth
Bracciolo, Errore scheda 634 - 12 ARMREST Internal error detected 20-279
Detection: control valve 1 max. flow

Bracciolo,flusso distrib.1 disconnesso 637 - 4 ARMREST potentiometer disconnected 20-280
Detection: control valve 3 potentiometer

Bracciolo,flusso distrib.3 scollegato 635 - 4 ARMREST disconnected 20-279

Bracciolo,flusso distrib.4 scollegato 636 - 4 ARMREST potentiometer disconnected 20-280

Bracciolo,flusso max. distrib.3 disconnesso 641 - 4 ARMREST potentiometer disconnected 20-281

Bracciolo,flusso max. distrib.4 disconnesso 642 - 4 ARMREST potentiometer disconnected 20-281

Bracciolo,flusso, distrib.2 disconnesso 639 - 4 ARMREST potentiometer disconnected 20-280
Detection: Incorrect group 0 memory

Bracciolo,memoria blocco 0 in errore 648 - 2 ARMREST configuration 20-284





Detection: APS potentiometer

Bracciolo,potenziom. APS scollegato 696 - 4 ARMREST disconnected 20-286
Detection: control valve 1 time set

Bracciolo,tempo, distrib.1 disconnesso 638 - 4 ARMREST potentiometer disconnected 20-280
20-92
Code on
Detection: control valve 2 time set

Bracciolo,tempo, distrib.2 disconnesso 640 - 4 ARMREST potentiometer disconnected 20-281
Bracciolo,tensione 12V non corretta 644 - 8 ARMREST Detection: Incorrect 12V voltage 20-282
Detection: potentiometer power supply

Bracciolo,tensione 5V dist. non corretta 647 - 8 ARMREST control valve incorrect 5V voltage 20-284
Bracciolo,tensione 6V non corretta 645 - 8 ARMREST Detection: Incorrect 6V voltage 20-283
The transmission control unit detects an

C0-Msg PTCTL1 REQ- error in the information received by the
GEAR Errore Segnale CAN C0 TRANSM. HLHP control unit regarding the request 20-268
for range gear engagement.

C3-Msg EEC1 ENG- error in the information received by the
SPEED Errore Segnale CAN C3 TRANSM. ECU regarding the communication of 20-269
engine speed.
The transmission control unit detects a

CF-Allarme generico CF Timeout CAN Msg CF TRANSM. fault on the CANBUS line. 20-270
The transmission control unit has

Comando inversore Segnale non valido 63 - 2 HLHP detected an error in the value of the 20-104
shuttle lever signal (via CANBUS).

D1-Msg LIMITATION Timeout CAN Msg D1 TRANSM. fault on the CANBUS controller. 20-270

D2-Msg HPSACTRL Timeout CAN Msg D2 TRANSM. fault on the CANBUS controller. 20-271
The control unit detects that the 4WD

Elettrovalvola D.T. Corto circuito +12V 552 - 3 HLHP solenoid is shorting to battery positive. 20-123

Elettrovalvola D.T. Corto circuito massa 552 - 4 HLHP solenoid is shorting to earth. 20-124
The control unit detects an internal fault

Elettrovalvola D.T. Dispositivo guasto 552 - 12 HLHP in the control unit on the power feed to 20-127
the 4WD solenoid.

Elettrovalvola D.T. Guasto non identificato 552 - 11 HLHP in the control unit on the power feed to 20-126
the 4WD solenoid.

Elettrovalvola D.T. non connesso 552 - 5 HLHP solenoid is disconnected. 20-125

Elettrovalvola D.T. Segnale non valido 552 - 2 HLHP in the control unit on the power feed to 20-122
the 4WD solenoid.
Detection of the absence of a

Errore CAN Motore messaggio in timeout 633 - 9 HLHP connection via the CANBUS to the 20-155
engine control unit.
Detection of the absence of a

Errore CAN TCU messaggio in timeout 632 - 9 HLHP connection via the CANBUS to the 20-155
transmission control unit.
The control unit signals that EEPROM

Errore memoria Blocco 0 661 - 8 HLHP used to store the system parameters is 20-165
damaged.

EV differenziale Corto circuito +12V 653 - 3 HLHP differential lock solenoid is shorting to a 20-157
positive feed.
20-93
Code on

EV differenziale Corto circuito massa 653 - 4 HLHP differential lock solenoid is shorting to 20-158
earth.

EV differenziale Dispositivo guasto 653 - 12 HLHP in the control unit on the power feed to 20-161
the differential lock solenoid.

EV differenziale Guasto non identificato 653 - 11 HLHP in the control unit on the power feed to 20-160
The control unit detects that the diff lock

EV differenziale non connesso 653 - 5 HLHP solenoid is not connected. 20-159

EV differenziale Segnale non valido 653 - 2 HLHP in the control unit on the power feed to 20-156
Detection: lift "down" solenoid valve is

EV discesa sollevatore Corto circuito 603 - 6 HLHP short-circuited 20-139
The control unit detects that the lift

EV discesa sollevatore Corto circuito +12V 603 - 3 HLHP 'down' solenoid is shorting to battery 20-136
positive.

EV discesa sollevatore Corto circuito massa 603 - 4 HLHP 'down' solenoid is shorting to earth. 20-137
The control unit detects an excessive

EV discesa sollevatore non connesso 603 - 5 HLHP current draw by the lift 'down' solenoid. 20-138
The control unit detects that the front

EV discesa sospens. Corto circuito +12V 622 - 3 HLHP axle suspension 'down' solenoid is 20-149
shorting to a positive feed.

EV discesa sospens. Corto circuito massa 622 - 4 HLHP axle suspension 'down' solenoid is 20-150
shorting to earth.

in the control unit on the power feed to
EV discesa sospens. Dispositivo guasto 622 - 12 HLHP the front axle suspension 'down' 20-153
solenoid.

EV discesa sospens. Guasto non identificato 622 - 11 HLHP the front axle suspension 'down' 20-152
solenoid.

EV discesa sospens. non connesso 622 - 5 HLHP axle suspension 'down' solenoid is 20-151
disconnected.

EV discesa sospens. Segnale non valido 622 - 2 HLHP the front axle suspension 'down' 20-148
solenoid.

EV PTO anteriore Corto circuito +12V 551 - 3 HLHP PTO solenoid is shorting to battery 20-117
positive.

EV PTO anteriore Corto circuito massa 551 - 4 HLHP PTO solenoid is shorting to earth. 20-118

EV PTO anteriore Dispositivo guasto 551 - 12 HLHP in the control unit on the power feed to 20-121
the front PTO solenoid.
20-94
Code on

EV PTO anteriore Guasto non identificato 551 - 11 HLHP in the control unit on the power feed to 20-120

EV PTO anteriore non connesso 551 - 5 HLHP PTO solenoid is not connected. 20-119

EV PTO anteriore Segnale non valido 551 - 2 HLHP in the control unit on the power feed to 20-116
The control unit detects that the rear

EV PTO posteriore Corto circuito +12V 550 - 3 HLHP PTO solenoid is shorting to battery 20-111
positive.

EV PTO posteriore Corto circuito massa 550 - 4 HLHP PTO solenoid is shorting to earth. 20-112

EV PTO posteriore Dispositivo guasto 550 - 12 HLHP in the control unit on the power feed to 20-115
the rear PTO solenoid.

EV PTO posteriore Guasto non identificato 550 - 11 HLHP in the control unit on the power feed to 20-114

EV PTO posteriore non connesso 550 - 5 HLHP PTO solenoid is not connected 20-113

EV PTO posteriore Segnale non valido 550 - 2 HLHP in the control unit on the power feed to 20-110
Detection: lift "up" solenoid valve is

EV salita sollevatore Corto circuito 602 - 6 HLHP short-circuited 20-135
The control unit detects that the lift 'up'

EV salita sollevatore Corto circuito +12V 602 - 3 HLHP solenoid is shorting to battery positive. 20-132

EV salita sollevatore Corto circuito massa 602 - 4 HLHP solenoid is shorting to earth. 20-133
The control unit detects an excessive

EV salita sollevatore non connesso 602 - 5 HLHP current draw by the lift 'up' solenoid. 20-134

EV salita sospens. Corto circuito +12V 621 - 3 HLHP axle suspension 'up' solenoid is shorting 20-143

EV salita sospens. Corto circuito massa 621 - 4 HLHP axle suspension 'up' solenoid is shorting 20-144
to earth.

EV salita sospens. Dispositivo guasto 621 - 12 HLHP in the control unit on the power feed to 20-147
the front axle suspension 'up' solenoid.

EV salita sospens. Guasto non identificato 621 - 11 HLHP in the control unit on the power feed to 20-146

EV salita sospens. non connesso 621 - 5 HLHP axle suspension 'up' solenoid is 20-145
disconnected.

EV salita sospens. Segnale non valido 621 - 2 HLHP in the control unit on the power feed to 20-142
Detection: lift console incorrect supply

EXT Bracciolo,tensione 5V non corretta 646- 8 ARMREST voltage. 20-283
20-95
Code on
The engine control unit has detected the

absence of a connection to the
Motore,acc. pedale Guasto non identificato 91 - 11 ENGINE accelerator pedal position sensor or a 20-187
signal out of range.

connection to the accelerator pedal
Motore,acc. pedale Segnale non valido 91 - 2 ENGINE position sensor is either non-existent or 20-175
short-circuiting.

connection to the hand throttle position
Motore,accel. manuale Segnale non valido 201 - 2 ENGINE sensor is either non-existent or short- 20-176
circuiting.
The engine control unit has detected that

Motore,attuatore Dispositivo guasto 536 - 12 ENGINE the actuator position signal does not 20-184
match the requirement.

the reference signal for the position of
Motore,attuatore Non Calibrato 536 - 13 ENGINE the actuator does not match the 20-185
requirement.
Motore,Errore CAN Dispositivo guasto 743 - 12 ENGINE CANBUS line controller damaged 20-188
The engine control unit has not been able

Motore,Errore CAN Errore aggiornamento 743 - 9 ENGINE to read or send a message on the 20-188
CANBUS.

Motore,Errore CAN FMI 14 743 - 14 ENGINE the connection to the CANBUS is not 20-189
present.
Motore,Errore CAN Segnale non valido 898 - 2 ENGINE Error in connection to CANBUS 20-188

Motore,Errore interno Segnale non valido 766 - 2 ENGINE error in reading the work memory during 20-190
the normal control cycle.
The engine control unit detects an

Motore,Errore interno Segnale non valido 766 - 2 ENGINE actuator power input outside the 20-192
specified parameters.
The control unit detects that the power

Motore,Errore interno Segnale non valido 766 - 2 ENGINE input to the accelerator pedal position 20-192
sensor is missing or incorrect.

Motore,Errore interno Segnale non valido 766 - 2 ENGINE input to the engine boost pressure 20-190
sensor is missing or incorrect.

Motore,Errore interno Segnale non valido 766 - 2 ENGINE internal error. 20-192

Motore,Errore Memoria Dispositivo guasto 752 - 12 ENGINE error in reading the program memory 20-189
during the normal control cycle.
The engine control unit has detected a

Motore,Errore Memoria Segnale non valido 752 - 2 ENGINE “Stack Overflow” error during the 20-194
execution of the program.
The engine control unit detects that the

Motore,fuori giri FMI 14 702 - 14 ENGINE engine is or has been running overspeed 20-181
(above 3100 rpm).

Motore,Parametri E2P Dispositivo guasto 765 - 12 ENGINE error in writing the parameters. 20-189
20-96
Code on

Motore,Parametri E2P Segnale non valido 765 - 2 ENGINE discrepancy between the parameters 20-194
written in EEPROM.
The engine control unit detects that

Motore,Press. Atmosf. Dispositivo guasto 108 - 12 ENGINE atmospheric pressure is outside the 20-193
permissible limits.

Motore,pressione turbo. Segnale non valido 102 - 2 ENGINE the engine turbo charge pressure signal 20-177
is either non-existent or unreliable.

the difference between the command
Motore,Regolatore Difetto meccanico 535 - 7 ENGINE and the response of the actuator is 20-186
greater than 10%.

Motore,sens. velocita Frequenza non corretta 190 - 8 ENGINE signal from the engine pickup is either 20-174
non-existent or incorrect.
The engine control unit detects that its

Motore,sens.temp. ECU Dispositivo guasto 171 - 12 ENGINE internal temperature is too high. 20-193

Motore,Temp. gasolio Segnale non valido 174 - 2 ENGINE the fuel temperature signal is either non- 20-179
existent or unreliable.

Motore,Temp. gasolio Segnale troppo elevato 174 - 0 ENGINE fuel temperature higher than the alarm 20-182
threshold.

Motore,temperatura Segnale non valido 110 - 2 ENGINE the coolant temperature signal is either 20-178
non-existent or unreliable.

Motore,temperatura Segnale troppo elevato 110 - 0 ENGINE coolant temperature higher than the 20-180
alarm threshold

Motore,temperatura Segnale troppo elevato 110 - 0 ENGINE coolant temperature higher than the 20-180
alarm threshold

error in the information received by the
Msg PTCTL1 TRAVDIR Dispositivo guasto C1 TRANSM. HLHP control unit regarding the travel 20-268
direction selection request.

Pedale acceleratore Dispositivo guasto 51 - 12 HLHP error in the value of the accelerator pedal 20-104
signal (via CANBUS).

Puls.manuale DOWN Corto circuito massa 695 - 3 HLHP 'down' control buttons on the rear 20-170
sollev. fenders are continuously pressed.

Puls.manuale UP sollev. Corto circuito massa 694 - 3 HLHP control buttons on the rear fenders are 20-169
continuously pressed.

Pulsante PTO esterno Corto circuito +12V 662 - 3 HLHP PTO control buttons on the rear fenders 20-166
are continuously pressed.
The control unit detects that the steering

Sensore di sterzo Corto circuito +12V 689 - 3 HLHP angle sensor is shorting to battery 20-167
positive.
The ECU detects that the steering angle

Sensore di sterzo Corto circuito massa 689 - 4 HLHP sensor is disconnected. 20-168
20-97
Code on

Sensore pos. sollev. Corto circuito +12V 601 - 3 HLHP position sensor is shorting to battery 20-129
positive.

Sensore pos. sollev. Corto circuito massa 601 - 4 HLHP position sensor is shorting to earth. 20-130

Sensore pos. sollev. Dispositivo guasto 601 - 12 HLHP in the control unit in the input signal of the 20-131
lift position sensor.

Sensore pos. sospens. Corto circuito +12V 620 - 3 HLHP axle suspension position sensor is 20-140
shorting to battery positive.

Sensore pos. sospens. Corto circuito massa 620 - 4 HLHP suspension position sensor is 20-141
disconnected.
The control unit detects that the radar,

when installed, does not send any
Sensore Radar Dispositivo guasto 656 - 12 HLHP signals when the travel speed exceeds 2 20-164
km/h.
The control unit detects that the RH draft

Sensore sforzo destro Corto circuito +12V 541 - 3 HLHP sensor is shorting to battery positive. 20-108
The control unit detects that the RH draft

Sensore sforzo destro Corto circuito massa 541 - 4 HLHP sensor is shorting to earth. 20-109
The control unit detects that the LH draft

Sensore sforzo sin. Corto circuito +12V 540 - 3 HLHP sensor is shorting to battery positive. 20-106
The control unit detects that the LH draft

Sensore sforzo sin. Corto circuito massa 540 - 4 HLHP sensor is shorting to earth. 20-107
The control unit has detected that the

battery voltage is lower or higher than the
Tensione batteria Segnale non valido 158 - 2 HLHP operating limits (lower than 10.0V or 20-105
higher than 15.0V).
20-98
5. ALARMS 5.2 HLHP CONTROL UNIT ALARMS
5.2 HLHP CONTROL UNIT ALARMS
Alarm code Infocenter Description Page.
Pedale acceleratore The engine control unit has detected an error in the
SPN 51 - FMI 12 20-104
Dispositivo guasto value of the accelerator pedal signal (via CANBUS).
Comando inversore The transmission control unit has detected an error
SPN 63 - FMI 2 20-104
Segnale non valido in the value of the shuttle lever signal (via CANBUS).
The control unit has detected that the battery voltage

Tensione batteria
SPN 158 - FMI 2 Segnale non valido is lower or higher than the operating limits (lower 20-105
than 10.0V or higher than 15.0V).
SPN 540 - FMI 3 Sensore sforzo sin. The control unit detects that the LH draft sensor is 20-106
Corto circuito +12V shorting to battery positive.
SPN 540 - FMI 4 Sensore sforzo sin. The control unit detects that the LH draft sensor is 20-107
Corto circuito massa shorting to earth.
SPN 541 - FMI 3 Sensore sforzo destro The control unit detects that the RH draft sensor is 20-108
SPN 541 - FMI 4 Sensore sforzo destro The control unit detects that the RH draft sensor is 20-109
SPN 550 - FMI 2 EV PTO posteriore The control unit detects an internal fault in the control 20-110
Segnale non valido unit on the power feed to the rear PTO solenoid.
SPN 550 - FMI 3 EV PTO posteriore The control unit detects that the rear PTO solenoid is 20-111
EV PTO posteriore The control unit detects that the rear PTO solenoid is
SPN 550 - FMI 4 Corto circuito massa shorting to earth. 20-112
EV PTO posteriore The control unit detects that the rear PTO solenoid is
SPN 550 - FMI 5 non connesso not connected. 20-113
EV PTO posteriore The control unit detects an internal fault in the control
SPN 550 - FMI 11 Guasto non identificato unit on the power feed to the rear PTO solenoid. 20-114
EV PTO posteriore The control unit detects an internal fault in the control
SPN 550 - FMI 12 Dispositivo guasto unit on the power feed to the rear PTO solenoid. 20-115
EV PTO anteriore The control unit detects an internal fault in the control
SPN 551 - FMI 2 Segnale non valido unit on the power feed to the front PTO solenoid. 20-116
EV PTO anteriore The control unit detects that the front PTO solenoid
SPN 551 - FMI 3 Corto circuito +12V is shorting to battery positive. 20-117
SPN 551 - FMI 4 Corto circuito massa is shorting to earth. 20-118
SPN 551 - FMI 5 non connesso is not connected. 20-119
SPN 551 - FMI 11 Guasto non identificato unit on the power feed to the front PTO solenoid. 20-120
SPN 551 - FMI 12 Dispositivo guasto unit on the power feed to the front PTO solenoid. 20-121
Elettrovalvola D.T. The control unit detects an internal fault in the control
SPN 552 - FMI 2 Segnale non valido unit on the power feed to the 4WD solenoid. 20-122
Elettrovalvola D.T. The control unit detects that the 4WD solenoid is
SPN 552 - FMI 3 Corto circuito +12V shorting to battery positive. 20-123
20-99
Elettrovalvola D.T. The control unit detects that the 4WD solenoid is
SPN 552 - FMI 4 20-124
Elettrovalvola D.T. The control unit detects that the 4WD engagement
SPN 552 - FMI 5 20-125
non connesso solenoid is not connected.
SPN 552 - FMI 11 20-126
Guasto non identificato unit on the power feed to the 4WD solenoid.
SPN 552 - FMI 12 20-127
Dispositivo guasto unit on the power feed to the 4WD solenoid.
Acceleratore a mano The engine control unit has detected an error in the
SPN 561 - FMI 2 20-128
Segnale non valido value of the hand throttle signal (via CANBUS).
Sensore pos. sollev. The control unit detects that the lift position sensor is
SPN 601 - FMI 3 20-129
Sensore pos. sollev. The control unit detects that the lift position sensor is
SPN 601 - FMI 4 20-130
Sensore pos. sollev. The control unit detects an internal fault in the control
SPN 601 - FMI 12 20-131
Dispositivo guasto unit in the input signal of the lift position sensor.
EV salita sollevatore The control unit detects that the lift UP solenoid is
SPN 602 - FMI 3 20-132
EV salita sollevatore The control unit detects that the lift UP solenoid is
SPN 602 - FMI 4 20-133
SPN 602 - FMI 5 EV salita sollevatore The control unit detects that the current draw of the 20-134
non connesso lift UP solenoid valve is excessive.
SPN 602 - FMI 6 EV salita sollevatore Detection: lift UP solenoid valve is short-circuited 20-135
Corto circuito
SPN 603 - FMI 3 EV discesa sollevatore The control unit detects that the lift DOWN solenoid 20-136
Corto circuito +12V is shorting to battery positive.
SPN 603 - FMI 4 EV discesa sollevatore The control unit detects that the lift DOWN solenoid 20-137
Corto circuito massa is shorting to earth.
SPN 603 - FMI 5 EV discesa sollevatore The control unit detects that the current draw of the 20-138
non connesso lift DOWN solenoid valve is excessive.
SPN 603 - FMI 6 EV discesa sollevatore Detection: lift "down" solenoid valve is short- 20-139
Corto circuito circuited
SPN 604 - FMI 3 Alarm available but not utilized. -


20-100
The control unit detects that the front axle

Sensore pos. sospens.
SPN 620 - FMI 3 Corto circuito +12V suspension position sensor is shorting to battery 20-140
positive.
SPN 620 - FMI 4 Sensore pos. sospens. The control unit detects that the front suspension 20-141
Corto circuito massa position sensor is disconnected.
EV salita sospens. The control unit detects an internal fault in the control
SPN 621 - FMI 2 unit on the power feed to the front axle suspension 20-142
Segnale non valido UP solenoid.
The control unit detects that the front axle

SPN 621 - FMI 3 EV salita sospens. suspension UP solenoid is shorting to battery 20-143
Corto circuito +12V
positive.
EV salita sospens. The control unit detects that the front axle
SPN 621 - FMI 4 20-144
Corto circuito massa suspension UP solenoid is shorting to earth.
EV salita sospens. The control unit detects that the front axle
SPN 621 - FMI 5 20-145
non connesso suspension UP solenoid is disconnected.
The control unit detects an internal fault in the control

EV salita sospens.
SPN 621 - FMI 11 Guasto non identificato unit on the power feed to the front axle suspension 20-146
UP solenoid.
EV salita sospens. The control unit detects an internal fault in the control
SPN 621 - FMI 12 unit on the power feed to the front axle suspension 20-147
Dispositivo guasto UP solenoid.

EV discesa sospens.
SPN 622 - FMI 2 Segnale non valido unit on the power feed to the front axle suspension 20-148
DOWN solenoid.
EV discesa sospens. The control unit detects that the front axle
SPN 622 - FMI 3 suspension DOWN solenoid is shorting to battery 20-149
Corto circuito +12V positive.
SPN 622 - FMI 4 Corto circuito massa suspension DOWN solenoid is shorting to earth. 20-150
SPN 622 - FMI 5 non connesso suspension DOWN solenoid is disconnected. 20-151

SPN 622 - FMI 11 EV discesa sospens. unit on the power feed to the front axle suspension 20-152
Guasto non identificato
DOWN solenoid.

EV discesa sospens.
SPN 622 - FMI 12 Dispositivo guasto unit on the power feed to the front axle suspension 20-153
DOWN solenoid.

20-101

Errore CAN TCU Detection of the absence of a connection via the

SPN 632 - FMI 9 messaggio in timeout CANBUS to the transmission control unit. 20-155
Errore CAN Motore Detection of the absence of a connection via the

SPN 633 - FMI 9 messaggio in timeout CANBUS to the engine control unit. 20-155

SPN 653 - FMI 2 EV differenziale unit on the power feed to the differential lock 20-156
Segnale non valido
solenoid.
EV differenziale The control unit detects that the differential lock

SPN 653 - FMI 3 20-157
Corto circuito +12V solenoid is shorting to battery positive.
EV differenziale The control unit detects that the differential lock
SPN 653 - FMI 4 20-158
Corto circuito massa solenoid is shorting to earth.
EV differenziale The control unit detects that the diff lock solenoid is
SPN 653 - FMI 5 20-159
non connesso not connected.

EV differenziale
SPN 653 - FMI 11 Guasto non identificato unit on the power feed to the differential lock 20-160
solenoid.
EV differenziale The control unit detects an internal fault in the control

SPN 653 - FMI 12 unit on the power feed to the differential lock 20-161
Dispositivo guasto solenoid.
Alimen. sensori 8V The control unit detects a short circuit in 8V sensor

SPN 654 - FMI 2 20-162
Segnale non valido power feed.
Alimen. sensori 5V The control unit detects a short circuit in the 5V

SPN 655 - FMI 2 20-163
Segnale non valido sensors power supply line.
The control unit detects that the radar, when

Sensore Radar
SPN 656 - FMI 12 Dispositivo guasto installed, does not send any signals when the travel 20-164
speed exceeds 2 km/h.
SPN 661 - FMI 8 Errore memoria The control unit signals that EEPROM used to store 20-165
Blocco 0 the system parameters is damaged.
Pulsante PTO esterno The control unit detects that the rear PTO control
SPN 662 - FMI 3 buttons on the rear fenders are continuously 20-166
Corto circuito +12V pressed.
Sensore di sterzo The control unit detects that the steering angle
SPN 689 - FMI 3 Corto circuito +12V sensor is shorting to battery positive. 20-167
Sensore di sterzo The ECU detects that the steering angle sensor is
SPN 689 - FMI 4 Corto circuito massa disconnected. 20-168

20-102

The control unit detects that the lift UP control

SPN 694 - FMI 3 Puls.manuale UP sollev. buttons on the rear fenders are continuously 20-169
Corto circuito massa
pressed.
The control unit detects that the lift DOWN control

Puls.manuale DOWN sollev.
SPN 695 - FMI 3 Corto circuito massa buttons on the rear fenders are continuously 20-170
pressed.
20-103
SPN 51 - FMI 12 Pedale acceleratore

Dispositivo guasto
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the value of the accelerator pedal position sensor signal is not within the permissible minimum
and maximum limits.
CHECK
• Check whether there are any alarms present regarding the CANBUS and, if necessary, check the wiring following the
instructions given in the chapter “CANBUS LINE ALARMS”.
• Calibrate the accelerator pedal sensor (for details, see "4.3.6 CALIBRATION OF THE CLUTCH PEDAL")
• Cancel all alarms, turn the starter key first to "O" (OFF) and then back to the "I" (ON) position and check if the alarm is
still present as an active alarm, in which case the control unit must be renewed.
SPN 63 - FMI 2 Comando inversore

Segnale non valido
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the value of the shuttle lever signal is not within the permissible minimum and maximum limits.
CHECK
20-104
SPN 158 - FMI 2 Tensione batteria

Segnale non valido
DESCRIPTION
The control unit has detected that the battery voltage is lower or higher than the operating limits (lower than 10.0V or higher
than 15.0V).
CAUTION
Never connect the ART with the engine running when this alarm is indicated on the Infocenter display, as the
instrument could be damaged.
CHECK
• Check, with the engine off, that the battery voltage is within the prescribed range (normal voltage 12V - 13.5V).
1- VOLTAGE HIGHER THAN NORMAL

• Check whether or not the battery voltage returns to normal with the engine running. In this instance the problem
may be attributable to a fault in the HLHP control unit, otherwise, if the voltage increases above the normal value,
the cause of the problem is malfunctioning of the alternator voltage regulator.
2- VOLTAGE BELOW NORMAL

NOTE
This alarm is activated generally when the battery voltage is less than 10V.
It can be caused by an excessive current draw when the engine is started, or if the battery is damaged or
cannot be recharged by the alternator.
This alarm is generally only displayed as a passive alarm on the ART. Should the alarm be displayed among the
active alarms, and the battery voltage is within the prescribed range (normal voltage 12V - 13.5V) with the
engine on, the control unit must be renewed.
Lower voltage values may be detected following prolonged disuse of the tractor, in this case it is not necessary
to replace the battery immediately.
• Check first whether or not the battery voltage returns to normal with the engine running. In this instance the
problem may be attributable to the battery being discharged or damaged; if not, and the voltage remains lower or
higher than the prescribed minimum, the trouble is caused by incorrect operation of the alternator.
NOTE
In extreme cases, when the battery is seriously damaged (short circuiting), the alternator may not be able to
recharge the cells or generate sufficient voltage. Before changing the alternator, verify its correct or incorrect
operation by connecting a new battery.
20-105
SPN 540 - FMI 3 Sensore sforzo sin.

Corto circuito +12V
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the LH draft sensor is shorting to battery positive.
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on the “L” connector of the LH draft sensor and “HLHP2” of the HLHP control unit are not
oxidised and are firmly connected.
• With the starter key in position “I” (ON), check that the lift draft sensor is receiving power correctly (approx. 8 Vdc
between pin 3 (positive) and pin 1 (negative) of connector “L”)
• With the starter key in position “I” (ON) and the "HLHP2" connector disconnected from the control unit, connect a test
meter to pin 2 of connector “L” and to the ground on the tractor frame and check for 0 voltage (meter reading: 0V).
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 51 75 70 77
1 2 12 24 14 67 62
41 27 1 2 28 70 51 12 14 24 77 75 HLHP1
HLHP2
GND4
TK2 MS1
37 33 34 38 36 35 2
A
4
2
7.5A
F2A F15C
15A
L R POS
2 3 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 X55 1 2 3 4
+15 +30
F F
V V
0.013.9307.4 0.013.9308.4
D0034660
20-106
SPN 540 - FMI 4 Sensore sforzo sin.

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the LH draft sensor is shorting to earth.
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on the “L” connector of the LH draft sensor and “HLHP2” of the HLHP control unit are not
oxidised and are firmly connected
• With the connector "HLHP2" disconnected from the control unit, check that there is electrical continuity between pin
70 of the connector "HLHP2" and pin 2 of the connector "L"”.
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF) and “HLHP2” connector disconnected from the control unit, connect a test
meter to pin 2 of the connector “L” and to the earth on the transmission and test the resistance to check for a short circuit
(meter reading: infinity).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to "O" (OFF) and then back to the "I" (ON) position and check if the alarm is still
present as an active alarm, in which case the control unit must be renewed.
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 51 75 70 77
1 2 12 24 14 67 62
41 27 1 2 28 70 51 12 14 24 77 75 HLHP1
HLHP2
GND4
TK2 MS1
37 33 34 38 36 35 2
A
4
2
7.5A
F2A F15C
15A
L R POS
2 3 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 X55 1 2 3 4
+15 +30
F F
V V
0.013.9307.4 0.013.9308.4
D0034660
20-107
SPN 541 - FMI 3 Sensore sforzo destro

Corto circuito +12V
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the RH draft sensor is shorting to battery positive.
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on the “R” connector of the RH draft sensor and “HLHP2” of the HLHP control unit are not
• )With the starter key in position “I” (ON), check that the lift draft sensor is receiving power correctly (approx. 8 Vdc
between pin 3 (positive) and pin 1 (negative) of connector “R”)
meter to pin 2 of connector “R” and to the earth on the transmission and check for 0 voltage (meter reading: 0V).
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 51 75 70 77
1 2 12 24 14 67 62
41 27 1 2 28 70 51 12 14 24 77 75 HLHP1
HLHP2
GND4
TK2 MS1
37 33 34 38 36 35 2
A
4
2
7.5A
F2A F15C
15A
L R POS
2 3 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 X55 1 2 3 4
+15 +30
F F
V V
0.013.9307.4 0.013.9308.4
D0034660
20-108
SPN 541 - FMI 4 Sensore sforzo destro

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the RH draft sensor is shorting to earth.
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on the “L” connector of the RH draft sensor and “HLHP2” of the HLHP control unit are not
• With the connector "HLHP2" disconnected from the control unit, check that there is electrical continuity between pin
77 of the connector "HLHP2" and pin 2 of the connector "R"”.
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF) and connector “HLHP2” disconnected from the control unit, connect a test
meter to pin 2 of connector “R” and to the earth on the transmission and perform a resistance test to check for shorts
to earth (meter reading: infinity).
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 51 75 70 77
1 2 12 24 14 67 62
41 27 1 2 28 70 51 12 14 24 77 75 HLHP1
HLHP2
GND4
TK2 MS1
37 33 34 38 36 35 2
A
4
2
7.5A
F2A F15C
15A
L R POS
2 3 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 X55 1 2 3 4
+15 +30
F F
V V
0.013.9307.4 0.013.9308.4
D0034660
20-109
SPN 550 - FMI 2 EV PTO posteriore

Segnale non valido
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects an internal fault in the control unit on the power feed to the rear PTO solenoid.
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on the “HLHP1” connector of the control unit and the “EVPTO2” connector of the rear PTO
solenoid are not oxidised and are firmly connected
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 44 36
1 2
41 27 1 2 28 36 44 HLHP1
GND4
TK2
15 13
7.5A
F2A F15C
15A
EV EV
2 1
PTO1 1 2 PTO2
+15 +30 GND2
0.013.9307.4
D0034650
20-110

Corto circuito +12V
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the rear PTO solenoid is shorting to battery positive.
CHECK
meter to pin 2 of connector “EVPTO2” to the earth on the transmission and check for 0 voltage (meter reading: 0V).
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 44 36
1 2
41 27 1 2 28 36 44 HLHP1
GND4
TK2
15 13
7.5A
F2A F15C
15A
EV EV
2 1
PTO1 1 2 PTO2
+15 +30 GND2
0.013.9307.4
D0034650
20-111

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the rear PTO solenoid is shorting to earth.
CHECK
• Test the internal resistance of the solenoid (for the technical details, see unit 40)
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF) and connector " HLHP1" disconnected, connect a test meter to pin 2 of
connector “EVPTO2” and to the earth on the transmission and perform a resistance test to check for shorts to earth
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 44 36
1 2
41 27 1 2 28 36 44 HLHP1
GND4
TK2
15 13
7.5A
F2A F15C
15A
EV EV
2 1
PTO1 1 2 PTO2
+15 +30 GND2
0.013.9307.4
D0034650
20-112

non connesso
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the rear PTO solenoid is not connected.
CHECK
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF), connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “EVPTO2” and to pin 36 of the "
HLHP1" connector and measure the resistance to check for electrical continuity (test meter reading: 0 Ohm).
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF), connect a test meter to pin 1 of connector“EVPTO2” and to the earth on the
transmission and perform a resistance test to check that the wire is not broken (meter reading: 0 Ohm).
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 44 36
1 2
41 27 1 2 28 36 44 HLHP1
GND4
TK2
15 13
7.5A
F2A F15C
15A
EV EV
2 1
PTO1 1 2 PTO2
+15 +30 GND2
0.013.9307.4
D0034650
20-113

DESCRIPTION
CHECK
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 44 36
1 2
41 27 1 2 28 36 44 HLHP1
GND4
TK2
15 13
7.5A
F2A F15C
15A
EV EV
2 1
PTO1 1 2 PTO2
+15 +30 GND2
0.013.9307.4
D0034650
20-114

Dispositivo guasto
DESCRIPTION
CHECK
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 44 36
1 2
41 27 1 2 28 36 44 HLHP1
GND4
TK2
15 13
7.5A
F2A F15C
15A
EV EV
2 1
PTO1 1 2 PTO2
+15 +30 GND2
0.013.9307.4
D0034650
20-115
SPN 551 - FMI 2 EV PTO anteriore

Segnale non valido
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects an internal fault in the control unit on the power feed to the front PTO solenoid.
CHECK
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 44 36
1 2
41 27 1 2 28 36 44 HLHP1
GND4
TK2
15 13
7.5A
F2A F15C
15A
EV EV
2 1
PTO1 1 2 PTO2
+15 +30 GND2
0.013.9307.4
D0034650
20-116

Corto circuito +12V
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the front PTO solenoid is shorting to battery positive.
CHECK
meter to pin 2 of connector “EVPTO1” to the earth on the transmission and check for 0 voltage (meter reading: 0V).
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 44 36
1 2
41 27 1 2 28 36 44 HLHP1
GND4
TK2
15 13
7.5A
F2A F15C
15A
EV EV
2 1
PTO1 1 2 PTO2
+15 +30 GND2
0.013.9307.4
D0034650
20-117

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the front PTO solenoid is shorting to earth.
CHECK
connector “EVPTO1” and to the earth on the transmission and perform a resistance test to check for shorts to earth
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 44 36
1 2
41 27 1 2 28 36 44 HLHP1
GND4
TK2
15 13
7.5A
F2A F15C
15A
EV EV
2 1
PTO1 1 2 PTO2
+15 +30 GND2
0.013.9307.4
D0034650
20-118

non connesso
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the front PTO solenoid is not connected.
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on the “HLHP1” connector of the control unit and the “EVPTO1” connector of the front PTO
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF), connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “EVPTO1” and to pin 44 of the "
HLHP1" connector and measure the resistance to verify that there is electrical continuity (test meter reading: 0 Ohm).
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF), connect a test meter to pin 1 of connector “EVPTO1” and to the earth on the
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 44 36
1 2
41 27 1 2 28 36 44 HLHP1
GND4
TK2
15 13
7.5A
F2A F15C
15A
EV EV
2 1
PTO1 1 2 PTO2
+15 +30 GND2
0.013.9307.4
D0034650
20-119

DESCRIPTION
CHECK
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 44 36
1 2
41 27 1 2 28 36 44 HLHP1
GND4
TK2
15 13
7.5A
F2A F15C
15A
EV EV
2 1
PTO1 1 2 PTO2
+15 +30 GND2
0.013.9307.4
D0034650
20-120

Dispositivo guasto
DESCRIPTION
CHECK
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 44 36
1 2
41 27 1 2 28 36 44 HLHP1
GND4
TK2
15 13
7.5A
F2A F15C
15A
EV EV
2 1
PTO1 1 2 PTO2
+15 +30 GND2
0.013.9307.4
D0034650
20-121
SPN 552 - FMI 2 Elettrovalvola D.T.

Segnale non valido
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects an internal fault in the control unit on the power feed to the 4WD solenoid.
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on the “HLHP1” connector of the control unit and the “EVLOCK” connector of the 4WD
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 43 34
1 2
41 27 1 2 28 43 34 HLHP1
GND4
TK2
17 16
7.5A
F2A F15C
15A
EVDF EVDT
2 1 2 1
+15 +30 GND2
0.013.9307.4
D0034640
20-122

Corto circuito +12V
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the 4WD solenoid is shorting to battery positive.
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on the “HLHP1” connector of the control unit and the “EVDT” connector of the 4WD solenoid
are not oxidised and are firmly connected
meter to pin 2 of connector “EVDT” to the earth on the transmission and check for 0 voltage (meter reading: 0V).
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 43 34
1 2
41 27 1 2 28 43 34 HLHP1
GND4
TK2
17 16
7.5A
F2A F15C
15A
EVDF EVDT
2 1 2 1
+15 +30 GND2
0.013.9307.4
D0034640
20-123

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the 4WD solenoid is shorting to earth.
CHECK
connector “EVDT” and to the earth on the transmission and perform a resistance test to check for shorts to earth (meter
reading: infinity).
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 43 34
1 2
41 27 1 2 28 43 34 HLHP1
GND4
TK2
17 16
7.5A
F2A F15C
15A
EVDF EVDT
2 1 2 1
+15 +30 GND2
0.013.9307.4
D0034640
20-124

non connesso
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the 4WD engagement solenoid is not connected.
CHECK
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF), connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “EVDT” and to pin 34 of the "
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF), connect a test meter to pin 1 of connector “EVDT” and to the earth on the
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 43 34
1 2
41 27 1 2 28 43 34 HLHP1
GND4
TK2
17 16
7.5A
F2A F15C
15A
EVDF EVDT
2 1 2 1
+15 +30 GND2
0.013.9307.4
D0034640
20-125

DESCRIPTION
CHECK
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 43 34
1 2
41 27 1 2 28 43 34 HLHP1
GND4
TK2
17 16
7.5A
F2A F15C
15A
EVDF EVDT
2 1 2 1
+15 +30 GND2
0.013.9307.4
D0034640
20-126

Dispositivo guasto
DESCRIPTION
CHECK
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 43 34
1 2
41 27 1 2 28 43 34 HLHP1
GND4
TK2
17 16
7.5A
F2A F15C
15A
EVDF EVDT
2 1 2 1
+15 +30 GND2
0.013.9307.4
D0034640
20-127
SPN 561 - FMI 2 Acceleratore a mano

Segnale non valido
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the value of the hand throttle position sensor signal is not within the permissible minimum and
maximum limits.
CHECK
• Calibrate the hand throttle sensor (for details, see "4.2.6 CALIBRATION OF THE HAND THROTTLE (USING THE
SERDIA PROGRAM)" or "4.2.7 CALIBRATION OF THE HAND THROTTLE (USING THE ART)").
20-128
SPN 601 - FMI 3 Sensore pos. sollev.

Corto circuito +12V
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the lift position sensor is shorting to battery positive.
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on the connector “POS” of the lift position sensor and the “HLHP2” connector of the HLHP
control unit are not oxidised and are firmly connected
• With the starter key in position “I” (ON), check that the lift position sensor is receiving power correctly (approx. 5 Vdc
between pin 3 (positive) and pin 1 (negative) of connector “POS”).
• With the starter key in position “I” (ON), and "HLHP1" and "HLHP2" connectors disconnected from the control unit,
connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “POS” and to the earth on the cab and check for 0 voltage (meter reading: 0V).
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 51 75 70 77
1 2 12 24 14 67 62
41 27 1 2 28 70 51 12 14 24 77 75 HLHP1
HLHP2
GND4
TK2 MS1
37 33 34 38 36 35 2
A
4
2
7.5A
F2A F15C
15A
L R POS
2 3 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 X55 1 2 3 4
+15 +30
F F
V V
0.013.9307.4 0.013.9308.4
D0034660
20-129

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the lift position sensor is shorting to earth.
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on the connector “POS” of the lift position sensor and the “HLHP” connector of the HLHP
control unit are not oxidised and are firmly connected
• With the starter key in position “I” (ON), check that the lift position sensor is receiving power correctly (approx. 5 Vdc
between pin 3 (positive) and pin 1 (negative) of connector “POS”).
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF) and "HLHP1" and "HLHP2" connectors disconnected from the control unit,
connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “POS” and to the earth on the transmission and perform a resistance test to
check for shorts to earth (meter reading: infinity).
connect a test meter to pin 1 and pin 2 of connector “POS” and perform a resistance test to check that the connectors
are not shorting (meter reading: infinity).
• Check correct operation of the sensor (for technical details, see section 40)
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 51 75 70 77
1 2 12 24 14 67 62
41 27 1 2 28 70 51 12 14 24 77 75 HLHP1
HLHP2
GND4
TK2 MS1
37 33 34 38 36 35 2
A
4
2
7.5A
F2A F15C
15A
L R POS
2 3 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 X55 1 2 3 4
+15 +30
F F
V V
0.013.9307.4 0.013.9308.4
D0034660
20-130

Dispositivo guasto
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects an internal fault in the control unit in the input signal of the lift position sensor.
NOTE
This alarm is generated when the sensor is not receiving power correctly and the control unit fails to detect an input
signal. When this alarm is displayed, alarms related to the power inputs and earths of the components whose
power feed is connected in parallel to this sensor may also appear.
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on the “HLHP1” connector of the control unit and the “POS” connector of the rear PTO
solenoid are not oxidised and are firmly connected.
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 51 75 70 77
1 2 12 24 14 67 62
41 27 1 2 28 70 51 12 14 24 77 75 HLHP1
HLHP2
GND4
TK2 MS1
37 33 34 38 36 35 2
A
4
2
7.5A
F2A F15C
15A
L R POS
2 3 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 X55 1 2 3 4
+15 +30
F F
V V
0.013.9307.4 0.013.9308.4
D0034660
20-131
SPN 602 - FMI 3 EV salita sollevatore

Corto circuito +12V
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the lift UP solenoid is shorting to battery positive.
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on the “EVUP” solenoid connectors and “HLHP1" and "HLHP2” connectors of the HLHP
control unit are not oxidised and are firmly connected.
connect a test meter to pin 1 of connector “EVUP” and to the earth on the transmission and check for 0 voltage (meter
reading: 0V).
connect a test meter to pin2 of connector “EVUP” and to the earth on the transmission and check for 0 voltage (meter
reading: 0V).
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 42 72 79
1 2 29
HLHP1
41 27 1 2 28 72 29 78 42
HLHP2
GND4
MS1
32 9 34 33
7.5A
F2A F15C
15A
EVUP EVDW
1 2 1 2
+15 +30
0.013.9308.4
D0034670
20-132

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the lift UP solenoid is shorting to earth.
CHECK
connect a test meter to pin 1 of connector “EVUP” and to the earth on the transmission and perform a resistance test
to check for shorts to earth (meter reading: infinity).
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 42 72 79
1 2 29
HLHP1
41 27 1 2 28 72 29 78 42
HLHP2
GND4
MS1
32 9 34 33
7.5A
F2A F15C
15A
EVUP EVDW
1 2 1 2
+15 +30
0.013.9308.4
D0034670
20-133

non connesso
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the current draw of the lift UP solenoid valve is excessive.
CHECK
• Test the internal resistance of the solenoid (for the technical details, see unit 40).
connect a test meter to pin 1 and pin 2 of connector “EVUP” and perform a resistance test to check that the connectors
connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “EVUP” and to the earth on the transmission and perform a resistance test
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 42 72 79
1 2 29
HLHP1
41 27 1 2 28 72 29 78 42
HLHP2
GND4
MS1
32 9 34 33
7.5A
F2A F15C
15A
EVUP EVDW
1 2 1 2
+15 +30
0.013.9308.4
D0034670
20-134

Corto circuito
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects a short circuit in the control wire of the lift UP solenoid.
NOTE
This alarm is generated when the control unit detects an abnormal current draw (but not excessively high) on pin
72 of the connector "HLHP2".
CHECK
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF), connect a test meter to pin 2 of the connector “EVUP” and to the earth on the
transmission and test the resistance to check for shorts to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF), connect a test meter to pins 1 and 2 of connector “EVUP” and test the
resistance to check for a short circuit (meter reading: infinity).
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 42 72 79
1 2 29
HLHP1
41 27 1 2 28 72 29 78 42
HLHP2
GND4
MS1
32 9 34 33
7.5A
F2A F15C
15A
EVUP EVDW
1 2 1 2
+15 +30
0.013.9308.4
D0034670
20-135
SPN 603 - FMI 3 EV discesa sollevatore

Corto circuito +12V
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the lift DOWN solenoid is shorting to battery positive.
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on the “EVDW” solenoid connectors and “HLHP1" and "HLHP2” connectors of the HLHP
connect a test meter to pin 1 of connector “EVDW” and to the earth on the transmission and check for 0 voltage (meter
reading: 0V).
connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “EVDW” and to the earth on the transmission and check for 0 voltage (meter
reading: 0V).
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 42 72 79
1 2 29
HLHP1
41 27 1 2 28 72 29 78 42
HLHP2
GND4
MS1
32 9 34 33
7.5A
F2A F15C
15A
EVUP EVDW
1 2 1 2
+15 +30
0.013.9308.4
D0034670
20-136

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the lift DOWN solenoid is shorting to earth.
CHECK
connect a test meter to pin 1 of connector “EVDW” and to the earth on the transmission and perform a resistance test
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 42 72 79
1 2 29
HLHP1
41 27 1 2 28 72 29 78 42
HLHP2
GND4
MS1
32 9 34 33
7.5A
F2A F15C
15A
EVUP EVDW
1 2 1 2
+15 +30
0.013.9308.4
D0034670
20-137

non connesso
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the current draw of the lift DOWN solenoid valve is excessive.
CHECK
• Test the internal resistance of the solenoid (for the technical details, see unit 40).
connect a test meter to pin 1 and pin 2 of connector “EVDW” and perform a resistance test to check that the connectors
connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “EVDW” and to the earth on the transmission and perform a resistance test
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 42 72 79
1 2 29
HLHP1
41 27 1 2 28 72 29 78 42
HLHP2
GND4
MS1
32 9 34 33
7.5A
F2A F15C
15A
EVUP EVDW
1 2 1 2
+15 +30
0.013.9308.4
D0034670
20-138

Corto circuito
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects a short circuit in the control wire of the lift DOWN solenoid.
NOTE
This alarm is generated when the control unit detects an abnormal current draw (but not excessively high) on pin
78 of the connector "HLHP2".
CHECK
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF), connect a test meter to pin 2 of the connector “EVDW” and to the earth on the
transmission and test the resistance to check for shorts to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF), connect a test meter to pins 1 and 2 of connector “EVDW” and test the
resistance to check for a short circuit (meter reading: infinity).
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 42 72 79
1 2 29
HLHP1
41 27 1 2 28 72 29 78 42
HLHP2
GND4
MS1
32 9 34 33
7.5A
F2A F15C
15A
EVUP EVDW
1 2 1 2
+15 +30
0.013.9308.4
D0034670
20-139
SPN 620 - FMI 3 Sensore pos. sospens.

Corto circuito +12V
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the front axle suspension position sensor is shorting to battery positive.
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on the connector “X64” of the front suspension position sensor and the “HLHP1" and "HLHP2”
connectors of the HLHP control unit are not oxidised and are firmly connected.
• With the starter key in position “I” (ON), check that the front suspension position sensor is receiving power correctly
(approx. 8 Vdc between pin 3 (positive) and pin 1 (negative) of connector “X64”).
• With the starter key in position “I” (ON), connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “X64” and to the earth on the
transmission and check for 0 voltage (meter reading: 0V).
• Check correct operation of the sensor (for technical details, see section 40).
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 47 51 71
1 2 33 12 24 14
HLHP1
41 27 1 2 28 47 33 71 51 12 14 24
HLHP2
TK2 0.013.9307.4
34
33
GND4 MS1 A
6 3 1 2 3
GND2
G13 0.013.9308.4
1 3 2 5 4 6
7.5A
15A
F2A F15C
UP DW X64
1 2 1 2 2 3 1
+15 +30
0.013.9327.4
D0030860
20-140
SPN 620 - FMI 4 Sensore pos. sospens.

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the front suspension position sensor is disconnected.
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on the connector “X64” of the front suspension position sensor and the “HLHP1" and "HLHP2”
• With the starter key in position “I” (ON), check that the front suspension position sensor is receiving power correctly
(approx. 8 Vdc between pin 3 (positive) and pin 1 (negative) of connector “X64”).
• Check continuity between pin 71 of connector “HLHP2” and pin 2 of connector “X64”.
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF), connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “X64” and to the earth on the
transmission and perform a resistance test to check for shorts to earth (meter reading: infinity).
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 47 51 71
1 2 33 12 24 14
HLHP1
41 27 1 2 28 47 33 71 51 12 14 24
HLHP2
TK2 0.013.9307.4
34
33
GND4 MS1 A
6 3 1 2 3
GND2
G13 0.013.9308.4
1 3 2 5 4 6
7.5A
15A
F2A F15C
UP DW X64
1 2 1 2 2 3 1
+15 +30
0.013.9327.4
D0030860
20-141
SPN 621 - FMI 2 EV salita sospens.

Segnale non valido
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects an internal fault in the control unit on the power feed to the front axle suspension UP solenoid.
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on the “HLHP1” connector of the control unit and the “UP” connector of the front axle UP
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 47 51 71
1 2 33 12 24 14
HLHP1
41 27 1 2 28 47 33 71 51 12 14 24
HLHP2
TK2 0.013.9307.4
34
33
GND4 MS1 A
6 3 1 2 3
GND2
G13 0.013.9308.4
1 3 2 5 4 6
7.5A
15A
F2A F15C
UP DW X64
1 2 1 2 2 3 1
+15 +30
0.013.9327.4
D0030860
20-142

Corto circuito +12V
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the front axle suspension UP solenoid is shorting to battery positive.
CHECK
meter to pin 2 of connector “UP” and to the earth on the transmission and check for 0 voltage (meter reading: 0V).
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 47 51 71
1 2 33 12 24 14
HLHP1
41 27 1 2 28 47 33 71 51 12 14 24
HLHP2
TK2 0.013.9307.4
34
33
GND4 MS1 A
6 3 1 2 3
GND2
G13 0.013.9308.4
1 3 2 5 4 6
7.5A
15A
F2A F15C
UP DW X64
1 2 1 2 2 3 1
+15 +30
0.013.9327.4
D0030860
20-143

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the front axle suspension UP solenoid is shorting to earth.
CHECK
connector “UP” and to the earth on the transmission and perform a resistance test to check for shorts to earth (meter
reading: infinity).
present, the control unit must be renewed
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 47 51 71
1 2 33 12 24 14
HLHP1
41 27 1 2 28 47 33 71 51 12 14 24
HLHP2
TK2 0.013.9307.4
34
33
GND4 MS1 A
6 3 1 2 3
GND2
G13 0.013.9308.4
1 3 2 5 4 6
7.5A
15A
F2A F15C
UP DW X64
1 2 1 2 2 3 1
+15 +30
0.013.9327.4
D0030860
20-144

non connesso
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the front axle suspension UP solenoid is disconnected.
CHECK
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF), connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “UP” and to pin 47 of the " HLHP1"
connector and measure the resistance to verify that there is electrical continuity (test meter reading: 0 Ohm).
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF), connect a test meter to pin 1 of the “UP” connector and to the earth on the
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 47 51 71
1 2 33 12 24 14
HLHP1
41 27 1 2 28 47 33 71 51 12 14 24
HLHP2
TK2 0.013.9307.4
34
33
GND4 MS1 A
6 3 1 2 3
GND2
G13 0.013.9308.4
1 3 2 5 4 6
7.5A
15A
F2A F15C
UP DW X64
1 2 1 2 2 3 1
+15 +30
0.013.9327.4
D0030860
20-145

DESCRIPTION
CHECK
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 47 51 71
1 2 33 12 24 14
HLHP1
41 27 1 2 28 47 33 71 51 12 14 24
HLHP2
TK2 0.013.9307.4
34
33
GND4 MS1 A
6 3 1 2 3
GND2
G13 0.013.9308.4
1 3 2 5 4 6
7.5A
15A
F2A F15C
UP DW X64
1 2 1 2 2 3 1
+15 +30
0.013.9327.4
D0030860
20-146

Dispositivo guasto
DESCRIPTION
CHECK
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 47 51 71
1 2 33 12 24 14
HLHP1
41 27 1 2 28 47 33 71 51 12 14 24
HLHP2
TK2 0.013.9307.4
34
33
GND4 MS1 A
6 3 1 2 3
GND2
G13 0.013.9308.4
1 3 2 5 4 6
7.5A
15A
F2A F15C
UP DW X64
1 2 1 2 2 3 1
+15 +30
0.013.9327.4
D0030860
20-147
SPN 622 - FMI 2 EV discesa sospens.

Segnale non valido
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects an internal fault in the control unit on the power feed to the front axle suspension DOWN solenoid.
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on the “HLHP1” connector of the control unit and the “DW” connector of the front axle DOWN
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 47 51 71
1 2 33 12 24 14
HLHP1
41 27 1 2 28 47 33 71 51 12 14 24
HLHP2
TK2 0.013.9307.4
34
33
GND4 MS1 A
6 3 1 2 3
GND2
G13 0.013.9308.4
1 3 2 5 4 6
7.5A
15A
F2A F15C
UP DW X64
1 2 1 2 2 3 1
+15 +30
0.013.9327.4
D0030860
20-148

Corto circuito +12V
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the front axle suspension DOWN solenoid is shorting to battery positive.
CHECK
meter to pin 2 of connector “DW” and to the earth on the transmission and check for 0 voltage (meter reading: 0V).
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 47 51 71
1 2 33 12 24 14
HLHP1
41 27 1 2 28 47 33 71 51 12 14 24
HLHP2
TK2 0.013.9307.4
34
33
GND4 MS1 A
6 3 1 2 3
GND2
G13 0.013.9308.4
1 3 2 5 4 6
7.5A
15A
F2A F15C
UP DW X64
1 2 1 2 2 3 1
+15 +30
0.013.9327.4
D0030860
20-149

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the front axle suspension DOWN solenoid is shorting to earth.
CHECK
connector “DW” and to the earth on the transmission and perform a resistance test to check for shorts to earth (meter
reading: infinity).
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 47 51 71
1 2 33 12 24 14
HLHP1
41 27 1 2 28 47 33 71 51 12 14 24
HLHP2
TK2 0.013.9307.4
34
33
GND4 MS1 A
6 3 1 2 3
GND2
G13 0.013.9308.4
1 3 2 5 4 6
7.5A
15A
F2A F15C
UP DW X64
1 2 1 2 2 3 1
+15 +30
0.013.9327.4
D0030860
20-150

non connesso
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the front axle suspension DOWN solenoid is disconnected.
CHECK
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF), connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “DW” and to pin 33 of the " HLHP1"
connector and measure the resistance to verify that there is electrical continuity (test meter reading: 0 Ohm).
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF), connect a test meter to pin 1 of connector “DW” and to the earth on the
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 47 51 71
1 2 33 12 24 14
HLHP1
41 27 1 2 28 47 33 71 51 12 14 24
HLHP2
TK2 0.013.9307.4
34
33
GND4 MS1 A
6 3 1 2 3
GND2
G13 0.013.9308.4
1 3 2 5 4 6
7.5A
15A
F2A F15C
UP DW X64
1 2 1 2 2 3 1
+15 +30
0.013.9327.4
D0030860
20-151

DESCRIPTION
CHECK
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 47 51 71
1 2 33 12 24 14
HLHP1
41 27 1 2 28 47 33 71 51 12 14 24
HLHP2
TK2 0.013.9307.4
34
33
GND4 MS1 A
6 3 1 2 3
GND2
G13 0.013.9308.4
1 3 2 5 4 6
7.5A
15A
F2A F15C
UP DW X64
1 2 1 2 2 3 1
+15 +30
0.013.9327.4
D0030860
20-152

Dispositivo guasto
DESCRIPTION
CHECK
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 47 51 71
1 2 33 12 24 14
HLHP1
41 27 1 2 28 47 33 71 51 12 14 24
HLHP2
TK2 0.013.9307.4
34
33
GND4 MS1 A
6 3 1 2 3
GND2
G13 0.013.9308.4
1 3 2 5 4 6
7.5A
15A
F2A F15C
UP DW X64
1 2 1 2 2 3 1
+15 +30
0.013.9327.4
D0030860
20-153
SPN 631 - FMI 9 Errore CAN Bracciolo -

messaggio in timeout
DESCRIPTION
Detection of the absence of a connection via the CANBUS to the armrest
CHECK
• The HLHP control unit detects that the CANBUS connection to the transmission control unit is either not present or not
correct.
• For details, see heading “5.5 CANBUS ALARMS”.
20-154
SPN 632 - FMI 9 Errore CAN TCU

DESCRIPTION
Detection of the absence of a connection via the CANBUS to the transmission control unit.
CHECK
• The HLHP control unit detects that the CANBUS connection to the transmission control unit is either not present or not
correct.
• For details, see heading"5.6 CANBUS ALARMS".
SPN 633 - FMI 9 Errore CAN Motore

DESCRIPTION
Detection of the absence of a connection via the CANBUS to the engine control unit.
CHECK
• The HLHP control unit detects that the CANBUS connection to the engine control unit is either not present or not
correct.
• For details, see heading"5.6 CANBUS ALARMS".
20-155
SPN 653 - FMI 2 Errore CAN Motore

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects an internal fault in the control unit on the power feed to the differential lock solenoid.
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on the “HLHP1” connector of the control unit and the “EVDF” connector of the differential lock
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 43 34
1 2
41 27 1 2 28 43 34 HLHP1
GND4
TK2
17 16
7.5A
F2A F15C
15A
EVDF EVDT
2 1 2 1
+15 +30 GND2
0.013.9307.4
D0034640
20-156
SPN 653 - FMI 3 EV differenziale

Corto circuito +12V
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the differential lock solenoid is shorting to battery positive.
CHECK
meter to pin 2 of connector “EVDF” and to the earth on the transmission and check for 0 voltage (meter reading: 0V).
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 43 34
1 2
41 27 1 2 28 43 34 HLHP1
GND4
TK2
17 16
7.5A
F2A F15C
15A
EVDF EVDT
2 1 2 1
+15 +30 GND2
0.013.9307.4
D0034640
20-157

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the differential lock solenoid is shorting to earth.
CHECK
connector “EVDF” and to the earth on the transmission and perform a resistance test to check for shorts to earth (meter
reading: infinity).
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 43 34
1 2
41 27 1 2 28 43 34 HLHP1
GND4
TK2
17 16
7.5A
F2A F15C
15A
EVDF EVDT
2 1 2 1
+15 +30 GND2
0.013.9307.4
D0034640
20-158

non connesso
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the differential lock solenoid is not connected.
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on the “HLHP1” connector of the control unit and the “EVPTO2” connector of the differential
lock solenoid are not oxidised and are firmly connected
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF), connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “EVDF” and to pin 43 of the "
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF), connect a test meter to pin 1 of connector “EVDF” and to the earth on the
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 43 34
1 2
41 27 1 2 28 43 34 HLHP1
GND4
TK2
17 16
7.5A
F2A F15C
15A
EVDF EVDT
2 1 2 1
+15 +30 GND2
0.013.9307.4
D0034640
20-159

DESCRIPTION
CHECK
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 43 34
1 2
41 27 1 2 28 43 34 HLHP1
GND4
TK2
17 16
7.5A
F2A F15C
15A
EVDF EVDT
2 1 2 1
+15 +30 GND2
0.013.9307.4
D0034640
20-160

Dispositivo guasto
DESCRIPTION
CHECK
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 43 34
1 2
41 27 1 2 28 43 34 HLHP1
GND4
TK2
17 16
7.5A
F2A F15C
15A
EVDF EVDT
2 1 2 1
+15 +30 GND2
0.013.9307.4
D0034640
20-161
SPN 654 - FMI 2 Alimen. sensori 8V

Segnale non valido
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects a short circuit in 8V sensor power feed.
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on the “HLHP1” and "HLHP2" connectors of the control unit are not oxidised and are firmly
connected
• With the starter key in position “I” (ON) and the " HLHP1" connector disconnected, connect a test meter to pin 51 of
connector “HLHP1” and to the earth on the cab and check for 0 voltage (meter reading: 0V).
connector “HLHP1” and to the earth on the cab and perform a resistance test to check for shorts to earth (meter
reading: infinity).
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 51 71 70 77
1 2 12 24 14
41 27 1 2 28 70 51 12 14 24 77 71 HLHP1
HLHP2
GND4
TK2 MS1
37 33 34 38 1
A
2
7.5A
F2A F15C
15A
3
G13
6 4 5
0.013.9308.4
+15 +30
L R
2 3 1 2 3 1 1 2 3 X64
F F POS
0.013.9307.4 0.013.9327.4
D0034620
20-162
SPN 655 - FMI 2 Alimen. sensori 5V

Segnale non valido
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects a short circuit in the 5V sensors power supply line.
NOTE
Remove lift console and connect also connector X38
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on the “HLHP1” and "HLHP2" connectors of the control unit are not oxidised and are firmly
connected
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF) and the " HLHP2" connector disconnected, connect a test meter to pin 67 of
connector “HLHP2” and to the earth on the cab and perform a resistance test to check for 0 voltage (meter reading: 0V).
connector “HLHP2” and to the earth on the cab and perform a resistance test to check for shorts to earth (meter
reading: infinity).
• Check that connectors G38 are disconnected and are not oxidized or damaged.
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41 75
1 2 12 24 14 67 62
41 27 1 2 28 12 14 24 62 67 75 HLHP1
HLHP2
GND4
TK2 MS1
34 36 35 2
A
4
2
7.5A
F2A F15C
15A
POS
3 2 1 X55 1 2 3 4
+15 +30
V V
0.013.9307.4 0.013.9308.4
D0034610
20-163
SPN 656 - FMI 12 Sensore Radar

Dispositivo guasto
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the radar, when installed, does not send any signals when the travel speed exceeds 2 km/h.
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on the "RADAR" and “HLHP1" connectors of the control unit are not oxidised and are firmly
connected.
• With the starter key in position “I” (ON), check that the radar is receiving power correctly (approx. 12 Vdc between pin
3 (positive) and pin 1 (negative) of connector "RADAR").
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF) and the “HLHP1” connector disconnected from the control unit, check for
electrical continuity between pin 7 of connector “HLHP1” and pin 2 of connector “RADAR”.
• Check that the radar is functioning correctly (for details, see section 40).
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41
1 2 7
41 27 1 2 28 7 HLHP1
TK2
GND4 27 28
GND2
RADAR
7.5A
F2A F15C F5A

15A
3A
2 3 1
F
+15 +30 +15
0.013.9307.4
D0034600
20-164
SPN 661 - FMI 8 Errore memoria

Blocco 0
DESCRIPTION
The control unit signals that EEPROM used to store the system parameters is damaged.
CHECK
• Repeat the procedure for initialization of the of the HLHP control unit (for details, see "4.4.1 INITIALIZATION OF THE
HLHP CONTROL UNIT") then check whether the alarm is still present, in which case the control unit will have to be
replaced.
20-165
SPN 662 - FMI 3 Pulsante PTO esterno

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the rear PTO control buttons on the rear fenders are continuously pressed.
NOTE
This alarm is generated when, for accidental reasons, one of the rear PTO control buttons remains pressed for
more than 1 minute. If this alarm first appears in the list of active alarms and is then transferred to the passive
alarms list, the problem is deemed to have been solved automatically.
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on the connectors “PTOSX”, "PTODX" and “HLHP2” of the HLHP control unit are not oxidised
and are firmly connected.
• Check that the pushbuttons are functioning correctly (for technical details, see Group 40)
meter to pin 1 of connectors “PTOSX” and "PTODX" and to the earth on the transmission and check for 0 voltage (meter
reading: 0V).
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41
1 2 60
HLHP1
41 27 1 2 28 60 HLHP2
0.014.3649.4
G4
9
GND4
G2
18
G17 G14
2 1 2 1
PTODX PTOSX
7.5A
F2A F15C F5A 1 2 1 2

15A
3A
+15 +30 +15
0.013.9309.4 0.013.9309.4
D0034630
20-166
SPN 689 - FMI 3 Sensore di sterzo

Corto circuito +12V
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the steering angle sensor is shorting to battery positive.
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on the connector “X55” of the steering angle sensor and the “HLHP1" and "HLHP2”
• With the starter key in position “I” (ON), check that the steering angle sensor is receiving power correctly (approx. 5 Vdc
between pin 1 (positive) and pin 3 (negative) of connector “X55”).
• With the starter key in position “I” (ON), connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “X55” and to the earth on the
transmission and check for 0 voltage (meter reading: 0V).
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41
1 2 60
HLHP1
41 27 1 2 28 60 HLHP2
0.014.3649.4
G4
9
GND4
G2
18
G17 G14
2 1 2 1
PTODX PTOSX
7.5A
F2A F15C F5A 1 2 1 2

15A
3A
+15 +30 +15
0.013.9309.4 0.013.9309.4
D0034630
20-167
SPN 689 - FMI 4 Sensore di sterzo

DESCRIPTION
The ECU detects that the steering angle sensor is disconnected.
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on the connector “X55” of the steering angle sensor and the “HLHP1" and "HLHP2”
• With the starter key in position “I” (ON), check that the steering angle sensor is receiving power correctly (approx. 5 Vdc
• Check continuity between pin 77 of connector “HLHP2” and pin 2 of connector “X55”.
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF)), connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “X55” and to the earth on the
transmission and perform a resistance test to check for shorts to earth (meter reading: infinity).
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41
1 2 60
HLHP1
41 27 1 2 28 60 HLHP2
0.014.3649.4
G4
9
GND4
G2
18
G17 G14
2 1 2 1
PTODX PTOSX
7.5A
F2A F15C F5A 1 2 1 2

15A
3A
+15 +30 +15
0.013.9309.4 0.013.9309.4
D0034630
20-168
SPN 694 - FMI 3 Puls.manuale UP sollev.

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the lift UP control buttons on the rear fenders are continuously pressed.
NOTE
This alarm is generated when, for accidental reasons, one of the lift UP control buttons remains pressed for more
than 1 minute. If this alarm first appears in the list of active alarms and is then transferred to the passive alarms list,
the problem is deemed to have been solved automatically.
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on the connectors “UPSX”, "UPDX" and “HLHP1” of the HLHP control unit are not oxidised
meter to pin 1 of connectors "UPSX” and "UPDX" and to the earth on the transmission and check for 0 voltage (meter
reading: 0V).
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41
1 2 7 22 11
HLHP1
41 27 1 2 28 22 11 HLHP2
G4 0.014.3649.4
9
G2
GND4 19
20
G17 G14
4 3 1 4 3 1
7.5A
F2A F15C F5A

15A
DW UP DW UP
3A
1 2 DX 1 2 DX 1 2 SX 1 2 SX
+15 +30 +15
0.013.9309.4 0.013.9309.4
D0034590
20-169
SPN 695 - FMI 3 Puls.manuale DOWN sollev.

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the lift DOWN control buttons on the rear fenders are continuously pressed.
NOTE
This alarm is generated when, for accidental reasons, one of the lift DOWN control buttons remains pressed for
more than 1 minute. If this alarm first appears in the list of active alarms and is then transferred to the passive
alarms list, the problem is deemed to have been solved automatically.
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on the connectors “DWSX”, "DWDX" and “HLHP1” of the HLHP control unit are not oxidised
meter to pin 1 of connectors "DWSX” and "DWDX" and to the earth on the transmission and check for 0 voltage (meter
reading: 0V).
0.013.9301.4
27 28 41
1 2 7 22 11
HLHP1
41 27 1 2 28 22 11 HLHP2
G4 0.014.3649.4
9
G2
GND4 19
20
G17 G14
4 3 1 4 3 1
7.5A
F2A F15C F5A

15A
DW UP DW UP
3A
1 2 DX 1 2 DX 1 2 SX 1 2 SX
+15 +30 +15
0.013.9309.4 0.013.9309.4
D0034590
20-170
5. ALARMS 5.3 ENGINE CONTROL UNIT ALARMS
5.3 ENGINE CONTROL UNIT ALARMS

The engine control unit informs the operator of any malfunction affecting monitored components, both audibly and visually
(fault warning light) by way of the Infocenter.
The control unit signals faults by means of a graphic symbol in accordance with two modes:
1- flashing symbol: with this type of indication the ECU informs the operator that one of the components in the engine
system is faulty, but normal operation of the engine remains unaffected.
The engine continues to run correctly.
2- steadily illuminated symbol: this type of indication informs the operator that one of the components in the engine
system is faulty, and continuing to work under these conditions could result in serious damage to the engine.
Usually the engine will stop when an alarm of this type appears and it will no longer be possible to restart it until the
fault has been rectified.
Alarm code Serdia Infocenter Description Page.
SPN 84 - FMI 8 3 – Alarm available but not utilized. –

The engine control unit has detected the
SPN 91 - FMI 11 67 Motore, acc. pedale absence of a connection to the accelerator 20-187
Guasto non identificato pedal position sensor or a signal out of
range.
The control unit detects that the connection

SPN 91 - FMI 2 5 Motore, acc. pedale to the accelerator pedal position sensor is 20-175
Segnale non valido
either non-existent or short-circuiting.
The engine control unit detects that
Motore, Press. Atmosf.
SPN 108 - FMI 12 87 Dispositivo guasto atmospheric pressure is outside the 20-193
permissible limits.


SPN 102 - FMI 2 7 Motore, pressione turbo. the engine turbo charge pressure signal is 20-177
Segnale non valido
either non-existent or unreliable.

Motore, temperatura
SPN 110 - FMI 2 9 Segnale non valido the coolant temperature signal is either non- 20-178
Motore, temperatura The engine control unit has detected a

SPN 110 - FMI 0 31 coolant temperature higher than the alarm 20-180
Segnale troppo elevato threshold
Motore, temperatura The engine control unit has detected a

SPN 110 - FMI 0 41 coolant temperature higher than the alarm 20-183
Segnale troppo elevato threshold
SPN 171 - FMI 12 86 Motore, sens.temp. ECU The engine control unit detects that its 20-193
Dispositivo guasto internal temperature is too high.
20-171

Motore, Temp. gasolio
SPN 174 - FMI 2 11 Segnale non valido the fuel temperature signal is either non- 20-179
Motore, Temp. gasolio The engine control unit has detected a fuel
SPN 174 - FMI 0 36 t e m pe r a t ur e h i g h e r t h a n t h e a l a r m 20-182
Segnale troppo elevato threshold.

SPN 190 - FMI 8 1 Motore, sens. velocita signal from the engine pickup is either non- 20-174
Frequenza non corretta
existent or incorrect.
Motore, accel. manuale The control unit detects that the connection
SPN 201 - FMI 2 6 to the hand throttle position sensor is either 20-176
Segnale non valido non-existent or short-circuiting.
Motore, attuatore The engine control unit has detected that

SPN 536 - FMI 13 52 the reference signal for the position of the 20-185
Non Calibrato actuator does not match the requirement.

SPN 536 - FMI 12 50 Motore, attuatore the actuator position signal does not match 20-184
Dispositivo guasto
the requirement.

Motore, Regolatore the difference between the command and
SPN 535 - FMI 7 53 Difetto meccanico the response of the actuator is greater than 20-186
10%.

Motore, fuori giri
SPN 702 - FMI 14 35 FMI 14 engine is or has been running overspeed 20-181
(above 3100 rpm).
Motore, Errore CAN The engine control unit has detected that
SPN 743 - FMI 14 74 the connection to the CANBUS is not 20-189
FMI 14 present.
Motore, Errore CAN

SPN 743 - FMI 12 70 Dispositivo guasto CANBUS line controller damaged 20-188
Motore, Errore CAN The engine control unit has not been able to
SPN 743 - FMI 9 71 Errore aggiornamento read or send a message on the CANBUS. 20-188

SPN 752 - FMI 12 77 Motore, Errore Memoria error in reading the program memory during 20-189
Dispositivo guasto
the normal control cycle.

Motore, Errore Memoria
SPN 752 - FMI 2 93 Segnale non valido “Stack Overflow” error during the execution 20-194
of the program.
SPN 765 - FMI 12 76 Motore, Parametri E2P The engine control unit has detected an 20-189
Dispositivo guasto error in writing the parameters.
20-172

Motore, Parametri E2P
SPN 765 - FMI 2 90 Segnale non valido discrepancy between the parameters 20-194
written in EEPROM.
Motore, Errore interno The engine control unit has detected an

SPN 766 - FMI 2 78 error in reading the work memory during the 20-190
Segnale non valido normal control cycle.
The engine control unit detects an actuator

SPN 766 - FMI 2 80 Motore, Errore interno power input outside the specified 20-190
Segnale non valido
parameters.

Motore, Errore interno
SPN 766 - FMI 2 83 Segnale non valido supply to the accelerator pedal position 20-191
sensor is either absent or incorrect.
Motore, Errore interno The control unit detects that the power
SPN 766 - FMI 2 84 supply to the engine boost pressure sensor 20-192
Segnale non valido is either absent or incorrect.
SPN 766 - FMI 2 94 Motore, Errore interno The engine control unit has detected an 20-194
Segnale non valido internal error.
SPN 898 - FMI 2 68 Motore, Errore CAN Error in connection to CANBUS 20-188
Segnale non valido
20-173
ALARM N° 001
SPN 190 - FMI 8 Motore, sens. velocita

Frequenza non corretta
DESCRIPTION
The engine control unit detects that the signal from the engine pickup is either absent or incorrect.
CHECK
• Check that the engine speed pickup is installed correctly and at the specified distance from the pulse wheel
• Check that the internal resistance of the sensor is correct (for details, see section 40)
• Check that the contacts on connector “B40” and on engine control unit “MX1” are not oxidised and are firmly connected.
• Check for electrical continuity between pin 1 of connector “B40” and pin 12 of connector “MX1”.
1
14
12
13
MX1 MX2
13 12 14 1 2
G6
12 2
GND4
7.5A
F15B
G20
0.014.3650.4 13 12
+15
B40
1 2
0421.3753
0421.3172
0421.3182 0.013.9301.4
D0034580
20-174
ALARM N° 005
SPN 91 - FMI 2 Motore, acc. pedale

Segnale non valido
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the connection to the accelerator pedal position sensor is either absent or short-circuiting.
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on control unit connector "MX1" and connector “X16” are firmly connected and are not
oxidised
• Check that the accelerator pedal position sensor is receiving power correctly (approx. 5 Vdc measured between pin 32
(positive) and pin 30 (negative) of connector “X11").
• With connector “MX1” unplugged from the engine control unit, check for electrical continuity between pin 4 of
connector “X16” and pin 24 of connector “MX1”.
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF) and connector "MX1" disconnected from the engine control unit, connect a
test meter to pin 4 of connector “X16” and to the earth on the cab and perform a resistance test to check for shorts to
earth (meter reading: infinity).
• With connector "MX1" connected to the engine control unit and the starter key in position "I" (ON), connect a test meter
to pin 4 of connector "X16" and to the earth on the cab and check the voltage is zero (meter reading 0V).
• Check that the resistance characteristics of the accelerator pedal position sensor are correct (for technical details see
group 40).
1
14
23
24
25
14 1 2 23 24 25 MX2
GND4
G4
7.5A
F15B
7 6 4
X16
+15 1 4 2
v
0.013.9301.4 0.014.3649.4 D0030720
20-175
ALARM N° 006
SPN 201 - FMI 2 Motore, accel. manuale

Segnale non valido
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the connection to the hand throttle position sensor is either absent or short-circuiting.
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on ECU connector “MX1” and connector “GAS” are firmly connected and are not oxidised
(positive) and pin 30 (negative) of connector “X11")
• With connector “MX1” unplugged from the engine control unit, check for electrical continuity between pin 2 of the
"GAS" connector and pin 20 of connector “MX1”.
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF) and connector "MX1" disconnected from the engine control unit, connect a
test meter to pin 2 of the "GAS" connector and to the earth on the cab and perform a resistance test to check for shorts
to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• With the connector "MX1" connected to the engine control unit and the starter key in position "I" (ON), connect a test
meter to pin 2 of the "GAS" connector and to the cab earth and check that there is no voltage (test meter reading 0V).
group 40).
1
14
20
23
25
14 1 2 23 20 25 MX2
GND4
7.5A
F15B GAS
3 2 1
+15
v
0.013.9301.4 D0030740
20-176
ALARM N° 007
SPN 102 - FMI 2 Motore, pressione turbo.

Segnale non valido
DESCRIPTION
The engine control unit has detected that the engine turbo charge pressure signal is either absent or unreliable.
CHECK
• Check continuity between pin 1 of connector “B48” and pin 23 of connector “MX1”
• Check that the power input to the sensor is correct (5 Vdc approx measured between pin 3 (positive) and pin 1 (negative)
of connector “B48")
• With connector "MX1" disconnected from the engine control unit and the starter key in the "I" (ON) position, connect a
test meter to pin 2 of connector "B48" and to the engine earth, and check that voltage is zero (meter reading 0V).
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF), connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “B48” and to engine earth, and
measure the resistance to check for possible ground faults (meter reading: infinity).
1
14
23
24
25
MX1 25 24 23 14 1 2 MX2
G6
11 13 3
0.014.3650.4 G20 GND4

7.5A
25 24 23 F15B
2 3 4 1 B48
0421.3753 p +15
0421.3172
V
0421.3182 0.013.9301.4
D0034570
20-177
ALARM N° 009
SPN 110 - FMI 2 Motore, temperatura

Segnale non valido
DESCRIPTION
The engine control unit has detected that the coolant temperature signal is either absent or unreliable.
CHECK
• Check that the temperature sensor is functioning correctly and does not give a false reading; use an external infrared
thermometer and compare the reading with the value received from the sensor by the engine control unit.
• Check that the coolant level is within normal limits
• Check with the Serdia program that parameters "510 CoolantTempWarn" (normal value: 113 °C) and “514
CoolantTempEcy” (normal value: 130 °C) are correct
• With connector “MX1” unplugged from the engine control unit and the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, connect a test
meter to pin 1 of connector “B43” and to engine earth, and check that voltage is zero (meter reading 0V).
• With connector “MX1” unplugged from the
engine control unit and the starter key in the
“I” (ON) position, connect a test meter to pin
2 of connector “B43” and to engine earth, 1
and check that voltage is zero (meter 14
reading 0V).
2
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) 5
position, connect a test meter to pin 1 of
connector “B43” and to engine earth, and 8
measure the resistance to check for
possible ground faults (meter reading: 9
infinity).
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF),
connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector
“B43” and to the earth on the engine and
perform a resistance test to check for
MX1 9 5 8 14 1 2 MX2
shorts to earth (meter reading: infinity).
G6
10 1 8
0.014.3650.4 G20 GND4

9 5 8
7.5A
F15B
B43 B37
1 2 1 2
0421.3753 t° t° +15
0421.3172
0421.3182 0.013.9301.4
D0034560
20-178
ALARM N° 011
SPN 174 - FMI 2 Motore, Temp. gasolio

Segnale non valido
DESCRIPTION
The engine control unit has detected that the fuel temperature signal is either non-existent or unreliable.
CHECK
meter to pin 1 of connector “B37” and to engine earth, and check that there is no voltage registering (meter reading 0V).
meter to pin 2 of connector “B37” and to engine earth, and check that there is no voltage registering (meter reading 0V).
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF), connect a test meter to pin 1 of connector “B37” and to the earth on the engine
and perform a resistance test to check for shorts to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF), connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “B37” and to the earth on the engine
1
14
5 2
MX1 9 5 8 14 1 2 MX2
G6
10 1 8
0.014.3650.4 G20 GND4

9 5 8
7.5A
F15B
B43 B37
1 2 1 2
0421.3753 t° t° +15
0421.3172
0421.3182 0.013.9301.4
D0034560
20-179
ALARM N° 031

Segnale troppo elevato
DESCRIPTION
The engine control unit has detected a coolant temperature higher than the alarm threshold.
CHECK
• Check with the Serdia program that the parameter “510 CoolantTempWarn” is correct (normal value: 113 °C)
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 1 of connector “B43” and to engine earth, and
measure the resistance to verify that there are no short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
1
14
5 2
MX1 9 5 8 14 1 2 MX2
G6
10 1 8
0.014.3650.4 G20 GND4

9 5 8
7.5A
F15B
B43 B37
1 2 1 2
0421.3753 t° t° +15
0421.3172
0421.3182 0.013.9301.4
D0034560
20-180
ALARM N° 035
SPN 702 - FMI 14 Motore, fuori giri

FMI 14
DESCRIPTION
The engine control unit detects that the engine is or has been running overspeed (above 3100 rpm).
NOTE
This alarm is generally activated when, with the tractor on a downhill gradient, the engine is used as a brake and
forced to run at higher speed.
The alarm is usually reset automatically when the tractor reaches level ground.
If the alarm resets, no testing is necessary.
CHECK
• Check with the Serdia program that parameter “21 Speed over” is correct (normal value: 3100 rpm)
• Check that the engine speed pickup sensor functions correctly and does not give a false reading; use an external
sensor and compare the reading obtained with the value received from the pickup by the engine control unit.
• Check that the injection pumps control rod slides freely.
• Check that the internal resistance values for the actuator are correct (for details see section 40).
• Check that the parameter “1 TeethPickUp1” is correct (normal value=48).
20-181
ALARM N° 036
SPN 174 - FMI 0 Motore, Temp. gasolio

DESCRIPTION
The engine control unit has detected a fuel temperature higher than the alarm threshold.
CHECK
measure the resistance to verify that there are no short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
1
14
5 2
MX1 9 5 8 14 1 2 MX2
G6
10 1 8
0.014.3650.4 G20 GND4

9 5 8
7.5A
F15B
B43 B37
1 2 1 2
0421.3753 t° t° +15
0421.3172
0421.3182 0.013.9301.4
D0034560
20-182
ALARM N° 041

DESCRIPTION
The engine control unit has detected a coolant temperature higher than the alarm threshold.
CHECK
• Check that the coolant level is within normal limits
• Check with the Serdia program that the parameter “514 CoolantTempEcy” (normal value: 130 °C) is correct
measure the resistance to check for possible short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
1
14
5 2
MX1 9 5 8 14 1 2 MX2
G6
10 1 8
0.014.3650.4 G20 GND4

9 5 8
7.5A
F15B
B43 B37
1 2 1 2
0421.3753 t° t° +15
0421.3172
0421.3182 0.013.9301.4
D0034560
20-183
ALARM N° 050
SPN 536 - FMI 12 Motore, attuatore

Dispositivo guasto
DESCRIPTION
The engine control unit has detected that the actuator position signal does not match the requirement.
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “Y3” and on the control unit “MX1” are firmly attached and not oxidised.
• Check for electrical continuity between pin 4 of connector “Y3” and pin 19 of connector “MX1”.
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position and the engine 'off', connect a test meter to pin 4 of connector “Y3” and to
engine earth, and check that there is no voltage registering (meter reading: 0V).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 4 of connector “Y3” and to engine earth, and
• If the fault persists, renew the actuator.
1
14
19
MX1 19 14 1 2 MX2
G6
7
7.5A
F15B GND4
0.014.3650.4 G20
19
+15
Y3
5 4 3 2 1
0421.3753
0421.3172
0421.3182 0.013.9301.4
D0034550
20-184
ALARM N° 052
SPN 536 - FMI 13 Motore, attuatore

Non Calibrato
DESCRIPTION
The engine control unit has detected that the reference signal for the position of the actuator does not match the
requirement.
CHECK
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position and the engine 'off', connect a test meter to pin 5 of connector “Y3” and to
engine earth, and check that there is no voltage registering (meter reading: 0V).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 5 of connector “Y3” and to engine earth, and
• If the fault persists, renew the actuator.
1
14
16
2
18
MX1 18 16 14 1 2 MX2
G6
5
7.5A
F15B
GND4
0.014.3650.4 G20
18
+15
Y3
5 4 3 2 1
0421.3753
0421.3172
0421.3182 0.013.9301.4
D0034540
20-185
ALARM N° 053
SPN 535 - FMI 7 Motore, Regolatore

Difetto meccanico
DESCRIPTION
The engine control unit has detected that the difference between the command and the response of the actuator is greater
than 10%.
CHECK
• Check that the injection pumps control rod slides freely.
• Check that the fuel injection pumps have not seized.
1
14
16
2
18
19
MX1 18 19 16 14 1 2 MX2
G6
5 7
7.5A
F15B
GND4
0.014.3650.4 G20
18 19
+15
Y3
5 4 3 2 1
0421.3753
0421.3172
0421.3182 0.013.9301.4
D0034530
20-186
ALARM N° 067
SPN 091 - FMI 11 Motore, acc. pedale

Guasto non identificatot
DESCRIPTION
The engine control unit has detected the absence of a connection to the accelerator pedal position sensor or a signal out
of range.
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on control unit connector "MX1" and connector “X16” are firmly connected and are not
oxidised
group 40)
(positive) and pin 32 (negative) of the connector “X11")
• With connector “MX1” unplugged from the engine control unit, check for electrical continuity between pin 4 of
connector “X16” and pin 24 of connector “MX1”.
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF), connect a test meter to pin 4 of connector “X16” and to the earth on the cab
• With connector "MX1" connected to the engine control unit and the starter key in position "I" (ON), connect a test meter
to pin 4 of connector "X16" and to the earth on the cab and check the voltage is zero (meter reading 0V).
1
14
23
24
25
MX2 14 1 2 23 24 25
G4
7 6 4
GND4
7.5A
F15B X16
1 4 2
+15
v
0.013.9301.4 0.014.3649.4 D0030800
20-187
ALARM N° 068
SPN 898 - FMI 2 Motore, Errore CAN

Segnale non valido
DESCRIPTION
The engine control unit has not been able to read or send a message on the CANBUS.
CHECK
• For details, see chapter "5.6 CANBUS ALARMS".
ALARM N° 070

Dispositivo guasto
DESCRIPTION
The engine control unit has detected that the CANBUS controller is damaged.
CHECK
ALARM N° 071

Errore aggiornamento
DESCRIPTION
The engine control unit has not been able to read or send a message on the CANBUS.
CHECK
20-188
ALARM N° 074

FMI 14
DESCRIPTION
The engine control unit has detected that the connection to the CANBUS is not present.
CHECK
ALARM N° 076
SPN 765 - FMI 12 Motore, Parametri E2P

Dispositivo guasto
DESCRIPTION
The engine control unit has detected an error in writing the parameters.
CHECK
• Turn the starter key to “O” (OFF) and then back to “I” (ON).
• Repeat the data write procedure, and if the problem persists, contact the Technical Assistance Service.
ALARM N° 077
SPN 752 - FMI 12 Motore, Errore Memoria

Dispositivo guasto
DESCRIPTION
The engine control unit has detected an error in reading the program memory during the normal control cycle.
CHECK
• If the problem persists, contact the Technical Assistance Service.
20-189
ALARM N° 078
SPN 766 - FMI 2 Motore, Errore interno

Segnale non valido
DESCRIPTION
The engine control unit has detected an error in reading the work memory during the normal control cycle.
CHECK
• Note down the values of the parameters “3895 RAMTestAddr” and “3896 RAMTestPattern”
ALARM N° 080

Segnale non valido
DESCRIPTION
The engine control unit detects an actuator power input outside the specified parameters.
CHECK
• Check whether the alarm is still present, and, if so, contact the TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE SERVICE.
20-190
ALARM N° 083

Segnale non valido
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the power supply to the accelerator pedal position sensor is either absent or incorrect.
CHECK
(positive) and pin 2 (negative) of connector “X16")
1
14
23
24
25
14 1 2 23 24 25 MX2
GND4
G4
7.5A
F15B
7 6 4
X16
+15 1 4 2
v
0.013.9301.4 0.014.3649.4 D0030720
20-191
ALARM N° 084
SPN 766- FMI 2 Motore, Errore interno

Segnale non valido
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the power supply to the engine turbocharge pressure sensor is either absent or incorrect.
CHECK
• Check that the engine turbocharge pressure sensor is receiving power correctly (approx. 5 Vdc between pin 3 (positive)
and pin 1 (negative) of connector “B48”)
1
14
23
24
25
MX1 25 24 23 14 1 2 MX2
G6
13 11 3
0.014.3650.4 G20 GND4

7.5A
24 25 23 F15B
2 3 4 1 B48
p +15
0421.3172
V
0421.3182 0.013.9301.4
D0030750
20-192
ALARM N° 086
SPN 171 - FMI 12 Motore, sens.temp. ECU

Dispositivo guasto
DESCRIPTION
The engine control unit detects that its internal temperature is too high.
CHECK
• Turn the starter key to "O" (OFF) and wait a few minutes for the engine to cool down.
Turn the key back to "I" (ON) and check that the alarm does not reappear.
• If the alarm is repeated, contact the TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE SERVICE.
ALARM N° 087
SPN 108 - FMI 12 Motore, Press. Atmosf.

Dispositivo guasto
DESCRIPTION
The engine control unit detects that atmospheric pressure is outside the permissible limits.
CHECK
• Turn the starter key to "O" (OFF) and wait a few minutes.
Turn the key back to "I" (ON) and check that the alarm does not reappear.
• If the alarm is repeated, contact the TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE SERVICE.
20-193
ALARM N° 090
SPN 765 - FMI 2 Motore, Parametri E2P

Segnale non valido
DESCRIPTION
The engine control unit has detected a discrepancy between the parameters written in EEPROM.
CHECK
• Check that the parameter values to be written in the control unit EEPROM are correct and consistent with one another.
• Send the parameters to the control unit again.
ALARM N° 093
SPN 752 - FMI 2 Motore, Errore Memoria

Segnale non valido
DESCRIPTION
The engine control unit has detected a “Stack Overflow” error during the execution of the program.
CHECK
• Note down the values of parameters “3897 CStackTestFreeBytes” and “3898 IStackTestFreeBytes”
ALARM N° 094

Segnale non valido
DESCRIPTION
The engine control unit has detected an internal error.
CHECK
• Contact the Technical Assistance Service.
20-194
5. ALARMS 5.6 CANBUS ALARMS
5.6 CANBUS ALARMS

In order to remedy any problems signalled on the CANBUS by one or more of the control units, it is first necessary to fully
understand the method by which the control units are connected to the CANBUS.
The CANBUS physically consists of two twisted wires, designated CAN_H and CAN_L, along which data is transmitted by
the control units.
Between these two wires there are two 120 Ohm resistors, each connected in parallel, and therefore the resistance
measured at any point in the system should be 60 Ohm.
The resistors are physically located inside the Infocenter and the transmission control unit, which therefore can be
considered as termination control units.
The supplementary CANBUS connector and all the other control units are connected in parallel to the line connecting the
two termination control units.
Should one of the two resistors burn out, a resistance reading measured at any point of the system will be 120 Ohm.
In this case the CANBUS line continues to function, but the influence of external interference from high voltage cables,
radio transmitters and other devices that may generate radio signals, causes the generation of CANBUS alarms which,
although they will normally self-reset, may appear very frequently.
In this case therefore you may encounter problems with some of the various tractor systems that cannot be solved by
means of electrical/electronic diagnostics of the components associated with the faulty system since they are related
exclusively to a problem on the CANBUS line.
When one of the two termination control units is disconnected, or if a CANBUS wire comes loose from a connector of one
these two control units, as in the previous case, a resistance of 120 Ohm may be measured at any point of the system, but
the cause of the problem can be rectified by repairing the faulty control unit connection.
If the two CANBUS wires were short circuited to each other, the resistance would be zero (0 Ohm). In this case all the control
units would signal all the detectable faults.
The same situation would occur if one of the two wires shorts to ground or to a positive power supply on one of the CANBUS
line wires
When a problem on the CANBUS line is detected by one or more control units, connect the ART to the HLHP control unit
and access the "CAN Monitor" screen to check which control units are correctly connected to the CANBUS; use the
following table to identify the cause of the alarm.
20-287
5.6.1 ALARMS TABLE
Control unit that Code on Cases

detects alarm Alarm description
ECU HLHP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CAN EMR Connection to the engine control unit OK FAULT FAULT OK FAULT OK FAULT
Connection to the transmission control

CANBUS status on CAN TCU OK FAULT OK FAULT FAULT OK FAULT
unit
HLHP
x.x CAN Status”
CAN IC Connection to the Infocenter FAULT OK OK OK FAULT OK FAULT
CAN UI Connection to the armrest OK FAULT OK FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT
Communication problem with HLHP

C0 C0 control unit (range gear engagement P A A A P R
control)

C1 C1 P A A A P R
control unit (forward/reverse selection)
Communication problem with engine

C3 C3 control unit (engine speed) P A A P R
Transmission
CF CF P A A P R
control unit
D1 D1 Communication problem with engine P A A P R

control unit

D2 D2 control unit P A A A P R
SPN 51 - FMI 12 Communication problem with engine A A A P

control unit
SPN 63 - FMI 2 Communication problem with A A A P

transmission control unit

SPN 561 - FMI 2 control unit A A A P
HLHP
SPN 631 - FMI 9 Connection to armrest control unit not A A A A P
present
SPN 632 - FMI 9 Connection to transmission control unit A A A P

not present
Connection to engine control unit not

SPN 633 - FMI 9 present A A A P
SPN 898 -
68 Accelerator pedal data reception error P A A A P R
FMI 2
71 SPN 743 - Re c e p t i o n / t r a n s m i s s i o n e r r o r o n P P A P P P P R
FMI 9 CANBUS
Engine
SPN 743 -
70
FMI 12 CANBUS line controller damaged
P
SPN 743 - Fault on CANBUS line

74 P A P P P A R
FMI 14
KEY
R: alarm caused by interference on CANBUS, reset automatically and transferred to passive alarms
A: active alarm
P: alarm that might be present
20-288
CASE 1 ANALYSIS
DESCRIPTION
This fault is generally caused by disconnection of the Infocenter connector or by a break in one of the CANBUS wires in
section "1" or "2".
WARNING
Before testing the resistance or continuity of the wiring, turn the starter key to "O" (OFF) and disconnect the lead
from the negative battery terminal.
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “X18” of the Infocenter are not oxidized and are firmly secured.
• Connect a test meter to pin 14 and to pin 15 of connector “X18” on the wiring side and check that the resistance is 120
Ohm.
• If the resistance reading is 0 Ohm, reconnect connector "X18" to the Infocenter and connect a test meter to pin 3 and
to pin 4 of connector "G1" on the central wiring side and check that the resistance is 120 Ohm.
• If the resistance reading is 0 Ohm, the fault can be attributed to a break in one of the wires of the CANBUS in the central
wiring loom and can be remedied by repairing or renewing the wiring loom.
• If the resistance reading is 120 Ohm, check the continuity of the wiring between pin 3 of connector "G1" and pin 14 of
connector "X18" and between pin 4 of connector "G1" and pin 15 (or 11) of connector "X18".
If continuity is not detected, the instrument panel wiring must be repaired or renewed.
X3 HLHP1 MX2 X11

3 4 39 40 12 13 28 20
6 7 8 9
GEARBOX
X18
G1 27
CAN RES 11 CAN RES
CAN H 14 3 25 CAN H
CAN L 15 4 26 CAN L
1 2 3 4 5
D0030970
20-289
CASE 2 ANALYSIS
DESCRIPTION
This fault is generally caused by disconnection of the HLHP control unit or by a break in one of the CANBUS wires in section
"3".
WARNING
CHECK
• The fault can be attributed to a break in one of the CANBUS wires and can be remedied by repairing or renewing the
wiring.
X3 HLHP1 MX2 X11

3 4 39 40 12 13 28 20
6 7 8 9
GEARBOX
X18
G1 27
CAN RES 11 CAN RES
CAN H 14 3 25 CAN H
CAN L 15 4 26 CAN L
1 2 3 4 5
D0030980
20-290
CASE 3 ANALYSIS
DESCRIPTION
This fault is generally caused by the disconnection or by a break in one of the CANBUS wires in section “8”.
WARNING
CHECK
• Check that the power supply to the engine control unit is correct (12 Vdc measured between pin 14 (positive) and pins
1 and 2 (negative) of connector "MX2" on wiring side).
If the voltage is zero, check the condition of fuse F15B (7.5 A).
• Check that the contacts on connector “MX2” of the engine control unit are not oxidised and are firmly secured.
• Connect a test meter to pin 12 and to pin 13 of connector “MX2” on the wiring side and check that the resistance is
approx. 60 Ohm.
If the resistance reading is different from the value specified above, repair or renew the wiring loom.
• If the fault is not identified by the above checks, it can be attributed to a defective CANBUS controller, and can be
remedied by renewing the engine control unit.
Before renewing the engine control unit, use SERDIA to check the active alarms detected by the control unit.
If alarm 70 is present, the engine control unit must be renewed.
X3 HLHP1 MX2 X11

3 4 39 40 12 13 28 20
6 7 8 9
GEARBOX
X18
G1 27
CAN RES 11 CAN RES
CAN H 14 3 25 CAN H
CAN L 15 4 26 CAN L
1 2 3 4 5
D0030990
20-291
CASE 4 ANALYSIS
DESCRIPTION
This fault is generally caused by the disconnection of the transmission control unit connector or by a break in one of the
CANBUS wires in section "4" or "5".
WARNING
CHECK
• Check that the power supply to the transmission control unit is correct with the starter key in position "0" (OFF) (12 Vdc
measured between pins 23 and 68 (positive) and between pins 1 and 2 (negative) of the "GEARBOX" connector on the
wiring side).
If the voltage is zero, check the condition of fuse F5C (7.5A).
• Check that the power supply to the transmission control unit is correct when the starter key is in the "I" (ON) position (12
Vdc measured between pins 45 and 66 (positive) and between pins 1 and 2 (negative) of connector "GEARBOX" on the
wiring side).
If the voltage is zero, check the condition of fuse F16B (7.5A).
• Check that the contacts on the “GEARBOX” connector of the transmission control unit are not oxidised and are firmly
secured.
• Connect a test meter to pin 26 and to pin 27 of the “GEARBOX” connector of the control unit and check that the
resistance is approx.120 Ohm.
If the resistance differs from this value, fit a new control unit.
• Connect a test meter to pin 25 and to pin 26 (or to pin 27) of the “GEARBOX” connector on the wiring side and check that
the resistance is approx. 120 Ohm.
If the resistance reading differs from this value, repair or renew wiring.
remedied by renewing the transmission control unit. Before proceeding with renewal of the engine control unit, use the
EDS to check all the active alarms detected by the control unit.
X3 HLHP1 MX2 X11

3 4 39 40 12 13 28 20
6 7 8 9
GEARBOX
X18
G1 27
CAN RES 11 CAN RES
CAN H 14 3 25 CAN H
CAN L 15 4 26 CAN L
1 2 3 4 5
D0031000
20-292
CASE 5 ANALYSIS
DESCRIPTION
This fault is generally caused by the disconnection of connector "HLHP1" of the HLHP control unit or by a break in one of
the CANBUS wires in section "7".
CHECK
• Check that the power supply to the HLHP control unit is correct with the starter key in the "0" (OFF) position (12 Vdc
between pins 1 and 27 (positive) and between pins 2 and 28 (negative) of the connector "HLHP1" of the wiring loom).
If the voltage is zero, check the condition of fuse F15C (15A).
• Check that the power supply to the transmission control unit is correct with the starter key in the "I" (ON) position (12
Vdc between pin 41 (positive) and between pins 2 and 28 (negative) of the "GEARBOX" wiring connector).
If the voltage is zero, check the condition of fuse F2A (7.5A).
• Check that the contacts on connector “HLHP1” of the control unit are not oxidised and are firmly secured.
• Connect a test meter to pin 39 and to pin 40 of connector “HLHP1” on the wiring side and check that the resistance is
60 Ohm.
remedied by renewing the HLHP control unit.
X3 HLHP1 MX2 X11

3 4 39 40 12 13 28 20
6 7 8 9
GEARBOX
X18
G1 27
CAN RES 11 CAN RES
CAN H 14 3 25 CAN H
CAN L 15 4 26 CAN L
1 2 3 4 5
D0031010
20-293
CASE 6 ANALYSIS
DESCRIPTION
This fault is generally caused by the disconnection of the armrest connector or by a break in one of the CANBUS wires in
section “9”.
CHECK
• Check that the armrest is receiving power correctly with the starter key in position “I” (ON) (12 Vdc between pin 7
(positive) and pin 26 (negative) of connector “X11” on wiring side).
If the voltage is zero, check the condition of fuse F9A.
• Check that the contacts on the armrest connector “X11” are not oxidised and are firmly secured.
• Connect a test meter to pin 20 and to pin 28 of connector “X11” on the wiring side and check that the resistance is
approx. 60 Ohm.
• If the fault is not identified by the above checks, it can be attributed to a defective CANBUS controller and can be
remedied by renewing the HLHP control unit.
X3 HLHP1 MX2 X11

3 4 39 40 12 13 28 20
6 6 8 9
GEARBOX
X18
G1 27
CAN RES 11 CAN RES
CAN H 14 3 25 CAN H
CAN L 15 4 26 CAN L
1 2 3 4 5
D0034410
20-294
CASE 7 ANALYSIS
DESCRIPTION
This fault is caused by a short circuit of the CANBUS wires at any point in the system or by a short circuit of the wires to earth
or to battery positive.
CHECK
• Check that the contacts of connector “X3” of the supplementary CANBUS socket are not short circuited.
• Check that the contacts on connectors “X11” of the armrest (not fitted in this version), “HLHP1” of the HLHP control
unit, “GEARBOX” of the transmission control unit, “MX2” of the engine control unit and “X18” of the Infocenter are not
oxidised or short circuited and that they are firmly secured.
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF), and with all the connectors connected to their respective control units,
connect a test meter to pin 3 of connector “X3” and to ground on the cab and perform a resistance test to check for
shorts to earth (meter reading: infinity).
Repeat the procedure with pin 4 of connector “X3”.
• With the starter key in position “I” (ON), and with all the connectors connected to their respective control units, connect
a test meter to pin 3 of connector “X3” and to ground on the cab and check for 0 voltage (meter reading: 0V).
Repeat the procedure with pin 4 of connector “X3”.
• If the fault is not identified by the above checks, it can be attributed to a short circuit between the CANBUS wires, and
can be remedied by repairing or renewing the wiring loom.
X3 HLHP1 MX2 X11

3 4 39 40 12 13 28 20
6 6 8 9
GEARBOX
X18
G1 27
CAN RES 11 CAN RES
CAN H 14 3 25 CAN H
CAN L 15 4 26 CAN L
1 2 3 4 5
D0031020
20-295
CASE 8 ANALYSIS
DESCRIPTION
This fault is caused by external interference created by high tension wires, radio transmitters and other devices that
generate radio frequency signals that can interfere with data transmission on the CANBUS.
CHECK
• The fault can be caused by burning out of the termination resistors or by the presence of strong electromagnetic fields
in the working area.
• Check that the contacts on connectors “GEARBOX” of the transmission control unit and “X18” of the Infocenter are not
oxidised or short circuited and that they are firmly secured.
• Connect a test meter to pin 25 and to pin 27 of connector “GEARBOX” of the control unit and check that the resistance
is approx. 120 Ohm.
If the resistance differs from this value, fit a new control unit.
• Connect a test meter to pin 14 and to pin 11 of connector “X18” on the Infocenter side and check that the resistance is
approx.120 Ohm.
If the resistance differs from this value, fit a new Infocenter.
X3 HLHP1 MX2 X11

3 4 39 40 12 13 28 20
6 6 8 9
GEARBOX
X18
G1 27
CAN RES 11 CAN RES
CAN H 14 3 25 CAN H
CAN L 15 4 26 CAN L
1 2 3 4 5
D0031020
20-296
5. ALARMS 5.4 TRANSMISSION CONTROL UNIT ALARMS
5.4 TRANSMISSION CONTROL UNIT ALARMS

The transmission control unit warns the operator of any malfunction affecting monitored components, by way of audible
signals, and messages generated in the display on the right hand front upright of the cab and on the Infocenter.
The fault signal on the transmission display involve the display of the key symbol together with a code and, in certain cases,
also an audible alarm, while the fault is signalled on the Infocenter by means of text messages.
In the event of two or more alarms being activated simultaneously, the display will show only the one with the higher code.
All alarms presented on the display correspond directly to the alarm conditions detected via EDS, apart from a certain
number associated with malfunction of the connection between the control unit and the display, which are shown on the
display with the “EE” alarm code.
In addition to coded alarms, there are also conditions in which the control unit is unable to diagnose the cause of the fault;
these are identifiable from abnormalities in operation of the transmission.
Depending on the severity of the fault by which it is triggered, a given alarm can have a limiting effect on the way the
transmission is managed.
In many instances, where the fault is not serious, a warning appears in the display and the operation of the transmission
remains substantially unaffected, whereas in other cases, the warning is displayed and operation will be totally inhibited,
or in less serious cases, simply limited.
5.4.1 DEFINITION OF TRANSMISSION OPERATING MODES

When a fault occurs, depending on the severity, the transmission control will respond by selecting one of the following
modes:
1 - Limp-Home
2 - Limp-Home-Ls
3 - No-Aps
4 - Substitute strategy
5 - Emergency drive
6 - Transmission shutdown
7 - TC-Shutdown
1- Limp-Home
In this mode operation of the transmission is limited.
When this operating mode is activated the transmission automatically selects neutral and the powershift can no
longer be used; the gears must be shifted with the mechanical linkage only.
Forward/reverse direction changes can only be effected when the tractor is completely stationary and the shuttle
lever is in the neutral position for more than 1 second (or, if exclusively alarm 47 is present direction changes are
possible simply by pressing the clutch pedal).
To quit this operating mode the following conditions must be met: fault repaired and shuttle lever moved to
"NEUTRAL" or clutch pedal fully depressed.
2- Limp-Home-Ls
When this operating mode is activated the transmission automatically selects neutral.
Forward/reverse direction changes can only be effected when the tractor is completely stationary and the shuttle
lever is in the neutral position for more than 1 second.
3- No-Aps
In this operating mode the transmission operates only in manual mode.
When this operating mode is activated the transmission is managed exclusively by commands given directly by the
operator.
To quit this operating mode the fault must be repaired.
4- Substitute strategy
In this operating mode the transmission management system locks up and the powershift can no longer be used; the
20-195
gears must be shifted with the mechanical linkage only.

5- Emergency drive
The powershift can no longer be used and the gears must be shifted with the mechanical linkage only.
The main clutch engagement curve reverts to the default settings.
It is not possible to modulate the main clutch using the clutch pedal (each movement of the clutch pedal causes full
engagement or disengagement of the clutch).
The power supply to solenoid valves Y2, Y4, Y5 and Y6 is removed.
Any variation in the signal from the clutch pedal position sensor or the clutch pedal depressed sensor will cause the
transmission to revert to neutral.
The tractor will only start to move from completely stationary when the shuttle lever is placed in neutral position for
more than one second.
"NEUTRAL".
6- Transmission shutdown
In this mode the transmission operation is completely inhibited.
When this shutdown occurs the transmission locks up completely and reverts to neutral; the power supply to
solenoid valves Y1, Y3, HK and Y7 is removed.
"NEUTRAL".
7- TC-Shutdown
In this mode the transmission is completely locked in its operation.
When this shutdown occurs the transmission locks up completely and reverts to neutral; the power supply to all
solenoid valves is removed.
To quit this operating mode the following condition must be met: fault repaired.
5.4.2 SYSTEM ANOMALIES NOT DETECTED BY THE TRANSMISSION CONTROL UNIT
Abnormality Page
The “EE” message appears on the display 20-271
EDS software unable to connect to the transmission control unit 20-272
Transmission switches unexpectedly from forward or reverse drive into neutral 20-273
The transmission continues to shift range automatically every 1 or 2 seconds 20-274
Momentary loss of traction with the tractor in motion 20-274

The transmission remains in neutral 20-275
20-196
Art Infocenter Description Operating mode Page.

10-Calib. friz. prin. The control unit detects errors in the
10 20-203
TC-possibile errore main clutch calibration values
11-Pedale frizione E2P The control unit detects errors in the
11 20-203
TC-possibile errore main clutch calibration values

12-Sensore temperatura
12 TC-Ingresso a +12V the power input to the transmission oil 20-204
temperature sensor.
13-Sensore temperatura The control unit detects a problem with

13 the power input to the temperature 20-205
TC-Ingresso a massa sensor.
The control unit detects a discrepancy

between the speeds sensed at the main
14-Switch di neutra clutch input and at the transmission
14 output, indicated by the status of the 20-206
TC-Errore logico start enable sensor (which indicates
whether the transmission is in neutral or
gears are engaged)
15 – Alarm available but not utilized – –
The control unit detects a discrepancy

18 18-Circuito idraulico between the oil pressure reading and 20-207
TC-Errore logico
the operating status of the transmission
21-Velocita' troppo elevata The control unit detects a ground
21 20-208
TC-possibile errore speed higher than the permissible limit
The control unit detects a transmission

22 22-Temp. shuttle-mode o i l t e m pe r at ur e h i gh e r t ha n t h e 20-208
TC-possibile errore permissible limit with the tractor
operating in “FIELD” mode
The control unit detects a transmission

23-Temp.transport-mode o i l t e m pe r at ur e h i gh e r t ha n t h e
23 20-209
TC-possibile errore permissible limit with the tractor
operating in “ROAD” mode.
24 frizione principale The control unit detects the main clutch 20-209
velocita' elevata running overspeed.

25-Ingresso velocità between the information on the engine
25 TC-possibile errore speed via CANBUS and that read by the 20-210
nLse pick-up sensor.

20-197

36-EV cambio 2 The control unit detects that solenoid

36 SUBSTITUTE STRATEGY 20-211
TC-Circ. aperto uscita Y4 is either not connected or faulty

37-EV cambio 2
37 TC-Corto massa uscita line of solenoid Y4 is short-circuiting to SUBSTITUTE STRATEGY 20-212
earth
38-EV cambio 2 The control unit detects that the control

38 line of solenoid Y4 is short-circuiting to SUBSTITUTE STRATEGY 20-213
TC-Corto +12V uscita battery positive
39-EV cambio 1 The control unit detects that solenoid

39 TC-Circ. aperto uscita Y2 is either not connected or faulty SUBSTITUTE STRATEGY 20-214

40 40-EV cambio 1 line of solenoid Y2 is short-circuiting to SUBSTITUTE STRATEGY 20-215
TC-Corto massa uscita
earth
41-EV cambio 1
41 TC-Corto +12V uscita line of solenoid Y2 is short-circuiting to SUBSTITUTE STRATEGY 20-216
battery positive
47-Sensore vel. nAB The control unit detects that the rpm
47 sensor nAb is disconnected or short- LIMP-HOME 20-217
TC-Ingresso a +12V
48-Sensore vel. nAB The control unit detects that the rpm
48 LIMP-HOME 20-218
TC-Ingresso a massa sensor nAb is short-circuiting to earth

4B-Sensore vel. nAB
4B TC-Errore logico information coming from the rpm LIMP-HOME 20-219
sensor nAb
50-Sensore vel. nHK The control unit detects that the rpm
50 sensor nHk is disconnected or short- LIMP-HOME 20-220
TC-Ingresso a +12V circuiting to battery positive
51-Sensore vel. nHK The control unit detects that the rpm
51 TC-Ingresso a massa sensor nHk is short-circuiting to earth LIMP-HOME 20-221

52 52-Sensore vel. nHK information coming from the rpm LIMP-HOME 20-222
TC-Errore logico
sensor nHk

53-Sensore vel.nLSA
53 TC-Ingresso a +12V sensor nLsa is disconnected or short- LIMP-HOME 20-223
54 54-Sensore vel.nLSA The control unit detects that rpm LIMP-HOME 20-224
TC-Ingresso a massa sensor nLsa is short-circuiting to earth
55-Sensore vel.nLSA The control unit detects unreliable

55 information coming from the rpm LIMP-HOME 20-225
TC-Errore logico sensor nLsa

5F 5F-Sensore FRRS calibration values of the field/road 20-226
TC-possibile errore
position sensor are incorrect.
20-198

60-calibrazione FRRS
60 TC-possibile errore calibration values of the field/road 20-226
position sensor are incorrect
61-Sensore FRRS The control unit detects that the field/

61 road position sensor is shorting to LIMP-HOME-LS 20-227
TC-Ingresso a +12V battery positive (+5V).

62 62-Sensore FRRS road position sensor is shorting to TC-SHUTDOWN 20-228
TC-Ingresso a +12V
battery positive (+12V).

63-Sensore FRRS
63 TC-Ingresso a massa road position sensor is disconnected or LIMP-HOME-LS 20-229
shorting to earth.
The control detects a conflict in the

information received from the clutch
64 64-Pedale frizione pedal position sensor and clutch pedal EMERGENCY DRIVE 20-230
TC-Errore logico
depressed sensor, regarding the
position of the pedal
65-Pedale frizione The control unit detects that the clutch

65 pedal position sensor is disconnected EMERGENCY DRIVE 20-231
TC-Ingresso a massa or short-circuiting to earth
The control unit detects that the clutch EMERGENCY DRIVE

66-Pedale frizione
66 TC-Ingresso a +12V pedal position sensor is shorting to or 20-232
battery positive TC-SHUTDOWN
67-Alimen. Sens. AU1 The control unit detects that the power EMERGENCY DRIVE
67 input to the clutch pedal position or 20-233
TC-Corto massa uscita sensor is less than the prescribed value TC-SHUTDOWN
68-Alimen. Sens. AU1 The control unit detects that the power EMERGENCY DRIVE
68 input to the clutch pedal position or 20-234
TC-Corto +12V uscita sensor is higher than the correct value TC-SHUTDOWN
69-Pedale frizione The control unit detects one or more EMERGENCY DRIVE
69 threshold values of the clutch pedal or 20-235
TC-Errore logico position sensor out of range. TC-SHUTDOWN

calibration values of the clutch pedal EMERGENCY DRIVE
70-Pedale frizione E2P have not been saved correctly due to a
70 TC-possibile errore d e f e c t i n t h e E E P R O M m e m o r y or 20-235
locations, or that the clutch pedal has TC-SHUTDOWN
never been calibrated


73-Pulsante aper. friz. "Comfort Clutch" button is
73 LIMP-HOME-LS 20-236
TC-Ingresso a massa disconnected or short-circuiting to
earth
74-Pulsante aper. friz. The control unit detects that the

74 "Comfort Clutch" button is short- LIMP-HOME-LS 20-237
TC-Ingresso a +12V circuiting to battery positive
20-199

76-EV proporzionale
76 TC-Circ. aperto uscita proportional solenoid valve operating TC-SHUTDOWN 20-238
the main clutch is disconnected
77-Elettrovalvola proporzio- The control unit detects that the

proportional solenoid valve operating
77 nale the main clutch is short-circuiting to TC-SHUTDOWN 20-239
earth

79-EV direz. avanti
79 TC-Circ. aperto uscita f o r w a r d t r a v e l s o l e n o i d Y 3 i s TC-SHUTDOWN 20-240
disconnected
80-EV direz. avanti The control unit detects that the

80 forward travel solenoid Y3 is shorting to TC-SHUTDOWN 20-241
TC-Corto massa uscita earth
82-EV direz. indietro The control unit detects that the reverse
82 TC-Circ. aperto uscita travel solenoid Y1 is disconnected TC-SHUTDOWN 20-242
83 TC-Corto massa uscita travel solenoid Y1 is shorting to earth TC-SHUTDOWN 20-243
SUBSTITUTE-STRATEGY
85 85-Leva inversore The control unit detects a problem or 20-244
TC-Errore logico affecting the shuttle control lever. TRANSMISSION
SHUTDOWN
The control unit detects that the type of
Pin di codifica non coin-
87 vehicle has not been programmed TC-SHUTDOWN. 20-245
cidono con tipo di veicolo correctly

89-Alimentazione VPS1 draw of the main clutch solenoids and
89 TC-SHUTDOWN 20-246
TC-Errore logico forward/reverse solenoids Y1 and Y3
90-Alimentazione VPS2 The control unit detects that the current

90 draw of the powershift solenoid valves TC-SHUTDOWN 20-247
TC-Errore logico Y2, Y4, Y5 and Y6 is abnormal

between values read by the NLSA and
91-Frizione principale
91 TC-Errore logico NHK sensors, the clutch pedal position TC-SHUTDOWN 20-248
sensor and the position of the creeper
control lever
92-Tensione batteria The control unit has detected an TRANSMISSION

92 TC-Ingresso a +12V abnormally high input voltage SHUTDOWN 20-249
93-Tensione batteria The control unit has detected an TRANSMISSION

93 TC-Ingresso a massa abnormally low input voltage SHUTDOWN 20-250

94 94-EV proporzionale clutch solenoid valve is short-circuiting TC-SHUTDOWN 20-251
TC-Corto +12V uscita
to battery positive
95-EV direz. avanti
95 TC-Corto +12V uscita forward travel solenoid Y3 is shorting to TC-SHUTDOWN 20-252
battery positive
96 travel solenoid Y1 is shorting to battery TC-SHUTDOWN 20-253
TC-Corto +12V uscita positive
20-200

97-Programma errato
97 TC-Errore logico transmission control unit software has TC-SHUTDOWN 20-254
not been programmed correctly
98-Config.errata The control unit detects that

98 transmission configuration data have TC-SHUTDOWN 20-254
TC-Errore logico not been programmed correctly.
The control unit detects that machine

99 99-Config. veicolo configuration data have not been saved TC-SHUTDOWN 20-255
TC-possibile errore
correctly (CHECKSUM ERROR)
AB – Alarm available but not utilized – –
AC – Alarm available but not utilized – –
AD – Alarm available but not utilized – –

B0-Sensore vel. nLSE
B0 TC-Ingresso a massa sensor nLse is disconnected or short- LIMP-HOME 20-256
B1 B1-Sensore vel. nLSE The control unit detects that the rpm LIMP-HOME 20-257
TC-Ingresso a +12V sensor nLse is short-circuiting to earth
B2-Sensore vel. nLSE The control detects unreliable

B2 information coming from the rpm LIMP-HOME 20-258
TC-Errore logico sensor nLse

B3-FRRS EV campo
B3 TC-Circ. aperto uscita "FIELD" mode selector solenoid Y5 is TC-SHUTDOWN 20-259
disconnected
B4-FRRS EV campo The control unit detects that the

B4 "FIELD" mode selector solenoid Y5 is TC-SHUTDOWN 20-260
TC-Corto +12V uscita shorting to battery positive

B5 B5-FRRS EV campo "FIELD" mode selector solenoid Y5 is TC-SHUTDOWN 20-261
shorting to earth

B6-FRRS EV strada
B6 TC-Circ. aperto uscita "ROAD" mode selector solenoid Y6 is TC-SHUTDOWN 20-262
disconnected
B7-FRRS EV strada The control unit detects that the

B7 "ROAD" mode selector solenoid Y6 is TC-SHUTDOWN 20-263

B8 B8-FRRS EV strada "ROAD" mode selector solenoid Y6 is TC-SHUTDOWN 20-264
shorting to earth

B9-EV Blocco Neutra
B9 TC-Circ. aperto uscita gearbox neutral lock solenoid Y7 is TC-SHUTDOWN 20-265
disconnected
BA-EV Blocco Neutra The control unit detects that the

BA gearbox neutral lock solenoid Y7 is TC-SHUTDOWN 20-266

BB BB-EV Blocco Neutra gearbox neutral lock solenoid Y7 is TC-SHUTDOWN 20-267
shorting to earth
20-201
The transmission control unit detects

C0 C0-Msg PTCTL1 REQGEAR an error in the information received by LIMP-HOME-LS 20-268
TC-Errore Segnale CAN the HLHP control unit regarding the
request for range gear engagement.
The transmission control unit detects

C3-Msg EEC1 ENGSPEED an error in the information received by
C3 LIMP-HOME-LS 20-269
TC-Errore Segnale CAN the ECU regarding the communication
of engine speed.
C6 – Alarm available but not utilized – –

C9 – Alarm available but not utilized – –
CB – Alarm available but not utilized – –
CF CF-Messaggio EEC1 The transmission control unit detects a LIMP-HOME-LS 20-270

TC-Timeout CAN Msg fault on the CANBUS line.
D0 – Alarm available but not utilized – –

D1-Msg LIMITATION The transmission control unit detects a
D1 – 20-270
TC-Timeout CAN Msg fault on the CANBUS controller.
D2-Msg HPSACTRL The transmission control unit detects a

D2 – 20-271
TC-Timeout CAN Msg fault on the CANBUS controller.
The display detects a problem of

EE – communication with the transmission – 20-271
control unit.
EDS software unable to connect to the

GEN1 – transmission control unit. – 20-272
Transmission slips unexpectedly from

GEN2 – forward or reverse drive into neutral. – 20-273
The transmission continues to shift

GEN3 – range automatically every 1 or 2 – 20-274
seconds
Momentary loss of traction with the

GEN4 – – 20-274
tractor in motion
GEN5 – The transmission remains in neutral – 20-275
20-202
10 0-Calib. friz. prin.

TC-possibile errore
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects errors in the main clutch calibration values
NOTE
This alarm is always displayed when, following replacement of the control unit, the procedure to put the new
control unit into service has not been carried out.
ECU RESPONSE
The control unit does not limit the operation of the transmission, but sets the contact pressure on the main clutch pedal to
the default value (99.99, corresponding to the value registering at the end of the engagement ramp).
CHECK
• Perform the main clutch calibration procedure.
11 11-Pedale frizione E2P

TC-possibile errore
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects errors in the main clutch calibration values
ECU RESPONSE
The control unit does not limit the operation of the transmission, but sets the contact pressure on the main clutch pedal to
the default value (99.99, corresponding to the value registering at the end of the engagement ramp).
CHECK
• Perform the main clutch calibration procedure.
20-203
12 12-Sensore temperatura
TC-Ingresso a +12V
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects a problem with the power input to the transmission oil temperature sensor.
NOTE
This alarm could be displayed as a result of alarm 66 or 68 being activated.
ECU RESPONSE
The control unit does not limit operation of the transmission but sets the transmission temperature to the "Cold
transmission" default value.
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on the “GEARTEMP” and "GEARBOX" connectors of the lift control unit are not oxidized and
are firmly secured.
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “GEARTEMP” and to pin 24 of
connector "GEARBOX" and measure the resistance to check for electrical continuity (test meter reading: 0 Ohm).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a
test meter to pin 1 of connector “GEARTEMP” and to pin 0.013.9301.4
39 of connector "GEARBOX" and measure the resistance 1 2 23
to check for electrical continuity (test meter reading: 0
Ohm).
• With the connector "GEARBOX" disconnected from the 45
engine control unit and the starter key in the "I" (ON)
position, connect a test meter to pin 1 of the connector
24 39 66 68
"GEARTEMP" and to the transmission earth and check
that there is no voltage (test meter reading 0V). 66 45 23 68 1 2 39 24 GEARBOX
• With the connector "GEARBOX" disconnected from the
engine control unit and the starter key in the "I" (ON)
position, connect a test meter to pin 2 of the connector
"GEARTEMP" and to the transmission earth and check GND4
that there is no voltage (test meter reading 0V). TK2
10 6
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and
then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is
still present, the transmission control unit must be
renewed. GEARTEMP
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
1 2
+15 +30
0.013.9307.4
D0034520
20-204
13 13-Sensore temperatura
TC-Ingresso a massa
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects a problem with the power input to the temperature sensor.
ECU RESPONSE
The control unit does not limit operation of the transmission but sets the transmission temperature to the "Cold
transmission" default value.
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on the “GEARTEMP” and "GEARBOX" connectors of the lift control unit are not oxidized and
are firmly secured.
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 1 of connector “GEARTEMP” and to engine
earth, and measure the resistance to check for shorts to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “GEARTEMP” and to the earth
on the transmission and perform a resistance test to check for shorts to earth (meter reading: infinity).
present, the transmission control unit must be renewed.
0.013.9301.4
1 2 21 23
45
24 39 68
21 45 23 68 1 2 39 24 GEARBOX
GND4
TK2
10 6
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C GEARTEMP

1 2
+15 +30
0.013.9307.4
D0030870
20-205
14 14-Switch di neutra
TC-Errore logico
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects a discrepancy between the speeds sensed at the main clutch input and at the transmission output,
indicated by the status of the start enable sensor (which indicates whether the transmission is in neutral or gears are
engaged)
ECU RESPONSE
The control unit does not limit the operation of the transmission.
CHECK
• In the event that there are other alarms activated, relating
to the main clutch speed sensor (nHk) and the engine 0.013.9301.4
speed sensor (nAb), verify the cause as described under
the relative alarm headings before proceeding as follows. 1 2 31 21 23
• Check that the contacts on the “S” connector of the
starter enable switch and on the "GEARBOX" lift control
unit are not oxidized and are firmly secured.
45
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF), connect a test
meter to pin 30 of relay “RL9” and to the earth on the
66 68
engine and perform a resistance test to check for
electrical continuity with the mechanical gearbox in 66 45 23 68 1 2 31 GEARBOX
neutral (meter reading 0 Ohm) and open circuit with gear

selected (meter reading: infinity).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and GND4
still present, the transmission control unit must be
renewed.
TK2
31
GND2
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
2 1
S
+15 +30
0.013.9307.4
D0034510
20-206
18 18-Circuito idraulico
TC-Errore logico
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects a discrepancy between the oil pressure reading and the operating status of the transmission
ECU RESPONSE
The control unit does not limit the operation of the transmission, but indicates the problem via the Infocenter.
CHECK
• If there are other alarms present relating to the NLSA, NLSE, NAB and NHK speed sensors, identify the cause as
described under the relative alarm headings before proceeding as described below.
• Check that the contacts on the “18BAR” connector of the transmission oil temperature sensor and the “GEARBOX”
connector of the lift control unit are not oxidised and are firmly connected.
• With the starter key in position “I” (ON), check that the transmission oil temperature sensor is receiving power correctly
(12V between pin 1 (positive) of connector “18BAR” and the earth on the transmission)
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a
test meter to pin 2 of connector “18BAR” and to pin 29 of
the "GEARBOX" connector and measure the resistance 0.013.9301.4
to check for electrical continuity (test meter reading 0
Ohm). 1 2 29 23
• Check the pressure in the hydraulic circuit of the
transmission system.
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and 45
still present, the transmission control unit must be 66 68
renewed. 66 45 23 68 1 2 29 GEARBOX
GND4
TK2
2 1
31
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C F15A

3A
1 2 18 BAR
+15 +30 +15
0.013.9307.4
D0034500
20-207
21 21-Velocita' troppo elevata

TC-possibile errore
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects a ground speed higher than the permissible limit
ECU RESPONSE
The control unit does not limit the operation of the transmission, but sounds a continuous beep until ground speed returns
within the permissible limits.
CHECK
• Reduce ground speed.
22 22-Temp. shuttle-mode
TC-possibile errore
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects a transmission oil temperature higher than the permissible limit with the tractor operating in
“FIELD” mode
ECU RESPONSE
The control unit does not limit the operation of the transmission, but when the alarm is activated five beeps will be sounded
in succession and a single beep every two minutes thereafter.
CHECK
• Reduce the load on the transmission.
• Switch off the engine.
20-208
23 23-Temp.transport-mode
TC-possibile errore
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects a transmission oil temperature higher than the permissible limit with the tractor operating in
“ROAD” mode.
ECU RESPONSE
The control unit does not limit the operation of the transmission and does not display any alarm message.
CHECK
• Reduce ground speed.
24 frizione principale
velocita' elevata
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects the main clutch running overspeed.
ECU RESPONSE
The control unit does not limit the operation of the transmission.
CHECK
• Reduce ground speed immediately
20-209
25 25-Ingresso velocità
TC-possibile errore
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects a conflict between the engine speed information acquired via CANBUS and the value read by the
nLse pick-up sensor.
ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to “No-APS” mode.
CHECK
• Check that the NLSE and NLSA connectors have not been inadvertently swapped around (the NLSA connector should
be installed on the sensor nearest the engine).
• If there are other alarms activated relating to the nLse engine speed sensor (alarms B0, B1 and B2), check the cause as
described under the relative alarm headings before proceeding as follows.
• Check that the engine control unit does not detect any alarms regarding the CANBUS as active or passive alarms (SPN
743 FMI 9 on the HLHP control unit and Serdia alarm n° 71 ) or the engine speed sensor (SPN 190 FMI 8 on the HLHP
control unit and Serdia alarm n° 1).
• Connect the ART to the HLHP control unit and check, in the “3.1.2 INPUT FREQ” menu, that the engine speed signal is
correctly transmitted via the CANBUS.
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to “I” (ON); if the alarm is still present the control unit
must be renewed.
20-210
36 36-EV cambio 2
TC-Circ. aperto uscita
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that solenoid Y4 is either not connected or faulty
ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to "SUBSTITUTE STRATEGY" mode.
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on connector “X52” and on the "GEARBOX" transmission control unit are not oxidized and are
firmly secured.
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF), connect a test meter to pin E and pin F of connector “X52” on the transmission
and perform a resistance test to check solenoid valve impedance (for details, see section 40).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin E of connector “X52” and to pin 11 of connector
"GEARBOX" and measure the resistance to check for electrical continuity (test meter reading: 0 Ohm).
0.013.9301.4
1 2 8 32 11 12 23
45
50 54 55 57 66 68
66 45 23 68 1 2 32 12 55 11 8 57 50 54 GEARBOX
GND4
TK2 MS1
20 12 21 23 9 25 21 18
A
1
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
D A B E F C X52 EVF 1 2 EVR 1 2
+15 +30
Y2
Y5
Y6
Y3
Y1
Y4
0.013.9307.4 0.013.9308.4
D0034490
20-211
37 37-EV cambio 2
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the control line of solenoid Y4 is short-circuiting to earth
ECU RESPONSE
CHECK
firmly secured.
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF), connect a test meter to pin E and pin F of connector “X52” on the transmission
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF) and "GEARBOX" connector disconnected, connect a test meter to pin E of
connector “X52” and to the earth on the transmission and test the resistance to check for shorts to earth (meter reading:
infinity).
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF) and "GEARBOX" connector disconnected, connect a test meter to pin E of
connector “X52” on the transmission and to the earth on the transmission and test the resistance to check for shorts to
0.013.9301.4
1 2 8 32 11 12 23
45
50 54 55 57 66 68
66 45 23 68 1 2 32 12 55 11 8 57 50 54 GEARBOX
GND4
TK2 MS1
20 12 21 23 9 25 21 18
A
1
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
+15 +30
Y2
Y5
Y6
Y3
Y1
Y4
0.013.9307.4 0.013.9308.4
20-212 D0034490
38 38-EV cambio 2
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the control line of solenoid Y4 is short-circuiting to battery positive
ECU RESPONSE
NOTE
This alarm could be displayed as a result of alarm 90 being activated.
CHECK
firmly secured.
• With the starter key in position “I” (ON), connect a test meter to pin C of connector “X52” and to the earth on the
transmission and check for 0 voltage (meter reading 0V).
0.013.9301.4
1 2 8 32 11 12 23
45
50 54 55 57 66 68
66 45 23 68 1 2 32 12 55 11 8 57 50 54 GEARBOX
GND4
TK2 MS1
20 12 21 23 9 25 21 18
A
1
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
+15 +30
Y2
Y5
Y6
Y3
Y1
Y4
0.013.9307.4 0.013.9308.4
D0034490
20-213
39 39-EV cambio 1
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that solenoid Y2 is either not connected or faulty
ECU RESPONSE
CHECK
firmly secured.
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF), connect a test meter to pin C and pin F of connector “X52” on the transmission
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin C of connector “X52” and to pin 57 of the
"GEARBOX" connector and measure the resistance to check for electrical continuity (test meter reading: 0 Ohm).
0.013.9301.4
1 2 8 32 11 12 23
45
50 54 55 57 66 68
66 45 23 68 1 2 32 12 55 11 8 57 50 54 GEARBOX
GND4
TK2 MS1
20 12 21 23 9 25 21 18
A
1
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
+15 +30
Y2
Y5
Y6
Y3
Y1
Y4
0.013.9307.4 0.013.9308.4
D0034490
20-214
40 40-EV cambio 1
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the control line of solenoid Y2 is short-circuiting to earth
ECU RESPONSE
CHECK
firmly secured.
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF), connect a test meter to pin C and pin F of connector “X52” on the transmission
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF) and "GEARBOX" connector disconnected, connect a test meter to pin C of
connector “X52” on the transmission and to the earth on the transmission and test impedance to check for shorts to
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF) and "GEARBOX" connector disconnected, connect a test meter to pin C of
connector “X52” on the transmission and to the earth on the transmission and test impedance to check for shorts to
0.013.9301.4
1 2 8 32 11 12 23
45
50 54 55 57 66 68
66 45 23 68 1 2 32 12 55 11 8 57 50 54 GEARBOX
GND4
TK2 MS1
20 12 21 23 9 25 21 18
A
1
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
+15 +30
Y2
Y5
Y6
Y3
Y1
Y4
0.013.9307.4 0.013.9308.4
D0034490
20-215
41 41-EV cambio 1
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the control line of solenoid Y2 is short-circuiting to battery positive
ECU RESPONSE
NOTE
CHECK
firmly secured.
• With the starter key in position “I” (ON), connect a test meter to pin C of connector “X52” and to the earth on the
transmission and check for 0 voltage (meter reading 0V).
0.013.9301.4
1 2 8 32 11 12 23
45
50 54 55 57 66 68
66 45 23 68 1 2 32 12 55 11 8 57 50 54 GEARBOX
GND4
TK2 MS1
20 12 21 23 9 25 21 18
A
1
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
+15 +30
Y2
Y5
Y6
Y3
Y1
Y4
0.013.9307.4 0.013.9308.4
D0034490
20-216
47 47-Sensore vel. nAB

TC-Ingresso a +12V
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the rpm sensor nAb is disconnected or short-circuiting to battery positive.
ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to “LIMP-HOME” mode, and at the first attempt to shuttle in either direction, the
transmission will revert to neutral, emitting a continuous beep.
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on the “NAB” connector and on the "GEARBOX" transmission control unit are not oxidised and
are firmly secured.
• With the starter key in position “I” (ON), check that transmission output rpm sensor is receiving power correctly (12 V
between pin 3 (positive) of connector “NAB“ and the earth on the transmission).
• With the starter key in position “I” (ON) and "GEARBOX" connector disconnected, connect a test meter to pin 1 of
connector “NAB” and to the earth on the transmission and check for 0 voltage (meter reading 0V).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “NAB” and to pin 62 of the
• With the starter key in the “O”
(OFF) position, connect a test
meter to pin 1 of connector 0.013.9301.4
“NAB” and to pin 3 of connector
1 2 3 16 17 23
"GEARBOX" and measure the
resistance to check for
electrical continuity (test meter
45
reading: 0 Ohm).
• Check correct operation of the
sensor (for technical details, 40 66 68
66 45 23 68 1 2 62 3 16 40 17 GEARBOX
see section 40).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter
key first to “O” (OFF) and then
back to the “I” (ON) position
again, and if the alarm is still GND4
present, the control unit must

be renewed. TK2
40 2 11 5 3 7 8
F14C
1A
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
F15A
3A
NAB NHK NLSA NLSE

3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
+15 +30 f f f f
+15
0.013.9307.4
D0034480
20-217
48 48-Sensore vel. nAB

TC-Ingresso a massa
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the rpm sensor nAb is short-circuiting to earth
ECU RESPONSE
CHECK
are firmly secured.
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “NAB” and to transmission
earth, and measure the resistance to check that there are no short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
0.013.9301.4
1 2 3 16 17 23
45
40 66 68
66 45 23 68 1 2 62 3 16 40 17 GEARBOX
GND4
TK2
40 2 11 5 3 7 8
F14C
1A
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
F15A
3A
NAB NHK NLSA NLSE

3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
+15 +30 f f f f
+15
0.013.9307.4
D0034480
20-218
4B 4B-Sensore vel. nAB

TC-Errore logico
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects unreliable information coming from the rpm sensor nAb
ECU RESPONSE
CHECK
are firmly secured.
between pin 3 (positive) of connector “NAB“ and the earth on the transmission).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 1 of connector “NAB” and to pin 3 of connector
0.013.9301.4
1 2 3 16 17 23
45
40 66 68
66 45 23 68 1 2 62 3 16 40 17 GEARBOX
GND4
TK2
40 2 11 5 3 7 8
F14C
1A
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
F15A
3A
NAB NHK NLSA NLSE

3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
+15 +30 f f f f
+15
0.013.9307.4
D0034480
20-219
50 50-Sensore vel. nHK

TC-Ingresso a +12V
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the rpm sensor nHk is disconnected or short-circuiting to battery positive
ECU RESPONSE
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on the “NHK” connector and on the "GEARBOX" transmission control unit are not oxidized and
are firmly secured.
between pin 3 (positive) of connector “NHK” and the earth on the transmission).
connector “NHK” and to the earth on the transmission and check for 0 voltage (meter reading 0V).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “NHK” and to pin 16 of the
meter to pin 1 of connector 0.013.9301.4
“NHK” and to pin 3 of connector
1 2 3 16 17 23
"GEARBOX" and measure the
resistance to check for
electrical continuity (test meter
45
reading: 0 Ohm).
sensor (for technical details, 40 66 68
66 45 23 68 1 2 62 3 16 40 17 GEARBOX
see section 40).
again, and if the alarm is still GND4

be renewed. TK2
40 2 11 5 3 7 8
F14C
1A
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
F15A
3A
NAB NHK NLSA NLSE

3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
+15 +30 f f f f
+15
0.013.9307.4
D0034480
20-220

TC-Ingresso a massa
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the rpm sensor nHk is short-circuiting to earth
ECU RESPONSE
CHECK
are firmly secured.
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “NHK” and to transmission
0.013.9301.4
1 2 3 16 17 23
45
40 66 68
66 45 23 68 1 2 62 3 16 40 17 GEARBOX
GND4
TK2
40 2 11 5 3 7 8
F14C
1A
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
F15A
3A
NAB NHK NLSA NLSE

3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
+15 +30 f f f f
+15
0.013.9307.4
D0034480
20-221

TC-Errore logico
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects unreliable information coming from the rpm sensor nHk
ECU RESPONSE
CHECK
are firmly secured.
between pin 3 (positive) of connector “NHK” and the earth on the transmission).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 1 of connector “NHK” and to pin 3 of connector
0.013.9301.4
1 2 3 16 17 23
45
40 66 68
66 45 23 68 1 2 62 3 16 40 17 GEARBOX
GND4
TK2
40 2 11 5 3 7 8
F14C
1A
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
F15A
3A
NAB NHK NLSA NLSE

3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
+15 +30 f f f f
+15
0.013.9307.4
D0034480
20-222
53 53-Sensore vel.nLSA
TC-Ingresso a +12V
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the rpm sensor nLsa is disconnected or short-circuiting to battery positive
ECU RESPONSE
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on the “NLSA” connector and on the "GEARBOX" transmission control unit are not oxidized
and are firmly secured.
between pin 3 (positive) of connector “NLSA“ and to the earth on the transmission).
connector “NLSA” and to the earth on the transmission and check for 0 voltage (meter reading 0V).
(OFF) position, connect a test 0.013.9301.4
meter to pin 2 of connector 1 2 3 16 17 23
“NLSA” and to pin 40 of
connector "GEARBOX" and
measure the resistance to
45
check for electrical continuity
(test meter reading: 0 Ohm).
40 66 68
66 45 23 68 1 2 62 3 16 40 17 GEARBOX
meter to pin 1 of connector
“NLSA” and to pin 3 of
connector "GEARBOX" and
measure the resistance to GND4
check for electrical continuity
(test meter reading: 0 Ohm). TK2
40 2 11 5 3 7 8
• Check correct operation of the F14C
1A
sensor (for technical details,

see section 40).
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
F15A
3A
key first to “O” (OFF) and then NAB NHK NLSA NLSE
3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
back to the “I” (ON) position f f f f
+15 +30
again, and if the alarm is still
+15
be renewed.
0.013.9307.4
D0034480
20-223
TC-Ingresso a massa
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that rpm sensor nLsa is short-circuiting to earth
ECU RESPONSE
CHECK
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “NLSA” and to transmission
0.013.9301.4
1 2 3 16 17 23
45
40 66 68
66 45 23 68 1 2 62 3 16 40 17 GEARBOX
GND4
TK2
40 2 11 5 3 7 8
F14C
1A
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
F15A
3A
NAB NHK NLSA NLSE

3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
+15 +30 f f f f
+15
0.013.9307.4
D0034480
20-224
TC-Errore logico
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects unreliable information coming from the rpm sensor nLsa
ECU RESPONSE
CHECK
between pin 3 (positive) of connector “NLSA“ and to the earth on the transmission).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 1 of connector “NLSA” and to pin 3 of
0.013.9301.4
1 2 3 16 17 23
45
40 66 68
66 45 23 68 1 2 62 3 16 40 17 GEARBOX
GND4
TK2
40 2 11 5 3 7 8
F14C
1A
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
F15A
3A
NAB NHK NLSA NLSE

3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
+15 +30 f f f f
+15
0.013.9307.4
D0034480
20-225
5F 5F-Sensore FRRS
TC-possibile errore
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the calibration values of the field/road position sensor are incorrect.
ECU RESPONSE
The control unit does not limit the operation of the transmission, but restores the default values.
CHECK
• Calibrate the field/road position sensor.
60 60-FRRS calibration
TC-possible error
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the calibration values of the field/road position sensor are incorrect
ECU RESPONSE
The control unit does not limit the operation of the transmission, but restores the default values.
CHECK
• Calibrate the field/road position sensor.
20-226
61 61-Sensore FRRS
TC-Ingresso a +12V
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the field/road position sensor is shorting to battery positive (+5V).
ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to "LIMP-HOME-LS" mode, and at the first attempt to shuttle in either direction, the
transmission will shift to neutral and a continuous beep will sound.
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on the “X59” connector and on the "GEARBOX" transmission control unit are not oxidized and
are firmly secured.
• Check that the sensor is functioning correctly.
• With the starter key in position “I” (ON), check that the field/road position sensor is receiving power correctly (5V
• With the starter key in position “I”
(ON), connect a test meter to pin 3
and to pin 4 of connector "X59" and
check for 0 voltage (meter reading:
0V).
• With the starter key in position “O” 0.013.9301.4
(OFF), connect a test meter to pin 2 1 2 4 44 23
and to pin 3 of connector "X59" and
perform a resistance test to check
that the connectors are not 45
shorting (meter reading: infinity).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key 49 66 68
first to “O” (OFF) and then back to
the “I” (ON) position again, and if 66 45 23 68 1 2 37 24 38 49 18 GEARBOX
the alarm is still present, the control

unit must be renewed.
GND4
G3 G2 MS1
1 2 10 21 13 11
510 Ohm
160 Ohm
X26 X46
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
2 4 1 2 1
1 2 3 4 X59
GND2
+15 +30
V
V
0.014.3649.4 0.013.9308.4
D0034470
20-227
62 62-Sensore FRRS
TC-Ingresso a +12V
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the field/road position sensor is shorting to battery positive (+12V).
ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to “TC-SHUTDOWN” mode and the transmission reverts to neutral, emitting a continuous
beep.
CHECK
are firmly secured.
• With the starter key in position “I” (ON), connect a test meter to pin 3 and to pin 4 of connector "X59" and check for 0
voltage (meter reading: 0V).
0.013.9301.4
1 2 4 44 23
45
49 66 68
66 45 23 68 1 2 37 24 38 49 18 GEARBOX
GND4
G3 G2 MS1
1 2 10 21 13 11
510 Ohm
160 Ohm
X26 X46
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
2 4 1 2 1
1 2 3 4 X59
GND2
+15 +30
V
V
0.014.3649.4 0.013.9308.4
D0034470
20-228
63 63-Sensore FRRS
TC-Ingresso a massa
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the field/road position sensor is disconnected or shorting to earth.
ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to "LIMP-HOME-LS" mode, and at the first attempt to shuttle in either direction, the
transmission will shift to neutral and a continuous beep will sound.
CHECK
are firmly secured.
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF), connect a test meter to pin 3 and to pin 4 of connector "X59" and perform a
resistance test to check that the connectors are not shorting (meter reading: infinity).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 3 of connector “X59” and to pin 18 of the
0.013.9301.4
1 2 4 44 23
45
49 66 68
66 45 23 68 1 2 37 24 38 49 18 GEARBOX
GND4
G3 G2 MS1
1 2 10 21 13 11
510 Ohm
160 Ohm
X26 X46
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
2 4 1 2 1
1 2 3 4 X59
GND2
+15 +30
V
V
0.014.3649.4 0.013.9308.4
D0034470
20-229
64 64-Pedale frizione
TC-Errore logico
DESCRIPTION
The control detects a conflict in the information received from the clutch pedal position sensor and clutch pedal depressed
sensor, regarding the position of the pedal
ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to “EMERGENCY DRIVE” mode, the transmission reverts to neutral and a continuous beep
is sounded
CHECK
• In the event that there are other alarms activated, relating to the clutch pedal position sensor, verify the cause as
described under the relative alarm headings before proceeding as follows.
are firmly secured.
• Check that the clutch pedal position sensor can travel through its full stroke and that it is correctly connected to the
clutch pedal (for details, see "CLUTCH PEDAL AND ACCESSORIES in section 30).
• Calibrate the clutch pedal position sensor.
• Check correct operation of the clutch pedal depressed proximity sensor (for details see section 40)
• Check that the clutch pedal
proximity sensor is positioned 0.013.9301.4
correctly (for details, see "CLUTCH 1 2 4 44 23
PEDAL AND ACCESSORIES" in
section 30).
• Check correct operation of the 45
clutch pedal position sensor (for
details see section 40)
49 66 68
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key
first to “O” (OFF) and then back to 66 45 23 68 1 2 37 24 38 49 18 GEARBOX
the “I” (ON) position again, and if

the alarm is still present, the control
GND4
G3 G2 MS1
1 2 10 21 13 11
510 Ohm
160 Ohm
X26 X46
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
2 4 1 2 1
1 2 3 4 X59
GND2
+15 +30
V
V
0.014.3649.4 0.013.9308.4
D0034470
20-230
TC-Ingresso a massa
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the clutch pedal position sensor is disconnected or short-circuiting to earth
ECU RESPONSE
is sounded.
CHECK
are firmly secured.
• With the starter key in position “I” (ON), check that the clutch pedal position sensor is receiving power correctly (5V
connector “X26” and to the earth on the transmission and check for 0 voltage (meter reading 0V).
0.013.9301.4
1 2 4 44 23
45
49 66 68
66 45 23 68 1 2 37 24 38 49 18 GEARBOX
GND4
G3 G2 MS1
1 2 10 21 13 11
510 Ohm
160 Ohm
X26 X46
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
2 4 1 2 1
1 2 3 4 X59
GND2
+15 +30
V
V
0.014.3649.4 0.013.9308.4
D0034470
20-231
TC-Ingresso a +12V
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the clutch pedal position sensor is shorting to battery positive
ECU RESPONSE
is sounded. In the event that one or more of alarms 85, 92 and 93 should also be activated, the transmission will be switched
to “TC-SHUTDOWN” mode.
NOTE
CHECK
are firmly secured.
• With the starter key in position “I” (ON), check that the clutch pedal position sensor is receiving power correctly (5V
connector “X26” and to the earth on the cab and check for 0 voltage (meter reading 0V).
(OFF) position, connect a test 0.013.9301.4
meter to pin 4 of connector “X26” 1 2 4 44 23
and to pin 38 of the "GEARBOX"
connector and measure the
resistance to check for electrical 45
continuity (test meter reading: 0
Ohm).
49 66 68
sensor (for technical details, see 66 45 23 68 1 2 37 24 38 49 18 GEARBOX
section 40).
back to the “I” (ON) position GND4
again, and if the alarm is still G3 G2 MS1
1 2 10
present, the control unit must be 21 13 11
510 Ohm
renewed.
160 Ohm
X26 X46
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
2 4 1 2 1
1 2 3 4 X59
GND2
+15 +30
V
V
0.014.3649.4 0.013.9308.4
D0034470
20-232
67 67-Alimen. Sens. AU1

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the power input to the clutch pedal position sensor is less than the prescribed value
ECU RESPONSE
NOTE
CHECK
• If there are other alarms present relating to the clutch pedal position sensor, the transmission oil temperature, the
"comfort clutch" button or the field/road position sensor, identify the cause as described under the relative alarm
headings before proceeding as described below.
• Check that the contacts on the “X26” connector of the clutch pedal position sensor and “GEARTEMP” connector of the
transmission oil temperature sensor and on the "GEARBOX" transmission control unit are not oxidised and are firmly
secured.
(ON), check that the clutch pedal 0.013.9301.4
position sensor is receiving 1 2 4 44 23
power correctly (5V between pin
1 (positive) and pin 2 (negative) of
connector “X26”). 45
sensor (for technical details, see
49 66 68
section 40).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter 66 45 23 68 1 2 37 24 38 49 18 GEARBOX

present, the control unit must be GND4
renewed. G3 G2 MS1
1 2 10 21 13 11
510 Ohm
160 Ohm
X26 X46
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
2 4 1 2 1
1 2 3 4 X59
GND2
+15 +30
V
V
0.014.3649.4 0.013.9308.4
D0034470
20-233
68 68-Alimen. Sens. AU1

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the power input to the clutch pedal position sensor is higher than the correct value
ECU RESPONSE
NOTE
CHECK
• If there are other alarms present relating to the clutch pedal position sensor, the transmission oil temperature, the
"comfort clutch" button or the field/road position sensor, identify the cause as described under the relative alarm
headings before proceeding as described below.
• Check that the contacts on the “X26” connector of the clutch pedal position sensor and “GEARTEMP” connector of the
transmission oil temperature sensor and on the "GEARBOX" transmission control unit are not oxidised and are firmly
secured.
(ON), check that the clutch pedal 0.013.9301.4
position sensor is receiving 1 2 4 44 23
power correctly (5V between pin
1 (positive) and pin 2 (negative) of
connector “X26”). 45
sensor (for technical details, see
49 66 68
section 40).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter 66 45 23 68 1 2 37 24 38 49 18 GEARBOX

present, the control unit must be GND4
renewed. G3 G2 MS1
1 2 10 21 13 11
510 Ohm
160 Ohm
X26 X46
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
2 4 1 2 1
1 2 3 4 X59
GND2
+15 +30
V
V
0.014.3649.4 0.013.9308.4
D0034470
20-234
TC-Errore logico
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects one or more threshold values of the clutch pedal position sensor out of range.
ECU RESPONSE
CHECK
• Perform the clutch pedal position sensor calibration procedure.
70 70-Pedale frizione E2P

TC-possibile errore
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the calibration values of the clutch pedal have not been saved correctly due to a defect in the
EEPROM memory locations, or that the clutch pedal has never been calibrated
ECU RESPONSE
NOTE
CHECK
• Perform the clutch pedal position sensor calibration procedure.
20-235
73 73-Pulsante aper. friz.

TC-Ingresso a massa
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the "Comfort Clutch" button is disconnected or short-circuiting to earth
NOTE
ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to "LIMP-HOME-LS" mode, the transmission shifts to neutral and a continuous beep
sounds.
CHECK
are firmly secured.
• Check that the pushbutton is functioning correctly (for technical details, see Group 40)
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF) and "GEARBOX" connector disconnected and "X46" connector connected,
connect a test meter to pin 24 and to pin 49 of connector “GEARBOX” and test the resistance to check for:
- meter reading 510 Ohm with "comfort clutch" button released;
- meter reading approx. 122 Ohm with "comfort clutch" button pressed.
• With the starter key in position
“O” (OFF) and "GEARBOX" 0.013.9301.4
connector disconnected, 1 2 4 44 23
connect a test meter to pin 1 of
connector “X46” and to pin and
earth on the cab and test the 45
resistance to check for shorts to
49 66 68
“O” (OFF) and "GEARBOX" 66 45 23 68 1 2 37 24 38 49 18 GEARBOX
connector disconnected,
connector “X46” and to earth on
the cab and test the resistance to GND4
check for shorts to earth (meter G3 G2 MS1
reading: infinity). 1 2 10 21 13 11
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter 510 Ohm

back to the “I” (ON) position 160 Ohm

X26 X46
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
present, the transmission control 2 4 1 2 1
1 2 3 4 X59

GND2
+15 +30
V
V
0.014.3649.4 0.013.9308.4
D0034470
20-236
74 74-Pulsante aper. friz.

TC-Ingresso a +12V
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the "Comfort Clutch" button is short-circuiting to battery positive
NOTE
ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to "LIMP-HOME-LS" mode, the transmission shifts to neutral and a continuous beep
sounds.
CHECK
are firmly secured.
• With the connector "GEARBOX" disconnected from the engine control unit and the starter key in the "I" (ON) position,
connect a test meter to pin 1 of connector "X46" and to the transmission earth and check for 0 voltage (test meter
reading 0V).
• With the connector "GEARBOX" disconnected from the engine control unit and the starter key in the "I" (ON) position,
connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector "X46" and to the transmission earth and check for 0 voltage (test meter
reading 0V).
0.013.9301.4
1 2 4 44 23
45
49 66 68
66 45 23 68 1 2 37 24 38 49 18 GEARBOX
GND4
G3 G2 MS1
1 2 10 21 13 11
510 Ohm
160 Ohm
X26 X46
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
2 4 1 2 1
1 2 3 4 X59
GND2
+15 +30
V
V
0.014.3649.4 0.013.9308.4
D0034470 20-237
76 76-EV proporzionale
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the proportional solenoid valve operating the main clutch is disconnected
ECU RESPONSE
beep.
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on the “EVP” connector and on the "GEARBOX" transmission control unit are not oxidized and
are firmly secured.
• Test the resistance of the solenoid (for details, see section 40).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 1 of connector “EVP” and to pin 56 of the
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “EVP” and to pin 13 of the
• With the starter key in position “I” (ON), check that the proportional solenoid valve is receiving power correctly (12 V
between pin 2 (positive) of connector “EVP” and the earth on the transmission).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O”
(OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position 0.013.9301.4
again, and if the alarm is still present, the 1 2 10 13 23
control unit must be renewed.
45
56 66 68
66 45 23 68 1 2 13 10 56 GEARBOX
GND4
TK2
29 32 26
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
EV LOCK EVP
+15 +30 2 1 2 1
Prop
Y7
0.013.9307.4
D0034460
20-238
77 77-Elettrovalvola proporzionale
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the proportional solenoid valve operating the main clutch is short-circuiting to earth
ECU RESPONSE
beep.
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on the “EVP” connector and on the "GEARBOX" transmission control unit are not oxidized and
are firmly secured.
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF) and "GEARBOX" connector disconnected, connect a test meter to pin 1 of
connector “EVP” and to the earth on the transmission and test the resistance to check for shorts to earth (meter reading:
infinity).
0.013.9301.4
1 2 10 13 23
45
56 66 68
66 45 23 68 1 2 13 10 56 GEARBOX
GND4
TK2
29 32 26
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
EV LOCK EVP
+15 +30 2 1 2 1
Prop
Y7
0.013.9307.4
D0034460
20-239
79 79-EV direz. avanti

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the forward travel solenoid Y3 is disconnected
ECU RESPONSE
beep.
CHECK
are firmly secured.
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF), connect a test meter to pin A and to pin D of connector “X52” on the
transmission and perform a resistance test to check for the solenoid valve resistance (for details, see section 40).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin D of connector “X52” and to pin 32 of the
0.013.9301.4
1 2 8 32 11 12 23
45
50 54 55 57 66 68
66 45 23 68 1 2 32 12 55 11 8 57 50 54 GEARBOX
GND4
TK2 MS1
20 12 21 23 9 25 21 18
A
1
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
+15 +30
Y2
Y5
Y6
Y3
Y1
Y4
0.013.9307.4 0.013.9308.4
D0034490
20-240

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the forward travel solenoid Y3 is shorting to earth
ECU RESPONSE
beep.
CHECK
are firmly secured.
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF), connect a test meter to pin A and to pin D of connector “X52” on the
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF) and "GEARBOX" connector disconnected, connect a test meter to pin D of
infinity). 0.013.9301.4
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF)
1 2 8 32 11 12 23
and "GEARBOX" connector
disconnected, connect a test meter to pin
D of connector “X52” on the transmission
and to the earth on the transmission and 45
test the resistance to check for shorts to
earth (meter reading: infinity). 50 54 55 57 66 68
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to
66 45 23 68 1 2 32 12 55 11 8 57 50 54 GEARBOX
“O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON)
position again, and if the alarm is still
GND4
TK2 MS1
20 12 21 23 9 25 21 18
A
1
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
+15 +30
Y2
Y5
Y6
Y3
Y1
Y4
0.013.9307.4 0.013.9308.4
D0034490
20-241
82 82-EV direz. indietro

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the reverse travel solenoid Y1 is disconnected
ECU RESPONSE
beep.
CHECK
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF), connect a test meter to pin A and to pin B of connector “X52” on the
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin B of connector “X52” and to pin 32 of the
0.013.9301.4
1 2 8 32 11 12 23
45
50 54 55 57 66 68
66 45 23 68 1 2 32 12 55 11 8 57 50 54 GEARBOX
GND4
TK2 MS1
20 12 21 23 9 25 21 18
A
1
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
+15 +30
Y2
Y5
Y6
Y3
Y1
Y4
0.013.9307.4 0.013.9308.4
D0034490
20-242

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the reverse travel solenoid Y1 is shorting to earth
ECU RESPONSE
beep.
CHECK
are firmly secured.
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF), connect a test meter to pin A and to pin B of connector “X52” on the
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF) and "GEARBOX" connector disconnected, connect a test meter to pin B of
infinity).
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF)
and "GEARBOX" connector disconnect- 0.013.9301.4
ed, connect a test meter to pin B of con- 1 2 8 32 11 12 23
nector “X52” on the transmission and to
the earth on the transmission and test the
resistance to check for shorts to earth 45
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to 50 54 55 57 66 68
“O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON)
position again, and if the alarm is still 66 45 23 68 1 2 32 12 55 11 8 57 50 54 GEARBOX
GND4
TK2 MS1
20 12 21 23 9 25 21 18
A
1
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
+15 +30
Y2
Y5
Y6
Y3
Y1
Y4
0.013.9307.4 0.013.9308.4
D0034490
20-243
85 85-Leva inversore
TC-Errore logico
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects a problem affecting the shuttle control lever.
ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to:
- "SUBSTITUTE-STRATEGY” if the tractor is equipped with an armrest console; in this configuration, forward-reverse
direction changes can be made using the joystick on the armrest;
- "TRANSMISSION-SHUTDOWN” if the tractor is not equipped with an armrest console; in this configuration, the
control unit puts the transmission into neutral and emits a continuous beep.
CHECK
are firmly secured.
• Verify the correct operation of the shuttle lever (for details see section 40).
• With the starter key in position “I” (ON), check that the shuttle control lever is receiving power correctly (12V between
pin 3 (positive) of connector “X63” and the earth on the cab)
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF) and
"GEARBOX" connector disconnected, connect a test 0.013.9301.4
meter alternately to pin 1, pin 2, pin 3 and pin 4 of 1 2 20 23
connector “X63" and to earth on the cab and test the
resistance to check for shorts to earth (meter reading:
infinity).
45
"GEARBOX" connector disconnected, connect a test
meter alternatively to pin 1 of connector “X63” and 63 65 66 68
alternately to pin 2, pin 3 and pin 4 and perform a 66 45 23 68 1 2 63 65 20 GEARBOX
resistance test to check for shorts (meter reading:
infinity).
"GEARBOX" connector disconnected, connect a test GND4
meter to pin 2 of connector “X63” and alternately to
G4 G3
pin 3 and pin 4 and perform a resistance test to check 5 5 3 4
for shorts (meter reading: infinity).
AS4 0.014.3649.4
"GEARBOX" connector disconnected, connect a test 20 18 21 19
meter to pin 3 of connector “X63” and to pin 4 and
perform a resistance test to check for shorts (meter F14C
1A
reading: infinity). X63

7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
• With the starter key in position “I” (ON), connect a test 3 1 4 2
meter alternately to pin 1, pin 2 and pin 4 of connector

3.9 Ohm
3.9 Ohm
3.9 Ohm
+15
“X63" and to the earth on the cab and check for 0 FW N RV

+15 +30
voltage (meter reading 0V).
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) 0.014.0007.4
and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the D0034450
alarm is still present, the control unit must be renewed.
20-244
87 Pin di codifica non coincidono

con tipo di veicolo
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the type of vehicle has not been programmed correctly
ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to “TC-SHUTDOWN” mode.
CHECK
• Reprogram the control unit, entering the correct tractor model data, and repeat the calibration procedure for the main
clutch, the clutch pedal and the road/field sensor.
connector "GEARBOX" and to the earth on the cab and check for 0 voltage (meter reading 12V).
20-245
89 89-Alimentazione VPS1
TC-Errore logico
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the current draw of the main clutch solenoids and forward/reverse solenoids Y1 and Y3 and
the lock solenoid is abnormal.
ECU RESPONSE
beep.
CHECK
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF) and "GEARBOX" connector disconnected, connect a test meter to pin A of
infinity).
connector “EVP” and to the earth on the transmission and test the resistance to check for shorts to earth (meter reading:
infinity).
connector “EVLOCK” and to the earth on the transmission and test the resistance to check for shorts to earth (meter
reading: infinity).
• With the starter key in position “I” (ON) and "GEARBOX" connector disconnected, connect a test meter to pin A of
connector “X52” and check for
0 voltage (meter reading: 0V).
• With the starter key in position 0.013.9301.4
“I” (ON) and "GEARBOX"
1 2 8 32 11 12 23
c o n ne c t o r d i s c o nn e c t e d,
connector “EVP” and check for
45
0 voltage (meter reading: 0V).
“I” (ON) and "GEARBOX" 50 54 55 57 66 68
c o n ne c t o r d i s c o nn e c t e d, 66 45 23 68 1 2 32 12 55 11 8 57 13 10 56 50 54 GEARBOX
c onnect or “ EVLOCK ” and
check for 0 voltage (meter
reading: 0V).
GND4
• With the starter key in the “I”
(ON) position, connect a test TK2 MS1
meter to pins 23 and 68 and 20 12 21 23 9 25 29 32 26 21 18
measure the voltage (meter A

reading: 12V) 1
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
EV
key first to “O” (OFF) and then LOCK EVP EVF 1 2 EVR 1 2
back to the “I” (ON) position X52 D A B E F C 2 1 2 1
+15 +30
Y5
Y6

Y2
Y3
Prop
be renewed.
Y1
Y7
Y4
0.013.9307.4 0.013.9308.4
D0034440
20-246
90 90-Alimentazione VPS2
TC-Errore logico
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the current draw of the powershift solenoid valves Y2, Y4, Y5 and Y6 is abnormal
ECU RESPONSE
beep.
CHECK
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF) and "GEARBOX" connector disconnected, connect a test meter to pin F of
infinity).
connector “EVF” (or EVR) and to the earth on the transmission and test the resistance to check for shorts to earth (meter
reading: infinity).
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, connect a test meter to pins 23 and 68 and measure the voltage (meter
reading: 12V)
0.013.9301.4
1 2 8 32 11 12 23
45
50 54 55 57 66 68
66 45 23 68 1 2 32 12 55 11 8 57 50 54 GEARBOX
GND4
TK2 MS1
20 12 21 23 9 25 21 18
A
1
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
+15 +30
Y2
Y5
Y6
Y3
Y1
Y4
0.013.9307.4 0.013.9308.4
D0034490
20-247
91 91-Frizione principale
TC-Errore logico
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects a conflict between values read by the NLSA and NHK sensors, the clutch pedal position sensor and
the position of the creeper control lever
ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to “TC-SHUTDOWN” mode and the transmission reverts to neutral.
CHECK
• Check that the creeper engagement lever is in the correct position and the sensor correctly placed.
• Check correct operation of the creeper engagement sensor (for details, see section 40).
• Test the resistance of the proportional solenoid valve (for details, see section 40).
• Check that the “NHK” e “NAB” connectors have not been inadvertently swapped around (the NAB connector should be
installed on the sensor nearest the rear lift).
connector “EVP” and to the earth on the transmission and check for 0 voltage (meter reading: 0 V).
“O” (OFF) and "GEARBOX"
c o n ne c t o r d i s c o nn e c t e d, 0.013.9301.4
connect a test meter to pin F of
connector “X52” and test the 1 2 8 32 11 12 23
resistance to check for shorts to
• Check the transmission 45
hydraulic system
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter 50 54 55 57 66 68
66 45 23 68 1 2 32 12 55 11 8 57 13 10 56 50 54 GEARBOX
be renewed.
GND4
TK2 MS1
20 12 21 23 9 25 29 32 26 21 18
A
1
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
EV
LOCK EVP EVF 1 2 EVR 1 2
X52 D A B E F C 2 1 2 1
+15 +30
Y5
Y6
Y2
Y3
Prop
Y1
Y7
Y4
0.013.9307.4 0.013.9308.4
D0034440
20-248
92 92-Tensione batteria
TC-Ingresso a +12V
DESCRIPTION
The control unit has detected an abnormally high input voltage
ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to “TC-SHUTDOWN” mode and the transmission reverts to neutral. In the event that one
or more of alarms 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69 or 70 should also be activated, the transmission will be switched to “TC-
SHUTDOWN” mode.
NOTE
This alarm is activated generally when the alternator charging voltage is irregular, and can be caused only by a fault
affecting the alternator itself.
CHECK
• Check first whether or not the battery voltage returns to normal with the engine running. In this instance the problem
may be attributable to a fault in the ECU, which must therefore be replaced with a new unit, otherwise the trouble is
being caused by incorrect operation of the alternator voltage regulator.
20-249
93 93-Tensione batteria
TC-Ingresso a massa
DESCRIPTION
The control unit has detected an abnormally low input voltage
ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to “TC-SHUTDOWN” mode and the transmission reverts to neutral. In the event that one
or more of alarms 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69 or 70 should also be activated, the transmission will be switched to “TC-
SHUTDOWN” mode.
NOTE
This alarm is generally activated when the battery voltage is less than 10V and can be caused by excessive current
draw when the engine is started, or if the battery is damaged or cannot be recharged by the alternator.
For this reason, this alarm can only be be displayed on EDS among the passive alarms. Should the alarm be
displayed among the active alarms, the control unit must be renewed.
CHECK
• See if the alarm is indicated as an active alarm; if so, the control unit must be renewed.
• Check, with the engine off, that the battery voltage is as prescribed (higher than 12V); if not, install a new battery.
NOTE
Lower voltages may be recorded after the tractor has been standing idle for an extended period; this does not
mean necessarily that the battery needs replacing.
may be attributable to the battery being discharged or damaged; if not, and the voltage remains lower than the
prescribed minimum, the trouble is caused by incorrect operation of the alternator.
NOTE
In extreme cases, when the battery is seriously damaged (short circuiting), the alternator may not be able to
recharge the cells or generate sufficient voltage. Before changing the alternator, check its correct or incorrect
operation by connecting a new battery.
20-250
94 94-EV proporzionale
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the main clutch solenoid valve is short-circuiting to battery positive
ECU RESPONSE
beep.
NOTE
CHECK
connector “EVP” and to the earth on the transmission and check for 0 voltage (meter reading: 0V).
connector “EVP” and to the earth on the transmission and check for 0 voltage (meter reading: 0V).
0.013.9301.4
1 2 10 13 23
45
56 66 68
66 45 23 68 1 2 13 10 56 GEARBOX
GND4
TK2
29 32 26
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
EV LOCK EVP
+15 +30 2 1 2 1
Prop
Y7
0.013.9307.4
D0034460
20-251

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the forward travel solenoid Y3 is shorting to battery positive
ECU RESPONSE
beep.
NOTE
CHECK
connector “X52” and to the earth on the transmission and check for 0 voltage (meter reading: 0V).
• With the starter key in position “I” (ON) and "GEARBOX" connector disconnected, connect a test meter to pin D of
0.013.9301.4
1 2 8 32 11 12 23
45
50 54 55 57 66 68
66 45 23 68 1 2 32 12 55 11 8 57 50 54 GEARBOX
GND4
TK2 MS1
20 12 21 23 9 25 21 18
A
1
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
+15 +30
Y2
Y5
Y6
Y3
Y1
Y4
0.013.9307.4 0.013.9308.4
D0034490
20-252

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the reverse travel solenoid Y1 is shorting to battery positive
ECU RESPONSE
beep.
NOTE
CHECK
• With the starter key in position “I” (ON) and "GEARBOX" connector disconnected, connect a test meter to pin B of
0.013.9301.4
1 2 8 32 11 12 23
45
50 54 55 57 66 68
66 45 23 68 1 2 32 12 55 11 8 57 50 54 GEARBOX
GND4
TK2 MS1
20 12 21 23 9 25 21 18
A
1
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
+15 +30
Y2
Y5
Y6
Y3
Y1
Y4
0.013.9307.4 0.013.9308.4
D0034490
20-253
97 97-Programma errato
TC-Errore logico
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the transmission ECU software has not been programmed correctly
ECU RESPONSE
CHECK
98 98-Config.errata
TC-Errore logico
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that transmission configuration data have not been programmed correctly.
ECU RESPONSE
CHECK
clutch, the clutch pedal and the road/field sensor.
20-254
99 99-Config. veicolo
TC-possibile errore
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that machine configuration data have not been saved correctly (CHECKSUM ERROR)
ECU RESPONSE
CHECK
clutch and the clutch pedal.
20-255
B0 B0-Sensore vel. nLSE

TC-Ingresso a massa
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the rpm sensor nLse is disconnected or short-circuiting to battery positive
ECU RESPONSE
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on the “NLSE” connector and on the "GEARBOX" transmission control unit are not oxidized
between pin 3 (positive) and pin 1 (negative) of connector “NLSE“).
connector “NLSE” and to the earth on the transmission and check for 0 voltage (meter reading 0V).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “NLSE” and to pin 17 of
connector "GEARBOX" and measure the resistance to verify that there is electrical continuity (test meter reading: 0
Ohm).
• Verify the correct operation of the sensor (for technical details, see section 40).
0.013.9301.4
1 2 3 16 17 23
45
40 66 68
66 45 23 68 1 2 62 3 16 40 17 GEARBOX
GND4
TK2
40 2 11 5 3 7 8
F14C
1A
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
F15A
3A
NAB NHK NLSA NLSE

3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
+15 +30 f f f f
+15
0.013.9307.4
20-256 D0034480

TC-Ingresso a +12V
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the rpm sensor nLse is short-circuiting to earth
ECU RESPONSE
CHECK
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “NLSE” and to transmission
earth, and measure the resistance to verify that there are no short circuits to earth (meter reading: infinity).
0.013.9301.4
1 2 3 16 17 23
45
40 66 68
66 45 23 68 1 2 62 3 16 40 17 GEARBOX
GND4
TK2
40 2 11 5 3 7 8
F14C
1A
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
F15A
3A
NAB NHK NLSA NLSE

3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
+15 +30 f f f f
+15
0.013.9307.4
D0034480
20-257

TC-Errore logico
DESCRIPTION
The control detects unreliable information coming from the rpm sensor nLse
ECU RESPONSE
CHECK
between pin 3 (positive) and pin 1 (negative) of connector “NLSE“).
0.013.9301.4
1 2 3 16 17 23
45
40 66 68
66 45 23 68 1 2 62 3 16 40 17 GEARBOX
GND4
TK2
40 2 11 5 3 7 8
F14C
1A
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
F15A
3A
NAB NHK NLSA NLSE

3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
+15 +30 f f f f
+15
0.013.9307.4
D0034480
20-258
B3 B3-FRRS EV campo
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the "FIELD" mode selector solenoid Y5 is disconnected
ECU RESPONSE
beep.
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on the “EVF” connector and on the "GEARBOX" transmission control unit are not oxidized and
are firmly secured.
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 1 of connector “EVF” and to pin 50 of connector
"GEARBOX" and measure the resistance to verify that there is electrical continuity (test meter reading: 0 Ohm).
0.013.9301.4
1 2 8 32 11 12 23
45
50 54 55 57 66 68
66 45 23 68 1 2 32 12 55 11 8 57 50 54 GEARBOX
GND4
TK2 MS1
20 12 21 23 9 25 21 18
A
1
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
+15 +30
Y2
Y5
Y6
Y3
Y1
Y4
0.013.9307.4 0.013.9308.4
D0034490
20-259
B4 B4-FRRS EV campo
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the "FIELD" mode selector solenoid Y5 is shorting to battery positive
ECU RESPONSE
beep.
NOTE
CHECK
connector “EVF” and to the earth on the transmission and check for 0 voltage (meter reading: 0V).
connector “EVF” and to the earth on the transmission and check for 0 voltage (meter reading: 0V).
0.013.9301.4
1 2 8 32 11 12 23
45
50 54 55 57 66 68
66 45 23 68 1 2 32 12 55 11 8 57 50 54 GEARBOX
GND4
TK2 MS1
20 12 21 23 9 25 21 18
A
1
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
+15 +30
Y2
Y5
Y6
Y3
Y1
Y4
0.013.9307.4 0.013.9308.4
D0034490
20-260
B5 B5-FRRS EV campo
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the "FIELD" mode selector solenoid Y5 is shorting to earth
ECU RESPONSE
beep.
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on the “EVF” connector and on the "GEARBOX" transmission control unit are not oxidized and
are firmly secured.
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF) and "GEARBOX" connector disconnected, connect a test meter to pin 1 of connector
“EVF” and to the earth on the transmission and test the resistance to check for shorts to earth (meter reading: infinity).
0.013.9301.4
1 2 8 32 11 12 23
45
50 54 55 57 66 68
66 45 23 68 1 2 32 12 55 11 8 57 50 54 GEARBOX
GND4
TK2 MS1
20 12 21 23 9 25 21 18
A
1
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
+15 +30
Y2
Y5
Y6
Y3
Y1
Y4
0.013.9307.4 0.013.9308.4
D0034490
20-261
B6 B6-FRRS EV strada
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the "ROAD" mode selector solenoid Y6 is disconnected
ECU RESPONSE
beep.
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on the “EVR” connector and on the "GEARBOX" transmission control unit are not oxidized and
are firmly secured.
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 1 of connector “EVR” and to pin 50 of connector
0.013.9301.4
1 2 8 32 11 12 23
45
50 54 55 57 66 68
66 45 23 68 1 2 32 12 55 11 8 57 50 54 GEARBOX
GND4
TK2 MS1
20 12 21 23 9 25 21 18
A
1
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
+15 +30
Y2
Y5
Y6
Y3
Y1
Y4
0.013.9307.4 0.013.9308.4
D0034490
20-262
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the "ROAD" mode selector solenoid Y6 is shorting to battery positive
ECU RESPONSE
beep.
NOTE
CHECK
connector “EVR” and to the earth on the transmission and check for 0 voltage (meter reading: 0V).
connector “EVR” and to the earth on the transmission and check for 0 voltage (meter reading: 0V).
0.013.9301.4
1 2 8 32 11 12 23
45
50 54 55 57 66 68
66 45 23 68 1 2 32 12 55 11 8 57 50 54 GEARBOX
GND4
TK2 MS1
20 12 21 23 9 25 21 18
A
1
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
+15 +30
Y2
Y5
Y6
Y3
Y1
Y4
0.013.9307.4 0.013.9308.4
D0034490
20-263
DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the "ROAD" mode selector solenoid Y6 is shorting to earth
ECU RESPONSE
beep.
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on the “EVR” connector and on the "GEARBOX" transmission control unit are not oxidized and
are firmly secured.
connector “EVR” and to the earth on the transmission and test the resistance to check for shorts to earth (meter reading:
infinity).
0.013.9301.4
1 2 8 32 11 12 23
45
50 54 55 57 66 68
66 45 23 68 1 2 32 12 55 11 8 57 50 54 GEARBOX
GND4
TK2 MS1
20 12 21 23 9 25 21 18
A
1
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
+15 +30
Y2
Y5
Y6
Y3
Y1
Y4
0.013.9307.4 0.013.9308.4
D0034490
20-264
B9 B9-EV Blocco Neutra

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the gearbox neutral lock solenoid Y7 is disconnected
ECU RESPONSE
beep.
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on the “EVLOCK” connector and on the "GEARBOX" transmission control unit are not oxidized
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF), connect a test meter to pin 1 of connector “EVLOCK” and to pin 10 of
0.013.9301.4
1 2 10 13 23
45
56 66 68
66 45 23 68 1 2 13 10 56 GEARBOX
GND4
TK2
29 32 26
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
EV LOCK EVP
+15 +30 2 1 2 1
Prop
Y7
0.013.9307.4
D0034460
20-265
BA BA-EV Blocco Neutra

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the gearbox neutral lock solenoid Y7 is shorting to battery positive
ECU RESPONSE
beep.
NOTE
CHECK
connector “EVLOCK” and to the earth on the transmission and check for 0 voltage (meter reading: 0V).
connector “EVLOCK” and to the earth on the transmission and check for 0 voltage (meter reading: 0V).
0.013.9301.4
1 2 10 13 23
45
56 66 68
66 45 23 68 1 2 13 10 56 GEARBOX
GND4
TK2
29 32 26
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
EV LOCK EVP
+15 +30 2 1 2 1
Prop
Y7
0.013.9307.4
D0034460
20-266
BB BB-EV Blocco Neutra

DESCRIPTION
The control unit detects that the gearbox neutral lock solenoid Y7 is shorting to earth
ECU RESPONSE
beep.
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on the “EVLOCK” connector and on the "GEARBOX" transmission control unit are not oxidized
connector “EVLOCK” and to the earth on the transmission and test the resistance to check for shorts to earth (meter
reading: infinity).
0.013.9301.4
1 2 10 13 23
45
56 66 68
66 45 23 68 1 2 13 10 56 GEARBOX
GND4
TK2
29 32 26
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
EV LOCK EVP
+15 +30 2 1 2 1
Prop
Y7
0.013.9307.4
D0034460
20-267
C0 C0-Msg PTCTL1 REQGEAR

TC-Errore Segnale CAN
DESCRIPTION
The transmission control unit detects an error in the information received by the HLHP control unit regarding the request
for range gear engagement.
ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to "LIMP-HOME-LS" mode.
CHECK
• Connect the ART to the HLHP control unit and check in the “3.1.1 DIGITAL INPUTS” menu that range up and down
buttons in the gearbox lever operate correctly.
• Cancel all alarms, turn the starter key first to "O" (OFF) and then back to the "I" (ON) position: if the alarm is still present,
the control unit must be renewed.
C1 Msg PTCTL1 TRAVDIR

Dispositivo guasto
DESCRIPTION
The transmission control unit detects an error in the information received by the HLHP control unit regarding the request
for direction of travel selection.
ECU RESPONSE
The control unit limits operation to "SUBSTITUTE STRATEGY" mode if the shuttle lever operates correctly, otherwise to
"TRANSMISSION-SHUTDOWN" mode.
CHECK
• Connect the ART to the armrest console and check in the “2.1 Joystick” menu that the travel direction selection buttons
operate correctly.
• Connect the ART to the HLHP control unit and check whether there are any active or passive alarms present regarding
the CANBUS and, if necessary, check the wiring following the instructions given in the chapter “CANBUS LINE
ALARMS”
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to "O" (OFF) and then back to the "I" (ON) position: if the alarm is still present,
20-268
C3 C3-Msg EEC1 ENGSPEED

TC-Errore Segnale CAN
DESCRIPTION
The transmission control unit detects an error in the information received by the ECU regarding the communication of
engine speed.
ECU RESPONSE
CHECK
• Connect the ART to the HLHP control unit and check, in the “3.1.2 INPUT FREQ” menu, that the engine speed signal is
correctly transmitted via the CANBUS.
• Check that the engine control unit does not detect any alarms regarding the CANBUS as active or passive alarms and,
if necessary, test the wiring following the instructions given in the chapter "5.6 CANBUS ALARMS".
• Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to "O" (OFF) and then back to the "I" (ON) position: if the alarm is still present,
20-269
CF CF-Messaggio EEC1
TC-Timeout CAN Msg
DESCRIPTION
The transmission control unit detects a fault on the CANBUS line.
ECU RESPONSE
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on the connector "GEARBOX" are not oxidized and are firmly secured.
• Check the CANBUS following the instructions given in the chapter "5.6 CANBUS ALARMS".
D1 D1-Msg LIMITATION
TC-Timeout CAN Msg
DESCRIPTION
The transmission control unit detects a fault on the CANBUS controller.
ECU RESPONSE
The control unit does not limit tractor operation.
CHECK
• Connect the ART to the HLHP control unit and check whether there are any alarms present regarding the CANBUS and,
if necessary, check the wiring following the instructions given in the chapter "5.6 CANBUS ALARMS".
20-270
D2 D2-Msg HPSACTRL
TC-Timeout CAN Msg
DESCRIPTION
The transmission control unit detects a fault on the CANBUS controller.
ECU RESPONSE
The control unit does not limit tractor operation.
CHECK
• Connect the ART to the HLHP control unit and check whether there are any alarms present regarding the CANBUS and,
if necessary, check the wiring following the instructions given in the chapter "5.6 CANBUS ALARMS".
EE
DESCRIPTION
The display detects a problem of communication with the transmission control unit.
CHECK
• Check the electrical connection between transmission display and control unit.
20-271
GEN1
DESCRIPTION
EDS software unable to connect to the transmission control unit.
CHECK
• Turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position, and try connecting to the transmission
control unit.
• Check the condition of the transmission control unit power supply fuses F5C and F16B
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position check that the control unit is receiving power correctly (12V between pin
23 and pin 68 (positive) and pin 1 and pin 2 (negative) of connector “GEARBOX”).
• With the starter key in position “I” (ON), check that the control unit is receiving power correctly (12 V between pin 21 and
pin 45 (positive) and pin 1 and pin 2 (negative) of the "GEARBOX" connector).
connector “X4” (diagnostic connector) and to the earth on the cab and test the resistance to check for shorts to earth
connector “X4” (diagnostic connector) and to the earth on the cab and check for 0 voltage (meter reading 0V).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 8 of connector “X4” (diagnostic connector) and to
pin 15 of connector "GEARBOX" and measure the resistance to check for electrical continuity (test meter reading: 0 Ohm).
• If the fault cannot be traced and rectified through this procedure, fit a new control unit.
0.013.9301.4
1 2 15 23
45
66 68
66 45 23 68 1 2 15 GEARBOX
GND4
2 8 1 X4
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C F9A

3A
+15 +30 +15
D0034430
20-272
GEN2
DESCRIPTION
Transmission switches unexpectedly from forward or reverse drive into neutral.
ECU RESPONSE
The display indicates forward drive, reverse drive and neutral status simultaneously, and a continuous beep is sounded.
CHECK
• Check the wiring, following the procedures described for alarms 53, 54, 55, B0, B1 and B2.
• Check the pressure in the hydraulic circuit of the transmission system.
20-273
GEN3
DESCRIPTION
The transmission continues to shift range automatically every 1 or 2 seconds
ECU RESPONSE
None.
CHECK
• Check the wiring, following the procedures described for alarms 36, 37, 38, 39, 40 and 41.
GEN4
DESCRIPTION
Momentary loss of traction with the tractor in motion
ECU RESPONSE
None.
CHECK
20-274
GEN5
DESCRIPTION
The transmission remains in neutral
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on the “S” connector of the starter enable switch and on the "GEARBOX" lift control unit are not
oxidized and are firmly secured.
• Check that the switch is functioning correctly (for details, see Group 40).
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 2 of connector “S” and to pin 31 of connector
"GEARBOX" and measure the resistance to verify that there is electrical continuity (test meter reading 0 Ohm).
0.013.9301.4
1 2 31 23
45
66 68
66 45 23 68 1 2 31 GEARBOX
GND4
TK2
31
GND2
7.5A
7.5A
F16B F5C
2 1
S
+15 +30
0.013.9307.4
D0034420
20-275
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
5. ALARMS 5.5 ARMREST ALARMS
5.5 ARMREST ALARMS

The armrest informs the operator of any malfunction affecting monitored components, both audibly and visually by way of
the Infocenter.
Connecting the ART® to the armrest makes it possible to view the complete list of alarms detected in the form of short de-
scriptive messages, while connecting the ART® to the HLHP control unit makes it possible to display the list in the form of
numerical codes designated SPN (Suspect Parameter Number i.e. possible faulty device) and FMI (Failure Mode Iden-
tifier) and the number of times the alarm in question has occurred.
On Infocenter On Art HPSA On armrest ART Description Page

SPN-FMI
Bracciolo,
SPN 634-FMI 12 Massa Pot.guasta Internal error detected 20-279
Errore scheda
Bracciolo,flusso Cntr. valve 3 potentiometer discon-

distrib.3 scollegato SPN 635-FMI 4 Joy dist3 scoll. nected 20-279
Bracciolo,flusso SPN 636-FMI 4 Joy dist4 scoll. Cntr. valve 4 potentiometer discon- 20-279
distrib.4 scollegato nected
Bracciolo,flusso max. Cntr. valve 3 max. flow potentiome-

SPN 641-FMI 4 Pot.Dist3F.scol. 20-281
distrib.3 disconnesso ter disconnected
Bracciolo,flusso max. Cntr. valve 4 max. flow potentiome-

distrib.4 disconnesso SPN 642-FMI 4 Pot.Dist4F.scol. ter disconnected 20-281
Bracciolo,flusso SPN 637-FMI 4 Pot.Dist1F.scol. Cntr. valve 1 max. flow potentiome- 20-280
Bracciolo,flusso, SPN 639-FMI 4 Pot.Dist2F.scol. Cntr. valve 2 max. flow potentiome- 20-280
Bracciolo,memoria Incorrect group 0 memory configu-

SPN 648-FMI 2 E2P CONFIG BRACC 20-284
blocco 0 in errore ration

blocco 1 in errore SPN 649-FMI 2 EEPROM FILTER1 ration 20-284
Bracciolo,memoria SPN 650-FMI 2 EEPROM FILTER 2 Incorrect group 2 memory configu- 20-285

SPN 651-FMI 2 EEPROM FILTER 3 20-285

blocco 4 in errore SPN 652-FMI 2 EEPROM FILTER 4 ration 20-285
Bracciolo,memoria SPN 657-FMI 2 EEPROM CALIB Incorrect group 5 memory configu- 20-286
Bracciolo,potenziom.
SPN 696-FMI 4 Pot.APS.scol. APS potentiometer disconnected 20-286
APS scollegato
Bracciolo,tempo, Cntr. valve 1 time set potentiometer

distrib.1 disconnesso SPN 638-FMI 4 Pot.Dist1T.scol. disconnected 20-280
Bracciolo,tempo, SPN 640-FMI 4 Pot.Dist2T.scol. Cntr. valve 2 time set potentiometer 20-281
distrib.2 disconnesso disconnected
Bracciolo,tensione
SPN 644-FMI 8 Alimentaz. 12V Incorrect 12V power supply 20-282
12V non corretta
20-277
Bracciolo,tensione Cntr. valve potentiometer 5V power

5V dist. non corretta SPN 647-FMI 8 Alimentaz.5V INT supply incorrect 20-284
Bracciolo,tensione SPN 645-FMI 8 Alimentaz. 6v8 Incorrect 6V voltage 20-283

6V non corretta
EXT Bracciolo, tensio- Lift unit console power supply vol-

SPN 646-FMI 8 Alimentaz.5V 20-283
ne 5V non corretta tage incorrect
20-278
SPN 634 - FMI 12 Bracciolo

Massa Pot. guasta Errore scheda
DESCRIPTION
Internal error detected
CHECK
• The only way to solve this alarm is to renew the controls unit located under the tip-up armrest.
SPN 635 - FMI 4 Bracciolo, flusso

Joy dist3 scoll. distrib.3 scollegato
DESCRIPTION
Detection: control valve 3 potentiometer disconnected
CHECK

Joy dist4 scoll. distrib.4 scollegato
DESCRIPTION
Detection: control valve 4 potentiometer disconnected
CHECK
20-279

Pot.Dist1F.scol. distrib.1 disconnesso
DESCRIPTION
Detection: control valve 1 max. flow potentiometer disconnected
CHECK
SPN 638 - FMI 4 Bracciolo, tempo

Pot.Dist1T.scol. distrib.1 disconnesso
DESCRIPTION
Detection: control valve 1 time set potentiometer disconnected
CHECK

DESCRIPTION
CHECK
20-280
SPN 640 - FMI 4 Bracciolo, tempo

Pot.Dist2T.scol. distrib.2 disconnesso
DESCRIPTION
Detection: control valve 2 time set potentiometer disconnected
CHECK
SPN 641 - FMI 4 Bracciolo, flusso max.

DESCRIPTION
CHECK
SPN 642 - FMI 4 Bracciolo, flusso max.

DESCRIPTION
CHECK
20-281
SPN 644 - FMI 8 Bracciolo, tensione

Alimentaz. 12V 12V non corretta
DESCRIPTION
The control unit has detected that the battery voltage is off range (lower than 10.0V or higher than 15.0V)
NOTE
This alarm is activated generally when the battery voltage is less than 10V.
It can be caused by excessive current draw when the engine is started, or if the battery is damaged or cannot be recharged
by the alternator.
This alarm is generally only displayed as a passive alarm on the ART. Should the alarm be displayed among the active
alarms, and the battery voltage is within the prescribed range (normal voltage 12V - 13.5V) with the engine on, the armrest
must be renewed.
CAUTION
Never connect the ART with the engine running when this alarm is displayed on the Infocenter as the instrument could be
damaged if the alarm is activated by a excessive battery voltage.
CHECK
Lower voltage values can be detected after prolonged disuse of the tractor although this does not make it necessary
to change the battery.
may be attributable to the battery being discharged or damaged; if not, and the voltage remains lower or higher than the
prescribed minimum, the trouble is being caused by incorrect operation of the alternator.
NOTE
In extreme cases, when the battery is seriously damaged (short-circuiting), the alternator may not be able to recharge the
cells or generate sufficient voltage. Before changing the alternator, verify its correct or incorrect operation by connecting
a new battery.
20-282

Alimentaz. 6v8 6V non corretta
DESCRIPTION
Detection: Incorrect 6V voltage
CHECK

Alimentaz.5V EXT 5V non corretta
DESCRIPTION
Detection: lift unit console power supply voltage incorrect.
CHECK
• Check that the contacts on the “X47” connector of the lift console and “X11” connector of the armrest are not oxidised
• With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 10 and to pin 11 of connector “X47” (console
side) and measure the resistance to check for electrical continuity (test meter reading: 800 - 1000 Ohm).
If the resistance differs from this value, fit a new lift console.
• With the starter key in position “O” (OFF), connect a test meter to pin 10 of connector “X47” of the console (wiring side)
and to the earth on the cab and perform a resistance test to check for shorts to earth (meter reading: infinity).
• With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, connect a test meter to pin 10 of connector “X47” of the console (wiring side)
and to the earth on the cab and perform a resistance test to check for shorts to battery positive (meter reading: 0 V).
• With the starter key in position “I” (ON), check that the lift console is receiving power correctly (5 Vdc between pin 10
(positive) and pin 11 (negative) of wiring side connector “X47”) .
• If the fault is not identified by the above checks, it can be attributed to a defective controls unit (located under the tip-
up armrest), and can be remedied by renewing the controls unit.
20-283

Alimentaz.5V INT 5V dist. non corretta
DESCRIPTION
Detection: potentiometer power supply control valve incorrect 5V voltage
CHECK
SPN 648 - FMI 2 Bracciolo, memoria

E2P CONFIG BRACC blocco 0 in errore
DESCRIPTION
Detection: Incorrect group 0 memory configuration
CHECK

EEPROM FILTER1 blocco 1 in errore
DESCRIPTION
CHECK
20-284

DESCRIPTION
CHECK

DESCRIPTION
CHECK

DESCRIPTION
CHECK
20-285

EEPROM CALIB blocco 5 in errorer
DESCRIPTION
CHECK
SPN 696 - FMI 4 Bracciolo, potenziom.

Pot.APS.scol. APS scollegato
DESCRIPTION
Detection: APS potentiometer disconnected
CHECK
The only way to solve this alarm is to renew the controls unit located under the tip-up armrest.
20-286
6. ENGINE CONTROL UNIT TESTER PROGRAM 6.1 ACCESS AND COMUNICATION
6. ENGINE CONTROL UNIT TESTER PROGRAM
6.1 ACCESS AND COMUNICATION

SERDIA (diagnostics and service) is a PC software application that allows communication with the control units mu means
of a notebook PC and interface.
The SERDIA program supports control units DEUTZ EMR1, EMR2, EMS2 and MVS and allows communication with
several control units with just one program.
The updated version is communicated by means of service communications.
All modifications relative to settings, parameterisation, cancellation of error memories and calibration of control units
are possible only with SERDIA.
SERDIA operates with Windows 2000 - XP operating systems.
The user interface makes it possible to retrieve all functions required simply by clicking the buttons with the mouse.
The following menu options can be open:
• Control units selection
• Parameterisation
• Error memory
• Operation test
• Activities
• Instruments
6.1.1 MINIMUM RESOURCES

The following minimum standards and resources are required for SERDIA operation:
• Notebook or PC with USB serial interface.
• Video card: minimum VGA
• 80486 processor (higher)
• Minimum memory 256 MB RAM
• Approx. 50 Mb free space on HD
• CD-Rom drive
• Software: Windows 2000 operating system or more recent version
6.1.2 ORDERING
SERDIA, and all special DEUTZ tools, can be ordered from:
SAME-DEUTZ-FAHR ITALIA S.p.A.

Viale F. CASSANI, 15
24047 TREVIGLIO (BG) - ITALY
6.1.2.1 INITIAL UTILISATION

For the initial utilisation we recommend the SERDIA package (LEVEL III) P/N 5.9030.740.4/30.
Supply:
• SERDIA software
• diagnostic interface with user level implemented
• concise installation instructions
• reference with tools and adapters for fault finding procedures
• carrying case
6.1.2.2 ORDERING OF INDIVIDUAL ITEMS

Meaning Competence level Order N°
20-297
Installation disk 5.9030.740.0/10

Level III interface General revision 5.9030.740.2/10
6.1.2.3 ADAPTER
Individual OEMs have their own diagnostic connectors. Therefore the SERDIA interface calls for the use of an intermediate
element (adapter) between the 12-pin DEUTZ connector and the respective OEM connector.
For diagnostics of DEUTZ-Fahr tractor engines SAME-DEUTZ-FAHR GROUP supplies suitable adapters (DEUTZ 12-pin
-> DFA 14-pin) as genuine original spare parts:
ORDER N° 5.9030.741.0
6.1.3 CONNECTION OF NOTEBOOK AND SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

6.1.3.1 INSTALLATION OF SERDIA 2000
If the WINDOWS operating system is not yet installed on your hard disk, install it now following the installation instructions
supplied with the software.
6.1.3.2 USER LEVELS, ACCESS AUTHORISATION

DEUTZ Service has provided three different user levels for SERDIA users (I, II, III,). The levels are preset in the interface.
The reason for the different access levels is to prevent unauthorised personnel from tampering with individual parameter
settings (similar to the lead seals applied to the injection pumps).
With this access authorisations system, a filter is implemented whereby only the parameters and function fields permitted
for the various user levels are accessible.
6.1.3.3 CREATION OF CONNECTION BETWEEN CONTROL UNIT (ENGINE) AND NOTEBOOK

Communication specifications:
• Serial communication
• BaudRate = 9600
• Serialport = COM1
SERDIA supplies as standard an interface for connection between the control unit and the customer's notebook PC. Even
though
several security measures are implemented in the interface and in the control unit, including reverse polarity protection,
protection against voltage surges and galvanic separation, it is not possible to eliminate completely the risk of errors,
therefore the connection
of the notebook with the control units must be carried out in strict compliance with the following instructions.
Procedure for connection taking care to observe the specified sequence of operations:
1) Switch off the engine by switching off the starter switch (terminal 15). Do not switch on the notebook PC yet.
2) Connect the interface diagnostic connector with the diagnostic connection on the vehicle, system.
The diagnostic connector must be fitted by the customer and can be included in the DEUTZ supply on request.
3) Connect the other side of the interface with the RS 232/COM1 serial port (9-pin connector on the rear of your
notebook PC).
Note: on PCs the COM1 port may be occupied by the mouse. In this case you must connect the interface cable to the
second serial port (COM2) which must then be configured (see chapter What to do if...?).
4) You can now switch on the starter switch (cl.15) and power up the notebook. The engine must not be started.
5) Launch the SERDIA application as described in chapter 1.8, launching the program.
20-298
6.1.3.4 LAUNCHING THE PROGRAM

In the Windows operating system the SERDIA program will open by double clicking the corresponding icon.
The first time you use the program:
the first time the program is opened it will initially perform a control unit recognition routine. SERDIA checks which control
units
are connected and with which control units it is possible to communicate. This procedure may last around 30 seconds,
because the program
successively interrogates all the possible control units. During this interval the message "searching for connected control
units"
will be displayed on the screen. Immediately afterwards the screen shows the "Control unit selection" form, in which any
unrecognised control units
are displayed in grey.
• Select the required control unit and confirm with OK.

• The message "Initialisation active!" is displayed (lasting approximately 7 seconds). A connection with the control unit
is established.
Relaunching the program:
SERDIA records the last control units recognised at the time of the previous program launch (e.g. EMR2). If said control
units are connected during the second program launch, SERDIA will skip the recognition phase and starts initialising the
control units immediately. This significantly reduces the time required for the program to open.
The message "Initialization active" is displayed (duration of approx. 7 seconds). A connection with the control unit is
established.
If another control unit has been connected before relaunching the program, the recognition procedure is started (duration
approx. 30 seconds).
For engines with two control units (e.g. EMR with EMS2) it is possible to select the required control unit, performing a new
recognition procedure (see 2.1).
20-299
6.1.3.5 PROCEDURE FOR COMMUNICATION WITH THE CONTROL UNIT

Possible communication procedure:
after having performed the communication procedure correctly the main screen form is displayed
"Service diagnostic" with the fields "Control Units", "Control unit identification"
and "Measured values" (see Control unit selection chapter).
In addition to a selection menu, said forms contain the "Activity" button (see "Activity" chapter).
The communication status between the PC/notebook and control unit is represented by means of text and a
coloured section in the status bar:
Yellow (flashing): ISO blocks processing, i.e. exchange of data (e.g. measured values) between SERDIA and the
control unit.
Green (flashing): ISO connection OK, i.e. only blocks are exchanged to maintain communication between SERDIA
and the control unit active.
red: communication interrupted.
Communication procedure failed:
the communication procedure can fail for the following reasons:
• No control unit or interface connected
• Communication error, see Errors chapter in the communication procedure.
In both cases an error message is displayed and SERDIA proposes offline mode, see the Offline Mode chapter.
6.1.3.6 OFFLINE MODE

If no control unit/engine and/or interface is available, you can use SERDIA in
password protected mode or in DEMO mode for training purposes.
Password protected mode and DEMO mode are proposed by SERDIA whenever an incorrect
communication procedure is signalled.
20-300
Click on "OK". Select the required mode in the "Confirm" window.
6.1.3.7 PASSWORD PROTECTED MODE

If you confirmed by clicking "Yes", after entering password 4000000 authorised users can read and print data, although the
cannot edit them.
6.1.3.8 DEMO MODE (TRAINING WITHOUT CONTROL UNIT)

If you press "No" the program enters DEMO mode.
1) In this mode you can practice using SERDIA without values.
2) You can read and print the graphics stored in the program.
On the contrary, in this mode it is not possible to perform operating tests of the control unit functions, for example.
20-301
6.1.4 PROGRAM COMMANDS

1) In "Windows" open the SERDIA program
2) From the main menu screen of SERDIA click on "Control unit selection".
3) From the "Control unit selection" screen select the required control unit
4) From the main SERDIA screen select the required menu option
6.1.4.1 MAIN SCREEN, MENU SELECTION

Menu item Control units Explanation
Control unit selection
Selection of required control unit (you can select just one control
Control unit selection All
unit)
Print all Export the values measured or the identification data of the control
unit to a printer or file
Protocol all Port configuration (Level IIIa only)
New recognition all New control unit recognition
Load operating software EMR2 Load operating software in EMR2 (Level IIIa only)
Engine switched off EMR2 Remote engine switch off
RG Reset EMR2 Control unit reset
Measured values
Display of all current values (also with engine stopped, but with U-
Current measured values all Batt.).
Ram values all EMR1: Level II only, EMR2: Level III, IIIa
In/Out Allocation all Allocation of signals utilised to control unit pins
CAN status all Single CAN monitor
Parameterisation
Configuration all Read and edit configuration
Programming complete Level III, IIIa only
Calibration Data logger calibration, e.g. pedal travel transducer
Errors memory
Errors memory all Read, display, and clear errors memory
Errors memory 2 EMR2 Read, display, and clear errors memory (Level III, IIIa only)
Control actuators, e.g. regulation element actuation (Level III, IIIa
Operating test only)
Extra
Maximum speed EMR2 Selection of three different max. speeds
Logistic data all
Collective load EMR2
Maintenance data
Help all General help for main menu form and relative buttons.
Activity EMR2 For specific maintenance tasks
20-302
6.1.4.2 MENU OPTION "CONTROL UNIT SELECTION"

SERDIA can communicate only with one control unit. Therefore the first step is to select the required control unit by clicking
on "Control unit selection" in the menu.
For more information refer to the chapter Control unit selection.
6.1.4.3 "MEASURED VALUES" ("CURRENT MEASURED VALUES") MENU OPTION

From a list of values measured including the inputs and outputs, you can select and display a series of values.
The displayed values that have exceeded an upper or lower limit value (if set) are highlighted by means of colours.
The values displayed are exclusively the measurement points associated with the control unit in question, with the
following distinction
• read values
• read electronic system values
sorted by
• definition
• value
• unit
The values are updated with a predefined scanning frequency. They can be displayed with engine running or with engine
stopped.
For more information refer to the chapter Measurement values.
6.1.4.4 "PARAMETERISATION" MENU OPTION

The numerous facilities available in relation to DEUTZ control units make it necessary to carry out targeted programming
specifically adapted in relation to the various operating conditions. If requested by the customer, modifications can be
made to the parameterisation, adaptations to local situations, or replacements, all of which make it necessary to access
the programming data.
Modifications to the parameterisation are only possible by means of SERDIA!
This menu option is also utilised to replace screwdriver settings, which are required in the case of analog control units.
Within the framework of preset limits, individual parameters can be edited (such as, for example, dynamic behaviour).
Parameterisation is performed in two separate screens, one for configuration and one for calibration. Access to the fields
of the various screens depends on the authorisation level of the connected user. Fields for which the user does not have the
necessary access privileges are not displayed.
6.1.4.5 "ERRORS MEMORY" MENU OPTION

This menu option is used to read the error messages stored in the control units.
Error messages refer exclusively to the electrical engine equipment, such as the wiring and the data logger. For example,
a typical error message could be "A general fault has occurred or a cable is broken/short circuited".
Only passive error messages can be deleted. Active error messages will remain in the memory.
Active error messages can be transformed into passive error messages by eliminating the relative error.
Error messages are retained in the memory also when the battery/power supply is connected.
The following information is displayed together with the error message:
• error position
• error type
• ambient data at time of error
• total number of errors (relative to the positions)
• frequency
• error status (active/passive)
• emergency mode operation (yes / no)
SERDIA offers auxiliary functions for the elimination of errors. You can also use the menu options "Measurement values"
and "Operating tests". For more information refer to the chapter Errors memory.
20-303
6.1.4.6 "OPERATING TESTS" MENU OPTION

SERDIA supports a large number of operating tests divided in accordance with the specific control unit (e.g. test of
adjustment element for EMR2).
Testing operating performance offers a valuable tool, especially in relation to troubleshooting procedures and
maintenance work.
For example, you can activate and test individual outputs of the control units by selecting test mode.
CAUTION: The tractor engine must be switched off
In the operating test the actuators of the tester program are activated by bypassing the running software of the
control unit.
Actuators are switched on or off in the nominal value column by clicking on the control box alongside the description of the
actuator. The reactions of the status of the actuator activated by the control unit are displayed under the real value.
The actuator status test always resides in the control unit and can be transmitted to SERDIA exclusively from the control
unit. In other words, if the effective required value is not obtained, this probably indicates a wiring error. The use of the
combination of menu options "Errors memory" and "Operating tests" may be helpful to pinpoint the cause of faults.
For more information on the subject of Operating tests refer to the chapter Operating tests.
6.1.4.7 "TOOLS" MENU OPTION

SERDIA supports a large number of specific tools for the control units.
Various submenus can be opened each of which containing its own video page:
• Top speed
• Logistic data
• Collective load
• Maintenance overrun
• OVerride memory
• Maintenance data
For more information refer to the chapter Tools.
6.1.4.8 HELP
In addition to these operating instructions you can also use SERDIA's Help function. In Windows, click on the
"Help" button.
6.1.5 END COMMUNICATION

Before removing the connections between the notebook PC and the engine control unit, go back to the main screen page
and click on "Exit".
If any parameters have been changed it may be advisable to check the current parameterisation. To do this, proceed as
follows:
1. Close SERDIA
2. Switch off the engine power supply and then switch it on again.
3. Restart SERDIA
4. Reactivate the control unit
5. Select the "Parameterisation" option
6. From the configuration page click on the "CENTR->PC" button
7. Export the configuration data by clicking the "PRINT" button
8. Print the engine documentation
9. Only once SERDIA is disconnected (after clicking "Exit"), disconnect the engine control unit from the notebook PC
(interface with cable).
20-304
6. ENGINE CONTROL UNIT TESTER PROGRAM 6.2 CONTROL UNIT SELECTION
6.2 CONTROL UNIT SELECTION

6.2.1 SELECTION OF TWO CONTROL UNITS
SERDIA automatically attempts to establish a connection with the last control unit recognised. If another control unit has
been selected, you need to repeat the control units recognition procedure by means of the "Control uni selection" / "New
recognition" menu option (duration approx. 30 seconds).
After the recognition phase the control units selection page will be displayed, showing exclusively the control units that
have been recognised. Control units that cannot be selected are shown in grey.
Possible control units:

• EMR1, EMR2 (electronic engine governor)
• MVS (electromagnetic valve system)
• EMS2 (Engine Monitoring System)
20-305
6.2.2 PRINT (EXPORT)

The data for identification of the selected control units and the data of other windows can be exported in two different ways:
1) Print to printer
To obtain a printout you will need to select a suitable printer driver in Windows.
The logistic data are shown at the head of all printouts:
• control unit type
• date
• time (system time set on the notebook)
• serial interface number
In addition, data relative to identification of the control unit and data of the measured values are shown.
2) Print to file
The resulting file can be edited, e.g. using Excel.
The following table illustrates the various options for storage of the data of the various video pages:
• as a printable file for further processing
• as a configuration file for communication of changes
• as a graphic file (*.egr) that can be read in SERDIA demo mode.
From form Key Extension Comment

Service diagnostics Print (file) *.ecu
for further processing, e.g. in Excel
Current measured values File *.msv
for further processing, e.g. in Excel
RAM values File *.msv
(EMR1: Level IIIa only, EMR2: Level III, IIIa only)
(AscII) *.agr for further processing, e.g. in Excel
Graphic
(Binary *.egr readable in DEMO SERDIA mode
Input/Output Print (file) *.ino for further processing, e.g. in Excel
Print (file) *.kfg
Configuration *.hex configuration file
Save to file
*.tds partial record, Level IIIa only
configuration file
Complete programming Control unit-->file *.hex (complete records, Levels III and IIIa)
Errors memory Print (file) *.err for further processing, e.g. in Excel
Logistic data Print (file) *.dat
20-306
6.2.3 PROTOCOL
This menu option is provided exclusively for DEUTZ for configuration of the interface.
6.2.4 IDENTIFICATION AND MEASUREMENT DATA
6.2.4.1 MEANING OF IDENTIFICATION DATA

• DEUTZ Part Number: Part number of the selected control unit.
• Commercial partner code: commercial partner code
• Product number:
Selected control unit type:
1 = EMR1, EMR2
2 = MVS
3 = EMS2
• Hardware version number: this number defines the version of the control unit.
• Software version number: this is the number of the control unit's EEPROM chip. If the number to the left of the decimal
point is changed (e.g. from 2. 1 to 3.1), the record will no longer work with the control unit. In this case contact the
manufacturer.
• Binary code checksum: binary code
• ISO access command: ISO access commands
• TN DEUTZ with label: label number
• Part number DEUTZ operative software: part number of Deutz management software
• Control unit serial number - Serial number year - Serial number month: year and month serial numbers
• Operating hours: number of engine running hours
• Number of engine starts
• Engine number
• Day of last modification - Month of last modification - Year of last modification: date on which parameterisation was
carried out on the control unit
• Last Service ID: serial number of the interface utilised during the last intervention. The first number denotes the
intervention level.
• Interface serial number: serial number of the currently used interface.
6.2.4.2 MEASUREMENT DATA

The "Measured values" field shows a part of the measured values.
This selection is not configurable.
20-307
6. ENGINE CONTROL UNIT TESTER PROGRAM 6.3 MEASUREMENT VALUES
6.3 MEASUREMENT VALUES
6.3.1 CURRENT VALUES (IN GENERAL)

The measured values are read cyclically and displayed in the "Current measured values" page.
Values that are outside the measurement rage of the sensor are highlighted by means of the following colours:
• Yellow: measurement range passed.
• Blue: Measurement range not reached.
EXPLANATION OF FUNCTION BUTTONS:

• Measured values: the "Select measured values" window is displayed with all the available values. In this window you
can select also the values that you wish to display. In general, the fewer the values to be displayed the higher the display
refresh frequency. The number of possible values available varies in accordance with the type of control unit.
• Graphic: the "Graphic" button serves to display the time trend of the selected measurement parameters (max. 5
parameters). If you select more than five measurement parameters an error message will be returned.
• Measurement duration: the duration of the recording is shown in seconds in the Measurement duration field. The
smallest value of measurement duration is one second. The maximum limit is several hours (defined in units of one
second). The default setting is 10 seconds.
The shortest measurement time is
40 ms for RAM values
60 ms for other values.
A measurement duration of 10 seconds results in:
for RAM values 10,000 ms/40 ms = 250 measurement points
for all other values 100,000 ms/60 ms = 166 measurement points.
Since the program offers a maximum of approximately 2000 measurement points, before starting the registration of
data the measurement frequency is adapted automatically.
The smallest possible measurement frequency is given by the duration of the data transmission from the control unit
to the PC.
The more measurement parameters to be displayed simultaneously the greater the duration of the data transmission
and the lower the measurement frequency.
• File:
the updated measurement data can be saved to file and retrieved at a later date, e.g. for additional processing with
Excel.
• Print: the displayed measured values are printed.
• Exit: return to the main "Service diagnostics" window.
20-308
6.3.1.1 SELECTION OF MEASURED VALUES

A list of the available measured values is displayed.
You can select which values are to be included in this list. The values are selected by clicking the required boxes. No more
than five values can be selected for the graphic representation (see 3.1.2 Graphics).
To activate or deactivate a larger number of values use the four buttons to the right of the list. The button functions are as
follows:
• Save: the selection of displayed values is saved to a file.
• Open: the values selection is retrieved from a file.
• Delete selection: the display of all values is deactivated.
• Select all: display of all values is activated.
• OK: to restore the display of current values. Changes in the values selection are saved.
• Exit: to return to the display of current values. Changes in the values selection are abandoned.
The following tables show the measured values that can be displayed. For certain parameters you will also need a
configuration (see chapter 4 Parameterisation), in which it is possible to assign specific measurement points to the inputs/
outputs of EMR1/EMR2 ("Configuration" menu, page 11: Assignment of inputs to measured values" and "page 13:
Assignment of outputs to measured values"). The values required for the configuration of parameters are shown in the
table. The assignment can be checked in the "Measured values" menu with the "Illustration of inputs/outputs" menu (see
Inputs/Outputs).
20-309
6.3.1.1.1 EMR2 MEASURED VALUES

VALUES SELECTION
Corresponding
Definition of measurement points Description RAM value
Battery voltage
Speed 1 (crankshaft) 2000
Speed 1 (crankshaft) 2031
Speed 2 (cam shaft) 2002
Control rod travel 2300
Control rod travel 2330
Engine coolant temperature 2904
Fuel temperature 2906
Air supply temperature 2905
Accelerator potentiometer voltage 2900
Hand throttle
Hand throttle 2901
Oil pressure Oil pressure 2903
Atmospheric pressure Atmospheric pressure 2930
Engine coolant level Engine coolant level 2820
Engine brake status Engine brake status 2826
Gearbox status Gearbox status 2827
Error lamp status Error lamp status 2868
Origin of engine stop
LIMIT. Speed
Speed Travel speed
Fuel consumption calculation Fuel consumption 2360
Injected quantity calculation Injection quantity 2350
Quantity limitation Quantity limitation 2701
Active quantity limitation Active quantity limitation
Preset active nominal value
Active performance reduction
Active curve 3145
Active rpm limitation
Oil pressure warning signal (optional)
Torque (optional)
Output: ( F16 ) frequency Rpm 1 Rpm 2 2000 2001 2002
Output: ( F16 ) digital 7 2857
Output: (M2 ) digital 3 2853
20-310
Corresponding
Definition of measurement points Description RAM value
Digital input ( F6 ) 3 Input 2854
Dig. input ( F18 ) /PWM 1 Input 2856
Dig. input ( F18 ) /PWM 1 Input
Digital input ( F19 ) 4 Input
Dig./Analog Input ( F20 ) 3 Input
Dig. input ( F21 ) /PWM 2 Input
Input
Input
Fuel temperature 2906
Input
Engine coolant temperature 2904
Oil pressure sensor input
Air supply temperature sensor input
6.3.1.2 GRAPHICS
If you select a maximum of 5 measured values, clicking on "Graphic" opens the "Graphic Representation" window.
The measured parameters are represented within a display range (minimum to maximum).
The values on the axis scales are entered in the "Delta" column.
Selecting the "Help" check box allows you to execute the representation in a scale selected automatically by the program.
Since the program performs the representation taking account of the minimum and maximum values of the various
measured parameters, it is not possible to execute the automatic scale representation in the case of measured parameters
that are constant through time.
A maximum of two axes are created, one on the left and one on the right of the display field..
In L columns (left) and R columns (right) you can assign a representation on the axis to a parameter.
20-311

• Start: this function button starts the data recording procedure.
• Update: this button updates the displayed information. The update is necessary if any change has been made to the
minimum, maximum, or delta values. The update will take account of the new values.
• Print: click on this button to send the data to a printer. First a printer selection screen will be displayed followed by a
screen in which you can enter a comment. Finally the printout is generated.
• Save: the formations of the displayed representations can be saved to file in two different formats:
1) as an ASCII file (*.agr) for further processing, e.g. using Excel
2) as a binary file (*.egr) for representation of graphics in offline mode, see 1.9 Offline mode.
• Open: The graphic information saved in a file is retrieved and displayed.
6.3.2 RAM VALUES

RAM values are calculated from the measurement values by means of the microprocessors in the control units and they are
made available by SERDIA.
The following table shows the possible RAM values that are utilised by EMR2 control units.
20-312
2283PreheatActive 2701FuelLimitMax
2000Speed
2284PostheatActive 2702FuelLimitStart
2001SpeedPickUp1
2285StartReadActive 2703FuelLimitSpeed
2002SpeedPickUp2
2704FuelLimitBoost
2003SpeedPickUp1Value 2300ActPos
2705FuelLimitSimBoost
2004SpeedPickUp2Value 2330ActPosSetpoint
2706FuelLimitVelocity
2005ActivePickUp 2350FuelQuantity
2707FuelLimitCan
2025SpeedGradient 2353FuelQuantityCorr
2710FuelLimitMinActive
2031SpeedSetp 2360FuelConsumption
2711FuelLimitMaxActive
2032SpeedSetpRamp 2361FuelEconomy
2712StartLimitActive
2033SpeedSetpSelect 2400Can:Online
2713SpeedLimitActive
2041DigitalPotOffset 2401Can:RxTelActive
2714BoostLimitActive
2100P_CorrFactor 2402Can:RxTelTimeOut
2715SimBoostLimitActive
2101I_CorrFactor 2403Can:RxTelVoltTimOut
2716VelocityLimitActive
2102D_CorrFactor 2404Can:RxIRCount
2717CanLimitActive
2110FuelSpeedGovernor 2405Can:TxIRCount
2720SpeedLimit1Active
2111SpeedGov:P-Part 2406Can:BusOffCount
2112SpeedGov:I-Part 2407Can:RxBufOverflow
2113SpeedGov:D-Part 2408Can:Tx0BufOverflow
2723ReduceCan
2115StaticCorrActive 2409Can:Tx1BufOverflow
2724ReduceOilPressure
2120DroopPresent 2410Can:FragBufOverflow
2725ReduceCharAirTemp
2411Can:SetpointPhase
2130IMFuelSetp
2726ReduceCoolantTemp
2412Can:SetpointError
2131IMFuelSetpSelect
2727ReduceAmbientPress
2533FuelTempFuelCorr
2132IMOrAllSpeedGov
2730SetpLimitCan
2600EngineNo:Low
2133IMGovAtMaxOrIdle
2731SetpLimitVelocity
2601EngineNo:High
2134IMFuelSetOrGovernor
2740Setp1Source:Analog
2602FunctionSetNo:Low
2135IMSetpoint
2741Setp1Source:PWM
2603FunctionSetNo:High
2140TorqueSetpoint
2742Setp1Source:Subst
2604CanSetNo:Low
2141TorqueReserveMax
2743Setp1Source:Can
2605CanSetNo:High
2142TorqueReserveCurve
2750CurrSetp:Setpoint1
2606ASAP2SetNo
2143TorqueLimitMax
2751CurrSetp:Setpoint2
2607SerdiaID:Low
2144TorqueLimitCurve
2752CurrSetp:SpeedFix1
2608SerdiaID:High
2145TorqueLimitCurveAct
2753CurrSetp:SpeedFix2
2609SerdiaDate:Day
2150EngineBrakeActive
2754CurrSetp:Freeze
2610SerdiaDate:Month
2251LimitsDelay
2755CurrSetp:FreezeSetp
2611SerdiaDate:Year
2280GlowPlugActive
2756CurrSetp:HoldButton
2612EOLDate:Day
2281FlameGlowPlugActive
2757CurrSetp:MinButton
2613EOLDate:Month
2282FlameValveActive
2758CurrSetp:MaxButton
2614EOLDate:Year
20-313
2759CurrSetp:CalIdle 2901Setpoint2Extern 3060ErrDigitalOutput3

2761CurrSetp:VeloIdle 2902BoostPressure 3062ErrDigitalOutput7
2810SwitchDroop2 2903OilPressure 3063ErrOverCurrentOD3
2811SwitchDroopCurve 2904CoolantTemp 3067ErrHardwSetp1
2812SwitchSpeedFix1 2905CharAirTemp 3068ErrCanSetp1
2813SwitchSpeedFix2 2906FuelTemp 3070ErrCanBus
2814SwitchSpeedLimit2 2920BoostPressureCorr 3071ErrCanComm
2815SwitchSpeedLimit3 2921FuelTempCorr 3076ErrParamStore
2816SwitchGovernIMOrAll 2930AmbientPressure 3077ErrProgramTest
2817SwitchFreezeSpeed 2931AmbientPressActive 3078ErrRAMTest
2818SwitchFreezeSetp 3000ConfigurationError 3080ErrPowerCurrent
2819SwitchOilLevel 3001ErrPickUp1 3083ErrRef1
2820SwitchCoolantLevel 3002ErrPickUp2 3084ErrRef2
2821SwitchSpeedInc 3003ErrVelocity 3085ErrRef4
2822SwitchSpeedDec 3004ErrOverSpeed 3086ErrIntTemp
2823SwitchMinButton 3005ErrSetp1Extern 3087ErrAmbPressure
2824SwitchMaxButton 3006ErrSetp2Extern 3090ErrData
2825SwitchHoldButton 3007ErrBoostPressure 3093ErrStack
2826SwitchBrake 3008ErrOilPressure 3094ExceptionNumber
2827SwitchNeutral 3009ErrCoolantTemp 3095ExceptionAddrLow
2828SwitchGlowPlug 3010ErrCharAirTemp 3096ExceptionAddrHigh
2829SwitchEngineStop 3011ErrFuelTemp 3097ExceptionFlag
2851DigitalOut1 3030ErrOilPressWarn 3098ErrorActive
2852DigitalOut2 3031ErrCoolantTempWarn 3099EEPROMErrorCode
2853DigitalOut3 3032ErrCharAirTempWarn 3101S1ErrPickUp1
2854DigitalOut4 3033ErrOilLevelWarn 3102S1ErrPickUp2
2855DigitalOut5 3034ErrCoolantLevelWarn 3103S1ErrVelocity
2856DigitalOut6 3035ErrWarnSpeed 3104S1ErrOverSpeed
2857DigitalOut7 3036ErrFuelTempWarn 3105S1ErrSetp1Extern
2861DigitalOut1State 3040ErrOilPressEcy 3106S1ErrSetp2Extern
2862DigitalOut2State 3041ErrCoolantTempEcy 3107S1ErrBoostPressure
2863DigitalOut3State 3042ErrChargeAirTempEcy 3108S1ErrOilPressure
2864DigitalOut4State 3043ErrOilLevel 3109S1ErrCoolantTemp
2865DigitalOut5State 3044ErrCoolantLevel 3110S1ErrChargeAirTemp
2866DigitalOut6State 3050ErrFeedback 3111S1ErrFuelTemp
2867DigitalOut7State 3052ErrRefFeedback 3130S1ErrOilPressWarn
2868StatusErrorLamp 3053ErrActuatorDiff 3131S1ErrCoolTempWarn
2900Setpoint1Extern 3059ErrFeedbackAdjust 3132S1ErrChAirTempWarn
20-314
3133S1ErrOilLevelWarn 3206S2ErrSetp2Extern 3287S2ErrAmbPressure

3134S1ErrCoolLevelWarn 3207S2ErrBoostPressure 3290S2ErrData
3135S1ErrWarnSpeed 3208S2ErrOilPressure 3293S2ErrStack
3136S1ErrFuelTempWarn 3209S2ErrCoolantTemp 3294S2ErrIntern
3140S1ErrOilPressEcy 3210S2ErrChargeAirTemp 3300Velocity
3141S1ErrCoolantTempEcy 3211S2ErrFuelTemp 3350EGRValveActive
3142S1ErrCharAirTempEcy 3230S2ErrOilPressWarn 3351EGRFuelFilter
3143S1ErrOilLevel 3231S2ErrCoolTempWarn 3352EGRBoostLimitActive
3144S1ErrCoolantLevel 3232S2ErrChAirTempWarn 3353EGRFuelActive
3150S1ErrFeedback 3233S2ErrOilLevelWarn 3354EGRCoolantActive
3152S1ErrRefFeedback 3234S2ErrCoolLevelWarn 3355EGRAmbientActive
3153S1ErrActuatorDiff 3235S2ErrWarnSpeed 3356EGRMapActive
3159S1ErrFeedbackAdjust 3236S2ErrFuelTempWarn 3500PWMIn1
3160S1ErrDigitalOut3 3240S2ErrOilPressEcy 3501FrequencyIn1
3162S1ErrDigitalOut6 3241S2ErrCoolantTempEcy 3502PWMIn2
3163S1ErrOverCurrentOD3 3242S2ErrCharAirTempEcy 3503FrequencyIn2
3167S1ErrHardwSetp1 3243S2ErrOilLevel 3510AnalogIn1
3168S1ErrCanSetp1 3244S2ErrCoolantLevel 3511AnalogIn1_Value
3170S1ErrCanBus 3250S2ErrFeedback 3520AnalogIn2
3171S1ErrCanComm 3252S2ErrRefFeedback 3521AnalogIn2_Value
3174S1ErrCanPassive 3253S2ErrActuatorDiff 3530AnalogIn3
3176S1ErrParamStore 3259S2ErrFeedbackAdjust 3531AnalogIn3_Value
3177S1ErrProgramTest 3260S2ErrDigitalOut3 3540AnalogIn4
3178S1ErrRAMTest 3262S2ErrDigitalOut6 3541AnalogIn4_Value
3180S1ErrPowerCurrent 3263S2ErrOverCurrentOD3 3550TempIn1
3183S1ErrRef1 3267S2ErrHardwSetp1 3551TempIn1_Value
3184S1ErrRef2 3268S2ErrCanSetp1 3560TempIn2
3185S1ErrRef4 3270S2ErrCanBus 3561TempIn2_Value
3186S1ErrIntTemp 3271S2ErrCanComm 3570TempIn3
3187S1ErrAmbPressure 3274S2ErrCanPassive 3571TempIn3_Value
3190S1ErrData 3276S2ErrParamStore 3600ServoCurrrent
3193S1ErrStack 3277S2ErrProgramTest 3601PowerSupply
3194S1ErrIntern 3278S2ErrRAMTest 3603Reference1+5V
3201S2ErrPickUp1 3280S2ErrPowerCurrent 3604Reference2+5V
3202S2ErrPickUp2 3283S2ErrRef1 3605Reference4+5V
3203S2ErrVelocity 3284S2ErrRef2 3606IntTemp
3204S2ErrOverSpeed 3285S2ErrRef4 3700StartCounter
3205S2ErrSetp1Extern 3286S2ErrIntTemp 3701WorkingHours
20-315
3702WorkingSeconds 3944EMR1ActuatorActive
3720LoadWorkMap:h 3950Feedback
3730LoadWorkMap:s 3955FeedbackReference
3740ElectronicTemp:T 3960FeedbackCorrection
3745ElectronicTemp:h
3750ElectronicTemp:s
3800EmergencyAlarm
3801CommonAlarm
3802EngineStop
3803EngineStopped
3804EngineStarting
3805EngineRunning
3806EngineReleased
3810ButtonActive
3821EEPROMAccess:ISO
3823EEPROMAccess:Button
3827EEPROMAccess:Memory
3828EEPROMAccess:Work
3830Phase
3840HardwareVersion
3841AddHardwareVersion
3842SoftwareVersion
3843BootSoftwareVersion
3844SerialDate
3845SerialNumber
3847BootDevelopmVersion
3850Identifier
3851LastIdentifier
3865CalculationTime
3870Timer
3895RAMTestAddr
3896RAMTestPattern
3897CStackTestFreeBytes
3898IStackTestFreeBytes
3905ServoPIDCorr
3906ServoStateStatic
3916ServoCurrentSetp
3917ServoCurrentCorr
20-316
6.3.3 INPUT/OUTPUT CONFIGURATION

The inputs and outputs can be configured. The current settings of the inputs and outputs are displayed under this
menu option.
6.3.4 CAN STATUS

This window shows CAN bus activities of EMR1 and EMR2.
• Sent: contains CAN information:TxCounter (from 0 to 65,535 words). This value increases with each CAN transmission
signal and indicates the data sending activities of the EMR1 control unit.
• Received: contains CAN information:RxIrCounter (from 0 to 65,535 words). This value increases with each CAN
transmission signal and indicates the data sending activities of the EMR1 control unit.
• Bus Off: counter that indicates the frequency with which the EMR1 control unit has disconnected from the CAN bus
due to permanent errors (CanBusOff-Counter from 0 to 255 bytes).
• Status: CanOnline indicates whether the EMR1 control unit is active on the CAN bus. The value 1 for online status and
0 for offline status is transmitted on the ISO 9141 interface. The SERDIA program displays the message "online" (for
value 1) or "offline" (for value 0).
20-317
• Phase: The CanSetPointPhase variable (from 0 to 255 bytes) is transmitted by means of the ISO 9141 interface.
This variable indicates the duration in the preset nominal value:
Phase Text
0 MotSteht, initialisation, start procedure
1 MotSteht, stop phase 1, no CAN error
2 MotSteht, stop phase 2, CAN timeout error
3 MotStartet, .... until the optimal engine speed is recognised
4 MotLäuft, EMR1 wait for nominal value via CAN
5 MotLäuft, nominal value present via CAN ok
6 MotLäuft, emergency operation, nominal value procedure by means of CAN interrupted
7 This phase is not present
ERROR INFORMATION / EVENTS COUNTER

The EMR1 sends the special CanErrorNumber (from 0 to 255 byte) for CAN bus errors by means of the ISO 9141 interface.
These numbers are associated with a text message that is displayed in the CAN interface window on the SERDIA program.
Code Text
0 no errors present
1 Request message not present on object of controller 15
2 controller object not valid
3 controller object multiple assignment
4 CAN active but no message activated
5 diagnostic object not activated
6 scanrate 0 in diagnostic message
7 scanrate 0 in nominal value telegram
8 configuration of nominal rpm 6 not suitable for TSC2 activation
9 TSC1 is activated but ’SolldrehzKonf’ is not on ’6’
10 ’ReglerKonf=6’, but neither TSC1 nor FktUmschaltg is activated
11 ’ReglerKonf=6 & SolldrehzKonf=6’, but TSC1 is not activated
12 TSC1 activated, but ’ReglerKonf!=6’
13
14
100 reception message interrupted
101 nominal value telegram interrupted with engine stopped (replacement value)
102 nominal telegram value not present with engine stopped due to insufficient battery voltage
103 nominal telegram value not present after engine start due to insufficient battery voltage
104 nominal telegram value not present after engine start, replacement value not used
105 nominal telegram value not present with engine running, replacement value used
In the case of reception message timeout errors special processing is required. These messages are always accompanied
by error number 100.
To identify which message caused a timeout error, SERDIA proceeds as follows:
20-318
• CanRxObjAvtive, which indicates the active messages, i.e. the messages effectively received by bits.
• CanConf_bits contains reception messages configured by bits.
SERDIA rejects CanRxObjActive by bit (inactive message) and subsequently executes an AND connection by bit with
CanConf_bits. This results in obtaining reception messages by bit that are configured but not active (CanRxTimOutBits).
A text is associated with each CanRxTimeOutBits bit, representing the names of the various reception messages.
Since it is not possible to utilise all the bits, entering "dc" (don't care) in the text causes the text to be excluded for the bit
in question.
If the text "100 reception message interrupted" is displayed, also the text of the list of missing reception messages
is generated.
Example of error information displayed:

100 reception message interrupted
engine temperature
oil level / engine oil pressure
function switching
aspiration / exhaust gas conditions
VanRxTimeOutBit Text
0 Engine temperature
1 Aspiration / exhaust gas conditions
2 Oil level / engine oil pressure
3 TSC1
4 Engine protection
5 Function switching
20-319
6. ENGINE CONTROL UNIT TESTER PROGRAM 6.4 PARAMETERS
6.4 PARAMETERS
6.4.1 CONFIGURATION (GENERAL)

IMPORTANT NOTES
1 - Before making any changes you must first save the original data record for security purposes.
2 - You can perform a test with the engine running only for PID values and this procedure must be carried out only by
skilled personnel.
3 - Incorrect settings can result in damage to the engine!
CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE
With the "Parameterisation" option in the menu bar you can enter the "Configuration" page. The configuration procedure
is as follows:
• In the heading click on the tab relative to the required page or
• use the "Next" and "Previous" buttons to scroll through the pages until arriving at the page that contains the parameters
to be set (e.g.: ’accelerator pedal (SWG1) upper reference’ on page 10: transducer calibration values-nominal values).
• Click on the "New value" field and enter the required numerical value, which must be between the minimum and
maximum specified.
• Click on the "PC->CENTR " button. All the configuration data are transmitted to the control unit. At this point the data
are resident in the control unit and they can be utilised to test the engine settings. Note however that said data will be
lost when the power supply is disconnected.
• store the record in the control unit by means of the "Save in ECU" button (all data will be overwritten).
• To check the data (read/display) use the "CENTR->PC" button.
• Once the engine test has produced satisfactory results, the record can be saved on the hard disk or on a diskette by
means of the "Save to file" button.

• CENTR.->PC: the configuration data are read and displayed from the control unit.
• PC->CENTR.: the modified configuration data are transmitted to the control unit. To save the data, press the "Save in
ECU" button.
• Open file: the configuration data are read and displayed from file (*.hex).
• Save to file:
Yes: if required, you can group the configuration data together and save them as a partial record
No: all configuration data are saved to a file (*.hex).
The proposed filename (not obligatory) is formed of the engine number. Alternative filenames can be used if required.
Then click OK. The file (i.e. the engine data record) is saved with the filename <numeromotore>.hex.
20-320
• Save in ECU: The configuration data are saved permanently in the control unit
WARNING!
• Do not make any changes to the parameterisation unless the reasons for such changes are clear and
carefully assessed and you have full information concerning the value you intend to alter.
• All changes to the configuration must be reported.
• The procedure for reporting changes is illustrated in Technical Information 0199-99-9827
• Previous: the data of the previous screen are displayed.

• Next: the data of the next screen are displayed.
• Print: export the specified configuration data to a printer. The configuration window can be printed page by page or by
a series of pages (from page x to page y), or in their entirety.
6.4.2 COMPLETE PROGRAMMING

Saving the data from a control unit:
• Read the control unit data with "ECU->file". The "Save as..." window is displayed.
• Save the data to a file with the required name as <nomefile>.hex.
You can use an alternative name in place of the proposed name <numeromotore>.hex. Then confirm by clicking the OK
button. The file (i.e. the engine data record) is saved with the chosen name.
Complete programming of the control unit:

• Click on the "Programming" button. The "Open" window will be displayed.
• Select the required file and open it.
• Click on the "Save in ECU" button.
Of all the configuration data only the operative data read from the control unit (second column) or from a file (third column)
are displayed. Before the transmission of configuration data to the control unit, the operative data can be edited in the
fourth column. Also these data will be transmitted together with the transmission of the configuration data to the control
unit.
Complete programming is not available for access levels I and II.

• ECU->file: The configuration data are read, displayed, and saved by the control unit as a HEX file.
PROGRAMMING:
the edited configuration data or configuration data in the form of a HEX file are transmitted to the control unit. To export the
data in a definitive manner press the "Save in ECU" button in EMR1.
• Save in ECU: the configuration data are saved permanently in the control unit.
20-321
6.4.3 CALIBRATION
System component calibration procedures are available only by means of the diagnostics interface. For this purpose you
will need the SERDIA diagnostic software. In combination with the EMR1 you will need to calibrate the accelerator pedal
and (if present) the hand throttle potentiometer (this requirement is not applicable to the units).
Important requirements:
• engine switched off
• power supply voltage (start / terminal 15) present
• accelerator pedal installed
EXPLANATION OF DEFINITIONS (EXAMPLES):

• 1510.... = accelerator pedal transducer pin F24
• 1530.... = normal accelerator pedal potentiometer pin F20
GENERAL CALIBRATION PROCEDURE:

• Select the calibration dimension in the top window.
• Set the accelerator pedal / hand throttle potentiometer to the required position.
• "Read value" button active: press the button, the calibration value assigned to a position is displayed in the edit field.
• "Read value" button inactive: enter the calibration value in the edit field.
• Export the calibration value to the control unit with "PC->ECU".
• Save the calibration value to the control unit with "Save in ECU".
• Switch on the ignition switch and then switch it off again.

• Read value: if the active "Read value" button is activated, you can use it to read the calibration value corresponding to
a pedal position.
• PC->ECU: The displayed calibration value is transmitted to the control unit.
• Save in ECU: the calibration data are permanently saved on the control unit.
20-322
6. ENGINE CONTROL UNIT TESTER PROGRAM 6.5 FAULTS MEMORY
6.5 FAULTS MEMORY
6.5.1 GENERAL INFORMATION

The errors memory lists the anomalies that have occurred since the last memory erasure and that can be diagnosed.
Select the "Errors memory" option to display the current contents of the errors log.
When the errors are eliminated, you can also erase the corresponding error messages in the "Errors memory" window:
• Display the errors memory warnings by pressing the "Read ME" button
• Use the mouse to highlight the displayed error position in the "Errors position" window
• (e.g.: "8112:(M17) adjustment travel sensor"). The error position is shown in grey.
• Click the "Delete ME" button. The error position is erased and the warning disappears.
• Quit the "Errors memory" window by clicking "Exit".
20-323
6. ENGINE CONTROL UNIT TESTER PROGRAM 6.5 FAULTS MEMORY
FIELDS DESCRIPTION
• Error position: list of error positions from which you can select an error position to obtain detailed information. Since
there are several causes of errors for certain components, this list may show several repeated error positions. For
example, oil pressure control: degree of performance and cut-off limit.
• Error type: all the data in this field refer to the error position selected in the top field of the list.
• Ambient data: supplementary data (e.g. measurement dimensions) that contain additional information concerning the
selected error position.
• Total errors: total number of all recorded error positions.
• Frequency: frequency with which the selected error position occurs.
• Error status: selected error active or passive

• Read mem.: with this button you can import the error memory again from the control unit and the display will be
updated.
• Clear Mem: with this button request is transmitted to the control unit to clear the errors memory.
20-324
6. ENGINE CONTROL UNIT TESTER PROGRAM 6.6 EXTRA
6. ENGINE CONTROL UNIT TESTER PROGRAM
6.6 EXTRA
6.6.1 TOP SPEED

In this form you can select three different tractor top speeds (30, 40, 50 km/h).
6.6.2 LOGISTIC DATA

In this form you can display and print the control unit logistic data.
EMR1/EMR2:
• engine no.
• EMR functions record part number
• ASAP2 record part number
• date, month, and year of completion
• only EMR2:
• CAN functions record part number
• operating hours
• number of engine starts
20-325
6. ENGINE CONTROL UNIT TESTER PROGRAM 6.6 EXTRA
Wiring and saving of control unit data is reserved exclusively to DEUTZ AG.
6.6.3 LOADS COLLECTIVE

This form provides an overview of the fields of speeds and loads at which the engine has been operated.
Records in the control unit can be deleted again by users with higher access authorisation levels.
Limitation: only EMR2 and EMS2
20-326
6. ENGINE CONTROL UNIT TESTER PROGRAM 6.7 ACTIVITY
6.7 ACTIVITY
6.7.1 EMR2
For maintenance tasks, the forms for specific configuration activities are displayed under this button of the SERDIA main
screen:
Diagnostics and tests
• governor behaviour measurement
• start process measurement
• surveillance function measurement
• air intake pressure measurement
• sensor measurements
• city measurements
• measurement of nominal values preset data
• measurement of digital inputs/outputs
Settings
• top speed setting
• idle speed setting
• governor measurement
• P level measurement
• determination of inputs/outputs
• surveillance
Error logs
• display / clear errors log
6.7.1.1 EXAMPLE OF GOVERNOR SETTING
Procedure:
• Click on the "Activities" button.
• Click on the "set up: governor setting" box. The "governor settings" menu will be displayed.
20-327
Explanation of function buttons:

• ECU->PC: the configuration data are read and displayed from the control unit.
• PC->ECU: the modified configuration data are transmitted to the control unit. To store the data permanently, click the
"Save in ECU" button
• Save in ECU: the configuration data are saved permanently in the control unit.
All changes to the configuration must be communicated!

The notification procedure is described in service bulletin 0199-99-9287.
• Graphic: With the "Graphic" button you can display the graphic representation of the time trend of the selected
measurement parameters (max. 5). If more than 5 parameters are selected an error message will be displayed.
• Measurement duration: the duration of the recording is shown in seconds in the Measurement duration field. The
smallest value of measurement duration is one second. The maximum limit is several hours (defined in units of one
second). The default setting is 10 seconds. The minimum measurement interval is
40 ms for RAM values and
60 ms for the other values. A measurement duration of 10 seconds results in
10000 ms/40 ms = 250 measurement points for RAM values and
10000 ms/60 ms = 166 measurement points for other values.
Since the program includes a maximum of 200 measurement points, before the start of the data recording the
measurement period is adapted automatically. The minimum measurement interval is established by the duration of
data transmission from the control unit to the PC. The more measurement parameters to be displayed simultaneously
the greater the duration of the data transmission and the lower the measurement interval.
• Print: the displayed measurement values are printed.
• Exit: return to the "Activities" menu.
20-328
6.7.1.2 EXAMPLE OF P LEVEL SETTING
Procedure:
• Click on the "Activity" button.
• Click on the "set up: set P level" box. The "P level setting" menu is displayed.
Explanation of function buttons:

• ECU->PC: the configuration data are read and displayed from the control unit.
• PC->ECU: the modified configuration data are transmitted to the control unit. To store the data permanently, click the
"Save in ECU" button.
• Save in : the configuration data are saved permanently in the control unit.
All changes to the configuration must be communicated!

The notification procedure is described in service bulletin 0199-99-9287.
• Print: the displayed measurement values are printed.

• Exit: return to the "Activities" menu.
20-329
6.7.1.3 SETTING THE INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
With the "Activity" button, in "Inputs and Outputs setting" the possible data
1. can be displayed by right-clicking the mouse
2. the values are assigned by left-clicking the mouse
In the same form you can also assign the activatable functions and the measurement values of all the inputs and outputs
displayed (to do this click on the "Measurement" button).
This configuration facility is only possible with access level III.
20-330
6. ENGINE CONTROL UNIT TESTER PROGRAM 6.8 WHAT TO DO IF...?
6.8 WHAT TO DO IF...?
6.8.1 SERDIA IN GENERAL

6.8.1.1 ERRORS IN COMMUNICATION SETTINGS
If it proves impossible to establish communication despite the connection between interface and control unit, the following
error message will be displayed
Possible causes of the error message:

• power supply missing to control unit or interface
• Interruption of power supply voltage when engine is stopped
• Incorrect attribution of port on PC (see 9.1.2)
• Connection error of the power supply voltage poles from engine to interface
• Not all of the four wires are connected (+,-,k,l)
• Incorrect or faulty control unit.
Elimination, possibility of quick checks:
• The yellow LED of the interface must illuminate when SERDIA is opened.
• Measure the power supply voltage on the diagnostic connector (the interface requires 8-28 Vdc).
• Check ports assignment.
• Connect another control unit.
Additional information on the subject of power supply voltage for control units, interface, and PC:
• EMR control units are compatible with an operating voltage of at least 10 V up to a maximum of 30 V (typical range 12-
24 V).
Current draw: 5 A with 12 V, 7 A with 24 V
• The interface is supplied by the engine and is compatible with a power input voltage of between 12 V and 24 V.
• The control units and interface are protected against polarity inversion and overvoltage. Despite this protection,
incorrect connection, e.g. to a 230 V supply, can result in damage.
• Thanks to the optical connection integrated in the interface, the PC (notebook and printer) can be connected to the
vehicle battery and ground without risks for the control unit and interface and without any loss of data.
20-331
6.8.2 EMR2
6.8.2.1 FLUCTUATING ENGINE SPEED
Finding the causes:
Similarly to engines with a mechanical governor, also when troubleshooting engines with the EMR2 control unit it is
necessary to consider the engine components such as the pump, accessibility of the control rod, fuel system, and so forth.
Specifically, if the engine was previously functioning correctly, the causes of subsequent speed fluctuations are usually
unrelated to the EMR2.
Governor setup:
governor settings are initially required for new applications and they must be tested and documented with the system
(engine and plant) in all operating conditions.
If the new application has been completed and approved, you must inform the manufacturer of the governor parameters
that are specific to the application. For subsequent engines with the same application it is not usually necessary to execute
another adaptation.
Menu path:
SERDIA main menu -> Activities menu -> governor setup box -> Run
Basic notes concerning corrections to the setup:

• Make corrections to settings when the engine is running.
• Increasing PID values leads to greater amplitude of governor oscillation.
• In the "New value" field record the value to be corrected. One way to do this is to highlight the original value with the
mouse and then enter the new value (the original value will be automatically overwritten).
• Click on the "PC->ECU" button to send the new value to the control unit. The governor imports the new regulator
settings and the result can be assessed by observing operation of the engine.
• After correcting the settings and before disconnecting the power supply (terminal 15), save the new parameter setting
in EMR1. This is achieved by clicking the "Save in ECU" button.
20-332
Basic governing setup:

The control unit is programmed at the end of the band with the following standard values.
Standard values
Parameters (variables) Notes
Aggregate Vehicle
Speed governor Factor - P 18-20 4,0 Basic setting and PID values application factors.
These parameters are independent from the
Speed governor Factor - I 10,0 10,0 engine status (rpm, constantly active load) and
they represent the main tools for setting of the
Speed governor Factor - D 5-12 2,5 governor.
Speed governor 90,0 65,0 Lowering the governor parameter for the static field
Rpm band for nominal value. In this rpm band the
Speed governor 15,0 80,0 engine runs in the status field with precision and
uniformity without abrupt reactions to changes in
rpm.
Governor Pos. Factor - P 10,0 10,0
Governor Pos. Factor - I 10-15 5,0
Governor Pos. Factor - D 5-10 5,0 Corrections of settings can be made in accordance
Governor Pos. Factor – DT2 8.0 8.0 with the manufacturer.
Governor Pos. 160-180 180.0

Governor Pos. 0.25 0.25
Standard values, parameters that depend on engine speed and load:

3 characteristic curves for P,I and D values = ftk (rpm, injected quantity).
Parameters (variables) Standard values Notes

X: rpm supports 60…2500 7 rpm values
Y: quantity supports (cmm/lift) 0, 20 …100 4 injected quantity values
Total 3 x 28 registration. Registration of 100% triggers the
Characteristic curve (%) 100 transmission of the rpm PID governor values (page 4).
Corrections must be executed in the various work points.
Execution of governor correction:

Before changing the parameters it is advisable to store the current configuration with "save to file" and/or print
configuration pages 4, 5 and 17.
The adjustment procedure is performed in three steps:
1. PID governor basic parameters. The adjustment is basically performed with the basic parameters.
• If you need to perform a new basic governor adjustment, set all the governor characteristic curves to 100%.
• The P dimension is the main parameter and it must therefore be set first. Increase the parameter value for
"DrehzRegler:P-Anteil" starting from 10% until the engine starts to oscillate at f > 1 Hz with excitation by means of
abrupt load changes. Then reduce the P dimension by 25%.
Example: P dimension with tendency to oscillate (unstable) = 12. 12-25 % of 12 = 9 (new setting value).
The adjustment depends primarily on the moment of inertia of plant mass (engine + alternator).
For moments of mass inertia of up to 8kgm2, the value range for the P dimension is between 10 and 45 %.
With higher moments of mass inertia the P dimension can be increase up to 90 %.
Note for engine units: calculation of optimal governor values is performed with the operating engine speed and various
different loads. Take note of the various P dimensions calculated in this manner and record them as average value in
"DrehzRegler:P-Anteil".
For dual frequency systems you must take account of the second frequency when calculating the average value.
Note for vehicle engines: calculation of the optimal adjustment values is performed on various points of engine speeds
and loads. Take note of the various P dimensions calculated in this manner and record them as average values in
20-333
"DrehzRegler:P-Anteil".
The various P dimensions resulting from the different load and rpm points must be correct in the PID characteristic
curve.
• Use the same procedure to adjust the D and I dimensions. Increase the value starting from 5 % until reaching conditions
of instability and then return by 25 %.
2. Parameters for static and dynamic operation.
Setting the parameters "Speed governor: damping" and "Speed governor: damping range" (page 4).
With the parameter "Speed governor: damping range" you can establish the band of engine speeds in which the rpm
is in static state.
For example, the value 15 rpm establishes for the engine speed a range of +/-15 rpm.
With the parameter "Speed governor: damping" you can determine the reduction of the governor parameters (PID
dimensions) for the static range. Backwards, i.e. if the engine speed is within the engine speed band for the nominal
value, the parameters of the governor (PID dimensions) decrease to the value corresponding to the damping factor.
Example: speed governor: P dimension = 10 %
to speed governor: damping = 65 %
In this way, dimension P in static engine behaviour in the range of nominal engine speed +/- damping range is reduced
to 6.5 %. The goal of this intervention is to arrive at a situation wherein the engine functions in a precise and stable
manner in the nominal speed band without reacting violently to small changes in speed. If, following a fault, the engine
should function outside the speed band, the programmed governor parameters are restored to 100 % effectiveness
and the governor corrects speed errors as rapidly as possible.
For standard settings refer to the basic settings of the governor. Corrections of the setting are possible only during
the engine running test.
3. Parameters that depend on the engine speed and load.
For the basic P, I and D parameters there is a characteristic curve of the parameter that depends on the engine speed
and injected quantity (load) (page 17). The effective parameters are determined by the multiplications of the basic
parameters by the contents of the characteristic curves.
Example: speed governor: P dimension =10 %
P dimension characteristic curve = 200 % at 2000 rpm and 50 cmm/lift
Result: for the indicated work point the P dimension becomes effective with 20 %.
6.8.2.2 ACCELERATOR PEDAL CALIBRATION

In normal circumstances the accelerator pedal is operated by the tractor operator. The accelerator input (PIN 24 on vehicle
connector) can be utilised also as a remote control input, as required for locomotive and marine applications. Calibration
is required however in all cases.
Calibration must be performed both for initial commissioning of the customer and Service and in the event of the
installation of replacements. The accelerator is not always part of the DEUTZ AG supply. However, we recommend using
the DEUTZ pedal transducer P/N 0419 9457. Further to agreements entered into with the manufacturer the customer may
however install alternative accelerators.
Condition:
• Connection as per overview of EMR1 system:
signal input (pin 24 / vehicle connector) versus GND (pin 23 / vehicle connector)
• Analog signal:
> 0.5 V (accelerator at rest), e.g. 1 V
< 4.5 V (accelerator pressed fully down against limit stop), e.g. 4 V
• The reference voltage is provided by EMR1 on the vehicle connector (pin 25 + 5 V).
This reference voltage is compatible also with the hand throttle potentiometer. Therefore, the load current with the
parallel connection of the pedal accelerator and the hand throttle potentiometer must be no greater than 25 mA in total
(i.e. total resistance > 200 Ω).
Accelerator calibration by means of the "Calibration" menu:
Calibration is executed from the menu. The two travel stops "Accelerator rest position" and "Accelerator depressed" are
calibrated as limit values. See "General calibration procedure".
Accelerator calibration by means of the "Measured values" "Configuration" menu:
The aim of the calibration procedure is to inform the control unit of the limit values of the two travel stops "accelerator rest
position" and "accelerator depressed" respectively as the lower and upper reference point. Moreover, they must be set in
20-334
accordance with the two reference points "Upper error value" (+5 % of the upper reference point) and "Lower error value"
(-5 % of the upper reference point).
Definition of parameters
Configuration form Calibration form Value
Accelerator (SWG1) upper Accelerator (SWG1) upper error limit
error value Max. nominal value x 1,05+
[max. …5V]
Accelerator (SWG1) Accelerator (SWG1) full speed

[fully depressed, Max. nominal value
upper reference upper limit]
Accelerator (SWG1) Accelerator (SWG1) rest position Pedal rest position = idle speed
lower reference [lower limit]
Accelerator (SWG1) lower
Accelerator (SWG1) lower error limit Pedal rest position - 0.05 x max. nominal value
error value [0 V…rest position]
Measurement of limit values:

• Open the "Measurement values", "Current measurement values" menu.
• Measured value "(F24) accelerator =SWG1": with the pedal in the rest position (lower reference) and the pedal fully
depressed (upper reference) "Retrieve value" and transmit it and save it in the control unit.
Configuration:
• Open the "Configuration" option in the "Parameterisation" menu.
• Record the values on the basis of the following example table ("Accelerator input configuration", see below).
• Conversion: 5 V = 1023 digits.
Example: accelerator pedal input configuration
Factory setting Effective value /
Calibration Configuration
Parameters (variables) measured value
mV Digital mV mV Digital
Accelerator (SWG1) upper
error value 4750 973 4357 1 893
Accelerator (SWG1)
4500 921 4150 4150 850
upper reference
Accelerator (SWG1)
lower reference 500 102 670 670 137
Accelerator (SWG1) lower

error value 250 51 463 2 95
1) Measured value "upper reference" + 5 % (of the upper reference)

2) Measured value "lower reference" + 5 % (of the upper reference)
6.8.2.3 HAND THROTTLE CALIBRATION

The hand throttle (pin 20 FS) is installed on vehicles such as agricultural machinery. The operator can set the required rpm,
for example during ploughing work, and remove his foot from the accelerator pedal completely. In the same way as for
mechanically adjusted levers, before starting the engine the position of the hand throttle must be set to 0 (idle speed).
The position of the hand throttle prevails over the position of the accelerator pedal and determines the engine idle speed.
The idle speed can be adjusted from a minimum value (650 rpm) and a nominal value (e.g. 2300 rpm) in a manner that is
proportional to the nominal value setting. On the basis of the hand throttle setting the engine reacts in the same way as to
the pedal accelerator. If the hand throttle is set to a given engine speed, e.g. 1500 rpm, pressing the accelerator pedal will
change engine speed only above this setting.
20-335
The position of the hand throttle is unrelated to the DEUTZ supply, instead it must be factory programmed in the EMR1. In
terms of control element the customer can install a potentiometer.
Requirement for the definition of the hand throttle (potentiometer) nominal value for customer installation:
• Input on vehicle connector pin 20
• Potentiometer supply as per pedal transducer, reference voltage 5V pin 25 and GND pin 23.
• Reference voltage load together with pedal transducer < 25 mA.
• Protection rating IP65
• Displacement of the travel stops between 10 % and 90 % of the potentiometer value.
Example: potentiometer resistance = 1 Ω, the adjustment range between the mechanical travel stops can be between 100
Ω and 900 Ω. This adjustment range can be achieved by
a) restriction of the rotation angle
b) additional resistor on the power lines.
Hand throttle potentiometer calibration:
The two potentiometer end stops must be calibrated.
The aim of the calibration procedure is to inform the control unit of the limit values of the two end stops "Potentiometer in
minimum speed position" and "Potentiometer nominal speed end stop", respectively as the lower and upper reference
points. Moreover, also the "Upper error value" (+5% % of the upper reference point) and the "Lower error value" (-5 % of
the upper reference point) must be programmed in accordance with the two reference points.
Definition of parameters
Configuration form Calibration form Value
Hand throttle (SWG2)
Hand throttle (SWG2) upper error limit Nominal rpm x 1.05+
upper error value
[upper limit …5V]
Hand throttle (SWG2) Hand throttle (SWG2)
Nominal rpm
upper reference full speed (upper limit)
Hand throttle (SWG2) Accelerator (SWG2)
lower reference speed from standstill [lower limit] Idle speed
Hand throttle (SWG2) Hand throttle (SWG2) Idle speed - 0.05 x nominal speed
lower error limit
lower error value [lower limit 0V]
20-336
6.8.2.4 TROUBLESOOTING EXAMPLE
Troubleshooting:
Connection interrupted? Not OK Restore connection.
OK
Fouled or corroded contacts? Not OK Clean or renew connector.
OK
Faulty sensor? Not OK Renew sensor.
OK
Faulty cable edge connector? Not OK Check or renew cable edge connector.
6.8.2.5 ENGINE FAILS TO START
Error reference Possible cause Reset
Check with Multimeter: Change the batteries.

voltage on starter motor terminals
Choke rpm > 160 rpm not reached < 7 V (12V system) Clean the ground cable on the connections
Choke rpm OK, the regulator rod Fuel supply fault.

Restore correct fuel supply.
moves to the starting position.
Power supply voltage interrupted, Disconnect vehicle connector and check the
connector to incorrect pins or with following positions
incorrect polarity. :
Pin 14F=+Ubatt
Pin 1F=-Ubatt
Pin 2F='Ubatt
Cut-out magnet faulty or not
Choke rpm OK, connected.
adjustment rod remains in idle
speed position. Control rod movements are stiff. Find the trouble spot and rectify the cause.
Faulty speed sensor. Renew sensor, check connection and lines.
Start load limitation set too low or Use the Serdia program to check the value of
an excessively high heating liquid measurement
temperature is signalled to the "(M9) coolant temperature " in the
EMR1. "Current measurement values" menu.
A critical error has occurred in the

EMR1 system.
Fault warning light flashing. Before performing any further start Fault finding with Serdia.
attempts rectify the fault. 20-337
Recognition of deviation of the

Error signal with Serdia: "8405: governor stroke, value measured in Renew the control element, see governor
adjustment device (governor,
stroke adjustment system, control the cut-out field. replacement Service example. No further
Cut-out magnet faulty or not adjustment operations are required.
rod". connected
Short circuit or interruption of the Renew the sensor, check for dirt or corrosion
Error signal with Serdia: "8170: of the armature, check the lines between the
(M13)Rpm 1, cam shaft". speed sensor (cam shaft sensor) or connector of the vehicle, and check for sensor
the line or the connection.
damage.
Error signal with Serdia: "8210:
Loss of EEPROM data" EMR1 memory error.
Renew control unit. Transfer data from the
"8220:Coil data lost" EMR1 memory error. original control unit to the new control unit 1:1.
"8020:control unit (governor
control) Control unit faulty.
Also with the engine stopped the Renew the sensor, check for dirt or corrosion
Error signal with Serdia: "8160: measurement value "(M21) Oil of the armature, check the lines between the
(M21)Oil pressure sensor" pressure" remains outside its connector of the vehicle, and check for sensor
range limits damage.
Also with the engine stopped the
Error signal with Serdia: "8140: measurement value "(M9) Coolant
Renew sensor, check connector and line.
(M9)Coolant temperature sensor" temperature" remains outside its
range limits
Error signal with Serdia: "8120: The accelerator pedal is incorrectly Check and, if necessary, edit the calibration
(F24)Accelerator pedal = SWG 1" calibrated values in the "Calibration" menu.
6.8.2.6 ENGINE DIES FOR NO APPARENT REASON
Error reference Possible cause Reset
Power off has not taken place and

EMR1 fault indication generated.
Other possibilities:
After powering off: (the ignition Fuel supply Repair fuel system.
switch has not yet been activated
On/Off) fault indicator light off Check for the presence of an additional speed
Surveillance of speed independent surveillance system (e.g. lift magnet) and
from EMR1
investigate the relative system, if found.
Check the vehicle EMR1 connector, fuse,
Power supply voltage interruption. ignition switch, and also for bad contacts.
Use Serdia to pinpoint the position Depending on the specific fault indication,
and area of the fault, fault perform targeted troubleshooting
indication procedures:
After powering off: (the ignition
switch has not yet been activated Overspeed (possible, for example,
On/ Of f ) fa u lt in di c a t o r l i g ht i n t h e e v e n t o f a b r u p t l o a d Reference value: correct speed if appropriate
permanently illuminated changes). + 15 %
for example "pressure" additional Check contact of the oil pressure sensor
note: "inactive". connector and renew sensor if necessary.
Take corrective action on the basis of the
After powering off: (the ignition A critical fault has occurred in the precise location of the fault. The action may
switch has not yet been activated include replacing the control unit, the control
On/ Of f ) fa u lt in di c a t o r l i g ht EMR1 system. Before starting the element, or the sensor. The additional note
engine find the fault with Serdia.
flashing "inactive" refers to a bad contact in the
specified fault point.
20-338
6.8.2.7 REPLACEMENT OF EMR1 CONTROL ELEMENT

The control element is a purely mechanical component of the EMR1, installed in a fixed manner on the engine. The control
magnet that forms part of the device is activated by the EMR1 and it positions the control rod and therefore serves to adjust
the supply of fuel to the engine. A stroke sensor installed in the control element informs EMR1 of the potion of the control
rod.
The following fault messages may make it necessary to renew the control element:
• 8113:(M17) Control stroke sensor
• 8405: Control element (governor, stroke measurement system, control rod)
Replacement instructions:
• Disconnect the power input to EMR1 and detach the connection cable to the control unit.
The battery positive lead must be disconnected for safety reasons.
• Remove the original control element and clean the mounting surface on the engine.
CAUTION: with the control element removed the control rod will be in the maximum load position so the engine
must not be started under any circumstances!
• Fit the new control element using DUETZ insulating past P/N 0101 6102.
When you renew the control element you need to check its compatibility with the control unit.
There are currently 3 possible combinations in the case of replacement:
Control element / control unit compatibility
Control Behaviour in the case of replacement of the control

unit, Software Corresponding element
vers. n° EMR1 control element, TN
TN
In the case of replacement, this combination must be

0211 1846 0211 1841 completely replaced by the combination 0211 1911 / 0211
1910. In addition, you should also consult the manufacturer.
0211 1910 0211 1911
0211 2017 1.08 0211 1926
0211 2017 1.11 0211 1926 The control element is equivalent to 0211 1911. Only the
fixing system to the mounting is different.
0211 2686
1.10 0211 1926
0211 2690
The control element and the pump are in combination.
0211 6178 Changing the EDC control element: additional adjustments
1.31 Bosch EDC are necessary
0419 9995 1) Self calibration (Level 4)
2) Transmit the EDC data to the control unit (Level 3)
CAUTION: specific information for 1015. Pay attention to the pump with the EDC control element.
• Restore the connection to the control unit and start the engine.
• With SERDIA, in the "Parameters" -> "Configuration" menu transmit the parameters to the EMR1 with the "PC->ECU"
button and test operation of the engine.
• If the engine runs smoothly, save the parameters to the control unit.
• When the test with SERDIA is completed clear the errors log.
• In the SERDIA main menu open the list for identification of control units and print the logistic data in "Tools" as
documentation.
• The original control element should be returned to the manufacturer together with the documentation.
20-339
6.8.2.8 RENEWING CONTROL UNITS

The control unit can be renewed in two different ways:
1. Original control unit damaged but data still legible (communication with SERDIA possible).
2. Installation of a new control unit with factory-programmed engine record.
Overview of EMR1 control units
1012/1013/2013 1015 1012/1013 for Deutz-Fahr only
- With NM label - Without NM label - With NM label - Without NM label - With NM label - Without NM label
- Programmed - Not programmed - Programmed - Not programmed - Programmed - Not programmed
-TN in SERPIC -TN on control unit -TN in SERPIC -TN on control unit -TN in SERPIC -TN on control unit
0211 2016 0211 2017 0211 2016 0211 2017 0211 2451 0211 2088
see also
SM 130-99-9305
Started from Started from Started from Started from Started from Started from
0211 2581 0211 2570 0422 6179 0422 6178 0211 2580 0211 2571
See also See also
SM 130-27-9308 SM 130-27-9308
Started from Started from Started from Started from Started from Started from
0211 26911 1) 0211 2686 1) 0419 4043 1) 0419 9995 1) 0211 2692 1) 0211 2690 1)
1) TN updated, reconsigned with order.

Overview of EMR2 control units
For all series
- With NM label - Without NM label
- Programmed - Not programmed
-TN in SERPIC -TN on control unit
0211 2704 0211 2850
Notes on the above records:

Complete control unit.
For operation of the engine, each control unit must be programmed with its own specific
- With NM label engine record and must bear an adhesive label (sensor no.). In this manner engine and control
- Programmed
- TN in SERPIC unit form an integrated unit.
When ordering a new control unit specify both the engine type and also the NM. The
completion is carried out by DEUTZ.
Control unit not programmed.
The engine cannot be started in conjunction with this control unit.
In the framework of maintenance work, this control unit can be completed with the
- Without NM label transmission of the specific record of the engine from the original control unit by means of
- Not programmed SERDIA with access level III, refer also to the SERDIA manual "Complete programming".
-TN on control unit For maintenance work it is also possible to order unprogrammed controlled units of DEUTZ
Service partners (competence class II). Completion (also NM label) is executed by the Service
partner. If the record cannot be read from the original control unit, it can be requested by email
with the same procedure as that described in SM 0199-99-9287 "Notification of EMR control
data modifications".
20-340
METHOD 1
Phase 1: Reading of engine record from the original control unit:
• Switch on ignition/power supply voltage.
• Start the SERDIA program.
• In SERDIA, change in the "Parameters"-> "Complete programming" menu.
• Click the "ECU->file" button. The configuration data are read. The "Save as..." window is then displayed.
• Enter a name and save the file.
The proposed filename (not obligatory) is formed of the engine number, although other names are possible.
Then confirm by clicking the OK button. The file (i.e. the engine data record) is saved with the name <numeromotore>.hex.
After importing the data record from the original control unit it will also contain data concerning the operating hours of the
engine and the number of engine elements.
• Quit the program. Switch off the ignition/power supply voltage.
Phase 2: Renewal of the control unit:

Compatibility of the control units must be checked on the basis of the above table, the contents of which must be observed
(same part number). Also compatibility of the control unit with the control element must be checked and observed.
• Switch on the ignition/power supply voltage.
• In SERDIA, change in the "Parameters"-> "Complete programming" menu.
• Click on the "Programming" button. The "Open" window will be displayed.
• Select the saved engine data record (<numeromotore>.hex) and double click on it.
• Transmit the engine record data to the EMR1 by clicking the "Next" button.
• Save the engine data record by clicking the control unit "Save in ECU" button.
Phase 3: Start the engine and check that it is running satisfactorily.

• Clear the errors from the "Errors log" menu
20-341
METHOD 2
Each EMR2 has a specific data record for the engine, which is saved in a DUETZ AG central computer when the engine is
delivered. Any modifications to the EMR1 configuration must be communicated to DEUTZ AG. When ordering a new
control unit, the unit in question must be programmed with a data record, which is in the possession of DEUTZ AG filed
under the relative engine number. If corrections of the engine settings are not communicated to DEUTZ AG, they cannot be
taken into account when programming a new control unit.
• disconnect both connections from the original control unit. Connect the control unit with the engine and vehicle
connectors (both 25 pin connectors).
• Clear the errors from the "Errors log" menu.
• Start the engine and check that it is running satisfactorily.
6.8.2.9 CONFIGURATION DATA READING ERRORS

This error warning is generated only if SERDIA is unable to read the HEX file. In this case the file may contain special accents
(ä,ö,ü) or characters that cannot be interpreted by SERDIA.
20-342
CONTENTS
SECTION 30
CONTENTS
ENGINE HOOD .............................................. 1 • FILTER – DRYER ..........................................................27

Removal...................................................................... 1 Removal.................................................................... 27
Refitting ...................................................................... 1 Refitting .................................................................... 27
• CONDENSER ASSEMBLY ...........................................28
WHEELS......................................................... 2 Removal.................................................................... 28
• FRONT WHEELS.............................................................2 Refitting .................................................................... 28
Removal...................................................................... 2 • COMPRESSOR.............................................................29
Refitting ...................................................................... 2 Removal.................................................................... 29
• REAR WHEELS ...............................................................3 Refitting .................................................................... 30
Removal...................................................................... 3
Refitting ...................................................................... 3 HEATER ASSEMBLY
(MANUAL VERSION)...................................31
FRONT FENDERS ......................................... 4 • COMPLETE ASSEMBLY ..............................................31
Removal...................................................................... 4 Removal.................................................................... 31
Refitting ...................................................................... 4 Refitting .................................................................... 33
CAB ACCESS STEPS.................................... 5 • UPPER HALF DUCT .....................................................34
Removal...................................................................... 5 Assembly .................................................................. 34
Refitting ...................................................................... 5 • FANS .............................................................................35
Disassembly ............................................................. 35
FUEL TANK.................................................... 6 Assembly .................................................................. 35
Removal...................................................................... 6 • HEATER MATRIX .........................................................36
Refitting ...................................................................... 8 Disassembly ............................................................. 36
Assembly .................................................................. 36
COOLERS-RADIATOR ASSEMBLY ............. 9
• AIR CONDITIONING EVAPORATOR ...........................37
• COMPLETE ASSEMBLY ................................................9 Disassembly ............................................................. 37
Removal...................................................................... 9 Assembly .................................................................. 37
Refitting .................................................................... 13
• FUEL COOLER..............................................................14 ENGINE COOLING FAN ASSEMBLY..........38
Removal.................................................................... 14 • ENGINE COOLING FAN ...............................................38
Refitting .................................................................... 14 Removal.................................................................... 38
• TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER ....................................15 Refitting .................................................................... 39
Removal.................................................................... 15 • ENGINE FAN DRIVE BELT...........................................40
• ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM RADIATOR....................17 Refitting .................................................................... 41
Removal.................................................................... 17 Tensioning ................................................................ 42
Refitting .................................................................... 20
• AIR FILTER ASSEMBLY...............................................21
ALTERNATOR UNIT ....................................43
Removal.................................................................... 21 • ALTERNATOR...............................................................43
• INTERCOOLER .............................................................22 Refitting .................................................................... 43
Removal.................................................................... 22 • ALTERNATOR DRIVE BELT ........................................44
Refitting .................................................................... 45
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM.................... 23 Tensioning ................................................................ 46
SPECIFICATIONS .................................................... 23
Operation.................................................................. 24 STARTER MOTOR .......................................47
Draining, flushing and recharging............................. 25 Removal.................................................................... 47
Refitting .................................................................... 47
30-i
CONTENTS
COMPRESSED AIR CIRCUIT ..................... 48 POWER STEERING...................................... 82

• AIR COMPRESSOR ..................................................... 48 • POWER STEERING ASSEMBLY................................. 82
Removal ....................................................................48 Removal ................................................................... 82
Refitting .....................................................................49 Refitting .................................................................... 84
• COMPRESSOR DRIVE BELT ...................................... 50 Disassembly ............................................................. 85
Removal ....................................................................50 Assembly.................................................................. 90
Refitting .....................................................................50 • PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE....................................... 100
Tensioning.................................................................51 Testing the operating pressure .............................. 100
Adjusting the operating pressure ........................... 100
FRONT PTO ................................................. 52 • BATTERY SUPPORT ................................................. 101
• COMPLETE ASSEMBLY.............................................. 52 Removal ................................................................. 101
Removal ....................................................................52 Refitting .................................................................. 102
Refitting .....................................................................52
• FLEXIBLE COUPLING ................................................. 53 HYDRAULIC PUMPS .................................103
Renewal .............................................................. 53 • TRANSMISSION PUMP............................................. 103
Refitting .....................................................................53 Removal ................................................................. 103
Refitting .................................................................. 105
FRONT AXLE DRIVE SHAFT ...................... 54 • SERVICES PUMP....................................................... 108
Removal ....................................................................54 Removal ................................................................. 108
Refitting .....................................................................56 Refitting .................................................................. 111
FRONT AXLE ............................................... 57 • STEERING PUMP ...................................................... 112
• VERSION WITHOUT FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION .... 57 Removal ................................................................. 112
Refitting .....................................................................58 EXHAUST PIPE ASSEMBLY .....................114
• VERSION WITH FRONT SUSPENSION ...................... 59 • SILENCER .................................................................. 114
Removal ....................................................................59 Removal ................................................................. 114
FRONT SUPPORT ....................................... 63 • EXHAUST PIPE .......................................................... 115
• COMPLETE ASSEMBLY Removal ................................................................. 115
(Version without axle suspension) ............................ 63 Refitting .................................................................. 116
Removal ....................................................................63 CAB.............................................................117
Refitting .....................................................................64
Removal ................................................................. 117
• COMPLETE ASSEMBLY Refitting .................................................................. 125
(Version with axle suspension)................................... 65
Removal ....................................................................65 ENGINE....................................................... 126
Refitting .....................................................................67 Preparation for removal.......................................... 126
Preparation before separating the engine
FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION ...................... 68 from the transmission............................................. 126
• FRONT SUSPENSION CONTROL VALVE .................. 68 Separation or removal ............................................ 127
Refitting .....................................................................71
• FRONT SUSPENSION POSITION SENSOR ............... 72 TORSIONAL SPRING PLATE .................... 132
Removal ....................................................................72 Removal ................................................................. 132
Positioning.................................................................72 Refitting .................................................................. 132
Testing.......................................................................73
• FRONT SUSPENSION CYLINDERS............................ 74
FLOOR MAT ............................................... 133
Removal ....................................................................74 Removal ................................................................. 133
Disassembly ..............................................................77 MULTIFUNCTION ARMREST ...................134
Assembly...................................................................78 Removal ................................................................. 134
BRAKE CYLINDERS ................................... 79 Refitting .................................................................. 134
Removal ....................................................................79 SEAT ...........................................................135
Refitting .....................................................................81 Removal ................................................................. 135
Refitting .................................................................. 135
30-ii
CONTENTS
ACCELERATOR PEDAL FRONT CONSOLE ..................................... 156

POTENTIOMETER..................................... 136 Removal.................................................................. 156
Removal.................................................................. 136 Refitting .................................................................. 158
Refitting .................................................................. 137
CLUTCH PEDAL AND ACCESSORIES.....159
RIGHT-HAND CONSOLE.......................... 138 • POSITION SENSOR....................................................159
Removal.................................................................. 138 Removal.................................................................. 159
Refitting .................................................................. 140 Refitting .................................................................. 159
• PROXIMITY SENSOR
CONTROL CABLES .................................. 141 (Clutch pedal depressed sensor).............................162
• CREEPER CONTROL .................................................141 Removal.................................................................. 162
Removal.................................................................. 141 Refitting .................................................................. 162
Refitting .................................................................. 142
• REAR CAB DOOR LATCH CABLE.......................163
PTO SPEED SELECTOR LEVER................................143 Renewal .............................................................163
Removal.................................................................. 143
LIFT
Refitting .................................................................. 144
• GEARSHIFT CONTROL..............................................145
DRAFT SENSOR .......................................165
Removal.................................................................. 145 Removal.................................................................. 165
Refitting .................................................................. 146 Refitting .................................................................. 165
PARKING BRAKE...................................... 147 LIFT POSITION SENSOR .......................... 166

Checking................................................................. 166
• CONTROL CABLE ......................................................147
Removal.................................................................. 166
Removal.................................................................. 147
Renewal of the position sensor bush
Refitting .................................................................. 148
(only if necessary) .................................................. 167
• PARKING BRAKE LEVER ..........................................149
Refitting .................................................................. 167
Adjustment ............................................................. 149
Adjusting................................................................. 167
SERVICE BRAKE....................................... 150
AUXILIARY SERVICES CONTROL
• BRAKE.........................................................................150
Adjustment ............................................................. 150 VALVE.........................................................169
Removal.................................................................. 169
STEERING WHEEL.................................... 151 Refitting .................................................................. 172
Removal.................................................................. 151 Disassembly ........................................................... 173
Refitting .................................................................. 151 Assembly ................................................................ 174
SHUTTLE LEVER....................................... 152
Removal.................................................................. 152
Refitting .................................................................. 153
LIGHTS SELECTOR SWITCH ................... 154
Removal.................................................................. 154
Refitting .................................................................. 155
30-iii
ENGINE HOOD
ENGINE HOOD
Removal
1 - Press button (1) and open engine hood (2). 2
F0103710
2 - Unplug connector (3) for light units power supply and

release the wiring from clip (4).
F0113080
3 - Detach gas springs (5) from hood (2).

5
F0101500
4 - Unscrew and remove screws (6) and washers

securing hood casing (7).
5 - Remove the hood.
6 6
Hood: approx. 65 kg (143 lb.)
In the absence of a suitable hoist, the hood may be
removed with the assistance of other people after
having agreed the movements to be carried out.
7
Refitting
• Refitting is the reverse of removal. F0101600
30-1
WHEELS FRONT WHEELS
WHEELS
FRONT WHEELS
Removal
On tractors with front suspension, before stopping the
engine prior to removal of the front wheels, disengage
the front suspension by pressing the pushbutton in
the cab for at least 20 seconds.
1 - Apply the parking brake.
2 - Position under the differential housing a trolley jack
“A” with a minimum lifting capacity of 15 tons. and a
maximum lift height of at least 15 cm (6 in.).
★ Drive safety wedges between the axle and the A
F0101700
trunnion mounting.
3 - Raise the front end of the tractor sufficiently to
eliminate flexure of the tyre walls and to lift the wheels
by approximately 2 cm (0.8 in.).
4 - Slacken off all the wheel nuts (1); remove the wheel
nuts, leaving one (for safety) at the top of the wheel. 2 1
1
5 - While holding the wheel vertical, remove the last nut
and remove wheel (2).
F0101800
6 - Position a stand “B” under the axle and lower the

tractor.
7 - Repeat the above operations to remove the other rear
wheel.
Refitting
• Refitting is the reverse of removal.
1
Wheel nuts: 350 Nm (258 lb.ft.)
B
★ Tighten the nuts gradually in a crosswise sequence.

F0103050
30-2
WHEELS REAR WHEELS
REAR WHEELS
Removal
1 - Position under the rear gearbox a trolley jack “A” with
minimum lifting capacity of 5 tons. and a maximum lift
height of at least 15 cm (6 in.).
★ Position jack “A” so that is nearer to the wheel to be
removed.
2 - Elevate the tractor until the tyre of the front wheel to be
removed just clears the ground.
A
F0101900
3 - Slacken off all the wheel nuts (1); remove the wheel
nuts, leaving one (for safety) at the top of the wheel.
1 2
4 - While holding the wheel vertical, remove the last 1
wheel nut and remove wheel (2).
F0101910
5 - Position a stand “B” with lateral retaining wings under

the rear axle housing and lower the jack so that the
axle rests on the stand.
★ Axle stand capacity: 2 tonnes minimum
6 - Check that the stand is correctly positioned before
removing the jack.
B
7 - Repeat the above operations to remove the other rear
wheel.
F0103720
Refitting
1
Wheel nuts:
M18x1.5: 370 Nm± 10%(273 lb.ft.±10%)
★ Tighten the nuts gradually in a crosswise
sequence.
30-3
FRONT FENDERS
FRONT FENDERS
Removal
★ Removal of the front fenders is only necessary for
major repairs and overhauls where additional working
space is required at the side of the tractor and
whenever the tractor is to be supported on stands.
1 - Remove the front wheels.
(For details, see "WHEELS - FRONT WHEELS").
2 - Unscrew and remove screws (1) and remove fender (2)

complete with mounting bracket (3).
Fender assembly: approx. 20 kg 1
1
F0101920
F0101930
Refitting
30-4
CAB ACCESS STEPS
CAB ACCESS STEPS
Removal
1 - Remove the rear wheel on the appropriate side. 2
(For details, see "WHEELS - REAR WHEELS")
2 - Remove screws (1) (qty 3), nuts (2) and remove fender
(3).
1
2
3
F0113090
3 - Loosen screw (4).
F0101950
4 - Remove screws (5) and remove cab access steps (6).
5 6
F0101960
Refitting
30-5
FUEL TANK
FUEL TANK
Removal
a - Do not smoke or allow naked flames in the vicinity
during the removal, refitting and filling operations.
b - Wipe up any spilt fuel immediately before
someone slips on it.
c - Disconnect the lead from the battery negative
terminal (–) and apply the parking brake.
1 - Drain the fuel tank completely by siphoning off the
fuel.
Fuel: max. 150 , (39.6 US.gall.)
2 - Remove the left rear wheel. (For details, see:
"WHEELS - REAR WHEELS")
3 - Remove the cab access steps on the left-hand side.
(For details, see: "CAB ACCESS STEPS")
4 - Remove screws (1) and remove locating (2) and

retaining discs (3) of fuel tank (4). 3
★ Note the position of hole "A" as the tank is levelled 4
by rotating the front washer.
A
2 1
1
F0101970
• For versions without cab pneumatic suspension

5 - Remove screws (5) (qty 2), loosen screw (6) and
remove support (7).
5
6
F0101981
30-6
FUEL TANK
• For versions with cab pneumatic suspension

Eliminate all residual pressure from the trailer air
circuit. 9
6 - Disconnect tie rod (8) and lower completely lever (9) to

discharge any residual pressure from the cab
suspension circuit.
8
F0113100
7 - Disconnect the cab suspension circuit supply pipe

from valve (10).
★ Recover pipe (11).
10
11
F0113110
8 - Remove the three screws (12).
12
14
F0113120
9 - Remove the two screws (13) and move shock

absorber assembly (14).
13
F0113130
30-7
FUEL TANK
• For all versions

10 - Remove union (15) and disconnect breather pipe (16).
★ Renew the copper washers on reassembly
15
16
F0113140
11 - Position suitable lifting equipment under fuel tank (4)

and pull it slightly outwards.
4
F0102000
12 - Unplug fuel level sensor connector (17).

13 - Loosen the clamps and disconnect fuel delivery and
return pipes (18). 17
★ Mark the hoses to avoid error when reconnecting.
★ Plug the pipes to prevent the entry of impurities.
18
F0102011
14 - Remove fuel tank (4).
Refitting
4 F0102020
30-8
COOLERS-RADIATOR ASSEMBLY COMPLETE ASSEMBLY
COOLERS-RADIATOR ASSEMBLY
COMPLETE ASSEMBLY
Removal
1 - Remove the engine hood.
(For details, see "ENGINE HOOD").
2 - Recover the refrigerant from the air conditioning
system. (For details, see "AIR CONDITIONING
SYSTEM")
3 - Drain the engine cooling system.
Coolant:
Mod. 90 100 110 120
15,5 15,5 17,5 15,5
US.gall. 4.10 4.10 4.62 4.10
4 - Loosen screws (1), (2) and (3) and remove lower guard
(4).
2
3
1
F0113150
5 - Loosen clamps (5) and disconnect pipes (6).

5
6
6
F0113160
30-9
6 - Loosen clamp (7) and disconnect pipe (8).

7 - Unplug connector (9) from filter clogging sensor . 8 7
F0113170
8 - Loosen clamps (10) and disconnect pipes (11)
11
11
10
10
F0113180
9 - Disconnect connector (12) of the air conditioning

pressure switch.
10 - Unscrew and disconnect air conditioning system
discharge pipe (13). 12 13
F0113190
11 - Remove ringnut (14) and disconnect pipe (15) from

support (16).
15
14
16
F0113200
30-10
12 - Disconnect discharge pipe (18) from air compressor

(17).
★ Immediately plug the pipe to prevent moisture
from entering the system.
17
18
F0113210
13 - Disconnect return pipe (19) from the exchanger.

19
F0113220
14 - Loosen clamps (20) and (21) and disconnect fuel

delivery (22) and return (23) pipes to radiator.
22
21
20
23
F0113230
15 - Undo fittings (24) and disconnect pipes (25) from the

exchanger.
25
25
24
24
F0113240
30-11
16 - Withdraw pipes (26) from the radiators support.
26
26
F0113250
17 - Remove screws (27) (qty 2) and (28).
27
28
F0113260
18 - Attach radiator assembly (29) to a hoist and take up

the slack in the lifting sling; slide the radiator assembly
forwards until the fan is free from the cowling.
29
F0113270
19 - Remove radiator assembly (29).
29
F0113280
30-12
Refitting
★ Remove the plugs and reconnect the pipes
immediately, tightening the fittings fully to ensure
moisture does not get into the system
★ Inspect the seals and renew them if damaged.
1 - Flush and recharge the air conditioning system. (For

details, see "AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM -
Evacuation, flushing and recharging").
2 - Fill the engine cooling system with coolant.
Coolant:
Mod. 90 100 110 120

15,5 15,5 17,5 15,5
US.gall. 4.10 4.10 4.62 4.10
3 - Start the engine and run for a few minutes to allow the
coolant to circulate.
4 - Stop the engine, check the coolant level in the
expansion tank and top up if necessary.
30-13
COOLERS-RADIATOR ASSEMBLY FUEL COOLER
FUEL COOLER
Removal
1 - Remove circlips (1) and remove pivot pins (2) on both
sides.
1
2
F0102160
2- Move condenser--drier assembly (3) to one side.

3
F0102170
3 - Undo fittings (4) and screws (5) and remove fuel cooler
(6).
4
★ Renew the copper washers on reassembly.
6
F0102181
Refitting
30-14
COOLERS-RADIATOR ASSEMBLY TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER
TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER
Removal
1 - Remove circlips (1) and remove pivot pins (2).
2
F0102160
2- Move condenser--drier assembly (3) to one side.

3
F0102170
3 - Remove screws (4) and move fuel cooler (5) to one

side.
4
5
F0102190
4 - Remove screw (6).
F0113290
30-15
COOLERS-RADIATOR ASSEMBLY TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER
5 - Remove unions (7) on both sides.

★ Renew the copper washers on reassembly.
F0113300
6 - Remove circlips (8), remove pivot pins (9) on both

sides and remove cooler assembly (10).
10
9
8
F0102212
Refitting
1 - Start the engine and allow the gearbox oil to circulate
for about 5 minutes to fill the coolers; check the seals
and fittings for leaks.
2 - Stop the engine and check the gearbox oil level; top
up, if necessary.
This operation is essential if new coolers have
been fitted.
30-16
COOLERS-RADIATOR ASSEMBLY ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM RADIATOR
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM RADIATOR
Removal
Disconnect the lead from the battery negative terminal 2
(–).
3
1 - Loosen screws (1), (2) and (3) and remove lower guard 1
(4).
F0113150
2 - Drain off the engine coolant:

Coolant:
Mod. 90 100 110 120

15,5 15,5 17,5 15,5
US.gall. 4.10 4.10 4.62 4.10
3 - Remove circlips (6) and remove pivot pins (7).
7
F0102161
4- Move condenser--drier assembly (8) to one side .

8
F0102171
30-17
5 - Remove screws (9) and move fuel cooler (10) to one

side.
9
10
F0102191
6 - Disconnect pipes (11) from both sides of the radiator.

11
11
F0113221
7 - Remove nuts (12) and move pipes (13).
13
12
F0113310

sides and remove gearbox oil cooler (16).
16
15
14
F0102211
30-18
9 - Loosen clamp (17) and disconnect line (18).
18
17
F0113320
10 - Loosen clamps (19) and (20) and disconnect hoses

(21) and (22) from radiator (23).
23
19
21 20
22
F0102231
11 - Remove screws (24) (two per side).
24
24
F0102241
12 - Remove complete radiator assembly (23).
23
F0102251
30-19
Refitting
1 - Fill the engine cooling system.
Coolant:
Mod. 90 100 110 120

15,5 15,5 17,5 15,5
US.gall. 4.10 4.10 4.62 4.10
2 - Start the engine and allow the gearbox oil and coolant
to circulate and check for leaks.
3 - Stop the engine, check the coolant level in the

4 - Check the gearbox oil level. Top up if necessary.
30-20
COOLERS-RADIATOR ASSEMBLY AIR FILTER ASSEMBLY
AIR FILTER ASSEMBLY
Removal
1 - Unplug air filter clogging sensor connector. 1
2 - Loosen clamps (1) and disconnect pipes (2).
F0113330
F0102270
4 - Remove screws (4) and (5) on both sides.
4
5
F0102280
5 - Remove air filter assembly (6). 1
Refitting 6
1
★ If the complete filter assembly is to be renewed, fit new
sealing gaskets.
F0103790
30-21
COOLERS-RADIATOR ASSEMBLY INTERCOOLER
INTERCOOLER
Removal
1 - Remove the complete air filter assembly.
(For details, see "AIR FILTER ASSEMBLY").
2 - Loosen clamps (1) and disconnect pipes (2) on both
sides.
2
F0113161
3 - While supporting the intercooler, detach gas spring (4)

from radiator support (3).
4 - Lower the intercooler as far as it will go.
F0102300

sides and remove intercooler (7).
7
5
6
F0102311
Refitting
30-22
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
2
Low pressure gas
High pressure gas

3 bar 28 bar
(43,5 psi) (406 psi)
High pressure liquid
1a
3 1
9
D0030510
1- Compressor with electromagnetic clutch TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2- Condenser • Minimum and maximum pressures:
3- Dryer tank-filter 2.4÷28.5 bar (34.8 – 413.3 psi)
4- Bistable pressure switch for compressor clutch • Refrigerant type: R134a
engagement/disengagement • Refrigerant quantity: 1600 g (56.4 oz)
5- Expansion valve • Total quantity of moisture-free oil added at 1st charging:
6- Evaporator 210 cm³ (12.81 Cu.in.)
7- Evaporator minimum temperature electronic sensor
8- Cab air blowers
9- Air cowling
30-23
Operation The temperature of the air flow through evaporator (6)

Compressor (1) is driven from the crankshaft via a drivebelt generated by centrifugal blowers (8) is significantly higher
and pulley with an electromagnetic clutch (1a), which is than – 8°C (17.6°F), and therefore it transfers heat to the
operated from a switch on the control panel. refrigerant, causing it to boil and evaporate.
The system is protected by a safety pressure switch, which At the outlet of evaporator (6) the refrigerant is aspirated by
performs the following functions: compressor (1) and a new cycle begins.
1 - To inhibit engagement of electromagnetic clutch (1a) The removal of heat from the ambient air flowing over the
when the system pressure falls below 2.4 bar (34.8 psi) evaporator causes the moisture in the air to condense, and
as a result of incomplete charging or refrigerant loss. the air is thus dehumidified; the moisture condenses on the
fins of the evaporator, where, if it is not maintained at a
2 - To disengage clutch (1a) and thereby stop the
temperature above 0°C (32°F), it will freeze and impair
compressor when the pressure exceeds the
evaporator efficiency.
permitted maximum of 28.5 bar (413.3 psi) (generally
The task of maintaining the evaporator at a temperature
as a result of over-heating.
above 0°C (32°F) (and within the optimum temperature for
The refrigerant (in vapour state) is drawn in by the
efficient heat exchange), is performed by electronic
compressor where it is compressed. This compression
temperature sensor (7); this sensor disengages clutch (1a)
causes the temperature of the vapour to rise; in these
of compressor (1) when the temperature falls to the lower
conditions the refrigerant flows to the condenser (2) where
limit and engages clutch (1a) when the evaporator
its heat is dissipated by the air flow until the fluid reaches the
temperature reaches the upper limit.
condensation temperature, changing to the high pressure
liquid phase. The condensate that forms on the fins of evaporator (6)
At this point the refrigerant is transferred to filter-drier unit contains dust, pollen and other airborne particulate;
(3), which performs three functions: filters out impurities, continuous condensation thus has the effect of purifying
absorbs moisture contained in the circuit, and finally, acts the air, and the droplets of condensate are conveyed to the
as a storage reservoir. exterior of the vehicle via two condensate drain lines.
The refrigerant in the liquid phase is transferred to A fixed quantity of anti-freeze oil is added to the circuit in
evaporator (6) into which it is injected through an expansion order to lubricate all the mechanical components of the
valve (5), which constantly meters the flow to ensure system; a certain percentage of this oil circulates
optimum evaporation. continuously in the form of an oil mist, thereby lubricating
In the evaporator, the refrigerant is heated and expands to the compressor (pistons and bearings) and the expansion
the point of evaporation with an ambient temperature of valve.
around – 8°C (17.6°F).
30-24
Evacuation, flushing and recharging

1 - Before evacuating, flushing and recharging the air
conditioning system, inspect the system for leaks
using a leak detector.
2 - To service the air conditioning system you will
require a dedicated servicing station capable of
performing the following operations:
a- Aspiration of the refrigerant fluid.
b- Creation of a high vacuum to purge the
system completely.
c- Filtration of the recovered refrigerant.
d- Separation of the anti-freeze and lubricating
oil from the liquid refrigerant and
determination of its quantity by weight.
e- Recharging system with the exactly the
same amounts of refrigerant and oil as the
quantities recovered.
f- Measuring the system discharge side
pressure and return pressure (low pressure).
1. Emptying the system

1 - Connect the maintenance station to the high pressure 1
service connection (1) and follow the specific
instructions of the maintenance station in order to
discharge the system.
2 - Disconnect the system component to be renewed or
overhauled immediately after the maintenance station
has terminated the procedure; plug the open ends of
the system pipes as quickly as possible.
F0102320
2. Flushing and recharging the system

Before each recharging, the system must be purged of all
air, moisture and contaminants (oxides, deposits). This
entails creating a high vacuum within the system to 1
evaporate any moisture present.
T h e v a p o u r , w h e n e x t r a c t e d , dr a w s w i t h i t a ny
contaminants present in the system.
★ For the purging and recharging operations, the
maintenance station must be connected to high (1)
and low (2) pressure service valves.
Maximum vacuum" must be maintained for at least 10
minutes.
F0102320
30-25
★ After flushing, the moisture-free oil recovered during

the discharging operation must be re-introduced into 2
the system, followed by the refrigerant.
Quantity of refrigerant (R134a): 1600 g (56.4 oz.)

Oil quantity: see quantity recovered.
If the system has to be discharged and flushed in order
to renew a system component, the quantity of oil in the
replaced component must be measured and the same
amount of new oil must added to that recovered with
the refrigerant.
For details of the oil and refrigerant recharging F0102330
procedure, refer to the instructions supplied with the
service machine.
30-26
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM FILTER – DRIER
FILTER – DRIER
Removal
system.
(For details, see "AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM -
Evacuation, flushing and recharging"). 3
2 - Remove screw (1) remove retaining washer (2) and 2
disconnect inlet and delivery pipes (3).
★ Plug the pipes to prevent the ingress of dirt. 1
F0113340
3 - Remove screws (4) and remove filter-dryer (5).

If the filter-dryer has to be renewed, the quantity of oil
in the replaced unit must be measured to determine 4
the quantity of oil that must be added to the circuit.
F0102351
Refitting
1
★ Remove the plugs and reconnect the pipelines
straight away, tightening fully to ensure moisture does
not get into the system.
★ Inspect the O-rings and renew if damaged.
1 - Purge and recharge the air conditioning system.
30-27
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM CONDENSER ASSEMBLY
CONDENSER ASSEMBLY
Removal
Remove the key from the ignition and apply the
parking brake.
2
system.
3
2 - Disconnect pipes (2) and (3) from condense (1).
1
★ Plug the open ends of the pipes immediately to
prevent moisture getting into the circuit. 1
F0113350
5 - Remove the four screws (4).

6 - Remove condenser assembly (1).
★ Take particular care not to damage the fins.
4
1
F0113360
Refitting
1
straight away, tightening fully to ensure moisture
does not get into the system.
★ Inspect the O-rings and renew if damaged.
30-28
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
Removal
1
system.
2 - Disconnect inlet (2) and delivery (3) lines from
compressor (1).
prevent moisture getting into the circuit. 1 2 3
3 - Unplug electromagnetic clutch control connector (4).
4 F0102091
4 - Loosen screws (5), (6) responsible for securing

reaction block (7) and fulcrum of support (8) of 8
compressor (9).
5
9
F0078122
5 - Turn tensioner screw (10) to slacken the fan and

compressor drivebelt.
★ Loosen the drivebelt sufficiently to be able to slip it
10
off the compressor pulley.
F0078085
6 - Unscrew and remove self-locking nuts (11) and fixing

screws (12); remove compressor (9). 12
12
11
F0078161
30-29
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM COMPRESSOR
Refitting
1
straight away, tightening fully to ensure moisture does
not get into the system.
★ Inspect the O-rings and renew them if damaged.
1 - Adjust the tension of the compressor/fan drivebelt.
(For details, see "ENGINE FAN DRIVE BELT").
30-30
HEATER ASSEMBLY (MANUAL VERSION) COMPLETE ASSEMBLY
HEATER ASSEMBLY (MANUAL VERSION)
COMPLETE ASSEMBLY
Removal
Disconnect the battery negative terminal (–) from the
parking brake.
1 - Drain the air conditioning system.
Evacuation, flushing and recharging"). 1
★ Recover the system oil and make a note of the
quantity.
2
2 - Remove the two screws (1) and remove lower partition

(2).
1
1
2 F0102380
3 - Disconnect rotating beacon connector (3) and left fan

connector (4). 4
3
F0102390
4 - Disconnect connector (5) and RH fan connector (6)

and remove wiring.
F0102400
30-31
5 - Disconnect pipes (7) and (8) of the air conditioning

system. 3
prevent moisture getting into the circuit.
8
7
F0102410
6 - Disconnect the heating valve (10) control cable (9).
10 9
F0102420
7 - Loosen clamp (11) and disconnect heating system

pipes (12) and (13).
★ Mark the hoses to avoid error when reconnecting.
13
11
12
F0102430
8 - Remove all eight screws (14).
14
F0102440
30-32
9 - Remove heating-air conditioning assembly (15).
15
F0102450
Refitting
1
★ Charge the system with the previously noted quantity
of refrigerant oil.
2
★ Quantity of R134a: 1600 g (56.4 oz)
★ After recharging the system, check the seals on the
system pipes using a leak detector.
3
High pressure fitting (5/8’ - 18UNF):–
13.6÷20.3 Nm (10 --– 15 lb.ft)
Low pressure fitting (7/8’–14UNF):

35.3³–42 Nm (26 -- 31 lb.ft)
30-33
HEATER ASSEMBLY (MANUAL VERSION) UPPER HALF DUCT
UPPER HALF DUCT
1 - Cut gasket (1) along the joint between covers (2).

2
F0102470
2 - Remove screws (3) and remove cover (2) on both

sides. 2
F0102480
3 - Undo the ten spring clips (4) securing half duct (5).
5 4
F0102490
4 - Remove all screws (6) and remove half duct (5).
6 5
Assembly
F0102500
30-34
HEATER ASSEMBLY (MANUAL VERSION) FANS
FANS
Disassembly
1 - Remove the two screws (1).
F0102460
2 - Remove fans (2) as required.

2
F0102510
Assembly
2a
• Refitting is the reverse of removal. 2b
★ If both fans are removed, install white fan (2a) on the

left-hand side of the assembly and green fan (2b) on
the right-hand side.
F0102520
30-35
HEATER ASSEMBLY (MANUAL VERSION) HEATER MATRIX
HEATER MATRIX
Disassembly
1 - Remove the four screws (1) to free heating system
pipes (2).
1
2 F0102530
2 - Remove clamps (3). 1
F0102540
3 - Remove heater matrix (4).

6
★ If the heater matrix is to be renewed, also renew the
gasket (5).
★ Check the condition of O-rings (6) and renew them 4
if necessary.
F0102550
Assembly
1
★ When refitting hose clamps (3), ensure that they
are positioned as shown in the figure.
F0102540
1004
30-36
HEATER ASSEMBLY (MANUAL VERSION) AIR CONDITIONING EVAPORATOR
AIR CONDITIONING EVAPORATOR
Disassembly
1 - Remove screws (1). 1
2 - Disconnect evaporator (2) from pipes. 2
1
F0102560
3 - Disconnect probe (4) of the safety thermostat and

remove the evaporator. 3
★ Check the condition of O-rings (3) and renew them
if necessary.
★ If the evaporator is to be renewed, also renew
gaskets (5). 4
★ Note the exact position of temperature sensor 5
probe (4).
F0102570
Assembly
1
Screws: 4±0.4 Nm (2.9±0.3 lb.ft.)
30-37
ENGINE COOLING FAN ASSEMBLY ENGINE COOLING FAN
ENGINE COOLING FAN ASSEMBLY
ENGINE COOLING FAN

Removal
1
Disconnect the negative lead (–) from the battery and
apply the parking brake.
1 - Remove radiator-heater matrix assembly (1).
(For details, see "COOLERS-RADIATOR
ASSEMBLY").
F0113281
2- Loosen screws (2) and (3) securing air conditioning

compressor and tensioner block (4). 4
3 - Turn screw (5) anticlockwise in order to slacken and 5
release fanbelt (6).
1
3 6
F0078086
4 - Using a hex socket wrench, loosen and remove the

central screw (7) securing the fan (8) and its pulley.
7 8
F0103360
5 - Remove fan assembly (8).

8
F0103370
30-38
ENGINE COOLING FAN ASSEMBLY ENGINE COOLING FAN
6 - With fan assembly (8) on a bench, loosen and remove

the four retaining bolts (9) and remove the old fan.
8
F0078051
7 - Position the new fan taking care to align the two front
locating marks.
8 - Tighten down screws (9) of the fan-pulley assembly.
9
F0078061
Refitting
• Refitting is the reverse of removal. 5
1
★ Turn tensioner screw (5) clockwise to tension the
compressor/fan drivebelt.
(For details, see"ENGINE FAN DRIVE BELT").
1 - Fill the engine cooling system.
Coolant: ................ max. 17.5 , (4.62 US. gall.)

2 - Purge and recharge the air conditioning system. F0078022

3 - Start the engine and run for a few minutes to allow the
coolant to circulate.
4 - Stop the engine; check the level of the coolant in the
30-39
ENGINE COOLING FAN ASSEMBLY ENGINE FAN DRIVE BELT
ENGINE FAN DRIVE BELT
Removal
parking brake.
system.
2 - Remove radiator-heater matrix assembly (1).

(For details, see COOLERS-RADIATOR
ASSEMBLY").
1
3 - Remove the compressor drivebelt.
(For details, see "COMPRESSED AIR CIRCUIT -
COMPRESSOR DRIVE BELT").
F0113281
4 - Remove fan (2).

(For details, see "ENGINE COOLING FAN"). 2
F0103371
• For models with front PTO

5 - Loosen and fully unscrew the six screws (3) securing
the flange of cardan shaft (4). 6
3
6 - Detach flange (5) from flexible coupling (6).
4 5
F0078015
30-40

7 - Loosen tensioner (7) and remove the old drivebelt.
7
1
F0078023
Refitting
1
★ Adjust the tension of the belt.
(For details, see next heading).
30-41
Tensioning
★ Before adjusting the tension, carefully examine the
drivebelt for signs of wear. 3
The belt must be renewed immediately at the first sign 1
of cracking, fraying or separation of the plies.
If a new belt is fitted, re-adjust the tension after 2
approx. 15 operating hours.
4
5 F0078123
1 - Loosen screws (1) and (2) securing air conditioning

compressor (3) and tensioner block (4).
2 - Turn tensioner screw (5) clockwise to tension drivebelt
(6) as indicated below:
★ Static deflection ”A” on first fitting:
550±50 N 6
★ Static deflection ”A” after 15 minutes:
400±50 N
The check should be carried out with the engine A
cold.
3 - Tighten screws (1) and (2). F0102581
30-42
ALTERNATOR ASSEMBLY ALTERNATOR
ALTERNATOR ASSEMBLY
ALTERNATOR
Removal 2
Remove the battery cover and disconnect the 3
negative battery lead (–). 1
1 - Loosen screws (1), (2) and (3) and remove lower guard
(4).
F0113150
2 - Remove guard (5), remove nut (6) and disconnect lead

(7).
3 - Remove nut (8) and disconnect lead (9). 8
9
5 6
7
F0078112
4 - Loosen screws (10) and (11) of fuel pump bracket (12)

in order to slacken off drivebelt (13). 10
5 - Remove alternator (14).

For details, see the engine manual. 11
13
12
F0078095
Refitting
• Refitting is the reverse of removal
1 14
★ Adjust the tension of the drivebelt.
(For details, see "ALTERNATOR DRIVEBELT").
F0078107
30-43
ALTERNATOR ASSEMBLY ALTERNATOR DRIVEBELT
ALTERNATOR DRIVEBELT
Removal
★ The belt must be renewed at the first signs of wear.
Check for fraying, cracks and separation of the belt
plies.
★ Some of the operations described below refer only to
models equipped with front PTO.
If the tractor in question is not equipped with these
items, any operations that refer specifically to them
should be ignored.
Disconnect the battery's negative (–) terminal.
1 - Remove radiators assembly (1).

ASSEMBLY").
1
F0113281
2 - Remove the cooling fan assembly (2).

(For details, see "ENGINE COOLING FAN"). 1 2
F0103371
3 - Slacken the air compressor drivebelt (3).

(For details, see "COMPRESSOR DRIVE BELT").
2
3
F0077872
30-44
• For models with front PTO

4 - Loosen and fully unscrew six bolts (4) securing the
flange of cardan shaft (5). 7
4
5 6
F0078016
6- Loosen screws (8) and (9) securing the fuel lift pump,
disengage alternator drivebelt (10) and remove it by 8
passing it between the crankshaft pulley and the front
support. 9
3
10
F0078094
Refitting
1
★ Adjust the tension of the fan belt. (For details, see
("ENGINE FAN DRIVE BELT").
2
★ Adjust the tension of the air compressor drivebelt.
3
30-45
Tensioning
2
1 - Tension the belt using a T bar with a 3/4" drive exten- 1
sion bar, or a 3/4" angle drive bar inserted in the ap-
erture in fuel pump support (1).
2 - To tension the drivebelt, turn the bar clockwise and
tighten screws (2) and (3).
F0078106
3 - To check that the tension is correct, use the tool and

procedure indicated in the engine manual.
★ Static deflection ”A” on first fitting:
13 mm drivebelt: 450±50 N
★ Static deflection ”A” after 15 minutes:
13 mm drivebelt: 300±50 N A
The check should be carried out with the engine
cold.
F0077882
30-46
STARTER MOTOR
STARTER MOTOR
Removal
Remove the battery cover and disconnect the
negative battery lead (–). 3
1 - Remove cover (1) and nut (2) securing leads (3) and (4). 1 2
F0102590
2 - Remove cover (5) and disconnect lead (6).

4 - Remove starter motor (7). 7
For details, see the engine manual.
5
F0102600
Refitting
30-47
COMPRESSED AIR CIRCUIT AIR COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSED AIR CIRCUIT
AIR COMPRESSOR
Removal
2
1 - Disconnect air suction pipe (2) and pressure pipe (3)
from compressor (1).
1
F0115020
2 - Disconnect oil lubrication pipe (4) from compressor

(1).
★ Always renew the seals of the lube oil pipe. 1
3 - Loosen screws (5) in order to slacken off drivebelt (6).

4
1
F0113370
4 - Loosen and remove compressor fixing screws (7).
F0113380
5 - Remove compressor (1), withdrawing it upwards.

★ Check the condition of the O-ring and renew if 1
necessary.
F0077971
30-48
COMPRESSED AIR CIRCUIT AIR COMPRESSOR
Refitting
1
★ Adjust the tension of the drivebelt.
30-49
COMPRESSED AIR CIRCUIT COMPRESSOR DRIVE BELT
COMPRESSOR DRIVE BELT
Removal
Remove the key from the ignition and apply the 1
parking brake.
1 - Loosen pivot and fixing screws (1), (2) of bracket (3) 2
supporting belt tensioner pulley (4). 1
3
F0077870
• For models with front PTO only

the flange of cardan shaft (6). 5
8
6 7
F0078012

4 - Remove worn drivebelt (9).
F0077880
Refitting
1
30-50
COMPRESSED AIR CIRCUIT COMPRESSOR DRIVE BELT
Tensioning
★ Before adjusting the tension, carefully examine the
drivebelt for signs of wear.
The belt must be renewed immediately at the first sign
of cracking, fraying or separation of the plies.
If a new belt is fitted, re-adjust the tension after
approx. 15 operating hours.
2 - Loosen pivot and fixing screws (1), (2) of bracket (3) as

for the belt renewal procedure.
3 - Tension the drivebelt using a T bar and 3/4" drive 2
extension bar inserted through the aperture in bracket
(3). 3
4 - To tension the drivebelt, turn the bar
counterclockwise and tighten screws (1), (2). 1
5 - Check the tension adjustment using the tool and
method described in the engine manual.
★ Static deflection on first fitting: 550±50 N
F0077904
★ Static deflection after 15 minutes: 400±50 N

The check should be carried out with the engine
cold.
30-51
FRONT PTO ASSEMBLY
FRONT PTO
ASSEMBLY
Removal
1 - Remove the complete front lift assembly . 2
2 - Unplug connector (1) and release the wiring from clip

(2).
1
F0018080
3 - Fully unscrew screws (3) securing cardan shaft (4) to

flexible coupling (5) and detach the flange.
5
3
4
F0078013
4 - Unscrew the four screws (6) but only remove the two
lower screws.
★ Leave the two upper screws in position for safety.
1 6
5 - Fit a non-slip block to a trolley jack; position the non-
slip block under the PTO assembly.
6 - Remove the upper screws left in position for safety
and remove PTO assembly (7) supporting cardan
shaft (4).
★ If necessary, use a lever to help separate the
components.
F0018090
PTO: 70 kg (154 lb.)

Refitting
7
1
Screws: 214 Nm (157.7 lb.ft.)
F0018100
30-52
FRONT PTO FLEXIBLE COUPLING
FLEXIBLE COUPLING
Renewal
1 - Remove complete radiator assembly.
(For details, see "COOLERS-RADIATOR 1
4
ASSEMBLY").
the flange of cardan shaft (2).
2 3
F0078017
4 - Unscrew and remove retaining screws (6) of coupling

(5) and remove the coupling itself. 1
5
F0018676
Refitting
1
Screws: Loctite 243
Screws: 139±10% Nm (102.4±10% lb.ft.)
30-53
FRONT AXLE DRIVE SHAFT
Removal
parking brake.
1 - Using suitable lifting equipment "A", raise the front of
the tractor by about 10-12 cm (4-5 in.).
2 - Position two stands under the front axle able to
support the tractor.
A F0101701
3 - Remove screws (2) and remove locating and retaining

discs (2) of fuel tank (3).
4 3
★ Mark the washers so as to avoid error when
refitting the tank.
C
★ Note the position of hole "A" as the tank is levelled
by rotating the front washer.
2 1
1 B
F0101971

4 - Move the fuel tank 8–10 cm–towards the outside.
Loosen and remove screw (4) retaining spacer (5) and
the shield. 5
F0078452
5 - Loosen unions (6) and free the differential locking

pipe.
6
★ Plug the pipes to prevent the entry of impurities. 6
F0113390
30-54
6 - Support shield (7) and remove screw (8).
8
7
F0102611
7 - Remove screws (9) and remove shield (7).

9
9
F0102621
8 - Position a support under shaft (10) and remove flange

screws and lock nuts (11).
1
★ Disengage the parking brake so that the shaft can
11
be turned. 10
F0102631
• For tractors with front axle suspension

9 - Remove screw (12) and remove clamp (13).
13
12
F0113400
30-55

10 - Disconnect the flanges and withdraw drive shaft (10)
towards the front of the tractor. 2
10
F0078485
Refitting
1
Nuts: 43.5±10% Nm (32±10% lb.ft.)
★ Tighten the screws in crosswise sequence.
2
Rear coupling: grease.
30-56
FRONT AXLE VERSION WITHOUT AXLE SUSPENSION
FRONT AXLE
VERSION WITHOUT AXLE SUSPENSION
Removal
Disconnect the lead from the battery negative terminal
(–) and apply the parking brake.
(For details, see "FRONT WHEELS").
2 - Remove the front fenders.
(For details, see "FRONT FENDERS")
3 - Remove the front axle drive shaft.
(For details, see "FRONT AXLE DRIVE SHAFT")
4 - Position a trolley jack “A” under the engine sump and
remove stands previously positioned under the front
axle.
5 - Disconnect steering control pipes (1).
★ Label the pipes to avoid confusion on
reconnection.
★ Plug the pipes and ports to prevent the ingress of 1
dirt.
F0113410
• For version with ASM

6 - Unplug the steering angle sensor connector (2).
F0113420

7 - Remove screws (3) and remove plate (4).
F0113430
30-57
FRONT AXLE VERSION WITHOUT AXLE SUSPENSION
8 - Position a suitable jack under axle (5) and lever it

slightly in the lift direction.
9 - Using a slide hammer puller, remove pivot pin (6).
5
F0113440
10 - Remove complete axle assembly (5).
F0113450
Refitting
30-58
FRONT AXLE VERSION WITH AXLE SUSPENSION
VERSION WITH AXLE SUSPENSION
Removal
2 - Remove the fenders.
(For details, see "FRONT FENDERS")
(For details, see "FRONT AXLE DRIVE SHAFT")
4 - Position a trolley jack under the engine sump and
axle.
5 - Disconnect steering control pipes (2) from axle (1).
★ Plug the pipes and ports to prevent the ingress of
dirt.
2
1
F0113460
6 - Remove screws (3) and tilt pipes (2) towards the rear of
the tractor.
3
2
F0113470
7 - Remove screws (4) and remove cover (5).

8 - Remove screws (6) and detach from the front support
sensor (7).
5
6
F0113480
30-59
F0113421
10 - Remove circlip (9) and washer (10) on both sides.
10
F0113490
11 - Position a suitable jack under axle (1) and lever it

slightly in the lift direction.
1
F0113500
12 - Using a slide hammer puller, remove pins (11) on both

sides.
11
F0113510
30-60
13 - Remove screws (12) and the plate on both sides.
12
F0113520
14 - Using a slide hammer puller, remove pins (13) on both

sides.
13
F0113530
15 - Remove axle (1) complete with support (14).
1 14
F0113540
16 - Remove screws (15) and remove plate (16).
16
15
F0113550
30-61
17 - Withdraw oscillation pin (17) and remove support (14).

14
17
F0113560
Refitting
30-62
FRONT SUPPORT COMPLETE ASSEMBLY (Version without axle suspension)
FRONT SUPPORT
COMPLETE ASSEMBLY (Version without axle suspension)
Removal
(For details, see "WHEELS - FRONT WHEELS").
(For details, see FRONT FENDERS").
(For details, see "FRONT AXLE DRIVE SHAFT").
4 - Remove radiators assembly.
ASSEMBLY").
axle.

reconnection.
dirt. 1
F0113410
7 - Remove lower screws (2) (two per side). 1
F0102641
30-63
FRONT SUPPORT COMPLETE ASSEMBLY (Version without axle suspension)
8 - Position a suitable jack under the axle and lever it

slightly in the lifting direction.
F0102650
9 - Remove screws (3) (two per side). 1
F0102661
10 - Remove complete front support (4).

2
4
F0102671
Refitting
1
Screws: 260±26 Nm (191.6±19.2 lb.ft.)
2
Locating dowels: Grease
30-64
FRONT SUPPORT COMPLETE ASSEMBLY (Version with axle suspension)
COMPLETE ASSEMBLY (Version with axle suspension)
Removal
(For details, see "FRONT FENDERS").
4 - Remove radiators assembly.
ASSEMBLY").
axle. 2
1
6 - Disconnect steering control pipes (2) from axle (1).
★ Plug the pipelines and ports to prevent impurities
getting in.
F0113460
the tractor. 1
3
2
F0113470

9 - Remove screws (6) and detach from the front support
sensor (7).
5
6
F0113480
30-65
F0113421
11 - Loosen screw (9) to discharge pressure in the axle

suspension circuit and lower completely the front
axle. 9
F0113570
12 - Loosen and remove screws (10) (qty 6).

2
10 10
F0113580
13 - Position a suitable jack under axle (1) and lift axle (1)
pressing it fully home on the front support.
1
F0113590
30-66
14 - Disconnect pipes (11) (two per side) from cylinders

(12).
dirt.
11
12
F0113600
15 - Remove the two upper screws (13).

2
13
13
F0113610
16 - Remove the complete front support.

3
F0113591
Refitting
1
Screws: Loctite ________________
2
Screws: 260±26 Nm (191.6±19.2 lb.ft.)
3
Locating dowels: Grease
30-67
FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION FRONT SUSPENSION CONTROL VALVE
FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION

FRONT SUSPENSION CONTROL VALVE
Removal
1 - Loosen screw (1) to discharge pressure in the axle
suspension circuit.
2 - Remove the fuel tank.
(For details, see "FUEL TANK").
F0113571
3 - Remove screw (2) and remove cover (3).
3
F0113620
4 - Disconnect connectors (4).

★ Label the connectors to avoid confusion on
refitting. 4
F0113630
5 - Disconnect delivery pipe (5).
F0113640
30-68
6 - Loosen unions (6) and free the differential locking

pipe.
6
F0113390
7 - Remove screws (7) and (8).
F0113650

9
10
9
F0102622
9 - Disconnect from control valve (11) pipes (12), (13) and

(14) and pipe (15) and union (16).
13 14
15
12
11
16
F0113660
30-69
10 - Disconnect pipe (17) from the union.
17
F0113670
11 - Remove screw (18) remove clamp (19) and move the

pipes towards the front.
19 18
F0113680
21
20
F0113401
13 - Disconnect supply line (15) from transparent tube (22)

and remove pipe (15).
22
15
F0113690
30-70
14 - Position a suitable jack under control valve (11),

remove screws (23) and remove control valve (11).
23
11
F0113700
Refitting
1 - Start the engine and repeatedly activate and
deactivate the front suspension in order to expel any
air from the system and check for leaks.
2 - Stop the engine, check the gearbox oil level and top
up if necessary.
30-71
FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION FRONT SUSPENSION POSITION SENSOR
FRONT SUSPENSION POSITION SENSOR
Removal
1 - Remove cover (1).
1
F0113710
2 - Loosen rear nut (2).

3 - Unplug connector (3).
5
4 - Unscrew and remove upper retaining screw (4) of 4 7
support (5) and loosen lower screw (6); rotate support 2 8
(5).
5 - Remove lower nut (7) and remove sensor (8).
6
3
F0113720
Positioning
1 - Start the engine, fully extend the front suspension
cylinders and fit sensor (8) to support (5) with front nut
2
(2) fully unscrewed. 8
5
2 - Fix support (5) and push sensor (8) in direction ”X” until
pin (9) is fully retracted. F0113730
3 - Keeping the pin in this position, screw in rear nut (2)

right up to support (5).
9 7 2 8
4 - Screw front nut (7) up to support (5).
5 - Back off nut (7) by one turn and tighten nut (2) to secure
the sensor.
★ This adjustment prevents the possibility of the
sensor sustaining impact damage at the end of its
5
travel.
Nuts: 30±6 Nm (22.1±4.4 lb.ft.)

X
D0003930
30-72
FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION FRONT SUSPENSION POSITION SENSOR
Checking
1 - Connect the test lead T2 (P/N 5.9030.743.1) between

sensor (8) and wiring (3); start the engine and, using a 3
T2
multimeter, check the voltage when the cylinders are
in the mid-stroke position.
★ Voltage with cylinders in mid-stroke position =
3.8V
Fully retract the cylinders and check the voltage.
★ Voltage with cylinders retracted = 1.90÷1.95V
★ The voltage is measured between the terminals of
the brown (earth) and blue (signal) wires
NOTE. The same reading can also be taken using the F0022063
suspension section of the ART program.

(For details see ART in section 20)
2 - Stop the engine, disconnect lead T2 (P/N 5.9030.743.1)
and connect the wiring to the sensor.
3 - Refit cover (1).
30-73
FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION FRONT SUSPENSION CYLINDERS
FRONT SUSPENSION CYLINDERS
Removal
All operations are to be carried out with the parking
brake applied.
(For details, see "FRONT FENDERS").
axle.

6 - Remove screws (3) and detach from the front support 1
sensor (4). 3
F0113481
7 - Disconnect the steering cylinder pipes (5).

F0113461
the tractor.
6
5
F0113471
30-74
F0113422
10 - Position a suitable jack under the axle and lever it

slightly in the lifting direction.
11 - Remove screws (8) and retaining bars (9) of the lower
pivot pins.
F0113521
12 - Using the slide hammer puller, remove lower pivot

pins (10).
10
F0113531
13 - Lower the axle to disengage the lower mountings of

the cylinders.
11
Discharge the residual pressure from the suspension
system by unscrewing valve (11) about two full turns.
★ Wait a few minutes after discharging the pressure,
then re-close the valve.
F0113572
30-75
14 - Disconnect pipelines (13) and (14) from cylinders (12).

Loosen the fitting by a few turns, but before fully
13
disconnecting them, push them to detach them from
the couplers and release any residual pressure in the
system.
12
14
F0113740
15 - Remove screws (15) and retaining bars (16) of the

upper pivot pins.
16
15
F0113750
16 - Using a slide hammer puller, remove upper pivot pins

(17) and remove cylinders (18).
17
18
F0113760
Refitting
1 - Start the engine and turn the steering wheel
repeatedly to full lock in both directions. Activate and
deactivate the suspension a number of times to expel
air from the system and check for leaks.
2 - Stop the engine, check the gearbox oil level and top
up if necessary.
30-76
Disassembly
1 - Relieve the staking on the lock washer located
between end cap (1) and cylinder (2).
1
2
F0041180
2 - Using a pin wrench, unscrew end cap (1).

1
F0041190
3 - Withdraw rod (3) complete with end cap (1) and seals.
2
F0041200
4 - Heat the eye of piston (4) to a temperature of 100÷120

°C (212-248 °F) and detach it from rod (3). 3
4
3
F0041210
30-77
5 - Withdraw end cap (1) from the rod and remove in order
rod wiper (5), seals (6), (7) and guide (8). 2
★ Take care not to damage the seatings of the seals. 9
1
6 - Remove O-ring seal (9).
★ Make a note of which way round the seals are
assembled.
5
6 7 8
D0005380
7 - Remove seal (11) and guide (12) from piston (10).

★ Take care not to damage the seal seating.
12 11
10
D0005390
Assembly
1
Head: 500±20 Nm (368.5±14.7 lb.ft)
2
Seals: Oil
3
Piston eye: 380±10 Nm (280.1±7.4 lb.ft)
1 - Stake the lock washer tabs into the notch on cylinder

(2) and into one of the notches on end cap (1).
F0041220
30-78
BRAKE CYLINDERS
BRAKE CYLINDERS
Removal
(–).
2 - Remove the initial section of the exhaust pipe.
(For details, see "EXHAUST SYSTEM").
★ Do not remove the silencer and the middle section
of the exhaust pipe.
3 - Remove the front console.
(For details, see "FRONT CONSOLE").
4 - Remove screws (1) move expansion tank (2) towards

the front.
2
1
1
F0113770
5 - Drain all the fluid from brake fluid reservoir (3) and
detach pipes (4) from reservoir (3). 5
3
6 - Disconnect connectors (5), detach brake fluid 6
reservoir (3) from support (6).
4
F0113780
7 - Remove screws (7) and remove partition (8).

7
7
F0113790
30-79
BRAKE CYLINDERS

8 - remove screws (9) (qty 4)and detach guard (10) from 10
support (6).
9
9
F0101441
9 - Remove screws (11) (two per side) and remove guard

(6).
11
F0103381

10 - Disconnect pipes (12) from brake cylinders (13). 12
13
F0103851
11 - Disconnect feed pipes (13) and by-pass pipe (15)

between cylinders (14).
13
14 15
F0103621
30-80
BRAKE CYLINDERS
12 - Remove split pins (16) and remove pivot pins (17).
17 17
16
F0103631
13 - Remove screws (18) (qty. 4) and remove brake

cylinders (13).
18
13
F0103641
Refitting
1 - Fill the brake fluid reservoir to the maximum level.
2 - Bleed the air from the braking system.
30-81
POWER STEERING PUMP STEERING VALVE ASSEMBLY
POWER STEERING PUMP
STEERING VALVE ASSEMBLY

Removal
(–).
2 - Remove exhaust pipe assembly.
(For details, see "EXHAUST SYSTEM".
★ Do not remove the silencer and the middle section
of the exhaust pipe.


4 - Remove screws (1) move expansion tank (2) towards
the front. 2
1
1
F0113770
3
6 - Disconnect connectors (5), detach brake fluid 6
reservoir (3) from support (6).
4
F0113780
30-82

7
7
F0113790

8 - remove screws (9) (qty 4)and detach guard (10) from 10
support (6).
9
9
F0101441
9 - Remove screws (11) (two per side) and remove guard

(6).
11
F0103381

13 12
10 - Loosen unions (12) and disconnect hoses (13) from
power steering (14). 1
12
13
14
F0103651
30-83
11 - Remove screws (15).
15
F0103661
12 - Remove power steering (14).

★ If necessary, reposition plate (16) with the relative
spacers. 2
16
14
F0103671
Refitting
1
Hose connection union: 60 Nm (44.2 lb.ft.)
2
★ If the hose connection fittings have been removed
from the steering valve, replace the seals. Torque
reassembled fittings to 70 Nm (51.6 ft lb).
1 - Start the engine and turn the steering wheel
repeatedly in both directions to eliminate any air from
the power steering system.
2 - Check the unions for leaks.
3 - Bleed the air from the brake circuits.
30-84
Disassembly
26 15
24 18 13
27 "a
" ba
28 " aa 19
29
30 21
20
22
16
&)aa
&)ba
12
10
17
"’a
"’b
"’ "’a
8 aa
7 6
11
9
2
5 1
3 D0034690
30-85
1 - Unscrew and remove screws (1) and (3) and washers

(2) securing cover (4) (6 screws plus one special 3
screw). 1 2
F0009470
2 - Remove cover (4) by sliding it off sideways.

4
F0009480
3 - Remove stator/rotor assembly (5) complete with O-

rings (6) and spacer (7). 5
6 7
F0009490
4 - Remove drive shaft (8).
F0009500
30-86
5 - Remove distributor plate (9).
F0009510
6 - Remove safety valve stop bush (10).
10
F0009520
7 - Remove O-ring (11).
11
F0009530
8 - Remove ball (12) of the check valve and pins (13) and
balls (15) of the suction valves.
15
12 13
F0009541
30-87
9 - Checking through the central hole of the spool,

position cross pin (16) horizontally.
Push assembly (17) and the bearing assembly out of
power steering housing (18).
17
18
F0009550
10 - Remove outer race (19), inner race (20) and roller

bearing (21) from the spool. remove also ring (22).
★ Inner race (20) (thin) may sometimes remain in the
steering valve housing; ensure that it is fact
removed. 22 20
21
19
F0009560
11 - Remove cross pin (16), bush (17b) and spool (17a).

★ Use special cover screw (3).
17b
3 16
17a
F0009570
12 - Slowly withdraw spool (17a) from bush (17b).

17b
17a
F0009580
30-88
13 - Press neutral position springs (23) and remove them

from spool (17a).
23
17a
F0009590
14 - Remove dust seal (24) and composite seal (25) (O-ring

+ seal).
25
24
F0113070
15 - Remove plug (26) and its gasket (27).
26
27
F0112250
16 - Remove pressure relief adjuster screw (28).
28
F0112260
30-89
17 - Turn over the power steering housing and remove

spring (29) and relief valve (30).
★ The seat of the relief valve is a force fit in the
housing and cannot be removed.
30
29
F0009683
Assembly
★ Prior to reassembly, lubricate all components with
gearbox oil. 23b
1 - Insert two flat washers (23a) in the seat and centre 23a
them relative to the diameter of spool (17a). Insert the
four curved washers (23b) in pairs between the two
flat washers (23a) and push them fully home.
23b 23a 17a
F0009690
2 - Align spring assembly (23).
23
F0009700
3 - Insert spool (17a) in bush (17b).

★ Check that the position between the bush and the
17b
spool is as described in stage 1.
17a
F0009580
30-90
4 - Simultaneously push springs (23) and spool (17a) until

the springs are seated in the slots in bush (17b).
23
17a
17b
F0009710
5 - Align springs (23) and make sure they are positioned

centrally in relation to the diameter of bush (17b).
23
17b
F0009720
6 - Install ring (22) on its seat on bush (17b).

★ Ring (22) must be free to rotate without interfering
with springs (23).
22
17b
F0009730
7 - Insert cross pin (16).
16
F0009740
30-91
8 - Install the thrust bearing components in the order

indicated in point 9.
20
22 21 F0009751
9 - Thrust bearing assembly.

17a -Spool 20
17b -Bush
21
21- Needle roller bearing
20 -Inner ring 22
22 -Outer ring X
The outer ring must be installed with the
17a
chamfer “X” facing the shoulder of the spool.
17b
D0001181
10 - Position power valve housing (18) so the hole is

horizontal.
Insert the guide of special tool T9 (P/N 5.9030.480.0)
in the bush/spool assembly bore.
25
T9
F0009784
11 - Lubricate oil seal (25a) and O-ring (25b) and fit them on
the push rod of tool T9 (P/N 5.9030.480.0).
T9
25a 25b
T9 F0009774
30-92
12 - Fit tool T9 (P/N 5.9030.480.0) and insert it in the guide

previously inserted in the power steering bore.
25
T9
F0009784
13 - Push seal (25) into its seat in steering valve housing

(18) while rotating it to ease it into position.
18
F0009790
14 - Withdraw from power steering housing (18) tool T9 (P/

N 5.9030.480.0) and the guide, leaving the gasket
holder plunger in position. T9
18
F0009804
15 - Insert bush/spool assembly (17) in steering valve bore

(18).
Rotate the valve slightly while inserting it to ease it into 17
position.
★ Keep the cross pin horizontal while inserting the
assembly.
18
F0009810
30-93
16 - Push in assembly (17) until fully seated so that it forces

out the tool plunger left in the housing in step 14. 18
17
F0009820
17 - Rotate steering valve housing (18) until the centre hole

is vertical.
Insert ball (12) of the relief valve in the hole indicated by 12
the arrow.
18
F0009830
18 - Screw valve retaining bush (10) into the bore of the

relief valve.
★ The top of the retaining bush should be set below
10
the face of power steering housing (18).
18
F0009521
19 - Insert the two balls (15) in the holes indicated by the

arrows.
15
F0010310
30-94
20 - Insert stems (13) in the same holes.
13
F0009841
21 - Lubricate O-ring (11) and fit it in its seat.

11
O-ring: Gearbox oil
F0009850
22 - Locate distributor plate (9) so that its holes are aligned

with the holes in power steering housing (18). 9
18
F0009860
23 - Insert drive shaft (8) in the hole so that it engages the

cross pin; check that the engagement with the cross
pin is parallel to the steering column mounting face.
F0009870
30-95
24 - Position the drive shaft so that it is vertical and hold it in

this position using a suitable tool.
F0009880
25 - Lubricate the two O-rings (6) and fit them in the two
grooves in rotary spool unit (5). 6
Fit rotary spool unit (5) to drive shaft (8).
O-rings: Gearbox oil 8
F0009890
Install rotor (5a) on drive shaft (8) so that the valley

between two lobes is aligned with the groove in the
end of the drive shaft. Then turn outer ring (5b) to align
the fixing holes.
5a
F0009900
26 - Install spacer (7).

7
F0009910
30-96
27 - Fit cover (4).
F0009920
28 - Insert special screw (3) complete with washer (2) in the

hole indicated in the photo.
F0009930
29 - Insert the six screws (1) complete with washers (2).

Tighten screws (1) and (3) in a crosswise sequence to 3
a torque of 30±6 Νµ (22.1±4.4 lb.ft.). 1 2
F0009471
30 - Fit relief valve (30).
30
F0112270
30-97
31` - Fit spring (29).
29
F0112280
32- Fit pressure adjustment screw (28).

★ Calibrate the maximum working pressure on a test
bench.
(For details, see “Pressure relief valve” in this
chapter).
28
F0112260
33 - Fit plug (26) complete with seal (27).
Plug: 50±10 Nm (36.8±7.4 lb.ft.)
26
27
F0112250
34 - Locate dust seal (24) in power steering housing (18).

24
18
F0009970
30-98
35 - Install dust seal (24) in the steering valve housing using

a suitable drift and a soft faced mallet.
F0009980

36 - Close off the oil ports with plastic plugs to prevent
impurities getting in.
★ Fit the plugs by hand pressure alone; do not use a
hammer.
37 - On completion of the assembly operation, test the

operating pressure of the relief valve and calibrate as
necessary.
"RELIEF VALVE"(For details, see in this chapter)
F0009990
30-99
POWER STEERING PUMP RELIEF VALVE
RELIEF VALVE
Testing the operating pressure

1
1 - Disconnect steering pipe (1) and connect union “B”
connected in turn to a 400 bar full scale pressure gauge
“A”.
2 - Start the engine and turn the wheel back and forth
between the full lock positions to eliminate all air from the
system.
3 - Force the steering to full lock on the side opposite to that A B
on which the pressure gauge is connected, and read off
the maximum continuous pressure on the gauge “A”.
★ Maximum permissible pressure: F0044770
180÷190 bar
4 - If the pressure reading differs from that specified,
adjust pressure relief valve (2) of power steering (3). 6
3 4
2
F0114790
Adjusting the calibration

1 - Remove plug (4).
2 - Using a 4 mm hex key, proceed to adjust the relief
pressure by positioning adjustment screw (5).
• To INCREASE, turn the screw CLOCKWISE
• To REDUCE, turn the screw COUNTERCLOCK-
WISE.
3 - Refit plug (4), checking that seal (6) is correctly seated.
Plug: 50±10 Nm (36.8±7.4 lb.ft.)
30-100
POWER STEERING PUMP BATTERY SUPPORT
BATTERY SUPPORT
Removal
Disconnect the lead from the battery negative terminal 1 3
1 - Remove nut (1), remove tie rod (2) and loosen screw (3).
F0113800
2 - Remove battery (4), remove screws (5) and detach

lead (6) from the positive terminal.
★ Disconnect first lead (7) from the battery negative 7
terminal (–). 5
6 4
F0113810
3 - Remove battery (4).

4 - Remove nuts (8) and remove screws (9).
F0113820
10
F0113830
30-101
POWER STEERING PUMP BATTERY SUPPORT
6 - Remove screws (11) and remove battery support (12).

11
12
F0113840
Refitting
30-102
HYDRAULIC PUMPS TRANSMISSION PUMP
HYDRAULIC PUMPS
TRANSMISSION PUMP
Removal
1 - stop the engine, remove the key from the starter
switch and apply the parking brake.
2 - Allow the engine to cool down to ambient
temperature.
1 - Remove the cab.
(For details, see "CAB").
2 - Disconnect connector (1), pipe (2) and remove union

(3).
★ Plug the pipes and open fittings to prevent the 1
entry of impurities.
F0113850
3 - Remove screws (4) and (5) and nuts (6) and remove
clamps (7) and (8).
8
6
7
5
4
F0113860
4 - Disconnect suction pipe (10) and delivery pipe (11)

from pump (9). 11
9
10
F0113870
30-103
5 - Disconnect pipe (11) from union (12).
11
12
F0113880
6 - Disconnect suction and delivery pipes (14) and (15)

from pump (13).
13
15
F0113890
7 - Remove screw (16) and remove cover assembly (17).
17
16
F0045082
Before proceeding, close the passage between the

lower part of the pump gear and the engine sump. 20
★ Use non-crushable material. 18
8 - Remove nut (18) securing gear (19) and washer (20).
19
F0045092
30-104
9 - Turn the engine over by hand so that the slot for the
machine key is in the top position.
Using puller T3 (part no. 5.9030.895.0), remove pump T3
drive gear (19).
Remove the machine key.
Take care not to drop the key into the crankcase.
19
F0045102
10 - Unscrew and remove screws (21) and remove pump

(13). 22
★ Recover also gasket (22) that should be renewed
on reassembly.
13
21
F0113900
Refitting
22
1 - Position gasket (22).
★ To hold the gasket in place, apply grease to the
contact surface of the engine.
F0045123
2 - Position machine key (23) on the pump shaft with the

slot facing upwards.
★ Keep the flat face of the key inclined towards the
gear hub spline.
23
F0045132
30-105
3 - Fit pump (13) and gear (19) simultaneously.

★ To help seat the gear and the machine key 13
correctly, gently turn pump (13).
19
F0045143
4 - Hold gear (19) in position by hand tightening nut (18)

with washer (20). 20
18
19
F0045092
5 - Tighten down the pump with screws (21).

★ Tighten alternate screws gradually in sequence.
Screws M10: 50±10 Nm (36.9±7.4 lb.ft.)

6 - Lock gear (18) with nut (17).
Nut M12x2.5: 50±10 Nm (36.9±7.4 lb.ft.)
21
F0114900
7 - Remove the material closing the passage between the

engine sump and fit cover (17).
★ Carefully inspect the O-ring (24).
24
17
F0045152
30-106
8 - Connect suction and delivery pipes (14) and (15).

★ Before connecting the upper suction pipe, fill the
pump (13) with gearbox oil. 14
9 - Fit the cab and the hood side panel.

10 - Start the engine and check the gaskets and test the 13
operation of the gearbox.
15
F0113890
30-107
HYDRAULIC PUMPS SERVICES PUMP
SERVICES PUMP
Removal
1 -Stop the engine, remove the key from the starter 5
switch and apply the parking brake. 3
2 - Allow the engine to cool to ambient temperature.

1 - Drain off all the oil in the reservoir. 1
Oil in the reservoir: max. 45 , (11.9 US gall.)
4
2 - Remove screws (1) and (2) and nuts (3) and remove 2
clamps (4) and (5). 1
F0113861
3 - Remove screws (6) and detach pipe (7) from pump (8).
★ Check the condition of the O-ring and renew if
necessary.
4 - Detach pipe (9) from the pump.
7 6
F0113910
5 - Remove union (10).

★ Renew the copper gaskets on reassembly.
6 - Disconnect pipe (11) from pump (8).
10
11
F0113920
7 - Disconnect suction and delivery pipes (12) and (13).

13
12
F0113871
30-108
8 - Disconnect pipe (13) from union (14).
13
14
F0113881
15
F0113930
10 - Remove pump assembly (8).

2
F0113940
11 - Remove nut (16).

3
16
F0113950
30-109
12 - Using a suitable puller screwed in on gear holes (17),

separate gear (17) from pump (8). 17
F0113960
13 - Remove spacer (18) and paper gasket (19).
18 19
F0113970
14 - Remove screws (20) and remove union (21).

4
20
20
21
F0113980
15 - Remove screws (22) and remove pump (23).

necessary.
22
23
22
F0113990
30-110
Refitting
1
20
Oil in the reservoir: max 45 , (11.9 US gall.)
2 A
★ Fill the body of pump (20) with oil through hole “A”.
3
Nut: Loctite 242
F0114000
4
★ Do not fit pump (23) at this stage. Fit the pump only
once you have fixed pump (8) to the engine.
1 - Start the engine and turn the steering to full lock in
both directions in order to expel any air from the
system and check for leaks.
30-111
HYDRAULIC PUMPS STEERING PUMP
STEERING PUMP
Removal
1 - Stop the engine, remove the key from the starter
switch and apply the parking brake.
2 - Allow the engine to cool down to ambient
temperature.
1 - Drain off all the oil in the reservoir.
1
Oil in the reservoir: max. 45 , (11.9 US.gall.)
clamps (4) and (5).
5
3
4
2
1
F0113861
3 - Remove screws (6) and detach pipe (7) from pump (8).
necessary.
4 - Detach pipe (9) from pump (8).
7 6
F0113910
5 - Remove screws (10) and remove union (11).

10
11
F0114010
30-112
HYDRAULIC PUMPS STEERING PUMP
6 - Remove screws (12)and remove pump (8).

★ Check the condition of the O-ring (13) and renew it 13
if necessary. 12 8
Refitting
1
8
12
1 - Start the engine and turn the steering to full lock in
both directions in order to expel any air from the F0114020
system and check for leaks.
30-113
EXHAUST SYSTEM SILENCER
EXHAUST SYSTEM
SILENCER
Removal
1
parking brake.
1 - Using a lever, remove clamp (1).
F0114030
2 - Remove screw (2) and remove silencer (3).
F0114040
Refitting
30-114
EXHAUST SYSTEM EXHAUST PIPE
EXHAUST PIPE
Removal
1 - Remove screws (1) and remove guard (2). 1
2
1
1 F0114050
2 - Loosen screws (3) and move clamp (4) joining exhaust

pipe (5).
5
4
3
F0114060
3 - Remove nuts (6) (qty 4) and remove exhaust pipe (5).

6
5
F0114070
4 - Remove gasket (7).

★ Note the direction in which the seal is fitted. 7
F0114080
30-115
EXHAUST SYSTEM EXHAUST PIPE
5 - Remove screws (8) (qty 4) and remove exhaust pipe

(9).
8
8
F0114090
Refitting
30-116
CAB
CAB
Removal
(–).
2 - Remove exhaust pipe assembly.
(For details, see "EXHAUST SYSTEM".
3 - Remove the fuel tank.
(For details, see "FUEL TANK").
4 - Remove the rear wheels. (For details, see "WHEELS -
REAR WHEELS")
5 - Remove the access steps on the right-hand side.
(For details, see "CAB ACCESS STEPS").
6 - Remove the battery support.
(For details, see "BATTERY SUPPORT")
7 - Completely drain expansion tank (1).
Coolant:
max. 5 , (1.32 US. gall.)
8 - Remove screws (2) (qty 2) and remove expansion tank

(1).
1
2
2
F0113771
3
10 - Disconnect connectors (5), loosen clamp (6) and 7
detach brake fluid reservoir (3) from support (7).
4
F0113781
30-117
CAB

8
8
F0113791

12 - Remove screws (10) (qty 4) and detach guard (11) from 11
support (7).
10
10
F0101442

13 - Remove screws (12) (two per side) and remove
support (7).
12
F0103382
14 - Loosen unions (13) and (14) and disconnect air

conditioning pipes (15).
13
15
14
F0114100
30-118
CAB
15 - Loosen clamps (16) and disconnect pipes (17) from

the heating system.
reconnection. 17
16
F0114110
• For versions without front axle suspension

18
F0101471
• For version with front axle suspension

17 - Disconnect steering control pipes (19). 19
dirt. 21
20
F0114120
23
22
F0114130
30-119
CAB

24
F0101481
21 - Remove split pin (25) and remove pivot pin (26).

22 - Loosen nut (27) and disconnect parking brake cable
(28).
28
27
26
25
F0101492
23 - Remove retaining clip (29), press button (30) and

disconnect cable (39) from the support.
29
31
30
F0101512
• For version with creeper

24 - Using the same procedure as described in the
previous step, disconnect creeper cable (32). 32
★ The transmission control is installed between the
hydraulic oil reservoir and the transmission.
F0114140
30-120
CAB

25 - Disconnect brake pipes (33) on both sides.
33
F0101531
• For versions with pneumatic suspension

Eliminate all residual pressure from the trailer air
circuit. 35
26 - Disconnect tie rod (34) and lower completely lever (35)

to discharge pressure from the cab suspension
circuit.
34
F0113101
27 - Disconnect cab suspension circuit pipe (37) from

valve (36).
★ Recover pipe (38).
36
38
37
F0113111
28 - Remove screws (39) and disconnect antifreeze

coolant tank (40) from the fender.
40
39
F0114150
30-121
CAB

29 - Remove knobs (41) and remove cover (42). 42
41
F0114160
30 - Disconnect connectors (43).

43
F0114170
31 - Remove screws (44) (qty 3) and remove guard (45).

44
45
44
F0114180
32 - Remove retaining clips (46) and disconnect gearbox

control cables (47).
★ Label the wires to avoid confusion on
reconnection.
47
47
46
F0114190
30-122
CAB
33 - Disconnect power steering return pipe (49) from the

cooler (48).
★ Plug the pipe and the hole in the axle to prevent
impurities getting in.
49
48
F0114200
34 - Disconnect earth leads (50).
50
F0101591
35 - Remove cover (51), remove screws (52) and detach

the light supports from both sides of the cab.
51
52
F0101561

53
36 - Remove nuts (53) and (54) on both sides.
54
F0101581
30-123
CAB
• For versions with cab pneumatic suspension

37 - Remove screws (55) and disconnect stabilization bar
(50).
56
55
F0114210
38 - Remove cab fixing screws (57) from the supports and

remove nuts (58).
57
58
F0114220
39 - Remove cab front fixing nuts (59).
59
F0114230
40 - Fit special tool T1 (P/N 5.9030.990.0).
T1
F0103780
30-124
CAB
41 - Attach cab (60) to a suitable hoist and raise it slightly to

gain access to the power steering pipe.
60
F0101611
42 - Disconnect delivery pipe (61) to power steering.

43 - Remove the cab. 61
F0114240
Refitting
30-125
ENGINE
ENGINE
Preparation for removal

2 - Remove the cab.
3 - Remove front support.
(For details, see "FRONT SUPPORT").
4 - Remove the front axle suspension control valve.
(For details, see "FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION")
5 - Drain off all the oil from the reservoir and transmission.
Transmission oil: max. 45 , (11.9 US.gall.)

1
6 - Position stand “A” under the connecting housing.
7 - Proceed as described in the heading "Separation or
removal" in this chapter.
Preparation before separating the engine from the

transmission
2 - Remove the cab.
4 - Remove the battery.
5 - Drain off all the oil from the reservoir and transmission.
Transmission oil: max. 45 , (11.9 US.gall.)

C
1
6 - Position trolley stand “A” under the engine sump and
stand “B” under the connecting housing.
7 - Drive two wedges “C” between the front support and
the front axle to prevent the engine from dropping
when it is moved.
8 - Proceed as described in the heading "Separation or A B
removal" in this chapter.
F0101630
30-126
ENGINE
Separation or removal
• For versions with air system
1
1 - Disconnect pipe (1) from the compressor. 3
2 - Disconnect pipes (1) and (2) from valve (3) and remove
the pipe.
1
2
F0114250

3 - Remove screws (4) and disconnect relay (5) from cab 6
support (6).
F0114260
clamps (10) and (11).
10
9
11
8
7
F0113862
5 - Remove screw (12)
12
F0113831
30-127
ENGINE
6 - Remove screws (13) and remove cab support (14).
14
13
F0101661
7 - Disconnect all pipes (15) from cylinders (16) and

remove them.
16
16
15 15
F0101671
8 - Disconnect pipe (17).
17
F0114270
9 - Remove nut (18) and disconnect cable (19) from

thermostarter (20).
19
20
18
F0101731
30-128
ENGINE
10 - Unplug connectors (21) of air cleaner clogging sensor

(22) and engine oil pressure sensor.
22
21
F0114280
11 - Unplug axle position sensor connector (23).

12 - Unplug steering angle sensor connector (24).
23
24
F0114290
13 - Remove nut (25) and disconnect alternator cable (26).

14 - Unplug air conditioning compressor connector (27).
25
26
27
F0114300
15 - Unplug air conditioning pressure switch connector

(28).
28
F0114310
30-129
ENGINE
16 - Remove nut (29), disconnect cables (30) and remove

guard (31).
17 - Remove screw (32) and disconnect starter cable (33). 30
29
33
32
31
F0101751
18 - Loosen and remove lower screws (31). 2
34
34
F0101761
• In case of engine removal only

19 - Attach engine (35) to a hoist and take up the slack in
the lifting ropes.
35
F0101771
20 - Remove nuts (36) (two per side) and (37). 2

37
36
36
37
F0101781
30-130
ENGINE
21 - Remove engine assembly (35).
35
F0101791
• For engine-transmission separation only

37
22 - Remove nuts (36) (two per side) and (37). 2
36
36
37
F0101781
23 - Move engine (35) away from transmission (38) by

pushing both front wheels. 35
38
F0101811
Refitting
Transmission oil: max. 45 , (11.9 US gall.)
2
Screw M16: 260±26 Nm (191.6±19.2 lb.ft.)
Nuts M12: 110±11 Nm (81±8.1 lb.ft.)
Nuts M16: 260±26 Nm (191.6±19.2 lb.ft.)
30-131
TORSIONAL SPRING PLATE
TORSIONAL SPRING PLATE
Removal
1 - Separate the engine from the transmission.
(For details, see "ENGINE").
2 - Remove screws (1) and remove torsional spring plate 1
(2).
1
F0101820
Refitting
1
★ Fit torsional spring plate (2) ensuring that the longer
side of the hub is facing towards the transmission.
F0101830
30-132
FLOOR MAT
FLOOR MAT
Removal
1 - Remove screws (1) and remove frame (2).
F0101840

3
F0101850
3 - Loosen grub screw (4) and remove accelerator pedal

(5).
F0030553
4 - Remove screws (6) and remove profiles (7) on both

side.
5 - Remove floor mat (8). 8
Refitting
6
7
F0103880
30-133
MULTIFUNCTION ARMREST
MULTIFUNCTION ARMREST
Removal
1 - Disconnect connector (1).
F0114320
2 - Remove knobs (2) and remove armrest (3).
2
F0114330
Refitting
30-134
SEAT
SEAT
Removal
1 - Take out screws (2) (qty 2) and remove frame (1).
2 - Remove multifunction armrest. 2
(For details, see "MULTIFUNCTION ARMREST").
F0101840

3
F0101850
F0101860
5 - Remove screws (5) (qty 4) and remove seat (6).
Refitting
5
F0101870
30-135
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POTENTIOMETER
Removal
1 - Loosen grub screw (1) and remove accelerator pedal
(2). 1 2
F0030554
2 - Remove screws (3) (qty 2) and remove right-hand side

profile (4).
3 - Lift up part of floor mat (5). 5
F0103881
F0101880
5 - Unplug connector (7), remove screws (8) and remove

potentiometer (9).
8
7
F0101890
30-136
Refitting
1
★ Calibrate the accelerator pedal as described in Group
20. (For det ail s, see CALI BRATI ON OF THE
ACCELERATOR PEDAL)
30-137
RIGHT-HAND CONSOLE
RIGHT-HAND CONSOLE
Removal
Disconnect the lead from the negative terminal (–) of
the battery and apply the parking brake. 1
1 - Remove the seat.
(For details, see "SEAT").
2 - Remove hood (1).
F0114340
2
3
F0114350
4 - Remove screws (4) (qty 7) and remove hood (5).

★ In case of renewal, it will be necessary to 4
disconnect the wiring connectors from the control
units and from the parking brake.
5
4
F0114360
F0114370
30-138
RIGHT-HAND CONSOLE
6 - Remove screws (7) and (8).
8
7
F0114380
7 - Lift up the console and unplug lift console connector

(9) and air compressed pressure gauge connector
(10).
9
10
F0114390
8 - Remove screws (11) (qty 4) and remove door (12).
11
12
F0114400
9 - Remove console (13) and disconnect wiring

connectors (14) of the rear PTO control pushbuttons.
14 13
F0114420
30-139
RIGHT-HAND CONSOLE
10 - Remove screws (15) (qty 3).
15
15
F0102821
11 - Remove screws (16) (qty 6).
16
16
F0114430
12 - Remove right hand console (17).
17
F0114410
Refitting
30-140
CREEPER CONTROL CABLES
CREEPER
CONTROL CABLES
Removal
1 - Remove the armrest.
(For details, see "MULTIFUNCTION ARMREST").
2 - Remove retaining clip (1), press button (2) and 2
disconnect the cable. 1 1
F0114141
3 - Remove hood (3).
F0114341
4
5
F0114351
5 - Remove screw (6) and remove control cables

retaining plate (7).
F0114440
30-141
CREEPER CONTROL CABLES
6 - Remove spring (8), remove circlip (9) and withdraw

cable (10).
8
10
9
F0114450
Refitting
30-142
CREEPER REAR PTO SPEED SELECTOR LEVER
REAR PTO SPEED SELECTOR LEVER
Removal
the battery and apply the parking brake.
1 - Remove the right-hand console.
(For details, see "RIGHT-HAND CONSOLE" ).
2 - Move the PTO speed selector lever to the PTO 540
ECO position.
F0102870
3 - Remove the retaining clip (1), press the button (2) and
disconnect the cable (3) from the support. 1 1
3
2
F0101511
4- Remove screw (4) and remove control cables

F0114441
5 - Remove screws (6) and detach lever (7) from support

(8).
7 8
6 F0102880
30-143
CREEPER REAR PTO SPEED SELECTOR LEVER
6 - Remove retaining clip (9) and circlip (10), and

withdraw control cable (3).
10
3
9
F0102890
Refitting
1400
1 540 ECO
★ PTO speed selector lever (11) must be in the fully
lowered position when control cable (3) is attached.
★ After connecting control cable (3), check that lever (11)
can move through its full travel towards the front of
tractor and that the correct PTO speed is engaged
when the lever is aligned with the corresponding
symbol marked on the console.
D0304010
30-144
CREEPER GEARSHIFT CONTROL
GEARSHIFT CONTROL
Removal
the battery and apply the parking brake.
1 - Remove the right-hand console.
(For details, see "RIGHT-HAND CONSOLE" ).
2 - Remove the rear wheel.
(For details, see "WHEELS - REAR WHEELS").
3 - Remove the cab access steps on the right-hand side:
(For details, see "CAB ACCESS STEPS").
1
1
F0102900
5 - Remove screw (3) and remove control cables

3
F0102910
6 - Remove screws (5) (qty 3) and remove guard (6).
6
5
F0101541
30-145
CREEPER GEARSHIFT CONTROL
7 - Remove retaining clip (7) of gearshift control cable (8)

to be removed.
8
8
7
7
F0101551
8 - Remove retaining clip (9) and disconnect relative

gearshift control cable (8) from lever (10). 10
9 - Withdraw cable (8). 1

8
8
9
9
F0114460
Refitting
166 ± 1 mm
1
★ Check that end fitting (11) or (12) protrudes the correct 12
distance. 11
166 ± 1 mm
D0304000
30-146
PARKING BRAKE CONTROL CABLE
PARKING BRAKE
CONTROL CABLE
Removal 4
(–).
5
1 - Remove the seat.
(For details, see "SEAT").
2 - Remove split pins (1) and remove pivot pin (2). 3
1
2
3 - Loosen nut (3) and disconnect parking brake cable (4). 1
★ Remove fork (5). F0101491
4 - Remove screws (6) (qty 7) and open hood (7) by tilting

back to left. 6
7
6 F0102930
5 - Remove screws (8) (qty 4) and remove lever assembly

(9).
8
F0102940
6 - Remove circlip (10) and remove pin (11).

★ Recover spacers (12).
12
11
10
F0102950
30-147
PARKING BRAKE CONTROL CABLE

★ Recover spacers (14).
14
13
18
F0102960
8 - Withdraw lever (15) from support (16).

9 - Remove split pin (17), withdraw the pivot pin and
remove control cable (18).
17
15 18
16
F0102970
Refitting
1
★ Adjust the parking brake travel.
(For details, see "PARKING BRAKE LEVER").
30-148
PARKING BRAKE PARKING BRAKE LEVER
PARKING BRAKE LEVER
Adjustment
1 - Before proceeding with the adjustment, operate
handbrake lever (1) repeatedly in order to eliminate
any play and check that the control cable slides freely.
2 - Apply a dynamometer max 500 Nm full scale to the
handgrip, and raise the lever to the first notch; check
that the force applied to reach the first notch is within
the normal limits.
★ Normal effort: 300 +0 30 N (55 +0 5 lb.) 1
F0103900
3 - If you find a different value, loosen nut (2) with smallest

amount of play and tighten nut (3) having greatest
m m
5 m
2
m
amount of play.
0, ,5
IN 1
M AX
M
4 - Then check that the distances between nuts (2) and (3)
of tie rods (4) are 0.5÷1.5 mm (0.02 –-- 0.06 in.). 3
F0079130
5 - Take the tractor to a straight section of asphalted road

at least 50 m (97 yards) long.
6 - Engage gear and move off.
7 - With the tractor in motion, depress the clutch pedal
and fully apply handbrake (1); check that the rear
wheels lock up simultaneously.
8 - If the rear wheels do not lock up at the same time,
screw in by just a few degrees nut (2) corresponding
to the wheel that fails to lock up and screw out the
nut corresponding to the other wheel.
9 - Repeat the previous operations until both rear wheels
lock up simultaneously when the handbrake is fully
applied.
10 - Check that parking lever travel is within the normal
limits.
★ Normal lever travel: max. 5 notches
If adjustment is required, turn nuts (2) by equal
amounts.
30-149
SERVICE BRAKE BRAKE DEVICE
SERVICE BRAKE
BRAKE DEVICE
Adjustment
1 - Remove locknut (1) and partially unscrew nut (2).
1
2 - Tighten nut (2) to the specified torque.
Nut (2): 10 Nm (7.4 lb.ft.)
3 - Unscrew nut (2) by 1/4 turns, then tighten locknut (1) to
the specified torque. 2
Locknut (1): 80 Nm (59 lb.ft.)

F0103910
4 - Repeat the procedure on the brake on the opposite

side.
5 - Adjust the parking brake travel.
(For details, see "PARKING BRAKE LEVER").
30-150
STEERING WHEEL
STEERING WHEEL
Removal
(–). 1 3
2
1 - Remove centre cover (1) and remove nut (2) with its
washer.
2 - Remove locknut (3) for telescopic adjustment of the
steering wheel.
F0102980
3 - Remove nut (4), serrated washer (5) and remove

steering wheel (6). 6
1
4
5
F0102990
Refitting
1
Steering wheel nut:
M18x1.5: 40±10% Nm (29.5±10% lb.ft.)
M8: 10 +0 2 Nm (7.4 +0 1.5 lb.ft.)
30-151
SHUTTLE LEVER
SHUTTLE LEVER
Removal
(–).
1 - Remove the steering wheel.
(For details, see "STEERING WHEEL").
1
2 - Remove circlip (1).
F0103000
3 - Loosen and remove screws (2) (qty 5) and lift and

position lights selector switch assembly (3) on one
side.
2
F0103010
4 - Remove adhesive tape (4) and disconnect wiring

connector (5).
4
5
F0103020
F0103030
30-152
SHUTTLE LEVER
6 - Remove shuttle lever assembly (7).
F0103040
Refitting
30-153
LIGHTS SELECTOR SWITCH
Removal
(–).
1 - Remove the steering wheel. A
2 - Inset thin blade "A" under the gasket and prise off
infocenter (1).
F0103400
3 - Unplug connectors (2) from infocenter (1).

1
F0103410
4 - Remove circlip (3).
F0103420
F0103430
30-154
6 - Remove screws (5) (qty 6)and remove front dashboard

(6).
F0103440
7 - Unplug LH and RH side connectors (7). 1 7
F0103450
8 - Disconnect lights selector switch connector (8).
F0103460
9 - Rotate shroud (9) to align rotation lock key (11) with

spring (10) and slide shroud (9) off steering tube (12).
10 - Remove the dashboard complete with the lights
selector.
9
10
Refitting
12 F0103470
30-155
FRONT CONSOLE
FRONT CONSOLE
Removal
(–).
1
(For details, see "STEERING WHEEL"). 2
2 - Remove the lights selector switch.
(For details, see "LIGHTS SELECTOR SWITCH").
F0103480
4 - Disconnect all wiring connectors (3).

★ Label the connectors to avoid confusion on 3
reconnection.
F0103490
5 - Remove transmission display (4) and disconnect

wiring connector (5).
4
5
F0103500
6 - Remove screws (6) (qty 6) and remove speaker cover

(7).
6
6
F0103510
30-156
FRONT CONSOLE
7 - Remove screw (8) and remove speaker support (9).
F0103520
8 - Withdraw the wiring.

★ To facilitate installation, attach the wiring to a piece
of string to be left in the cab structure.
10
F0103530
9 - Remove lower screws (11) (qty 4).
11
F0103540
10 - Remove screws (12) (qty 2) and (13).
12
13
F0103550
30-157
FRONT CONSOLE
11 - Remove front console (14).
14
F0103560
Refitting
30-158
CLUTCH PEDAL AND ACCESSORIES POSITION SENSOR
CLUTCH PEDAL AND ACCESSORIES
POSITION SENSOR
Removal
(–).
2 - Remove the steering column switch unit.
4 - Disconnect connector (1) and remove screws (2).

★ Before removing screws (2), mark the position of
support (3) in relation to pedals support (4).
1
3
4
2
F0103570
5 - Remove screws (5) and remove sensor (6).

6
F0103580
Refitting
1 - Fit sensor (6) and secure with screws (5).
6
F0103590
30-159
2 - Connect wiring connector (1) and secure support (3)

with screws (2).
★ Make sure that tie-rod (7) is firmly and correctly
attached to clutch pedal and sensor. 1
3
7
F0103571
3 - Temporarily install instrument panel (8) and reconnect

all previously disconnected wiring connectors.
★ Connect also the wiring connector of transmission
display and steering column switch unit.
4 - Connect lead to negative terminal (–) of the battery and
connect ART to diagnostic socket.
F0104040
5 - Select the HLHP control unit and then access menu

"3.1.3 Analog inputs"; check that, with the clutch A N A L O G 2 I
N P U T
pedal released, sensor output voltage is 0.8±0.1 V. - - - - - - - - - - -
- - - - -
C l u t c h 1 . 1 0 V
C l u t c h 1 2 %
C l u t c h ( r e e d
) O F F
F R R S 3 . 2 0 V
A P S - P o t i 0 %
T e m p . 0 7 0 C
C l u t c h P r e s s 0 . 0 0 b
C a l i b . P r e s s 0 . 0 0 b
6 - If the voltage is not within the specified limits, lengthen

or shorten tie-rod (7) until you reach the optimal value.
F0103572
30-160
7 - Fully depress the clutch pedal and check that sensor

output voltage is 4.3±0.1 V. A N A L O G 2 I
N P U T
- - - - - - - - - - -
- - - - -
C l u t c h 3 . 9 8 V
C l u t c h 9 1 %
C l u t c h ( r e e d
) O F F
F R R S 3 . 2 0 V
A P S - P o t i 0 %
T e m p . 0 7 0 C
C l u t c h P r e s s 0 . 0 0 b
C a l i b . P r e s s 0 . 0 0 b
8 - If voltage is not within specified limits, lengthen or

shorten the pedal travel accordingly by adjusting stop
(9).
9 - Proceed to calibrate the clutch pedal position sensor.
(For details, see 4.3.6 CLUTCH PEDAL CALIBRATION
in section 20).
D0030530
10 - Disconnect the lead from the negative terminal (–) of

the battery and remove the instrument panel.
11 - Install front console.
12 - Install steering column switch unit.
13 - Install steering wheel.
30-161
CLUTCH PEDAL AND ACCESSORIES PROXIMITY SENSOR (Clutch pedal depressed sensor)
PROXIMITY SENSOR (Clutch pedal depressed sensor)
Removal
Disconnect lead from negative terminal (–) of the
battery and apply the parking brake. 1

2 - Remove steering column switch unit.
3 - Unplug connector (1) and release wiring from clip (2). 2
F0104050
4 - Remove nut (3) and remove sensor (4).

1
4
F0103600
Refitting
1
3 5
1 - Fully depress the clutch pedal.
2 - Adjust sensor position in relation to sleeve (5) by way
of nuts (3).
★ Spacer "D" between sensor and cam:
0.5÷1.0 Nm (0.02÷0.04 in.)
F0103610
30-162
CAB DOOR LATCH CABLE
Renewal
1 - Loosen and remove screws (1) (n° 4) responsible for
joining the halves of door handle (2).
2
1 1
F0019740
2 - Remove the two halves and recover bushes (3) and

cable driving pin (4).
3
4
2
3
F0019750
3 - Unscrew and remove fixing screws (5) of door lock

cover (6). 6
F0103680
4 - Loosen clamp (7) and withdraw cable (8).
F0103690
30-163
5 - Feed new cable (8) starting from handle side; engage it

with pin (4) and clamp (7).
With the cable under slight tension, tighten down the
clamp nut. 8
7
4
F0103700
6 - Lubricate bushes (3) and the handle sliding surfaces;

fit bushes onto pin and refit handle (2).
3
Seats and bushes: Molykote
2
7 - Check that the door opens correctly and complete the
refitting procedure.
F0019790
30-164
LIFT DRAFT SENSOR
LIFT DRAFT SENSOR
Removal
1 - Remove screws (1) and remove cover (2) and spacers
1
(3).
F0020380
2 - Support lift arm, remove bracket (4) and sensor (5).

3 - Release wiring from the retaining straps and unplug 4
connector of sensor being removed. 5
★ The wiring connectors are located under the cab
and can be accessed from the left-hand side of the
tractor.
F0020390
Refitting
★ Make sure the sensor is installed the right way
round.
30-165
LIFT POSITION SENSOR
Checking
Switch off the engine and remove the key from the
ignition. 1
1 - Cut the retaining strap and, using a thin blade,
disconnect the connector (2) from the position sensor
(1).
2
2 - Connect the test lead T4 (code 5.9030.743.0)
between connector (2) and sensor (1).
3 - Start the engine and with a multimeter check that the
supply voltage and the signal voltages with the lift
raised and lowered are within the specified ranges: F0021410
★ Power supply voltage (red - blue wires):

5.5±1V (DC)
★ Signal voltage with lift raised (brown-blue wires):
greater than or equal to 0.5Vdc
★ Signal voltage with lift lowered (brown-blue wires): T4
less than or equal to 4.5Vdc
★ If the voltage readings are not within the specified
ranges, renew the sensor. 2
1
F0022071
Removal
Switch off the engine and remove the key from the
ignition. 2
1 - Remove screws (1) securing cover (2) and sensor.
F0020360
2 - Remove sensor (3) and unplug connector (4).
F0020370
30-166
Renewal of the position sensor bush

(only if necessary)
1 - After removing the worn bush, clean and degrease the
seating.
Activator: Loctite 7649
19 º
A
2 - Apply sealant to the surfaces of the hole and fit the
new bush, with the milled position at an angle of 19°
and maintaining protrusion “A” of 4.5 –0 0.5 mm.
Sealant: Loctite 648
3 - Allow the sealant to cure for at least 30 minutes before
fitting the sensor. D0004771
Refitting
★ Before finally tightening the screws, rotate the
sensor fully in a counter-clockwise direction;
adjust the position sensor as described in the
following paragraph.
Adjustment
1 - Detach any mounted implements from the 3-point
linkage. 1
A
2 - With the engine stopped, raise the lift arms to their
maximum height using suitable lifting equipment.
3 - Make reference marks "A" on lever (1) and on bearing
support (2).
2
F0021420
4 - Lower the lift to its maximum depth position.

5 - Start engine, and while holding down external
3
pushbutton (3), command lift upward movement until
lift reaches stop. Keep pressing button (3) while
simultaneously turning position sensor (4) clockwise.
F0114470
30-167
6 - As sensor (4) is rotated, the lift will start to rise; release

pushbutton (3) and stop rotating sensor when the
reference marks made in step 3 are separated by
distance of “D” of 5÷6 mm (0.20 - 0.24 in). D
F0021440
7 - Fix sensor (4) in position by tightening the screws (5).
F0020361
8 - Check the adjustment by first lowering the lift (using

external pushbutton (3)) to an intermediate position
and then raising continuously until lift stops, which 3
must occur in compliance with the offset between the
marks applied in step 6, without reaching the
mechanical limit stop and hence without over-
pressurising the hydraulic system.
9 - If necessary, alter the position of the sensor by turning
it a few degrees in a counter-clockwise direction.
10 - Calibrate the sensor.
(For details, see 4.4.6 CALIBRATION OF THE LIFT
HIGH AND LOW POSITIONS in section 20). F0114470
30-168
AUXILIARY SERVICES CONTROL VALVE
Removal
1 - Park the tractor on level ground and lower the rear
lift and the front suspension fully.
2 - Apply the parking brake and remove the key from
the ignition.
3 - Clean control valve thoroughly and dry the area,

paying special attention to the part facing the
tractor cab.
4 - Plug the pipes and ports immediately to prevent

the ingress of dirt.
Discharge any residual pressure from the trailer

braking system. 1 2
3
1 - Disconnect trailer coupler (1) from support (2) and
remove line (3).
F0114480
2 - Disconnect trailer braking lines (4).
F0114490
3 - Remove screws (5) and remove support (2).

2
F0114500
30-169
4 - Disconnect connectors (6) (DW) and (7) (UP) from lift

unit control valve (8).
1 6
8
F0114510
5 - Loosen clamps (9) and move hose (10).
10
F0114520
6- Disconnect delivery pipe (11).

11
F0114530
7 - Remove union (12) and disconnect load sensing line

(13).
12
13
F0114540
30-170
8 - Remove oil collector protections (14) from the

couplers.
14
F0114550
9 - Disconnect control valve connectors (15).

★ Label connectors to avoid confusion on refitting.
15
15
F0114560
10 - Remove union (16) and remove pipe (17).
16
17
F0114570
11 - Connect control valve units (18) to a lifting device and

take the strain with the rope.
18
F0114580
30-171
12 - Remove nuts (19) and remove control valves unit (18).
18
19
19
F0114590
Refitting
1
★ Position the connectors on the solenoids of the upper
lift control valve
DW upper (6)
UP lower (7)
1 - Start the engine and fully raise and lower the lift a
number of times to expel air from the circuits and
check for leaks.
30-172
Disassembly
★ The control valves are assembled in stacks and
should only be disassembled in order to renew the
individual sections or in the event of leaks between the
sections; any overhaul of the control valves should be
carried out directly by the manufacturer or an
authorised service centre.
F0054100
1 - Loosen and remove the nuts (1) securing the valve

sections to be removed.
★ Loosen the nuts gradually and sequentially to
accommodate the expansion of the seals between
the sections.
1
F0054110
Left hand control valve

2 - First remove end cover (2), then the first solenoid
operated valve section RP (3), spacer (4), second
solenoid operated valve section FP (5) and subplate
(6) (or trailer braking valve).
2 3 4 5 6
1 2
Recover the distance washers located between
the sections, and make a note of their positions
(For details refer to the assembly operations).
3
F0054120
Right hand control valve

3 - Repeat the steps as described for the left hand control
valve.
(Parts 8-9-10-11-12) 1 2 3
12 11 10 8
9
F0054130
30-173
Assembly
• To reassemble, repeat the above steps in reverse 13
order.
1
★ Before bringing the valve sections, spacers and 7 14
plates together, make certain that O-rings (13) and
(14) are correctly positioned.
★ To keep the O-rings in place, smear the seats with
grease.
★ Be careful not to confuse the position of the O-
rings with that of the distance washers. F0030890
2
Tightening torque for nuts:
30 +0 3 Nm (22 0
+ 2.2 lb.ft.) 3 3
★ Nut tightening sequence:
1 - 2 - 3 (see figure alongside) 2 2
★ Tighten the nuts a little at a time, observing the
1 1
prescribed sequence.
D0020002
3
7 7
★ Locate the distance washers (7) as illustrated in the
figure alongside.
The distance washers (7) must be located only
between the surfaces of sections with no
markings.
D0020001
7 7
F0030900
30-174
CONTENTS
SECTION 40
CONTENTS
STRUCTURE OF THE UNIT............................................1 • 4.10 WINDSCREEN WIPERS .....................................................54

• 4.11 INSTRUMENT PANEL ....................................................... 55
HOW TO CONSULT THE UNIT.......................................2
• 4.12 RADIO................................................................................. 56
1. INTRODUCTION .........................................................3 • 4.13 MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER............................................. 57
• 1.1 LIST OF WIRING LOOMS...................................................... • 4.14 BRAKES.............................................................................. 58
• 1.2 DEFINITION OF COMPONENTS AND SYMBOLS ...............4 • 4.15 FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION .............................................. 59
• 1.3 GENERAL RULES.................................................................5 • 4.16 TRANSMISSION ................................................................. 60
• • 1.3.1 MODIFICATION OF THE TRACTOR'S • 4.17 ASM - 4WD - DIFFERENTIAL ............................................. 61
ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS..................... 5
• 4.18 ELECTRONIC LIFT ............................................................. 62
• • 1.3.2 MAIN WIRING FAULTS.............................................. 5
• 4.19 FRONT AND REAR PTO.....................................................63
• • 1.3.3 REMOVAL, REFITTING AND DRYING OF
• 4.20 CONTROL VALVES ............................................................64
CONNECTORS AND WIRING .................................... 6
• 4.21 CAN BUS SYSTEM............................................................. 65
• 1.4 DIAGNOSTIC INSTRUMENTS..............................................7
• 1.5 WIRE COLOUR CODES .......................................................7
5. WIRING LOOMS ...................................................... 67
2. INDICES .......................................................................8 • ENGINE WIRING (4 CYLINDERS) (1/2)........................................ 67
• ENGINE WIRING (4 CYLINDERS) (2/2)........................................ 68
• 2.1 INDEX BY PART DESCRIPTION...........................................8
• ENGINE WIRING (6 CYLINDERS)
• 2.2 INDEX BY PART CODE .....................................................14
engine part number –> 0109278 (1/2) .........................................69
• 2.3 INDEX BY CONNECTOR ...................................................20
(2/2) engine part number–> 0109278 .......................................... 70
3. COMPONENTS..........................................................29
• 3.1 COMPONENT TECHNICAL DATA......................................29 engine part number 10063954 –> (1/2) ....................................... 71
• 3.2 PINOUTS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF ELECTRONIC • ENGINE WIRING (6 CYLINDERS)
CONTROL...........................................................................36 (2/2) engine part number 10063954 –> ....................................... 72
• • 3.2.1 ENGINE CONTROL UNIT (0421.3098)..................... 36 • ENGINE HOOD WIRING .............................................................. 77
• • 3.2.2 TRANSMISSION CONTROL UNIT (2.8519.028.0) ... 38 • FRONT WORKLIGHTS WIRING ..................................................78
• • 3.2.3 HLHP CONTROL UNIT (P/N 2.8519.027.0/10) ........ 40 • RIGHT-HAND TRANSMISSION WIRING (1/2)............................. 81
• • 3.2.4 INFOCENTER........................................................... 43 • RIGHT-HAND TRANSMISSION WIRING (2/2)............................. 82
• LEFT-HAND TRANSMISSION WIRING (1/2) ...............................91
4. SYSTEMS...................................................................45
• LEFT-HAND TRANSMISSION WIRING (2/2) ...............................92
• 4.1 EARTHING POINTS ............................................................45
• 2/4 CONTROL VALVES WIRING ................................................. 93
• 4.2 STARTING ..........................................................................46
• TRAILER BRAKE WIRING (ITALY) ............................................. 103
• 4.3 PRE-HEATING ....................................................................47
• TRAILER BRAKE WIRING (GERMANY) ..................................... 105
• 4.4 ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROL .....................................48
• FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION WIRING ....................................... 107
• 4.5 LIGHTS - POWER STEERING
(VERSION WITHOUT FRONT LIFT) ....................................49 • BATTERY POSITIVE WIRING -
BATTERY NEGATIVE WIRING................................................... 109
• 4.6 LIGHTS - POWER STEERING
(VERSION WITH FRONT LIFT)............................................50 • POWER SUPPLY WIRING (1/2)................................................. 110
• 4.7 DIAGNOSTICS ACCESSORIES..........................................51 • POWER SUPPLY WIRING (2/2)................................................. 111
• 4.8 WORKLIGHTS • CAB EARTH WIRING................................................................. 112

(VERSION WITHOUT DEMISTING MIRRORS) ...................52 • INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRING (1/2) ......................................... 117
• 4.9 WORKLIGHTS • INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRING (2/2) ......................................... 118
(VERSION WITH DEMISTING MIRRORS)...........................53
• MUDGUARD WIRING ................................................................ 119
40-i
CONTENTS
• WIRING FOR LIGHTS ON ARMS .............................................. 120 • ROOF WIRING (1/2)................................................................... 147
• WIRING FOR SUPPLEMENTARY LIGHTS ON ARMS .............. 121 • ROOF WIRING (2/2)................................................................... 148
• UPPER LIGHTS WIRING • WIRING FOR WORKLIGHTS, DEFROST MIRROR
(VERSION WITH LIFT)................................................................122 ON CAB (HL VERSION) ............................................................. 149
• WIRING FOR WORKLIGHTS ON ARMS • WIRING FOR WORKLIGHTS ON CAB
(VERSION WITHOUT LIFT) ........................................................ 123 (STANDARD VERSION) ............................................................. 150
• LIGHTS SELECTOR SWITCH WIRING......................................135 • WINDSCREEN WIPER WIRING................................................. 151
• CENTRAL WIRING (1/2)............................................................. 137 • ROTATING BEACON WIRING ................................................... 152
• CENTRAL WIRING (2/2)............................................................. 138
• ENGINE WIRING........................................................................ 139
40-ii
STRUCTURE OF THE UNIT
STRUCTURE OF THE UNIT
For easier consultation, this unit has been divided into the following chapters:
1. INTRODUCTION
Contains a brief description of the terminology used, the procedures to follow for
troubleshooting and repairs, and the instruments required for troubleshooting.
2. INDEXES
Contains the indices arranged by connector name, by component code and by component
description.
3. COMPONENTS
Contains the layouts of the connectors used in the electrical system, descriptions of the
components installed on the tractor,the technical data necessary for functional testing and the
pinouts of the electronic control units.
4. SYSTEMS
Contains the electrical diagrams of the tractor's systems.
5. WIRING LOOMS
Contains the layouts, the wiring diagrams and the positioning of connectors on the tractor.
40-1
HOW TO CONSULT THE UNIT
HOW TO CONSULT THE UNIT

Consultation example
The quickest way to determine the cause of a malfunction of
A B a component is to check all the components in the system in
E which the component is incorporated.
2 In the example given on this page the simulated fault is a
1 malfunctioning starter motor that fails to start the engine.
Interruttore avviamento 0441.1512.4 42 X4 2 0443.7847 1- Look in heading «2.1. Component description

X4 index» for the starter motor and determine the system
17 in which it is incorporated.
The system is indicated in the column «System
(heading 4.xx)» and in this case it is “2” (figure A).
Motorino d'avviamento X70-X71 2 2- Consult heading «4.2 Starting» (figure B) where all
system components are shown in the electrical
diagram; these components are accompanied by
C numbers that correspond to the key on the same
page.
3- Check all the components in the system, starting, for
example, with switch “1”.
4- Look in heading «2.1. Component description
index» (figure A) for “Starting enabling switch” and
check in the column «Technical Descr'n (heading
1 Interruttore avviamento
3.2.xx)» whether there is a technical description (in
this case it is shown under n° 42 in the heading «3.2
42 X4 component technical data») (figure C).
0.012.5957.4/10
Take note also of the name of the connector to which
the component is connected (in this case “X4”).
F Only if the position of the component on the tractor is

not known
5 - Look in paragraph «2.3 Connector index» (figure D)
D X4
for the name of the connector to which the component
is connected (in this case “X4”) and note down the
wiring loom in which it is incorporated (in this case
“0.012.5957.4”) and the type of connector (in this case
“19”).
X4 19 0.012.5957.4 Interruttore avviamento 6 - Look for the wiring loom in chapter «5. Layouts,
electrical wiring diagrams, connector positions»
using the index at the beginning of the chapter.
7 - Look for the name of the connector in the photos
G attached to the electrical diagrams and determine its
position on the tractor from the drawing (figure E).
NOTE.
19 The wiring diagrams (figure F) contain the names
and descriptions of the connectors that are used in
all the tables of chapter 2.
8 - Using the data contained in heading «3.2 Component
technical data» (figure C) in position no. 42, check
operation of the switch.
If the pinout of the connector is not known, look in
heading «3.1 Connector layouts» (figure G) for the
number found in the “Type” column of the «2.3
Connector index» heading.
0.012.5957.4/10
X4
0.012.5957.4/10
40-2
1. INTRODUCTION 1.1 LIST OF WIRING HARNESSES
1. INTRODUCTION
This section of the workshop manual is intended as a practical guide to troubleshooting the
tractor's electrical and electronic systems.
The following pages provide the technician with all the necessary information regarding the
tractor's systems and components.
Due to the possible time difference between the introduction of technical modifications (in line
with our policy of continuous product improvement) and the corresponding amendment of our
printed documentation, we are obliged to state that the data contained in this document are
subject to modification and as such are not binding.
1.1 LIST OF WIRING HARNESSES

DESCRIPTION CODE PAGE
CONTROL VALVES WIRING 2/4 0.013.2588.4/10 40-93
0.014.1563.4/10 -
POWER SUPPLY WIRING (1/2) 0.014.1564.4 40-111
CENTRAL WIRING (1/2) 0.013.9301.4/50 40-137

ENGINE HOOD WIRING 0.013.0663.4/30 40-77
INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRING (1/2) 0.014.3649.4/40 40-117
LIGHTS SELECTOR SWITCH WIRING 0.014.0007.4 40-135
WIRING FOR LIGHTS ON ARMS 0.014.0732.4/10 40-120
FRONT WORKLIGHTS WIRING 0.013.4085.4/20 40-78
WIRING FOR WORKLIGHTS ON ARMS (VERSION WITHOUT
LIFT) 0.014.1874.4/20 40-123
WIRING FOR WORKLIGHTS ON CAB (STANDARD VERSION) 0.014.1565.4/10 40-150

WIRING FOR WORKLIGHTS, DEFROST MIRROR ON CAB (HL
VERSION) 0.013.9310.4/20 40-149
UPPER LIGHTS WIRING (VERSION WITH LIFT) 0.014.1875.4/10 40-122

WIRING FOR SUPPLEMENTARY LIGHTS ON ARMS 0.014.0002.4 40-121
ROTATING BEACON WIRING 0.011.3824.4 40-152
TRAILER BRAKE WIRING (GERMANY) 0443.7355.4/10 40-105
TRAILER BRAKE WIRING (ITALY) 0443.7356.4 40-103
ROOF LINE WIRING (1/2) 0.013.9304.4/40 40-147
CAB EARTH WIRING 0.014.8351.4 40-112
ENGINE WIRING 0.014.3650.4/10 40-139
ENGINE WIRING (4 CYLINDERS) (1/2) 0421.3182 40-67
ENGINE WIRING (6 CYLINDERS) engine serial number–>
0109278 (1/2) 0421.3172 40-69
ENGINE WIRING (6 CYLINDERS) engine serial number 10063954

–> (1/2) 0421.3753 40-71
FENDERS WIRING 0.013.9309.4/30 40-119

0.014.5132.4/10-
BATTERY POSITIVE WIRING - BATTERY NEGATIVE WIRING 0.014.5144.4/10 40-109
FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION WIRING 0.013.9327.4/40 40-107

WINDSCREEN WIPER WIRING 0.014.1567.4/10 40-151
RIGHT-HAND TRANSMISSION WIRING (1/2) 0.013.9307.4/70 40-81
LEFT-HAND TRANSMISSION WIRING (1/2) 0.013.9308.4/70 40-91
40-3
1. INTRODUCTION 1.2 DEFINITION OF COMPONENTS AND SYMBOLS
1.2 DEFINITION OF COMPONENTS AND SYMBOLS

To prevent any misunderstanding or ambiguity, listed below are definitions for some of the key
terms used in this unit.
TERM DESCRIPTION
Element used to connect two components (e.g. wiring-switch, wiring-

Connector wiring)
Temperature Electrical component that converts the temperature of a medium (air,

sensor water, oil, etc.) into a voltage or resistance
Pressure Electrical component that converts the pressure of a medium (air,

sensor water, etc.) into a voltage or resistance
Position Electrical component that converts the angular or linear position of an

sensor object into a voltage
Pressure Switch that changes state (opens or closes a contact) according to the
switch operating pressure in the circuit in which it is installed
Switch that changes state (opens or closes a contact) according to the

Thermostat temperature of the medium in which it is immersed.
Mechanical component that opens or closes one or more electrical

Lights switch contacts.
Solenoid valve Valve operated by applying electrical current to a coil (or solenoid)
Chapter “3.2 Description of components” shows the wiring diagrams for certain switches and
buttons.
The following symbols are used for ease of interpretation:
SYMBOL DESCRIPTION
Contact between pins CLOSED (stable switch position)
Contact between pins CLOSED (unstable switch position)
Indicator LED
Indicator lamp
Diode
40-4
1. INTRODUCTION 1.3 GENERAL RULES
1.3 GENERAL RULES

The inspection, maintenance, troubleshooting and repair operations are essential to ensure
that the tractor continues to operate correctly over time and to prevent malfunctions and
breakdowns.
The scope of this paragraph is to describe repair procedures and to help improve the quality of
repairs.
1.3.1 MODIFICATION OF THE TRACTOR'S ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
CIRCUITS
The manufacturer prohibits any modification or alteration of the electrical wiring for the
connection of any non-approved electrical applicances or components.
In particular, if it is discovered that the electrical system or a component has been modified
without authorisation, the Manufacturer will accept no liability for any damage to the vehicle
and the vehicle warranty will be invalidated.
1.3.2 MAIN WIRING FAULTS

a. Poor contact between connectors
The main causes of poor contact between connectors are incorrect insertion of the male
into the female connector, deformation of one or both connectors, and corrosion or
oxidation of the pin contact surfaces.
b. Defective pin soldering or crimping
The pins of the male and female connectors make good contact in the crimped or
soldered area, but the wires are subjected to excessive strain leading to breakage of the
insulation of the wire itself and a poor connection.
c. Disconnecting wiring
If components are disconnected by pulling on the wires, or if components are removed
with the wires still connected, or if the wiring is subject to heavy impact this could damage
the connections at the pins, breaking strands of wire.
d. Penetration of water in connectors
The connectors are designed to prevent penetration of liquids (water, oil etc.); however,
when the tractor is cleaned using high-pressure water or steam, water could penetrate
into or condense inside the connectors.
As the connectors are designed to prevent liquid penetration, any water that does get in
will not be able to drain out, and thus may cause short circuits across the pins.
For this reason it is good practice to dry the connectors with a low pressure jet of
compressed air after washing the tractor.
e. Oil or dirt on connectors
Oil or grease on the connectors or pins can create a poor contact (oil and grease are non-
conductors) .
Clean the connectors thoroughly using a dry cloth or a low pressure jet of compressed air
and use specific products (deoxidising sprays, etc.) to degease the contacts.
★ Take care not to bend the pins when cleaning them.
★ Use dehydrated not lubricated compressed air.
40-5
1. INTRODUCTION 1.3 GENERAL RULES
1.3.3 REMOVAL, REFITTING AND DRYING OF CONNECTORS AND

WIRING
a. Disconnection of connectors
When disconnecting wiring, pull on the connectors rather than on the wires themselves.
For connectors that are held in position with screws or levers, fully loosen the screws,
then pull on the connector.
For connectors that are clipped together, fully depress the clip then pull the connector
apart.
After disconnecting connectors, cover them in a waterproof material to prevent dirt or
moisture getting into the contacts.
b. Connecting the connectors
Inspect the connectors to check their condition:
• Make sure the pin contact surfaces are free of water, dirt or oil.
• Check that the connectors are not deformed and that the pins are not corroded.
• Check that the connector casings are not damaged or split.
★ If a connector is contaminated with oil or grease, or if moisture has penetrated the
casing, clean it as described in paragraph 1.3.2.
★ If a connector is damaged, deformed or broken, replace it with a new one.
When inserting connectors, make sure they are properly aligned before applying any
force.
For connectors with clips, insert the two halves until they clip together.
c. Cleaning and drying wiring
When wiring is dirty or contaminated with oil or grease, clean it with a dry cloth, or, if
necessary, with water or steam.
If the wiring has to be cleaned with water, avoid directing the water or steam jet on the
connectors; if water penetrates the connector, proceed as described in paragraph 1.3.2.
★ Check that the connector is not short circuited by water by testing the continuity
across the pins.
★ After checking that the connector is good condition, degrease the contacts using a
deoxidising product.
d. Renewal of damaged electrical components.
• When replacing electrical components (fuses, relays, etc.), use only original parts
supplied by the manufacturer.
• When replacing fuses, check that the new fuse conforms to DIN 72581 or ISO 8820
standards and in particular:
- fuse F1 (100A) DIN 72581/2
- bayonet fuse (F2, F3, etc.) DIN 72581/3C
- fuse F51 (100A) and F52 (200A) ISO 8820
The fitting of replacement fuses that do not comply with these standards will
invalidate the warranty with immediate effect and release the manufacturer from all
liability.
• When replacing relays, make sure that the new relay conforms to the standards
marked on the original relay.
40-6
1. INTRODUCTION 1.4 DIAGNOSTIC INSTRUMENTS
1.4 DIAGNOSTIC INSTRUMENTS

For the correct diagnosis of any faults in the tractor's electrical system, the following
instruments are required:
1 - Digital multimeter with the following minimum characteristics:
AC VOLT 0-600
DC VOLT ..... 0-600
OHM............ 0-32M
AC AMP....... 0-10
DC AMP ...... 0-10
2 - Computer with “SERDIA” and “EDS” software installed
3 - All Round Tester or computer “PCTESTER” software installed
1.5 WIRE COLOUR CODES

COLOUR CODES COLOUR CODES
A Light blue M Brown
B White N Black
C Orange R Red
G Yellow S Pink
H Grey V Green
L Blue Z Purple
40-7
2. INDEXES 2.1 INDEX BY PART DESCRIPTION
2. INDEXES
2.1 INDEX BY PART DESCRIPTION
Technical
Component descr'n System
Component description part number (Chap. Connector (Chap. 4.xx) Notes
3.2.xx)
Cigar lighter 2.7099.770.0 X25 7
Alternator 0118.2173 B+ D+ 2-11
Actuator 0211.2588 6 Y3 4
Manual air
Radio X92 12 conditioner
Horn X60 5-6
+30 +30A
Battery +30B
4 directional
Armrest 0.014.3360.4 X11 4-7-11-18-19- control valves
21 version
4-7-11-18-19- 2 directional
Armrest 0.014.3358.4 X11 21 control valves
version
Hazard lights control unit 2.8639.007.0/ X43 5-6

10
2.8519.038.0/ HLHP1 - 7-13-14-15-16-
HLHP Control unit 30 HLHP2 17-18-19-20-21
Engine control unit 0421.3098 MX1 - MX2 2-3-4-7-21
Transmission control unit 2.8519.028.0/ GEARBOX 2-7-16-21

10
Manual air
Fan speed selector switch X77 13 conditioner
Fan speed selector switch X80 13 Manual air

conditioner
Air conditioning compressor 0443.7338 X56 13
0.013.8345.4/
Lift control console 20 X47 18
Transmission display 0441.9280.4 X33 16

Preheating device 0428.4880 X67 3
Directional control valve 1 0445.1872 D1 20
Gearbox in neutral locking solenoid 0.010.3343.0 LOCK SV 16
valve
Differential lock control solenoid valve 0442.3824 DIFF SV 17
Front axle suspension 'Down' solenoid
valve DW 15
4WD control solenoid valve 0443.1661 5 4WD SV 17

Front PTO engagement solenoid valve PTO 1 SV 19
Rear PTO control solenoid valve 0.010.2628.2 PTO 2 SV 19
Front axle up control solenoid valve UP 15
40-8
Technical
3.2.xx)
Lift Down solenoid valve DW SV 18
Trailer parking brake solenoid valve 0.900.0397.9 X69 14
"FIELD" mode solenoid valve 0443.1661 5 F SV 16
"ROAD" mode solenoid valve 0443.1661 5 R SV 16
Main clutch proportional solenoid
valve 0443.4425 7 P SV 16
Lift Up solenoid valve UP SV 18

Gear change solenoid valves (Y1, Y2, 0441.6685 33 X52 16
Y3, Y4)
For driving on the
Right headlamp 2.8039.240.0 X62 5-6
right
For driving on the
Right headlamp 2.8039.250.0 X62 5-6 left
Right headlamp on arms 2.8059.528.0 G34 6 For driving on the

right with lift
Right headlamp on arms 2.8059.527.0 G34 6 For driving on the

left with lift
For driving on the
Left headlamp 2.8039.240.0 X61 5-6 right
Left headlamp 2.8039.250.0 X61 5-6 For driving on the

left
Left headlamp on arms 2.8059.528.0 G32 6 For driving on the

right with lift
For driving on the
Left headlamp on arms 2.8059.527.0 G32 6 left with lift
RH rear direction indicator 2.8059.500.0 X65 (RH) 5-6-14
LH rear direction indicator 2.8059.510.0 X65 (LH) 5-6-14
Front RH outer worklight 2.8039.160.0 C2 8-9
Front LH outer worklight 2.8039.160.0 C1 8-9
RH rear sidelight and brake light 2.8059.500.0 X66 (RH) 5-6-14
LH rear sidelight and brake light 2.8059.510.0 X66 (LH) 5-6-14
Number plate light 2.8059.526.0 X71 - X72 5-6 Manual air

conditioner
RH direction indicator and sidelight 2.8039.270.0 X115 5-6 On arms
LH direction indicator and sidelight 2.8039.280.0 X114 5-6 On arms
Right-hand supplementary light 2.8039.296.0 X117 8-9 On arms
Left-hand supplementary light 2.8039.296.0 X116 8-9 On arms
Version with
Right-hand front worklight on cab 2.8039.295.0/ X103 9 electric demisting
10 rearview mirrors
2.8039.295.0/ Version without

Right-hand front worklight on cab 10 X103 8 electric demisting
rearview mirrors
2.8039.295.0/ Version with

Right-hand front worklight on cab 10 X105 9 electric demisting
rearview mirrors
40-9
Technical
3.2.xx)

Left-hand front worklight on cab 10 X104 9 electric demisting
rearview mirrors
Version without
Left-hand front worklight on cab 2.8039.295.0/ X104 8 electric demisting
10 rearview mirrors
Version with
Left-hand front worklight on cab 2.8039.295.0/ X106 9 electric demisting
10 rearview mirrors

Right-hand rear worklight on cab 10 X107 9 electric demisting
rearview mirrors
Version without
2.8039.295.0/
Right-hand rear worklight on cab 10 X107 8 electric demisting
rearview mirrors
Version with
Right-hand rear worklight on cab 2.8039.295.0/ X109 9 electric demisting
10 rearview mirrors

Left-hand rear worklight on cab 10 X108 9 electric demisting
rearview mirrors

Left-hand rear worklight on cab 10 X108 8 electric demisting
rearview mirrors
Version with
Left-hand rear worklight on cab 2.8039.295.0/ X110 9 electric demisting
10 rearview mirrors
Rotating beacon 2.6039.017.0 X99 5-6
Infocenter 0443.3422.4/ X17 - X18 3-5-6-7-11-14-

20 21
ASM switch (not utilised) X39
2-3-4-5-6-7-8-
Starter switch 0441.1512.4 28 X38 9-10-11-12-13-
14-15-16-17-
18-19-20-21
Differential lock control switch (not X40
utilised)
Lift lock control switch (not utilised) X48
Rear worklights switch 0.012.5954.4 31 X82 8-9 Manual air

conditioner
Switch for worklights on arms 0.012.5943.4 23 X111 8-9 Version with

worklights on arms
Manual air
Rotating beacon on/off switch 0.012.5945.4 37 X81 5-6 conditioner
Door open warning light switch 2.7659.255.0 30 X83 7 Manual air

conditioner
Low/full beam headlights switch 0.012.5941.4 21 X112 6 Version without

worklights on arms
Manual air
Recirculation switch X79 13 conditioner
Rearview mirror demister switch 0.013.7108.4 X87 7 Manual air

conditioner
Power lift control switch (not utilised) X20
40-10
Technical
3.2.xx)
Front axle suspensions switch (not X42 15
utilised)
Manual air
Rear screen wiper switch 0.012.5946.4 29 X86 10 conditioner
Start enable switch (Green) 0441.6066 15 S 2
Front worklights switch 0.012.5943.4 23 X22 8-9
Handbrake switch 0439.1395 17 X8 14
Hazard warning lights switch 0.013.1330.4 24 X23 5-6
4WD engagement switch (not utilised) X41
0.012.5951.4/
Front PTO engagement switch 27 X37 19
10
0.012.5948.4/
AUTO PTO engagement switch 10 20 X15 19
Rear PTO engagement switch 0.012.5950.4/ 19 X14 19

10
5-6-7-8-9-12-
Sidelights switch 0.012.5940.4 25 X24 13-14-15-16-
17-18-19
Right brake pedal switch 0439.1395 17 X35 14-17
Left brake pedal switch 0439.1395 17 X34 14-17
Gearbox control lever 0.014.4950.4 X45 -X46 16
Shuttle control lever 0.012.7076.4 X63 16
Courtesy light 2.8339.074.0 X85 7 Manual air

conditioner
Manual air conditioner control panel X78 13 Manual air
lights conditioner
Compressed air gauge 0442.5709 18 X12 - X13 14
Right-hand recirculation motor 0.013.2142.0 X73 13 Manual air

conditioner
Left-hand recirculation motor 0.013.2142.0 X74 13 Manual air

conditioner
2.9019.200.0/
Windscreen wiper motor 10 X100 10
Rear screen wiper motor 2.9019.190.0 X91 10 Manual air

conditioner
Right-hand fan motor 0.900.0035.3 X90 13 Manual air

conditioner
Manual air
Left-hand fan motor 0.900.0035.4 X88 13 conditioner
Starter motor +30C +50 2
Interior roof light 2.8339.231.0 X75 7 Manual air

conditioner
Windscreen washer pump 0.013.8360.0 X2 10
Rear screen washer pump 0.013.8360.0 X1 10
Supplementary CANBUS socket X3 21
Power socket 2.6039.020.0 X10 7
40-11
Technical
3.2.xx)
Diagnostic socket X4 7
ISO4 socket (power supply to
implements) 0442.2323.4 X9 18
Trailer socket X53 5-6-14

Air conditioning pressure switch X54 13
Trailer braking low pressure switch 0.900.0064.4 X70 14
Transmission oil low pressure switch 0443.1690 1 18 BAR 16
Steering system pressure switch X51 11
Engine oil pressure switch 0118.2227 32 X50 11
HOLD" button (not utilised) HOLD 4
Rear lift Down Rx pushbutton 2.7659.182.0 4 DW (RH) 18
RH rear PTO button (on mudguard) 2.7659.177.0/ 12 PTO (RH) 19

20
RH rear lift up button 2.7659.182.0 4 UP (RH) 18
LH rear lift down button 2.7659.182.0 4 DW (LH) 18
LH rear PTO button (on mudguard) 2.7659.177.0/ 12 PTO (LH) 19

20
LH rear lift up button 2.7659.182.0 4 UP (LH) 18
Radar 0.008.8048.4/ 13 RADAR 18

10
Radar (UK) 0.010.7172.4 14 RADAR 18
Driver's seat 0.014.5564.4 X7 7
Steering angle sensor 0.900.0081.4 X55 17
Field/road sensor 0.900.0277.8 X59 16
Air cleaner clogged sensor X49 11
Fuel level sensor 2.7059.823.0/ 34 X58 11

10
Hand throttle position sensor (not GAS 4
utilised)
Accelerator pedal position sensor 0442.9390/10 X16 4
Clutch pedal position sensor 0443.2708 26 X26 16
Rear lift position sensor 0443.8667.0 11 POS 18
0.009.2194.4/
Front axle suspension position sensor 10 35 X64 15
Trailer braking pressure sensor 0.011.9428.0 36 X68 14

Trailer braking pressure sensor 0.011.9428.0 36 X68 14
Clutch pedal depressed proximity
sensor 0442.4165/10 22 X21 16
Lift draft sensor (right) 0.014.3972.4 R 18

Lift draft sensor (left) 0.014.3972.4 L 18
Engine boost pressure sensor 0419.4078 B48 4
Fuel temperature sensor 0419.9809 2 B37 4
40-12
Technical
3.2.xx)
Engine coolant temperature sensor 0419.9809 2 B43 4
Transmission oil temperature sensor 0441.6649 8 GEAR TEMP 16
Clutch speed sensor 0443.4551 NHK 16
Gearbox input shaft speed sensor 0443.4551 NLSE 16
Rear PTO speed sensor 0443.8352 PTO 19
Camshaft speed sensor 0419.9792 3 B40 4
Wheel speed sensor 0443.8450 9 NAB 16
Gearbox output shaft speed sensor 0443.8449 10 NLSA 16
Creeper engagement sensor 0443.6527 16 X5 2
Brake fluid level sensor X57 14
Right-hand rearview mirror with Version with

electric demisting 0.014.2021.4 X101 7 electric demisting
rearview mirrors
Version with
Left-hand rearview mirror with electric 0.014.2022.4 X102 7 electric demisting
demisting rearview mirrors
Right-hand tweeter 0.012.1725.0 X30 12
Left-hand tweeter 0.012.1725.0 X27 12
Manual air
Right-hand woofer 0.013.2161.0 X84 12 conditioner
Left-hand woofer 0.013.2161.0 X76 12 Manual air

conditioner
40-13
2. INDEXES 2.2 INDEX BY PART CODE
2.2 INDEX BY PART CODE
Technical
Code Description descr'n Connector System Notes
(Chap. 3.2.xx) (head. 4.xx)
0118.2173 Alternator B+ D+ 2-11
0118.2227 Engine oil pressure switch 32 X50 11
0211.2588 Actuator 6 Y3 4
0419.4078 Engine boost pressure sensor B48 4
0419.9792 Camshaft speed sensor 3 B40 4
0419.9809 Fuel temperature sensor 2 B37 4
Engine coolant temperature

0419.9809 2 B43 4
sensor
0421.3098 Engine control unit MX1 - MX2 2-3-4-7-21
0428.4880 Preheating device X67 3
0439.1395 Handbrake switch 17 X8 14
0439.1395 Right brake pedal switch 17 X35 14-17
0439.1395 Left brake pedal switch 17 X34 14-17
0441.6066 Start enable switch (Green) 15 S 2
0441.6649 Transmission oil temperature 8 GEAR TEMP 16

sensor
Gear change solenoid valves (Y1,

0441.6685 Y2, Y3, Y4) 33 X52 16
0442.3824 Differential lock control solenoid DIFF SV 17

valve
0442.5709 Compressed air gauge 18 X12 - X13 14
0443.1661 4WD control solenoid valve 5 4WD SV 17
0443.1661 "FIELD" mode solenoid valve 5 F SV 16
0443.1661 ROAD" mode solenoid valve 5 R SV 16
Transmission oil low pressure

0443.1690 switch 1 18 BAR 16
0443.2708 Clutch pedal position sensor 26 X26 16
0443.4425 Main clutch proportional solenoid 7 P SV 16

valve
0443.4551 Clutch speed sensor NHK 16
0443.4551 Gearbox input shaft speed sensor NLSE 16
0443.6527 Creeper engagement sensor 16 X5 2
0443.7338 Air conditioning compressor X56 13
0443.8352 Rear PTO speed sensor PTO 19
0443.8449 Gearbox output shaft speed 10 NLSA 16

sensor
0443.8450 Wheel speed sensor 9 NAB 16
40-14
Technical
0445.1872 Directional control valve 1 D1 20
0.008.8048.4/
10 Radar 13 RADAR 18
0.009.2194.4/ Front axle suspension position

10 sensor 35 X64 15
0.010.2628.2 Rear PTO control solenoid valve PTO 2 SV 19
Gearbox in neutral locking

0.010.3343.0 solenoid valve LOCK SV 16
0.010.7172.4 Radar (UK) 14 RADAR 18
0.011.9428.0 Trailer braking pressure sensor 36 X68 14
0.011.9428.0 Trailer braking pressure sensor 36 X68 14
0.012.1725.0 Right-hand tweeter X30 12
0.012.1725.0 Left-hand tweeter X27 12
5-6-7-8-9-12-
0.012.5940.4 Sidelights switch 25 X24 13-14-15-16-
17-18-19
Version without
0.012.5941.4 Low/full beam headlights switch 21 X112 6 worklights on
arms
Version with
0.012.5943.4 Switch for worklights on arms 23 X111 8-9 worklights on
arms
0.012.5943.4 Front worklights switch 23 X22 8-9
0.012.5945.4 Rotating beacon on/off switch 37 X81 5-6 Manual air

conditioner
0.012.5946.4 Rear screen wiper switch 29 X86 10 Manual air

conditioner
0.012.5948.4/
10 AUTO PTO engagement switch 20 X15 19
0.012.5950.4/ Rear PTO engagement switch 19 X14 19

10
0.012.5951.4/ Front PTO engagement switch 27 X37 19

10
Manual air
0.012.5954.4 Rear worklights switch 31 X82 8-9 conditioner
0.012.7076.4 Shuttle control lever X63 16
0.013.1330.4 Hazard warning lights switch 24 X23 5-6
Manual air
0.013.2142.0 Right-hand recirculation motor X73 13 conditioner
0.013.2142.0 Left-hand recirculation motor X74 13 Manual air

conditioner
40-15
Technical
0.013.2161.0 Right-hand woofer X84 12 Manual air

conditioner
Manual air
0.013.2161.0 Left-hand woofer X76 12 conditioner
Manual air
0.013.7108.4 Rearview mirror demister switch X87 7 conditioner
0.013.8345.4/ Lift control console X47 18

20
0.013.8360.0 Windscreen washer pump X2 10
0.013.8360.0 Rear screen washer pump X1 10
Right-hand rearview mirror with Version with

0.014.2021.4 electric demisting X101 7 electric demisting
rearview mirrors
Version with
0.014.2022.4 Left-hand rearview mirror with X102 7 electric demisting
electric demisting rearview mirrors
0.014.3358.4 Armrest X11 21 control valves
version
0.014.3360.4 Armrest X11 21 control valves
version
0.014.3972.4 Lift draft sensor (right) R 18
0.014.3972.4 Lift draft sensor (left) L 18
0.014.4950.4 Gearbox control lever X45 -X46 16
0.014.5564.4 Driver's seat X7 7
0.900.0035.3 Right-hand fan motor X90 13 Manual air

conditioner
0.900.0035.4 Left-hand fan motor X88 13 Manual air

conditioner
0.900.0064.4 Trailer braking low pressure switch X70 14
0.900.0081.4 Steering angle sensor X55 17
0.900.0277.8 Field/road sensor X59 16
Trailer parking brake solenoid

0.900.0397.9 valve X69 14
2-3-4-5-6-7-
8-9-10-11-12-
0441.1512.4 Starter switch 28 X38 13-14-15-16-
17-18-19-20-
21
0441.9280.4 Transmission display X33 16
ISO4 socket (power supply to

0442.2323.4 implements) X9 18
0442.4165/10 Clutch pedal depressed proximity 22 X21 16

sensor
0442.9390/10 Accelerator pedal position sensor X16 4
40-16
Technical
0443.3422.4/20 Infocenter X17 - X18 3-5-6-7-11-

14-21
0443.8667.0 Rear lift position sensor 11 POS 18
2.6039.017.0 Rotating beacon X99 5-6
2.6039.020.0 Power socket X10 7
2.7059.823.0/
10 Fuel level sensor 34 X58 11
2.7099.770.0 Cigar lighter X25 7
2.7659.177.0/ RH rear PTO button (on mudguard) 12 PTO (RH) 19

20
2.7659.177.0/
20 LH rear PTO button (on mudguard) 12 PTO (LH) 19
2.7659.182.0 Rear lift Down Rx pushbutton 4 DW (RH) 18
2.7659.182.0 RH rear lift up button 4 UP (RH) 18
2.7659.182.0 LH rear lift down button 4 DW (LH) 18
2.7659.182.0 LH rear lift up button 4 UP (LH) 18
2.7659.255.0 Door open warning light switch 30 X83 7 Manual air

conditioner
2.8039.160.0 Front RH outer worklight C2 8-9
2.8039.160.0 Front LH outer worklight C1 8-9
2.8039.240.0 Right headlamp X62 5-6 For driving on the

right
For driving on the

2.8039.240.0 Left headlamp X61 5-6 right
2.8039.250.0 Right headlamp X62 5-6 For driving on the

left
2.8039.250.0 Left headlamp X61 5-6 For driving on the

left
RH direction indicator and

2.8039.270.0 sidelight X115 5-6 On arms
2.8039.280.0 LH direction indicator and sidelight X114 5-6 On arms

10 Right-hand front worklight on cab X103 9 electric demisting
rearview mirrors
Version without
2.8039.295.0/ Right-hand front worklight on cab X103 8 electric demisting
10 rearview mirrors

10 Right-hand front worklight on cab X105 9 electric demisting
rearview mirrors

10 Left-hand front worklight on cab X104 9 electric demisting
rearview mirrors
40-17
Technical

10 Left-hand front worklight on cab X104 8 electric demisting
rearview mirrors
Version with
2.8039.295.0/ Left-hand front worklight on cab X106 9 electric demisting
10 rearview mirrors
Version with
2.8039.295.0/ Right-hand rear worklight on cab X107 9 electric demisting
10 rearview mirrors

10 Right-hand rear worklight on cab X107 8 electric demisting
rearview mirrors
Version with
2.8039.295.0/ Right-hand rear worklight on cab X109 9 electric demisting
10 rearview mirrors

10 Left-hand rear worklight on cab X108 9 electric demisting
rearview mirrors

10 Left-hand rear worklight on cab X108 8 electric demisting
rearview mirrors
Version with
2.8039.295.0/ Left-hand rear worklight on cab X110 9 electric demisting
10 rearview mirrors
2.8039.296.0 Right-hand supplementary light X117 8-9 On arms
2.8039.296.0 Left-hand supplementary light X116 8-9 On arms
2.8059.500.0 RH rear direction indicator X65 (RH) 5-6-14
2.8059.500.0 RH rear sidelight and brake light X66 (RH) 5-6-14
2.8059.510.0 LH rear direction indicator X65 (LH) 5-6-14
2.8059.510.0 LH rear sidelight and brake light X66 (LH) 5-6-14
2.8059.526.0 Number plate light X71 - X72 5-6 Manual air

conditioner
2.8059.527.0 Right headlamp on arms G34 6 For driving on the

left with lift
For driving on the

2.8059.527.0 Left headlamp on arms G32 6 left with lift
2.8059.528.0 Right headlamp on arms G34 6 For driving on the

right with lift
2.8059.528.0 Left headlamp on arms G32 6 For driving on the

right with lift
Manual air
2.8339.074.0 Courtesy light X85 7 conditioner
2.8339.231.0 Interior roof light X75 7 Manual air

conditioner
2.8519.028.0/ Transmission control unit GEARBOX 2-7-16-21

10
40-18
Technical
2.8519.038.0/ HLHP1 - 7-13-14-15-

30 HLHP Control unit HLHP2 16-17-18-19-
20-21
2.8639.007.0/
10 Hazard lights control unit X43 5-6
Manual air
2.9019.190.0 Rear screen wiper motor X91 10 conditioner
2.9019.200.0/ Windscreen wiper motor X100 10

10
40-19
2. INDEXES 2.3 INDEX BY CONNECTOR
2.3 INDEX BY CONNECTOR
Connection
wiring or
Connector Wiring code component part Component description Notes
number
+30A 0.013.9301.4/50 Battery
+30B 0.014.3658.4/10 Battery
0.014.1563.4/10
+30C 0.014.1564.4 Starter motor
0.014.5132.4/10
+30 0.014.5132.4/10 Battery
+50 0.013.9308.4/70 Starter motor
18 BAR 0.013.9307.4/70 0443.1690 Transmission oil low pressure switch
A 0.013.9307.4/70 0.013.9308.4/70
AS4 0.014.0007.4 0.014.3649.4/40
B1 0421.3172 Not utilised
B6 0421.3753 Not utilised
0421.3172
B37 0421.3182 0419.9809 Fuel temperature sensor
0421.3753
0421.3172
B40 0421.3182 0419.9792 Camshaft speed sensor
0421.3753
0421.3172
B43 0421.3182 0419.9809 Engine coolant temperature sensor
0421.3753
0421.3172
B48 0421.3182 0419.4078 Engine turbo pressure sensor
0421.3753
0.014.1563.4/10
B+ 0118.2173 Alternator
0.014.1564.4
C1 0.013.4085.4/20 2.8039.160.0 Front LH outer worklight
C2 0.013.4085.4/20 2.8039.160.0 Front RH outer worklight
D1 0.013.2588.4/10 0445.1872 Directional control valve 1
D+ 0.013.9308.4/70 0118.2173 Alternator
40-20
Connection
wiring or
number
D1-D2 0.013.9308.4/70 0.013.2588.4/10
D3-D4 0.013.9307.4/70 0.013.2588.4/10
DW (RH) 0.013.9309.4/30 2.7659.182.0 Rear lift Down Rx pushbutton
DW (LH) 0.013.9309.4/30 2.7659.182.0 LH rear lift down button
DW 0.013.9327.4/40 Front axle suspension 'Down' solenoid valve
DIFF SV 0.013.9307.4/70 0442.3824 Differential lock control solenoid valve
4WD SV 0.013.9307.4/70 0443.1661 4WD control solenoid valve
DW SV 0.013.9308.4/70 Lift Down solenoid valve
F SV 0.013.9308.4/70 0443.1661 "FIELD" mode solenoid valve
LOCK SV 0.013.9307.4/70 0.010.3343.0 Gearbox in neutral locking solenoid valve
P SV 0.013.9307.4/70 0443.4425 Main clutch proportional solenoid valve
PTO 1 SV 0.013.9307.4/70 Front PTO engagement solenoid valve
PTO 2 SV 0.013.9307.4/70 0.010.2628.2 Rear PTO control solenoid valve
R SV 0.013.9308.4/70 0443.1661 "ROAD" mode solenoid valve
UP SV 0.013.9308.4/70 Lift Up solenoid valve
0421.3172
F30 0421.3182 Not utilised
0421.3753
G1 0.013.9301.4/50 0.014.3649.4/40
G2 0.013.9301.4/50 0.014.3649.4/40
G3 0.013.9301.4/50 0.014.3649.4/40
G4 0.013.9301.4/50 0.014.3649.4/40
G5 0.013.9301.4/50 0.014.3649.4/40
G6 0.013.9301.4/50 0.014.3650.4/10
G7 0.013.9301.4/50 0.013.9304.4/40
G8 0.013.9301.4/50 0.013.9304.4/40
G9 0.014.3649.4/40 Not utilised
G10 0.013.9307.4/70 Not utilised
Version with
G11 0.014.1874.4/20 worklights on arms
0.014.3649.4/40
G11 0.014.1875.4/10 Version without
worklights on arms
G12 0.013.9304.4/40 0.014.1567.4/10 Manual air

conditioner
G13 0.013.9308.4/70 0.013.9327.4/40
G14 0.014.3649.4/40 0.013.9309.4/30
40-21
Connection
wiring or
number
G15 0.014.3649.4/40 0.013.9309.4/30
Must be
G16 0.013.9301.4/50 Wiring connector disconnected
G17 0.013.9301.4/50 0.013.9309.4/30
G18 0.013.9301.4/50 0.013.9309.4/30
G19 0.013.9308.4/70 0.013.0663.4/30
0421.3172
G20 0.014.3650.4/10 0421.3182
0421.3753
0.013.9310.4/20 Manual air

conditioner
G21 0.013.9304.4/40
Version with electric
0.014.1565.4/10 demisting rearview
mirrors
Manual air
0.013.9310.4/20 conditioner
G22 0.013.9304.4/40
mirrors
G23 0.013.9304.4/40 0.013.9310.4/20 Manual air

conditioner
Manual air
0.013.9310.4/20 conditioner
G24 0.013.9304.4/40
mirrors
0.013.9310.4/20 Manual air

conditioner
G25 0.013.9304.4/40
mirrors
G26 0.013.9304.4/40 0.013.9310.4/20 Manual air

conditioner
G27 0.013.9304.4/40 0.011.3824.4 Manual air

conditioner
G28 0.013.0663.4/30 0.013.4085.4/20
G29 0.013.0663.4/30 0.013.4085.4/20
G30 0.013.9301.4/50 Not utilised
Manual air
G31 0.013.9304.4/40 conditioner
0.014.0732.4/10
G32 0.014.0002.4 2.8059.528.0
For driving on the

2.8059.527.0 Left headlamp on arms right with lift
40-22
Connection
wiring or
number
G33 0.014.3649.4/40 0.014.0732.4/10
0.014.0732.4/10
For driving on the

G34 0.014.0002.4 2.8059.528.0 Right headlamp on arms right with lift
2.8059.527.0 Right headlamp on arms For driving on the left

with lift
G35 0.014.3649.4/40 0.014.0732.4/10
G36 0.014.3649.4/40 0.014.0732.4/10
G37 0.014.3649.4/40 0.014.0732.4/10
Must be
G38 0.013.9301.4/50 Wiring connector disconnected
GAS 0.013.9301.4/50 Hand throttle position sensor (not utilised)
GEARBOX 0.013.9301.4/50 2.8519.028.0/10 Transmission control unit
GEAR TEMP 0.013.9307.4/70 0441.6649 Transmission oil temperature sensor
HLHP1 0.013.9301.4/50 2.8519.038.0/30 HLHP Control unit
HLHP2 0.013.9301.4/50 2.8519.038.0/30 HLHP Control unit
HOLD 0.013.9301.4/50 HOLD" button (not utilised)
L 0.013.9307.4/70 0.014.3972.4 Lift draft sensor (left)
MS1 0.013.9301.4/50 0.013.9308.4/70
MX1 0.013.9301.4/50 0421.3098 Engine control unit
MX2 0.013.9301.4/50 0421.3098 Engine control unit
NAB 0.013.9307.4/70 0443.8450 Wheel speed sensor
NHK 0.013.9307.4/70 0443.4551 Clutch speed sensor
NLSA 0.013.9307.4/70 0443.8449 Gearbox output shaft speed sensor
NLSE 0.013.9307.4/70 0443.4551 Gearbox input shaft speed sensor
OIL TEMP 0.013.9307.4/70 Not utilised
POS 0.013.9307.4/70 0443.8667.0 Rear lift position sensor
PTO (RH) 0.013.9309.4/30 2.7659.177.0/20 RH rear PTO button (on mudguard)
PTO (LH) 0.013.9309.4/30 2.7659.177.0/20 LH rear PTO button (on mudguard)
PTO 0.013.9308.4/70 0443.8352 Rear PTO speed sensor
R 0.013.9307.4/70 0.014.3972.4 Lift draft sensor (right)
RADAR 0.013.9307.4/70 0.008.8048.4/10 Radar
RADAR 0.013.9307.4/70 0.010.7172.4 Radar (UK)
S 0.013.9307.4/70 0441.6066 Start enable switch (Green)
STOLL 0.013.9301.4/50 Not utilised
T 0.013.0663.4/30 Not utilised
40-23
Connection
wiring or
number
TK2 0.013.9301.4/50 0.013.9307.4/70
0443.7355.4/10
Not utilised 0.013.9308.4/70
0443.7356.4
UP (RH) 0.013.9309.4/30 2.7659.182.0 RH rear lift up button
UP (LH) 0.013.9309.4/30 2.7659.182.0 LH rear lift up button
UP 0.013.9327.4/40 Front axle up control solenoid valve
X1 0.013.9301.4/50 0.013.8360.0 Rear screen washer pump
X2 0.013.9301.4/50 0.013.8360.0 Windscreen washer pump
X3 0.013.9301.4/50 Supplementary CANBUS socket
X4 0.013.9301.4/50 Diagnostic socket
X5 0.013.9301.4/50 0443.6527 Creeper engagement sensor
X6 0.013.9301.4/50 Not utilised
X7 0.013.9301.4/50 0.014.5564.4 Driver's seat
X8 0.013.9301.4/50 0439.1395 Handbrake switch
X9 0.013.9301.4/50 0442.2323.4 ISO4 socket (power supply to implements)
X10 0.013.9301.4/50 2.6039.020.0 Power socket
4 directional control
0.014.3360.4 Armrest valves version
X11 0.013.9301.4/50
0.014.3358.4 Armrest 2 directional control
valves version
X12 0.014.3649.4/40 0442.5709 Compressed air gauge
X13 0.014.3649.4/40 0442.5709 Compressed air gauge
X14 0.014.3649.4/40 0.012.5950.4/10 Rear PTO engagement switch
X15 0.014.3649.4/40 0.012.5948.4/10 AUTO PTO engagement switch
X16 0.014.3649.4/40 0442.9390/10 Accelerator pedal position sensor
X17 0.014.3649.4/40 0443.3422.4/20 Infocenter
X18 0.014.3649.4/40 0443.3422.4/20 Infocenter
X19 0.014.3649.4/40 Not utilised
X20 0.014.3649.4/40 Power lift control switch (not utilised)
X21 0.014.3649.4/40 0442.4165/10 Clutch pedal depressed proximity sensor
X22 0.014.3649.4/40 0.012.5943.4 Front worklights switch
X23 0.014.3649.4/40 0.013.1330.4 Hazard warning lights switch
X24 0.014.3649.4/40 0.012.5940.4 Sidelights switch
X25 0.014.3649.4/40 2.7099.770.0 Cigar lighter
X26 0.014.3649.4/40 0443.2708 Clutch pedal position sensor
40-24
Connection
wiring or
number
X27 0.014.3649.4/40 0.012.1725.0 Left-hand tweeter
X28 0.013.9301.4/50 Not utilised
X30 0.014.3649.4/40 0.012.1725.0 Right-hand tweeter
X33 0.014.3649.4/40 0441.9280.4 Transmission display
X34 0.014.3649.4/40 0439.1395 Left brake pedal switch
X35 0.014.3649.4/40 0439.1395 Right brake pedal switch
X36 0.014.3649.4/40 Not utilised
X37 0.014.3649.4/40 0.012.5951.4/10 Front PTO engagement switch
X38 0.014.3649.4/40 0441.1512.4 Starter switch
X39 0.014.3649.4/40 ASM switch (not utilised)
X40 0.014.3649.4/40 Differential lock control switch (not utilised)
X41 0.014.3649.4/40 4WD engagement switch (not utilised)
X42 0.014.3649.4/40 Front axle suspensions switch (not utilised)
X43 0.014.3649.4/40 2.8639.007.0/10 Hazard lights control unit
X45 0.014.3649.4/40 0.014.4950.4 Gearbox control lever
X46 0.014.3649.4/40 0.014.4950.4 Gearbox control lever
X47 0.014.3649.4/40 0.013.8345.4/20 Lift control console
X48 0.014.3649.4/40 Lift lock control switch (not utilised)
X49 0.013.9307.4/70 Air cleaner clogged sensor
X50 0.013.9307.4/70 0118.2227 Engine oil pressure switch
X51 0.013.9307.4/70 Steering system pressure switch
X52 0.013.9307.4/70 0441.6685 Gear change solenoid valves (Y1, Y2, Y3, Y4)
X53 0.013.9308.4/70 Trailer socket
X54 0.013.9308.4/70 Air conditioning pressure switch
X55 0.013.9308.4/70 0.900.0081.4 Steering angle sensor
X56 0.013.9308.4/70 0443.7338 Air conditioning compressor
X57 0.013.9308.4/70 Brake fluid level sensor
X58 0.013.9308.4/70 2.7059.823.0/10 Fuel level sensor
X59 0.013.9308.4/70 0.900.0277.8 Field/road sensor
X60 0.013.0663.4/30 Horn
2.8039.240.0 Left headlamp For driving on the

right
X61 0.013.0663.4/30
2.8039.250.0 Left headlamp For driving on the left
40-25
Connection
wiring or
number
2.8039.240.0 Right headlamp For driving on the

right
X62 0.013.0663.4/30
2.8039.250.0 Right headlamp For driving on the left
X63 0.014.0007.4 0.012.7076.4 Shuttle control lever
X64 0.013.9327.4/40 0.009.2194.4/10 Front axle suspension position sensor
X65 (RH) 0.013.9309.4/30 2.8059.500.0 RH rear direction indicator
X65 (LH) 0.013.9309.4/30 2.8059.510.0 LH rear direction indicator
X66 (RH) 0.013.9309.4/30 2.8059.500.0 RH rear sidelight and brake light
X66 (LH) 0.013.9309.4/30 2.8059.510.0 LH rear sidelight and brake light
0.014.1563.4/10
X67 0428.4880 Preheating device
0.014.1564.4
0443.7355.4/10
X68 0.011.9428.0 Trailer braking pressure sensor
0443.7356.4
X69 0443.7356.4 0.900.0397.9 Trailer parking brake solenoid valve
X70 0443.7356.4 0.900.0064.4 Trailer braking low pressure switch
X71 0.013.9304.4/40 2.8059.526.0 Number plate light Manual air

conditioner
X72 0.013.9304.4/40 2.8059.526.0 Number plate light Manual air

conditioner
Manual air
X73 0.013.9304.4/40 0.013.2142.0 Right-hand recirculation motor conditioner
X74 0.013.9304.4/40 0.013.2142.0 Left-hand recirculation motor Manual air

conditioner
X75 0.013.9304.4/40 2.8339.231.0 Interior roof light Manual air

conditioner
Manual air
X76 0.013.9304.4/40 0.013.2161.0 Left-hand woofer conditioner
X77 0.013.9304.4/40 Fan speed selector switch Manual air

conditioner
X78 0.013.9304.4/40 Manual air conditioner control panel lights Manual air
conditioner
Manual air
X79 0.013.9304.4/40 Recirculation switch conditioner
X80 0.013.9304.4/40 Fan speed selector switch Manual air

conditioner
X81 0.013.9304.4/40 0.012.5945.4 Rotating beacon on/off switch Manual air

conditioner
Manual air
X82 0.013.9304.4/40 0.012.5954.4 Rear worklights switch conditioner
X83 0.013.9304.4/40 2.7659.255.0 Door open warning light switch Manual air
conditioner
40-26
Connection
wiring or
number
X84 0.013.9304.4/40 0.013.2161.0 Right-hand woofer Manual air

conditioner
Manual air
X85 0.013.9304.4/40 2.8339.074.0 Courtesy light conditioner
Manual air
X86 0.013.9304.4/40 0.012.5946.4 Rear screen wiper switch conditioner
X87 0.013.9304.4/40 0.013.7108.4 Rearview mirror demister switch Manual air

conditioner
Manual air
X88 0.013.9304.4/40 0.900.0035.4 Left-hand fan motor conditioner
X90 0.013.9304.4/40 0.900.0035.3 Right-hand fan motor Manual air

conditioner
X91 0.013.9304.4/40 2.9019.190.0 Rear screen wiper motor Manual air

conditioner
Manual air
X92 0.013.9304.4/40 Radio conditioner
X99 0.011.3824.4 2.6039.017.0 Rotating beacon
X100 0.014.1567.4/10 2.9019.200.0/10 Windscreen wiper motor

X101 0.013.9310.4/20 0.014.2021.4 Right-hand rearview mirror with electric demisting rearview
demisting mirrors
Left-hand rearview mirror with electric Version with electric

X102 0.013.9310.4/20 0.014.2022.4 demisting demisting rearview
mirrors

mirrors
X103 2.8039.295.0/10 Right-hand front worklight on cab
Version without
0.014.1565.4/10 electric demisting
rearview mirrors

mirrors
X104 2.8039.295.0/10 Left-hand front worklight on cab
Version without
rearview mirrors

X105 0.013.9310.4/20 2.8039.295.0/10 Right-hand front worklight on cab demisting rearview
mirrors

X106 0.013.9310.4/20 2.8039.295.0/10 Left-hand front worklight on cab demisting rearview
mirrors

mirrors
X107 2.8039.295.0/10 Right-hand rear worklight on cab
Version without
rearview mirrors
40-27
Connection
wiring or
number

mirrors
X108 2.8039.295.0/10 Left-hand rear worklight on cab
Version without
rearview mirrors

X109 0.013.9310.4/20 2.8039.295.0/10 Right-hand rear worklight on cab demisting rearview
mirrors

X110 0.013.9310.4/20 2.8039.295.0/10 Left-hand rear worklight on cab demisting rearview
mirrors
Version with
X111 0.014.1874.4/20 0.012.5943.4 Switch for worklights on arms worklights on arms
X112 0.014.1875.4/10 0.012.5941.4 Low/full beam headlights switch Version without

worklights on arms
X114 0.014.0732.4/10 2.8039.280.0 LH direction indicator and sidelight On arms
X115 0.014.0732.4/10 2.8039.270.0 RH direction indicator and sidelight On arms
X116 0.014.0002.4 2.8039.296.0 Left-hand supplementary light On arms
X117 0.014.0002.4 2.8039.296.0 Right-hand supplementary light On arms
0421.3172
Y3 0421.3182 0211.2588 Actuator
0421.3753
40-28
3. COMPONENTS 3.1 COMPONENT TECHNICAL DATA
3. COMPONENTS
3.1 COMPONENT TECHNICAL DATA
No Description Code Characteristics Connector
1 Transmission oil low 0443.1690 Normally open contact (NO) 18 BAR

pressure switch Switching pressure: 18 bar
Fuel temperature B37

sensor
2 0419.9809 Resistance at 21.5 °C: ~2.3 kOhm
Engine coolant B43
temperature sensor
Camshaft speed Resistor: 310 Ohm

3 sensor 0419.9792 Inductance: 140mH B40
Peak voltage: 40mV
DW (RH) / DW
4 Lift up/down 2.7659.182.0 Normally open contact (NO) (LH) / UP (RH) /
pushbutton UP (LH)
"FIELD" mode
solenoid valve F SV
"ROAD" mode Pin1 = earth

5 solenoid valve 0443.1661 Pin2 = power R SV
Resistance between pin1 and pin 2: 10 Ohm
4WD control 4WD SV

solenoid valve
Measured across pin 3 and pin 4: ~ 25 Ohm

6 Actuator 0211.2588 Measured across pin 3 and pin 5: ~ 25 Ohm Y3
Measured across pin 1 and pin 2: ~ 1.3 Ohm
Main clutch Pin1 = earth

7 proportional 0443.4425 Pin2 = power P SV
solenoid valve Resistance between pin1 and pin 2: approx. 5 Ohm
Resistance between pin 1 and pin 2:

Transmission oil at 25°C 1000 ±15 Ohm
8 temperature sensor 0441.6649 at 100°C 1696 ±35 Ohm GEAR TEMP
at 150°C 2211 ±80 Ohm
Pin1 = earth
Pin2 = square wave signal
9 Wheel speed sensor 0443.8450 Pin3 = 12V power NAB
High level: 3.5-4.3 V
Low level: 0.6-1.2 V
Pin1 = earth
Gearbox output Pin2 = square wave signal
10 shaft speed sensor 0443.8449 Pin3 = 12V power NLSA
(nLsa) High level: 3.5-4.3 V
Low level: 0.6-1.2 V
Pin1 = earth
Pin2 = 5.0Vdc power supply
Pin3 = analog signal
11 Rear lift position 0443.8667.0 0.6 Vdc output POS
sensor (Lift links fully raised)
4.5 Vdc output
(Lift links fully lowered)
40-29
12 Rear PTO button (on 2.7659.177.0/20 Resistance between Pin1 and Pin2 with button pressed: 3.9 RH PTO / LH
mudguard) Ohm PTO
Pin 1 = earth
Pin 2 = pulse signal (130 pulses/metre)
Pin 3 = 12 V power
13 Radar (Italy) 0.008.8048.4/10 With the radar powered on, the voltage at pin 2 should change RADAR
when a hand is passed in front of the sensor
Radar nominal frequency: 24125 GHz ± 25 MHz
Pin 1 = earth
Pin 2 = pulse signal (130 pulses/metre)
Pin 3 = 12 V power
14 Radar (UK) 0.010.7172.4 With the radar powered on, the voltage at pin 2 should change RADAR
when a hand is passed in front of the sensor
Radar nominal frequency: 24300 GHz ± 25 MHz
Normally closed switch (NC) resistance with contact closed 3.9

15 Start enable switch 0441.6066 Ohm S
Colour: Green
Creeper Normally closed switch (NC)

16 engagement sensor 0443.6527 resistance with contact closed 3.9 Ohm X5
Across Pin 1 and Pin 2:

17 Lights switch 0439.1395 Normally closed contact (NC) X8/ X34/ X35
Across Pin 3 and Pin 4:
Normally open contact (NO)
Compressed air Pin G = input from sensor

18 gauge 0442.5709 Pin + = 12V power X12/ X13
Pin - = earth
&" ( ’ 2 1 &
&& £ )
19 Rear PTO 0.012.5950.4/10 X14

engagement switch
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Pos
40-30
&" ( ’ 2 1 &
&& £ )
AUTO PTO
20 engagement switch 0.012.5948.4/10 X15
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Pos
&" ( ’ 2 1 &
&& £ )
Low/full beam
21 headlights switch 0.012.5941.4 X112
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Pos
Pin1 = earth
Clutch pedal Pin2 = analog signal:
22 depressed proximity 0442.4165/10 0 Volt with sensor covered by metal X21
sensor 12 Vdc with sensor exposed
Pin3 = 12V power
40-31
0
1
2
Front worklights X22
switch
&" ( ’ 2 1 &
&& £ )
23 0.012.5943.4
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Pos
Switch for 0
worklights on arms X111
1
&" ( ’ 2 1 &
&& £ )
Hazard warning
24 lights switch 0.013.1330.4 X23
Pin 1 2 4 6 7 8 10 12
Pos
0
1
2
&" ( ’ 2 1 &
&& £ )
25 Sidelights switch 0.012.5940.4 X24
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Pos
40-32
Pin1 = 5.0Vdc power

Pin2 = earth
Clutch pedal Pin4 = analog signal
26 position sensor 0443.2708 Output 0.5V DC X26
(Pedal fully released)
4.5 Vdc output
(Pedal fully depressed)
&" ( ’ 2 1 &
&& £ )
27 Front PTO 0.012.5951.4/10 X37

engagement switch
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Pos
83
50
30
86s
75 15
28 Starter switch 0441.1512.4 X38

Pin 30 15 50 75 83
Pos
40-33
0
1
2
&" ( ’ 2 1 &
&& £ )
Rear screen wiper

41 switch 0.012.5946.4 X86
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Pos
Door open warning

30 light switch 2.7659.255.0 Normally closed contact (NC) X83
&" ( ’ 2 1 &
&& £ )
Rear worklights
31 switch 0.012.5954.4 X82
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Pos
Engine oil pressure Normally closed contact (NC)

32 switch 0118.2227 Switching pressure: 0.5 ± 0.2 bar at 90 ± 5 °C X50
Solenoid valves Y1, Pin1 = earth

33 Y2 and Y5 0441.6685 Pin2 = power X52
Resistance between pin1 and pin 2: 28 ± 2 Ohm
Resistance between pin 1 and pin 2:

34 Fuel level sensor 2.7059.823.0/10 with tank full 175-195 Ohm X58
with tank half full 85-96 Ohm
with tank empty 4-7 Ohm
Pin1 = earth
Pin2 = Output signal
Front axle Pin3 = 10Vdc power
35 suspension position 0.009.2194.4 Output 0.2Vdc (sensor released) X64
sensor Output 8.3Vdc (sensor fully pressed)
Check the supply voltage
Trailer braking 12 Vdc power

36 pressure sensor 0.011.9428.0 Resistance at 0 bar 10-13 Ohm X68
Resistance at 6 bar 119-129 Ohm
40-34
&" ( ’ 2 1 &
&& £ )
Rotating beacon on/

37 off switch 0.012.5945.4 X81
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Pos
40-35
3. COMPONENTS 3.2 PINOUTS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS
3.2 PINOUTS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS
3.2.1 ENGINE CONTROL UNIT (0421.3098)

CONNECTOR MX1
1 13
14 25
Grub
screw Volts Abbreviation Description
1 Not utilised
2 Not utilised
3 Power (-) for preheating relay
4 Not utilised
5 Analog input, fuel temperature sensor
6 Not utilised
7 Not utilised
8 0V GND Reference voltage for signal on pins 5 and 9
9 Analog input, coolant temperature sensor
10 Not utilised
11 Not utilised
12 0V GND Reference voltage for signal on pin 13
13 Digital input, speed 1 (camshaft)
14 STG- PWM output, actuator electromagnet signal
15 STG+ PWM output, actuator electromagnet signal
16 Shielding of control rack position sensor (for pins 17, 18 and 19)
17 RF- Common connection for measurement and reference coils
18 RF REF Analog input, reference coil signal
19 RF MESS Analog input, measurement signal from measurement coil
20 Not utilised
21 Not utilised
22 Not utilised
23 0V GND Reference voltage for signal on pin 24
24 Analog input, turbo charge pressure sensor signal
25 +5V +5V LDA 5V reference voltage for signal on pin 24
40-36
CONNECTOR MX2
1 13
14 25
Pin Volts Abbreviation Description

1 0V 31 Battery negative
2 0V 31 Battery negative
3 Digital output, preheating indicator lamp control
4 Not utilised
5 Not utilised
6 Digital input, creeper engaged signal
7 Not utilised
8 Not utilised
9 Not utilised
10 L ISO 9141 serial interface (Diagnostics connector)
11 K ISO 9141 serial interface (Diagnostics connector)
12 CAN_H CAN_H
13 CAN_L CAN_L
14 +12V +15 Battery positive (15+)
15 Not utilised
16 Not utilised
17 Reference voltage for signal on pin 18
18 Digital input, HOLD button signal
19 Not utilised
20 Analog input, hand throttle sensor signal
21 Not utilised
22 Not utilised
23 0V GND Reference voltage for signal on pins 20 and 24
24 Analog input, signal from accelerator pedal sensor (SWG)
25 +5V +5V REF 5V reference voltage for signal on pins 20 and 24
40-37
3.2.2 TRANSMISSION CONTROL UNIT (2.8519.028.0)
GEARBOX CONNECTOR
2 22
45
24
68
46

1 0V VM1 Battery negative
2 0V VM2 Battery negative
3 0V VMG1 Reference voltage for signal on pins 16, 17, 40 and 62
4 0V VMG2 Reference voltage for signal on pin 44
5 ADM4 Not utilised
6 Not utilised
7 Not utilised
8 VPS2 Power (+) common, solenoid valves Y2, Y4, Y5, Y6
9 Not utilised
10 AIP2 Power, solenoid valve Y7
11 ADM6 Power, solenoid valve Y4
12 VPS1 Power common, solenoid valves Y1 and Y3
13 +12V VPS1 Power, proportional solenoid valve
14 SD1 Display control signal
15 SDDK Diagnostics connector
16 EF5 Digital input, main clutch rpm sensor (nAb)
17 EF7 Digital input, input rpm sensor (nLse)
18 EVPR Analog input, FIELD/ROAD position sensor signal
19 Not utilised
20 ED3 Analog input, reverse drive control signal
21 Not utilised
22 ED7 Digital signal, range downshift pushbutton
23 VPE1 Battery positive (30+)
24 VMGA2 Reference voltage (-) for signal on pins 38, 39 and 49
25 CANH CAN H
26 CANL CAN L
27 CANRES CAN RES
28 Not utilised
29 ED11 Digital input, low transmission oil pressure signal
30 Digital input, FIELD/ROAD mode control signal
40-38

31 EDM1 Signal, mechanical gearbox neutral
33 Not utilised
34 Not utilised
35 Not utilised
36 Not utilised
37 AU Reference voltage (+) for signal on pins 18 and 38
38 EU1 Analog input, angular position of clutch pedal sensor signal
39 ER1 Analog input, temperature sensor signal
40 EF6 Digital input, output rpm sensor (nLsa)
41 Not utilised
42 Not utilised
43 Not utilised
44 ED8 Digital input, clutch pedal full travel sensor
45 VPI Battery positive (15+)
46 Not utilised
47 Not utilised
48 Not utilised
49 ER2 Digital input, clutch comfort button
51 Not utilised
52 Not utilised
53 Not utilised
54 Not utilised
56 0V AIP1 Power (-), proportional solenoid valve
57 ADM5 Power, solenoid valve Y2
58 Not utilised
59 Not utilised
60 Not utilised
61 Not utilised
62 EF4 Digital input, rpm sensor (NAB)
63 ED1 Analog input, forward drive control signal
64 Not utilised
65 ED2 Analog input, neutral control signal
66 ED9 Battery positive (15+)
67 ED6 Digital signal - range upshift pushbutton
68 +12V VPE2 Battery positive (30+)
40-39
3.2.3 HLHP CONTROL UNIT (P/N 2.8519.027.0/10)
HLHP1 CONNECTOR
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

1 12V Battery positive (30+)
2 0V Battery negative
3 Not utilised
4 Power, 6-way solenoid valve
5 Power, lift stop LED
6 Not utilised
7 Digital input, radar
8 Input, rear PTO speed sensor
9 Not utilised
10 Not utilised
11 Digital input, lift up buttons (on mudguards)
12 Reference voltage (-) for pins 51, 62, 71, 75, 77
13 Not utilised
15 Not utilised
16 Digital input, lift down button (in cab)
17 Power, lift up LED
18 Digital input, AUTO PTO button
19 Not utilised
20 Not utilised
21 Not utilised
22 Digital input, lift down buttons (on mudguards)
23 Digital input, RH brake pedal
25 Not utilised
26 Not utilised
28 0V Battery negative
29 Power (-) to lift up solenoid valve
30 Not utilised
31 Not utilised
32 Not utilised
33 Power to front axle suspension down solenoid valve
40-40
34 Power to four-wheel drive engagement solenoid valve

35 Not utilised
36 Power to rear PTO solenoid valve
37 Not utilised
38 Digital input, braking signal
39 CAN_L
40 CAN_H
42 Power (-) to lift down solenoid valve
43 Power to differential lock solenoid valve
44 Power to front PTO solenoid valve
45 Not utilised
46 Not utilised
47 Power to front axle suspension up solenoid valve
48 Not utilised
49 Digital input, LH brake pedal
50 ISO 9141 K serial interface
51 Reference voltage (+8V) for pins 70, 71, 77
52 Not utilised
40-41
HLHP2 CONNECTOR
74 75 76 77 78 79 80
67 68 69 70 71 72 73
60 61 62 63 64 65 66
53 54 55 56 57 58 59
Pin Voltage Abbreviation Description

53 Not utilised
54 Digital input, alternator D+ signal (engine running)
55 Not utilised
56 Not utilised
57 Analog input, external lift sensor
58 Digital input, rear PTO button (in cab)
59 Not utilised
60 Digital input, rear PTO buttons (on mudguards)
61 Not utilised
62 Analog input, rear lift position sensor
63 Not utilised
64 Not utilised
65 Digital input, front PTO button
66 Not utilised
67 Reference voltage (+5V) for pins 55, 56, 62, 64, 69, 75, 76
68 Not utilised
69 Not utilised
70 Analog input, LH draft sensor
71 Analog input, front axle suspension position sensor
72 Power (+) to lift up solenoid valve
73 Not utilised
74 Not utilised
75 Analog input, steering angle sensor
76 Not utilised
77 Analog input, RH draft sensor
78 Power (+) to lift down solenoid valve
40-42
3.2.4 INFOCENTER
X17 6 12 X18
13 26
1 7 1 14
CONNECTOR X17
1 Not utilised
2 KL 49 KL 49
3 RA Relay-output, 9A current carrying capacity
4 Not utilised
5 KL 49A Connected voltage of turn signal relay
6 KL49 A Connected voltage of turn signal relay
7 LA Relay-output, 9A current carrying capacity
8 LA Relay-output, 9A current carrying capacity
9 KL49 B Lamp output, 12V 1.5W
12 RA Relay-output, 9A current carrying capacity
CONNECTOR X18
Pin Voltage Abbreviation Description
1 BLINK2 2nd trailer flasher indicator light
2 BLINK1 1st trailer flasher indicator light
3 BL_IN_LI Input, LH turn signal
4 BL_IN_RE Input, RH turn signal
5 0V KL31 Battery negative
6 +12V KL 58 +58 lights
7 LADEK Battery charge indicator light
8 LUFTF Air cleaner clogged
9 ÖLDRUCK Engine oil pressure warning light
10 TRAILER Input, trailer braking indicator light
11 CAN_RES CAN_RES
12 +12V KL15 Battery positive (15+)
13 TANK Input, fuel level sensor
14 CAN_H CAN_H
15 CAN_L CAN_L
16 FERNL Main beam indicator light
40-43
17 HYDR Not utilised

18 HANDBR Handbrake on warning light
19 VORGL Glowplugs test
20 RXD Diagnostic interface reception
21 +12V KL30 Battery positive (30+)
22 TXD Diagnostics interface transmission
23 ESCERA Input to ESC button
24 RETMEN Input to RET button
25 MEN+ Input to M+ button
26 MEN- Input to M- button-
40-44
4. SYSTEMS 4.1 EARTHING POINTS
4. SYSTEMS
4.1 EARTHING POINTS
GND5
GND4
F0104120 F0103920
GND3
GND4
F0101380
F0104190
F0104081
GND2
GND1
F0114610 F0114620
40-45
4. SYSTEMS
4.2 STARTING
1 3
2 4
START CONSENT
2 1 0
CREEPER
- VCC
- VCC
GND
GND
+15
+15
+15
+30
+30
6 1 2 14 87a 87 85 86 30 2 1 31 45 66 68 23 30 X 15 50
MX2 RL9 GEAR X38
0.013.9301.4
0.014.3649.4
BOX
G4
16
17
FRL9
F16B
F15B
FX38
F5C
7.5A
7.5A
7.5A
30A
30A
X5
1
8 2
G5
2
1
FU1
GND4
125A
GND2
TK2 1
31 2 5
S
MS1 +30A
30 31
0.013.9307.4
+30C +30
D+
0.014.5132.4
+30C
7
B+
+ -
+50 +30C BATTERY
0.014.1563.4 0.013.9308.4
0.014.1564.4 M
D0034100 6
1 Engine control unit

2 Engine starter relay
3 Transmission control unit
4 Starter switch
5 Start enabling switch (Green)
6 Starter motor
7 Alternator
8 Creeper engagement sensor
40-46
4. SYSTEMS 4.3 PREHEATING
4.3 PREHEATING
6
1 2 3 4 5
COLD START RELAY

(M3)
2 1 0
H.D.COMAND
COLD START
0.013.9307.4
GND
GND
+15
+30
+15
-31
5 12 19 21 30 X 15 50 87a 87 85 86 30 87a 87 85 86 30 30 86 85 NC NO 3 14 2 1 3
X18 X38 RL4 RL3 RLM1 MX1 MX2
0.014.3649.4
TK2 RL42 RL42

30 1 1
18 2 2
F16A
F15B
7.5A
F9A
7
3A
3A
G4 RL42B RL42B
16
17
10 RL42A
8
20
1 8
FX38
F5C
7.5A
30A
X67
G5 0.014.1563.4
1 0.014.1564.4
FU2 RL42A
125A
FU1
125A
GND3 GND4 +30A +30B

0.013.9301.4 0.014.3658.4
D0034200
+30 GND1
BATTERY
1 Infocenter
2 Starter switch
3 Ignition controlled power supplies relay
5 Preheating relay
7 Preheating relay
8 Preheating device
40-47
4. SYSTEMS
4.4 ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROL
CHARGE AIR PRESSURE SIGNAL (M24)
CHARGE AIR PRESSURE GND (M23)

CHARGE AIR PRESSURE +5V (M25)
WATER TEMPERATURE (M8) GND
WATER TEMPERATURE (M9)

1 2 3
SIGNAL PEDAL GAS
HAND GAS SIGNAL
ATTUATOR (M18)
ATTUATOR (M19)
ATTUATOR (M17)
ATTUATOR (M15)
ATTUATOR (M14)
FUEL TEMP (M5)
0421.3182
PICK-UP+ (M13)
2 1 0
PICK-UP- (M12)
GND SCREEN
GND COM 24
0421.3172
GND COM
+5V 24
HOLD
0.013.9301.4 0.014.3650.4
GND
GND
0421.3753
+15
30 X 15 50 87a 87 85 86 30 87a 87 85 86 30 1 2 25 23 24 14 17 18 20 16 24 25 23 5 8 9 13 12 18 19 17 15 14 1 3 2
X38 RL3 RL4 MX2 MX1 G20 B6
0.014.3649.4
20
21
G6 22 Y3
4 14 1
9 15 2
6
7
17
19
3
4
5
5 18 5
F16A
F15B
F9A
7.5A
3A
3A
2 12
12 13 B40 freq
10 10 2
G5 8 11 1 6
1 1 9
X16 3 8 B1
G4 6
87
3 11 1
17 16 2
87
5 13
6 16 14 5
11 1 7 23 B43
2 4 4 1
pos
4 6 25 2
t
7
24
F30
FX38
30A
2
3
1
B37
2
8
FU1
125A
t
1
+30A GND4 X11 HOLD GAS B48

26 7 29 30 31 32 33 2 1 2 3 1 4 3 2 1
HOLD HAND GAS GND
HAND GAS SIGNAL

HOLD HAND GAS
+5V HAND GAS
HAND GAS GND

GND
+15
D0034170
9
+ - 10
BATTERY
1 Starter switch 7 Engine coolant temperature sensor

2 Ignition controlled power supplies relay 8 Fuel temperature sensor
3 Ignition controlled power supplies relay 9 Engine boost pressure sensor
4 Engine control unit 10 Armrest
5 Actuator 11 Throttle pedal position sensor
6 Camshaft speed sensor
40-48
4. SYSTEMS 4.5 LIGHTS - STEERING COLUMN SWITCH UNIT (VERSION WITHOUT FRONT LIFT)
4.5 LIGHTS - STEERING COLUMN SWITCH UNIT (VERSION WITHOUT FRONT LIFT)
23 0.014.0007.4
LOW BEAM DIRECTION
HIGH BEAM LIGHT
CONTROL CONTROL
L
HB LB 0 R
2
1 5
HORN 3 4
DIRECTION LAMP RIGHT

DIRECTION LAMP LEFT
DIRECTION LAMP LEFT

CONTROL
DIRECTION RIGHT
FULL BEAM LIGHT

DIRECTION LEFT
2 1 0
TRAILER2
TRAILER1
DIR.COM
0.013.9301.4
49A
49A
49A
49A
+30
+15
+58
-31
49
7 12 17 10 11 9 4 3 2 1 30 X 15 50 2 9 12 8 11 10 6 5 3 7 3 4 16 21 12 1 2 6 5 87a 87 85 86 30 87a 87 85 86 30 30 86 85 NC NO
0.014.1874.4
AS4 X38 X17 X18 RL4 RL3 RLM3
5
G11 GND4 6
11
10
9
8
7
58L 58R L R 31 1 NO
2
0.013.0663.4
4
2
X53 X62 56b
2
1
7
F12C
F11A
F14B
F16A
F11B
F12B
-31
1
F5C
F2C
F7A
F9A
7.5A
F6C
F3A
0.014.0732.4
7.5A
7.5A
15A
15A
15A
15A
20A
30A
5A
3A
3A
56a
3
G2 MS1 G9
G33 4 24 9 X61 56b
1 9 38 12 2
8
-31
3 3 8 8 1
22 1 2 5 7 13 3
56a
2 4 11 12 7
X114 G36 G4 39 11 X60
12 40 10 2
9
-31
F10C
F11C
F13B
F10B
FX38
1
FU1
125A
F9B
20 41 1
7.5A
7.5A
20A
15A
30A
5A
3 1 11 35
21 1
2
2
3
10
17
36
X115 4 16 GND2
G35 14
-31 13 0.013.9308.4
G32 G34 G37 0.013.9304.4
4 3 1 2 4 3 1 2 15
16
G1 X81
D0034070
14 G7 2
1 11 10
10
0.014.3649.4
15 17 9
16 4
9
12 2
10 1 11
X72
RLM5
13
G5
X24 X23 X43 GND3 G15 G18 +30A RLM4 GND5 X71 G27
2 7 9 10 8 4 12 8 7 4 1 2 6 10 6 5 3 2 4 1 1 2 4 1 2 4 30 86 85 NC NO 30 86 85 NC NO 1 2 3 4
0.011.3824.4
0.013.9309.4
-31
C3
C2
49a
C
49
X66 DX
X65 DX
X65 SX
X66 SX
+ -
BATTERY
2 1 3 2 1 1 2 3 1 2
13
G
-31
-31
56a
56b
56b
56a
15 14 X99
18 1 2
20 19
17 16
1 Starter switch
2 Infocenter 12
3 Ignition controlled power supplies
relay
4 Ignition controlled power supplies
relay
5 Relay for sidelights 10 Rotating beacon on/off switch 15 Relay for full beam headlights 20 Sidelights switch
6 Trailer socket 11 Number plate light 16 RH rear sidelight and brake light 21 RH direction indicator and sidelight
7 Right headlamp 12 Rotating beacon 17 LH rear direction indicator 22 LH direction indicator and sidelight
8 Left headlamp 13 Number plate light 18 Hazard lights control unit 23 Steering column lights switch
9 Horn 14 Relay for low beam headlights 19 Hazard warning lights switch
40-49
4. SYSTEMS
4.6 LIGHTS - STEERING COLUMN SWITCH UNIT (VERSION WITH FRONT

LIFT)
28 1
0.014.0007.4
LOW BEAM DIRECTION
HIGH BEAM LIGHT
CONTROL CONTROL
L
X112
4 9 10 2
R 3
0.014.1875.4
HB LB 0
2 6
HORN 4 5

DIRECTION LAMP LEFT
DIRECTION LAMP LEFT

CONTROL
DIRECTION RIGHT
FULL BEAM LIGHT

DIRECTION LEFT
2 1 0
TRAILER2
TRAILER1
DIR.COM
RL21
0.013.9301.4
49A
49A
49A
49A
+30
+15
+58
-31
49
30
7 12 17 10 11 9 4 3 2 1 30 X 15 50 2 9 12 8 11 10 6 5 3 7 3 4 16 21 12 1 2 6 5 87a 87 85 86 30 87a 87 85 86 30 30 86 85 NC NO
86
AS4 X38 X17 X18 RL4 RL3 RLM3
27 85
NC
FRL21
15A
NO
RL22
NO 5
G11 GND4 7
NC 11
26 85 10
86 9
30 8
7
58L 58R L R 31 1 NO
2
0.013.0663.4
4
2
X53 X62 56b
2
1
8
F12C
F11A
F14B
F16A
F11B
F12B
-31
1
F5C
F2C
F7A
F9A
7.5A
F6C
F3A
0.014.0732.4
7.5A
7.5A
15A
15A
15A
15A
20A
30A
5A
3A
3A
56a
3
G2 MS1 G9
G33 4 24 9 X61 56b
1 9 38 12 2
3 3 8 8 1
-31
9
25 1 2 5 7 13 3
56a
2 4 11 12 7
X114 G36 G4 39 11 X60
-31 12 40 10 2
10
F10C
F11C
F13B
F10B
FX38
1
FU1
125A
F9B
20 41 1
7.5A
7.5A
20A
15A
30A
5A
3 1 11 35
24 1
2
2
3
10
17
36
X115 4 16 GND2
G35 14
-31 13 0.013.9308.4
G32 G34 G37 0.013.9304.4
4 3 1 2 4 3 1 2 15
16
G1 X81
14 G7 2
1 11 10
11
0.014.3649.4
15 17 9
23 22 16 4
9
12 2
10 1 12
X72
RLM5
13
G5
X24 X23 X43 GND3 G15 G18 +30A RLM4 GND5 X71 G27
2 7 9 10 8 4 12 8 7 4 1 2 6 10 6 5 3 2 4 1 1 2 4 1 2 4 30 86 85 NC NO 30 86 85 NC NO 1 2 3 4
0.011.3824.4
Steering column lights switch
-31
C3
C2
49a
C
49
+ -
0.013.9309.4
X66 DX
X65 DX
X65 SX
X66 SX
2 Starter switch BATTERY
3 Infocenter
G
2 1 3 2 1 1 2 3 1 2
14
4 Ignition controlled power supplies D0034060 16 15
-31
-31
56a
56b
56b
56a
19 X99
relay 21 20
1 2
5 Ignition controlled power supplies 18 17

relay
6 Relay for sidelights 13
7 Trailer socket
8 Right headlamp
9 Left headlamp
14 Number plate light 18 LH rear direction indicator 22 Right front light on arms 27 Relay for low beam headlights
10 Horn
15 Relay for low beam headlights LH rear sidelight and brake light 23 Left front light on arms 28 Low/full beam headlights switch
11 Rotating beacon on/off switch
19
16 Relay for full beam headlights Hazard lights control unit 24 RH sidelight and direction indicator
12 Number plate light
20
17 RH rear sidelight and brake light Hazard warning lights switch 25 LH sidelight and direction indicator
13 Rotating beacon RH rear direction indicator 21 Sidelights switch 26 Relay for full beam headlights
40-50
4. SYSTEMS 4.7 DIAGNOSTICS ACCESSORIES
4.7 DIAGNOSTICS ACCESSORIES
1 2 3 7
4 5 6 8
TRANSMISSION ISO4191
ARMREST ISO9141
RX INSTRUMENT
TX INSTRUMENT
2 1 0
HLHP ISO9141
ISO K ENGINE
ISO L ENGINE
ISO 9141
ISO4191
- VCC
- VCC
ISO K
ISO L
GND
GND
GND
GND
+15
+15
+15
+15
+30
+30
+30
+30
+15
-31
1 2 14 11 10 1 2 3 4 13 12 11 9 8 15 2 1 45 66 68 23 30 86 85 87 87a 30 86 85 NC NO 30 86 85 87 87a 50 2 28 27 1 41 30 X 15 50
MX2 X4 GEAR RL4 RLM3 RL3 HLHP1 X38
0.013.9301.4
0.014.3649.4
GND3
BOX HLHP2
F12C
F15C
F16B
F15B
FX38
F13B
F11B
F14B
F16A
F13A
F5C
F4A
F9A
F6A
F2A
F1B
7.5A
7.5A
7.5A
7.5A
7.5A
7.5A
7.5A
X11
30A
30A
30A
20A
15A
15A
3A
5A
3A
ISO 9141 27
20 GND 26 X18
+15 7 G1 5 -31
8 22 TX
GND4 7 20 RX 9
12 +15
F9C
5A
21 +30
X7
1 X25
19 2 G4 1
17 2 10
X10 16 3
1 20
18 2
3
14
10
4
8
125A
FU1
10
3 9 11
16 7
14 2
1 X24
+30A G7 G5
15 11 18
D0034110
G23 X101
+ - 1 1
12
2 2
BATTERY
GND5
G26 X102
X85 1 1
13
17 2
1
2 2
X87 X75 X83

10 2 4 9 A D C 1 2
+ -
0.013.9304.4 0.013.9310.4
16 15 14
1 Engine control unit 8 Starter switch 15 Courtesy light

2 Diagnostic socket 9 Infocenter 16 Rearview mirror demister switch
3 Transmission control unit 10 Cigar lighter 17 Courtesy light
4 Ignition controlled power supplies relay 11 Sidelights switch 18 Power socket
5 Relay for sidelights 12 Right-hand rearview mirror with electric demisting 19 Driver's seat
6 Ignition controlled power supplies relay 13 Left-hand rearview mirror with electric demisting 20 Armrest
7 HLHP control unit 14 Door open warning light connector
40-51
4. SYSTEMS
4.8 WORKLIGHTS
(VERSION WITHOUT DEMISTING MIRRORS)
1 2
8
3 4 5 6 7
2 1 0
0.013.9301.4 0.013.9304.4 0.014.1565.4

5 7 8 1 3 4 9 10 2 2 7 9 10 8 4 30 X 15 50 87a 87 85 86 30 87a 87 85 86 30 87a 87 85 86 30 87a 87 85 86 30 4 9 10 2
RL4 RL3 RL1 RL2 X82 GND5
0.014.1874.4
X111 X24 X38

G21
3 X103
1 2
4 1 9
2
G22
3 X104
1 2
4 1 10
NO 2
NC G11 G25
20 85 5 G5 G7 3 X108
86
30
3
6
21
11
16
21
1
4
2
1
11
7 1 9 2
RL20 1 16 11 G24
14 10 2 X107
G36 19 4 1
12
0.014.0732.4
-31 20 1 2
G33 G4 3
1 14
16
G37 17
-31
F11B
F13B
FX38
F16A
G35
F3C
F4C
F7C
F1A
7.5A
30A
15A
25A
25A
5A
3A
3A
1
G32 G34 G29 C2
3 1 3 1 2 2
MS1 G19 1 1 13
0.013.9301.4
0.014.0002.4
19 2
G1 3 G28 C1
F12C
F1C
20A
15A
21 1 2 2
14
FU1
125A
10 1 1
X116 X117 TK2 GND3 X22 +30A GND4 RLM3 RLM6 GND2
1 2 1 2 41 2 10 9 4 3 1 8 7 5 30 86 85 NC NO 30 86 85 NC NO
0.014.3649.4 0.013.9308.4 0.013.0663.4 0.013.4085.4
D0034190
0.013.9307.4
GND2
19 18
16 15
+ -
G10 17
1 2 BATTERY
1 Switch for worklights on arms 8 Switch for rear worklights 15 Side worklights relay
2 Sidelights switch 9 Right-hand front worklight on cab 16 Relay for sidelights
3 Starter switch 10 Left-hand front worklight on cab 17 Front worklights switch
4 Ignition controlled power supplies relay 11 Left-hand rear worklight on cab 18 Right-hand supplementary light
5 Ignition controlled power supplies relay 12 Right-hand rear worklight on cab 19 Left-hand supplementary light
6 Front worklights relay 13 Front RH outer worklight 20 Relay for worklights on arms
7 Rear worklights relay 14 Front LH outer worklight
40-52
4. SYSTEMS 4.9 WORKLIGHTS (VERSION WITH DEMISTING MIRRORS)
4.9 WORKLIGHTS
(VERSION WITH DEMISTING MIRRORS)
2
8
3 4 5 6 7
2 1 0
1
0.013.9301.4 0.013.9304.4 0.013.9310.4
2 7 9 10 8 4 30 X 15 50 87a 87 85 86 30 87a 87 85 86 30 87a 87 85 86 30 87a 87 85 86 30 4 9 10 2
X24 X38 RL4 RL3 RL1 RL2 X82 GND5 X103
G21
3
1
2
1 9
4
5 7 8 1 3 4 9 10 2
2 X105
2
10
0.014.1874.4
X111 1
G22
3 X107
1 2
4 1 11
2
X109
2
1 12
NO X108
NC G11 G25 2
13
24 85 5 G5 G7 3 1
86 3 21 16 1
30 6 11 21 4 X110
9
RL20
7
1
1
16 11
2 2
1
14
14 10 G24
G36 19 2 X104
0.014.0732.4
-31 20 4 1
15
G33 G4 1 2
1 14 3
16 X106
G37 17 1
16
-31 2
F11B
F13B
FX38
F16A
G35
F3C
F4C
F7C
F1A
7.5A
30A
15A
25A
25A
5A
3A
3A
1
G32 G34 G29 C2
3 1 3 1 2 2
MS1 G19 1 1 17
0.013.9301.4
0.014.0002.4
19 2
G1 3 G28 C1
F12C
F1C
20A
15A
21 1 2 2
18
FU1
125A
10 1 1
X116 X117 TK2 GND3 X22 +30A GND4 RLM3 RLM6 GND2
1 2 1 2 41 2 10 9 4 3 1 8 7 5 30 86 85 NC NO 30 86 85 NC NO
0.014.3649.4 0.013.9308.4 0.013.0663.4 0.013.4085.4
0.013.9307.4
D0034180
GND2
23 22
20 19
+ -
G10 21
1 2 BATTERY
1 Switch for worklights on arms 8 Switch for rear worklights 15 Left-hand front worklight on cab 22 Right-hand supplementary light
2 Sidelights switch 9 Right-hand front worklight on cab 16 Left-hand front worklight on cab 23 Left-hand supplementary light
3 Starter switch 10 Right-hand front worklight on cab 17 Front RH outer worklight 24 Relay for worklights on arms
4 Ignition controlled power supplies relay 11 Right-hand rear worklight on cab 18 Front LH outer worklight
5 Ignition controlled power supplies relay 12 Right-hand rear worklight on cab 19 Side worklights relay
6 Front worklights relay 13 Left-hand rear worklight on cab 20 Relay for sidelights
7 Rear worklights relay 14 Left-hand rear worklight on cab 21 Front worklights switch
40-53
4. SYSTEMS
4.10 WINDSCREEN WIPERS
0.014.0007.4 13
FRONT WIPER
CONTROL
0
int.
5
FRONT
WASHER
PUMP 1 2 3 4
CONTROL
2 1 0
0.013.9301.4
13 7 16 12 14 15 30 X 15 50 87a 87 85 86 30 87a 87 85 86 30 30 86 85 NC NO 7 2 10 9 1 4 5 8
AS4 X38 GND4 RL3 RL4 RLM3 GND5 X86
0.014.3649.4
X91
3
F13C
F16A
F11A
F12A
F12B
F11B
7.5A
2
7.5A
15A
20A
10A
6
3A
4
1
G5
X24 1
2 14
7 16
11 9
10 G4
8 16
0.013.9304.4
4 17 G7
11
GND3 G2 12
8 2
9 13
RLX100 10 1
4 7 14
2
G12
3 4 1 2
10 1
FX38
F13B
6
30A
5A
8
5
0.014.1567.4
FU1
125A
+30A X2 X1 STOLL X100
2 1 2 1 2 1 3 4 1 2
D0034210 M M
8 9
7
+ -
BATTERY
1 Starter switch 8 Windscreen washer pump

2 Ignition controlled power supplies relay 9 Rear window washer pump
3 Ignition controlled power supplies relay 10 Windscreen wiper motor
4 Relay for sidelights 11 Sidelights switch
5 Rear window wiper switch 12 Steering column lights switch
6 Rear window wiper motor
7 Windscreen wiper motor
40-54
4. SYSTEMS 4.11 INSTRUMENT PANEL
4.11 INSTRUMENT PANEL
1 2
3
2 1 0
DECREMENT
INCREMENT
ESCAPE
ENTER
GND
0.014.3649.4 0.013.9301.4 0.013.9307.4
+15
30 X 15 50 10 9 5 4 7 26 87a 87 85 86 30
GND3 X38 X11 GND4 RL4 GND2
X18 X49
FX38
F16A
F5C
F9A
7.5A
30A
G1
P
3A
3A
-31
INCREMENT
5
25 4
2
1
4
ESCAPE 23 1
DECREMENT 26 3 X50
TK2 5
P
ENTER 24 2 1
AIR FILTER 8 9 39
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE 9 10 14 X51
9 FUEL INDICATOR 13 12 19 1
P
6
+30 21
+15 12 G4
GND2
FU1
125A
GENERATOR LIGHT 7
17
STEERING PRESS.SENS. 4 16 X58
X17 10 MS1 2
7
20 4 1
15 23
D+
G5
1
17
B+
+30A 8
0.013.9308.4
D0034050
+ -
BATTERY
1 Starter switch
2 Armrest
4 Air cleaner clogging sensor
5 Engine oil pressure switch
6 Steering system pressure switch
7 Fuel level sensor
8 Alternator
9 Infocenter
40-55
4. SYSTEMS
4.12 RADIO
5
3 4
1 2
0.013.9304.4 0.013.9301.4
- -
+ +
30 86 85 87 87a 30 86 85 87 87a 30 86 85 NC NO
X92 X84 X76 GND5 GND4 RL4 RL3 RLM3

4
5
8
16 G7
12 19
14 18
NO
15 11
10 6 3
F13B
F12C
FX38
F10A
F16A
F11B
F9C
7.5A
30A
20A
5A
5A
5A
3A
2 5
7 4
3 6
10
11
13
9
2
+
9 -
1
X30
7
6
2
+
5
8 -
1 4
X27 14
1
4 16
8 G5
10
7
FU1
125A
9
7
2
X24 16
17
G4
GND3 X38 +30A
30 X 15 50
0.014.3649.4
D0034140 2 1 0
+ -
6
BATTERY
1 Right-hand woofer
2 Left-hand woofer
5 Relay for sidelights
6 Starter switch
7 Sidelights switch
8 Left-hand tweeter
9 Right-hand tweeter
10 Radio
40-56
4. SYSTEMS 4.13 MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER
4.13 MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
AC ENGAGEENT
2 1 0
0.014.3649.4
GND
GND
+30
+30
+15
30 X 15 50 30 86 85 87 87a 30 86 85 87 87a 30 86 85 NC NO 30 86 85 NC NO 2 28 54 27 1 41 8 7 5 9 11 4 10 6 12 3 2 13 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4
X38 RL4 RL3 RLM3 RLM7 HLHP1 GND5 G31 X80 X79
HLHP2 X73
6
5
M 8
X24 G5
4 16 X74
8 1 6
M 9
21 10
9
14
G7
5
7 7 X77
2 8 1
G4 11 2 10
16 20
17
FX38
F11B
F16A
F15C
F12C
F13B
GND3
F2A
F8A
F8B
F5B
F3B
7.5A
7.5A
X78
7.5A
15A
30A
20A
20A
20A
20A
3A
5A
1
G8 2 11
5
X56 3 X88
20 1 2 B
1 A
M 12
X54
P
2 MS1 X90
19 1 5 A
B
M 13
FU1
125A
0.013.9304.4
0.013.9308.4
GND4 +30A RLAC3 RLAC1 RLAC2 RLAC4 RLAC5

87 85 86 30 30 86 85 87 87 85 86 30 4 2 3 5 1 1 5 3 2 4
0.013.9301.4
D0034130
18 17 16 15 14
+ -
BATTERY
1 Starter switch 12 Left-hand fan motor

2 Ignition controlled power supplies relay 13 Right-hand fan motor
3 Ignition controlled power supplies relay 14 Relay for recirculation 2
4 Relay for sidelights 15 Relay for recirculation 1
5 Air conditioning compressor relay 16 Relay for fan 4th speed
6 HLHP control unit 17 Relay for fan 3rd speed
7 Fan speed selector switch 18 Relay for fan speed 4b
Recirculation switch 19 Air conditioning pressure switch
8 Right-hand recirculation motor 20 Air conditioning compressor
9 Left-hand recirculation motor 21 Sidelights switch
10 Fan speed selector switch
11 Manual air conditioner control panel lights
40-57
4. SYSTEMS
4.14 BRAKES
2 4
5 6 7 8
3 9
AIR PRESSURE SIGNAL

1
BRAKE PRESENCE
BRAKE SW RIGHT
2 1 0
BRAKE LEFT
0.014.3649.4 0.013.9308.4
GND
GND
P
+30
+30
+15
+15
-31
-31 +58 + S NO
- 30 X 15 50 2 28 23 49 27 1 41 38 87a 87 85 86 30 87a 87 85 86 30 30 86 85 NC NO 30 86 85 NC NO 54 1 NO
2
X12 X13 X38 GND4 HLHP1 RL3 RL4 RLM2 RLM3 X53
HLHP2
X34 G2 GND2
1 16
3 14
20 4 15
2 17
X57
X35
P
1
1 2 10
FX38
F15C
F13B
F16A
F12C
F14B
F11B
F8C
F5C
F9C
F2A
F4A
7.5A
7.5A
7.5A
15A
15A
20A
30A
30A
15A
3A
3A
5A
19 3
4
2
37
36
G1 35
GND3 14 16 TRAILER
11 17 1
25 2
X18 10 15 3 X68
11
P
-31 5 1 14 4 1
PARKING BRAKE LIGHT 18 14
MS1
18 TRAILER BREKE LIGHT 10
21
16
17
0443.7355.4
+30
+15 12 20
G4
X24 1
4 16
8 14
10 G5
17
FU1
125A
9
7 VERSIONE FRENATURA TALIA
2
G15 G18 X8 +30A
4 3 3 4 1 3 4 2
D0034040 0.013.9301.4 X70 P

2
13
0.013.9309.4
X69
14 1
12
X66 DX
X65 DX
X65 SX
X66 SX
1 2
+ - 2
3 X68
2 1 3 2 1 1 2 3 1 2
BATTERY 4 1
P
11
-31
-31
56a
56b
56b
56a
0443.7356.4
16 15
1 Compressed air pressure gauge 10 Brake fluid level sensor 17 Sidelights switch
2 Compressed air pressure gauge 11 Trailer braking pressure sensor 18 Infocenter
3 Starter switch 12 Solenoid valve for trailer parking brake 19 Right brake pedal switch
4 HLHP control unit 13 Trailer braking low pressure switch 20 Left brake pedal switch
5 Ignition controlled power supplies relay 14 Handbrake switch
6 Ignition controlled power supplies relay 15 RH rear direction indicator
7 Brake lights relay RH rear sidelight and brake light
8 Relay for sidelights 16 LH rear direction indicator
9 Trailer socket LH rear sidelight and brake light
40-58
4. SYSTEMS 4.15 FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION
4.15 FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION
1 2 3 4 5
2 1 0
- +
0.013.9301.4 0.013.9308.4 0.013.9327.4
9 4 2 10 30 X 15 50 87a 87 85 86 30 87a 87 85 86 30 NO NC 85 86 30
X42 X38 RL3 RL4 RLM3 GND2
0.014.3649.4
UP
2
1 6
DW
G13 2
MS1 3 1 7
F16A
F11B
F2A 1
87
875
7.5A
7.5A
3A
6 1 X64
G4
pos
3 2 2
17 4
8
87
3
16 6 1
14
G1
GND3 20
87
G5
1
87
16 A
2 3
14
F15C
F12C
FX38
F13B
30A
15A
20A
5A
TK2
33
34
FU1
125A
HLHP1
X24 +30A HLHP2 GND4
4 8 10 9 7 2 1 27 6 41 71 47 33 51 12 14 24 2 28
0.013.9307.4
+FRONT AXLE STD SW
FRONT AXLE POITION
EV UP FRONT AXLE
EV DOWN FRONT AXLE

+30
+30
+15
+8V
GNDCOM
GNDCOM
GNDCOM
GND
GND
D0034160
10 + -
9
BATTERY
1 Front axle suspensions switch

(not utilised)
2 Starter switch
6 Front axle up control solenoid valve
7 Front axle down control solenoid valve
8 Front axle suspension position sensor
9 HLHP control unit
10 Sidelights switch
40-59
4. SYSTEMS
4.16 TRANSMISSION
1
RV N FW
3.9 Ohm
3.9 Ohm
3.9 Ohm
2 4 1 3
6
X63
0.014.0007.4
2 3 4 5
7 8 9
OIL TEMPERATURE SENS

SEAT CONSENT
2 1 0
GNDCOM
GNDCOM
GNDCOM
0.013.9301.4
GND
GND
+15
+30
+30
7 19 21 18 20 30 X 15 50 87a 87 85 86 30 87a 87 85 86 30 30 86 85 NC NO 41 2 1 27 28 61 24 14 12 68 3 2 3 2 4 1 2 1 21 12
AS4 X38 GND4 RL3 RL4 RLM3 HLHP1 X6 X59 EV F EV R
0.013.9308.4
HLHP2
0.014.3649.4
F15C
F14C
F16A
F15A
F12B
F11B
F9A
7.5A
F2A
7.5A
20A
15A
3A
1A
3A
3A
MS1
G5 11
X46 1 21 GND2
1 510 Ohm 16 18
4
2 160 Ohm 14 13
A
F16B
7.5A
1
1
1 G4
24 2
3
16
17
OIL TEMP
2
2
4 5 1
5 20
3
6 14 NLSA
X45
freq
1
G2
21
2
3
10
13 TK2
X33 12 40 NLSE freq
12V 1 4 1
4
3
G3
6
25
5
2
3
11
23 M 2 21 26
Sig 5 9 2 NAB freq
Light 6 5 7 3
3 11 2 12
4 10 1
2 32
GND3 1 6 18 BAR P
10 1 2
8 8 1 13
7 3
X24 15 29 NHK freq
4 9 3
8 23 2
14
F16C
FX38
F13B
10 20
F5C
1
7.5A
30A
22
5A
1A
9 12
7 21 GEAR
2 TEMP
1
2 15
FU1
125A
GND2
GEAR
X26 X21 +30A BOX X52 EV P EV LOCK
2 4 1 3 1 2 23 68 45 66 44 4 37 24 38 20 65 63 14 30 22 67 49 1 2 18 50 54 57 3 56 40 62 39 10 29 17 16 13 8 11 32 12 55 B A D C F E 2 1 2 1
pos U
0.013.9307.4
GEAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
POWER SHIFT SENSOR B1

CLUTCH ON/OFF SIGNAL
GND COM SENSOR ON/OFF
ANGLE CLUTCH SW SIGNAL

+CLUTCH-F/S SENSOR
F/S SIGNAL
EV PROPORTIONAL
18 BAR PRESSURE SW
MAIN CLUTCH SENSOR B9

+30
+30
+15
+15
DISPLAY
CONFORT CLUTCH
NLSA B3
EV LOCKER
EV LOCKER
FRONT
F/S SWITCH
NAB B4
GND COM
REVERSE
NEUTRAL
HML-
- VCC
- VCC
VEF
HML+
EVR
Y2
GND SENSOR
VPS2+
Y4
Y3
VPS1+
Y1
D0034230
Y1
Y3
Y2
Y4
Prop
21 20
+ -
18 17 16
BATTERY
19
1 Shuttle control lever 8 "FIELD" mode solenoid valve 15 Transmission oil temperature sensor 22 Sidelights switch
2 Starter switch 9 "ROAD" mode solenoid valve 16 Gearbox in neutral locking solenoid valve 23 Transmission display
3 Ignition controlled power supplies relay 10 Gearbox output shaft speed sensor 17 Main clutch proportional solenoid valve 24 Gearbox control lever
4 Ignition controlled power supplies relay 11 Gearbox input shaft speed sensor 18 Gear change solenoid valves (Y1, Y2, Y3, Y4)
5 Relay for sidelights 12 Wheel speed sensor 19 Transmission control unit
6 HLHP control unit 13 Low transmission oil pressure switch 20 Clutch pedal depressed proximity sensor
7 Field/road sensor 14 Clutch speed sensor 21 Clutch pedal position sensor
40-60
4. SYSTEMS 4.17 ASM - 4WD - DIFFERENTIAL
4.17 ASM - 4WD - DIFFERENTIAL
1 3 4 5
ASM POSITION SENSOR

BRAKE SW RIGHT
2 1 0
EV DIFF LOCK
ASM SW STD
BRAKE LEFT
DT SW STD
DF SW STD
GNDCOM
GNDCOM
GNDCOM
EV DT
0.014.3649.4 0.013.9307.4
GND
GND
+5V
+30
+30
+15
30 X 15 50 49 23 2 28 1 27 10 41 48 21 75 67 43 34 24 14 12 30 86 85 87 87a 30 86 85 87 87a 30 86 85 NC NO
HLHP1 RL4 RL3 RLM3
X38 GND4 HLHP2
TK2 EV DT
34 1
X41 16 2 6
10 G1 17
2 17 35 EV DF
4
9
18
19
1
2
7
X39
10 G2
F15C
F12C
FX38
F16A
F13B
F11B
F2A
7.5A
7.5A
30A
20A
15A
5A
3A
2 15
4 14
GND2
9
A
4 3
X40 G5
10 1
2 14
4 16
9 X55
FU1
125A
2
X24 3
8
4 MS1 1
8 G4 2 4
10 14
11 9 16
7 17
2
GND3
X34 X35 +30A
1 3 4 2 1 3 4 2
0.013.9301.4 0.013.9308.4
D0034120
+ -
10 9
BATTERY
1 Starter switch 9 Right brake pedal switch

2 HLHP control unit 10 Left brake pedal switch
3 Ignition controlled power supplies relay 11 Sidelights switch
6 4WD control solenoid valve
7 Differential lock solenoid valve
8 Steering angle sensor
40-61
4. SYSTEMS
4.18 ELECTRONIC LIFT
3
2
1 4 5 6 7
LOWERING SPEED
2 1 0
MAX HEIGHT
LOWER LED
DEPHT SET
RAISE LED
INTERMIX
LIFT LED
SLIPAGE
GND
0.013.9301.4 0.013.9308.4
+5V
+15
30 X 15 50 2 7 9 10 8 4 23 24 17 25 11 12 13 21 6 7 26 30 86 85 NC NO 87a 87 85 86 30 87a 87 85 86 30 4 2 1 3 1 2 3 7 8
X38 X24 X11 RLM3 RL3 RL4 GND4 X9 X28
0.014.3649.4
F12C
F16A
F11B
F9A
F5A
F2A
7.5A
7.5A
30A
3A
3A
3A
G4
X20 14
2 16
8 17 EV UP
7 9 1
1 3 MS1 2 8
3 2 33
32 EV DW
F13B
FX38
9 2
9
30A
5A
G5 34 1
X48 16
2 14
1 18
1
8 POS pos
2
X47 G3 3 10
F15C
12
FU1
125A
2 1
15A
470R
470R 3 13
470R 4 14 G16 R F
16 4 4 2
11
220R
4K7
6 17 3 3 3
19
220R
4K7
7 18 2 2 1
TK2
220R
4K7
8 19 1 1
L
220R
4K7
9 11 8 8 38
220R
F
4K7
1 20 37 2
11
10 13 5 5
35
36
3
1
12
G1 6 6 33
7 7 34 RADAR freq
28 3
G2
6 G38
27 2 13
1
1 1 1
GND3 19
20
HLHP1
G14 G17 +30A HLHP2 GND2
4 1 3 4 1 3 41 22 11 45 35 53 56 64 69 76 55 27 1 2 28 17 5 16 57 42 72 29 78 77 70 67 62 51 24 14 12 7
0.013.9307.4
RAISE LED STD
D1 HL/LIFT STOP STD

EXTERNAL SW DOWN
EXTERNAL SW UP
LOWER LED STD
LIFT LED STD
D3 HL/LIFT DOWN STD
LIFT 2 SIGNAL
EV UP SIGNAL
RIGHT DRAF SIGNAL
LEFT DRAFT SIGNAL
POSITION SENSOR LIFT

DEPTH SET SDT
LOWERING SPEED
MAX HEIGHT
INTERMIX
D2 HL/LIFT UP STD
EV DOWN COM
EV DOWN SIGNAL
EV UP COM
+15
+30
+30
GND
GND
GNDCOM
GNDCOM
GNDCOM
+5V
+8V
RADAR
SLIPAGE
D0034220
0.014.9309.4
0.014.9309.4
+ -
DW UP DW UP 14
SX SX DX DX BATTERY
1 3 2 2 3 1 1 3 2 2 3 1
18 17 16 15
1 Starter switch 8 Lift Up solenoid valve 15 RH rear lift up button

2 Sidelights switch 9 Lift lowering solenoid valve 16 RH rear lift down button
3 Armrest 10 Rear lift position sensor 17 LH rear lift up button
4 Relay for sidelights 11 Lift draft sensor (right) 18 LH rear lift down button
5 Ignition controlled power supplies relay 12 Lift draft sensor (left) 19 Lift control console
6 Ignition controlled power supplies relay 13 Radar
7 ISO4 socket (Power for external implements) 14 HLHP control unit
40-62
4. SYSTEMS 4.19 FRONT AND REAR PTO
4.19 FRONT AND REAR PTO
2
6
1 3 4 5
2 1 0
0.013.9301.4 0.013.9308.4
4 2 9 10 2 7 9 10 8 4 30 X 15 50 87a 87 85 86 30 87a 87 85 86 30 30 86 85 NC NO
X37 X24 X38 RL3 RL4 RLM3 GND2
0.014.3649.4
F11B
F16A
F5A
F9A
F3A
7.5A
7.5A
3A
3A
3A
GND3
G4
16
X15 17
10 14
9 18
15 4 21 PTO
MS1
freq
2 19 1
9 20 3 7
X14 22 2
10 G5
9 1
14 4 16
2 14
EV PTO1
F15C
F12C
F13B
FX38
2
15A
30A
30A
8
5A
1
TK2
15
13 1
2 9
EV PTO2
FU1
125A
G2
18
HLHP1
+30A X11 GND4 HLHP2 GND2
1 2 2 1 7 3 8 22 26 2 28 27 1 60 41 18 58 65 8 36 44
G14 G17 0.013.9307.4
EXTERNAL PTO SW
R.TPO AUTO SW
F,PTO SW STD
PTO SPEDD SIGNAL
REAR PTO EV
FRONT PTO EV
GND
GND
R.PTO SW
+30
+30
+15
PTO AUTO
REAR PTO
FRONT PTO
+15
GND
D0034240
0.013.9309.4
0.013.9309.4
+ -
PTO PTO
2 1
SX
1 2
DX BATTERY 11 10
13 12
1 Front PTO engagement switch 10 HLHP control unit

2 Sidelights switch 11 Armrest
3 Starter switch 12 RH rear PTO button (on mudguard)
4 Ignition controlled power supplies relay 13 LH rear PTO button (on mudguard)
5 Ignition controlled power supplies relay 14 Rear PTO engagement switch
6 Relay for sidelights 15 AUTO PTO engagement switch
7 Rear PTO speed sensor
8 Front PTO engagement solenoid valve
9 Rear PTO engagement solenoid valve
40-63
4. SYSTEMS
4.20 DIRECTIONAL CONTROL VALVES
1
3 4
D3 HL/LIFT DOWN STD

D1 HL/LIFT STOP STD
D2 HL/LIFT UP STD
2 1 0
D4 HL
0.013.9301.4 0.013.9307.4 0.013.2588.4
GND
GND
+30
+30
+15
30 X 15 50 2 28 27 1 41 5 17 4 16 87a 87 85 86 30 87a 87 85 86 30
X38 GND4 HLHP1 RL3 RL4
0.014.3649.4
GND2 1
HLHP2 2
D3-D4 3 5
TK2 4 4
22 2 D3
24 3
27 1 1
2
6
F15C
FX38
F14A
F16A
F2A
7.5A
7.5A
F5A
30A
15A
3A
3A
3
4
D4
G5
1
4
3
G4 MS1 D1-D2 2 7
17 20 1 1
16 27 3 D2
28 2
4 4
FU1
125A
3
2 8
1
GND2 D1
+30A G30
1 3 2
0.013.9308.4
D0034080
+ -
BATTERY
1 Starter switch
2 HLHP control unit
5 Directional control valve 3
40-64
4. SYSTEMS 4.21 CAN BUS
4.21 CAN BUS
1 2 3 4 5 6
2 1 0
CAN RES
CAN H
CAN L
CAN H
CAN H
- VCC
- VCC
CAN L
CAN L
GND
GND
GND
0.014.3649.4
+30
+30
+15
+15
+15
+15
30 X 15 50 2 1 23 68 45 66 27 26 25 12 13 14 2 1 28 20 26 7 30 86 85 87 87a 30 86 85 87 87a
X38 GND4 GEAR MX2 X11 RL3 RL4
GND3 BOX X3
3 CAN H
4
7
CAN L
X18 2 -31
-31 5 G4 1 +15
+15 12 20
HLHP1
9 +30
CAN RES
21
11
10
16 HLHP2
CAN L 15 17 40 CAN H
CAN H 14 39 CAN L
28 GND
2 GND 8
3 27 +30
4 G1 1 +30
2 6 41 +15
1 5
G9
F15C
F16B
F15B
F16A
FX38
F5C
F9A
F2A
7.5A
7.5A
7.5A
7.5A
30A
15A
3A
3A
G5
1
0.013.9301.4
FU1
125A
+30A
D0034090
+ -
BATTERY
1 Starter switch
2 Transmission control unit
4 Armrest
7 Supplementary CANBUS socket
8 HLHP control unit
9 Infocenter
40-65
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
0421.3182
ENGINE WIRING (4 CYLINDERS) (1/2)
5. WIRING LOOMS
1 B6
2
3 B48
4
B43
3 2 1
1 2
3
2 F30
1
2
G20 1
B1
Y3
1
2 B37
2
B40
1
D0029990
B1 Not utilised
B6 Not utilised
B37 Fuel temperature sensor
B40 Camshaft speed sensor
B43 Engine coolant temperature sensor
B48 Engine turbocharging pressure sensor
F30 Not utilised
G20 To engine wiring
Y3 Actuator
0421.3182
40-67
0421.3182
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
G20
TABELLA COLORI / COLOURS TABLE

M Marrone/Brown C Arancio/Orange
V Verde/Green A Azzurro/Blue
Z Viola/Violet B Bianco/White
N Nero/Black L Blu/Dark Blue
S Rosa/Pink G Giallo/Yellow
2 3 4 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 R Rosso/Red H Grigio/Gray
1
B48 B37 F30 B43 B1 B40 Y3 B6 D0030000
0421.3182
40-68
0421.3172
ENGINE WIRING (6 CYLINDERS) engine serial number–> 0109278 (1/2)
ENGINE WIRING (6 CYLINDERS) engine serial number–> 0109278 (1/2)
1
2
B48 3
4
B6
B43
3 2 1
1 2
3
2 F30
1
2
G20 1
B1
Y3
1
2 B37
2
B40
1
B1 Not utilised
B6 Not utilised
F30 Not utilised
Y3 Actuator
0421.3172
40-69
0421.3172
ENGINE WIRING (6 CYLINDERS )(2/2) engine serial number –> 0109278
ENGINE WIRING (6 CYLINDERS )(2/2)

engine serial number –> 0109278
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
G20

1
B48 B37 F30 B43 B1 B40 Y3 B6 D0030000
0421.3172
40-70
0421.3753
ENGINE WIRING (6 CYLINDERS) engine serial number 10063954 –> (1/2)
ENGINE WIRING (6 CYLINDERS) engine serial number 10063954 –> (1/2)
1
2
B48 3
4 B6
B43
3 2 1
1 2
3
2 F30
1
2
G20 1
B1
Y3
1
2 B37
2
B40
1
D0034150
B1 Not utilised
B6 Not utilised
F30 Not utilised
Y3 Actuator
0421.3753
40-71
0421.3753
ENGINE WIRING (6 CYLINDERS) (2/2) engine serial number 10063954–>

engine serial number 10063954–>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
G20

1
B48 B37 F30 B43 B1 B40 Y3 B6 D0030000
0421.3753
40-72
CONNECTOR POSITIONS
CONNECTOR POSITIONS
1 G20
B43
F0077581
2
B48
F0077590
3 F30
F0114630
40-73
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
CONNECTOR POSITIONS ENGINE WIRING (4 CYLINDER) - ENGINE WIRING (6 CYLINDER)
ENGINE WIRING (4 CYLINDER) -

ENGINE WIRING (6 CYLINDER)
4
2
1
3
B6
4
F0114640
5
6
5 6
Y3
F0104660
F0077620
6
B37
B40
B1
0421.3182
F0114650
0421.3172
0421.3753
40-75
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
0.013.0663.4/30
ENGINE HOOD WIRING
ENGINE HOOD WIRING

X61
3
1 2
C
X60
1
G28
2
F
1
T G19
2
2
M 1.5
1
X60
M 1.5
1
2
G29
C
1
G29
2
M 1.5
1
T
2
M 1.5 2 1
1
2
G28 3
X62
3 3
1 2
X62 X61
MN 0.5
MB 0.5
GN 1.5
GR 1.5
BN 1.5
BN 1.5
M 2.5
M 2.5
M 2.5
M 2.5
G 1.5

B 1.5
B 1.5
1 10 11 20 2 3 4 19 18 7 8 9 12 13 R Rosso/Red H Grigio/Gray
G19 D0029830
G19 To left transmission wiring

G28 To front worklights wiring
G29 To front worklights wiring
T Not utilised
X60 Horn
X61 Left headlamp
X62 Right headlight
0.013.0663.4/30
40-77
0.013.4085.4/20
FRONT WORKLIGHTS WIRING
FRONT WORKLIGHTS WIRING
2
C1 - C2 G28 - G29
1
M 1.5 M 1.5
1 1
BN 1.5
2 G28 - G29
C1 - C2 BN 1.5
2
R Rosso/Red H Grigio/Gray
D0030070
C1 Front LH outer worklight

C2 Front RH outer worklight
G28 To engine hood wiring
G29 To engine hood wiring
0.013.4085.4/20
40-78
CONNECTOR POSITIONS ENGINE HOOD WIRING - FRONT WORKLIGHTS WIRING
CONNECTOR POSITIONS ENGINE HOOD WIRING - FRONT WORKLIGHTS WIRING
1 G28
G29
2
X60
1
X61 X62
C1
F0104020
C2
2 1
T 1
G19
F0104090
F0103070
0.013.0663.4/30
0.013.4085.4/2
40-79
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
0.013.9307.4/70
RIGHT-HAND TRANSMISSION WIRING (1/2)

S
RADAR 2 1
OIL TEMP GEAR TEMP

3
2
1
EV LOCK
2 1 2
1
X51 18 BAR 2
1
EV DT R
1
2
2
3
1
2
1
X50
1
2
X49
2 1
D0034250
X52
4
3
TK2
1 2 3
2
1
D3 - D4
NAB
1 2 3
2 1
1 2
EV DF
1 2
COVER NLSA
EV PTO1 EVP
GND2 1 2
1 2 3 1 2 3
RL42 1
2
NLSE NHK
EV PTO2
1 2 3
2 1 POS
1
2
3
4
A
3
G10 1 2
L
18 BAR Transmission oil low pressure switch GEAR TEMP Transmission oil temperature sensor R Lift draft sensor (right)
A To left-hand transmission wiring GND2 Earthing point 2 RADAR Radar
D3-D4 To control valve wiring L Lift draft sensor (left) RL42 Preheating relay
EV DF Differential lock control solenoid valve NAB Wheel speed sensor S Start enabling switch (Green)
EV DT Four-wheel drive control solenoid valve NHK Clutch speed sensor TK2 To central wiring
EV LOCK Gearbox neutral locking solenoid valve NLSA Gearbox output shaft speed sensor X49 Air filter clogging sensor
EV P Main clutch proportional solenoid valve NLSE Gearbox input shaft speed sensor X50 Engine oil pressure switch
EV PTO 1 Front PTO engagement solenoid valve OIL TEMP Not utilised X51 Steering circuit pressure switch
EV PTO 2 Rear PTO engagement solenoid valve POS Rear lift position sensor X52 Gear change solenoid valves (Y1, Y2, Y3, Y4) 0.013.9307.4/70
40-81
0.013.9307.4/70
TK2 M1.5
2
EV PTO1
40 +12V NAB LBL1
B7
GEAR BOX PRESSURE 18BAR (T29) MN1 2
F1 1 X50
+15 TRANSMISSION (7.5A) GN1 1
E1 2
NHK (T16) VB1
D1 3
OIL TANK TEMP. NZ1
C1 4 2
B1 5
GEAR BOX GND SENSOR (T3) MB1 M1
1 OIL TEMP
GEAR BOX TEMP.GND (T24) RN1
A1 6
NLSA (T40) CV1
F2 7
NLSE (T17) GR1.5
E2 8
EV POWER SUPPLY (T8) C1.5
D2 9
2
C2 10
GEAR BOX TEMP. (T39) VG1
1
GEAR TEMP
NAB (62) V1
B2 11
+15 EVP/EV GROUP (T12) CL1.5
A2 12 GN1
FRONT PTO EV 3
V1.5
F3 13 2 NAB
ENGINR PRESSURE (ST2-9- 26VIE) AG1 MB1
E3 14 2 1
D3 15
REAR PTO EV L1.5
2
M1.5 1 EV DT
C3 16
EV DT MN1.5 1 EV PTO2
2
B3 17
EV DF
RL1.5 X1 GN1
1 18 BAR
+15 H.D.RELAY (F14)
BR1.5
A3 18
STEERING CIRCUIT PRESSURE X2 MB1
ZR1 1
F4 19 1 X51 2
EV DF
E4 20
EV.MVV (T32)
ZB1.5
M1.5
1
GN1
2
NHK
3
EV.MVR (T55)
X7
ZB1.5
D4 21
D3 GM1 MB1
C4 22 1
EV.GV2 (T11) LN1
B4 23
GN1
2
NLSA
D4 HL-D3-D4 STD SG1 3
A4 24
EV.GV1 (T57) LN1.5
F5 25 MB1
1
EVP GND (T56) S1.5
E5 26
+15 RADAR/PTO SENSOR BVR1 GN1
2
NLSE
D5 27 3
RADAR ZB1
C5 28
+15 EV LOCK (T-13) CL1 X8 CL1
B5 29 2 LB1
F
A5 30
H.D.COMAND (M3) GH1
1
EV LOOCK CN1
A
START CONSENT (SW) SN1
F6 31 D
EV LOCK (T10) CN1 B X52
E6 32
+8 VOLT (HLHP 51) C1 E
D6 33
HLHP GND SENSOR VR1.5 C
C6 34
+5 VOLT HLHP ZG1
B6 35 1
A6 36
POSITION SENSOR RV1 CL1
2 EVP
LEFT DRAFT HN1
E7 37
RIGHT DRAFT HV1
D7 38 2
C7 39
AIR FILTER NS1.5
1 1
RL42
A7 41
M1
2
X49
M1
1
2 S
C1
3
GND2 1
X9 RV1
2
D3 - D4
2
G10 4
M1 1
RV1
3
M1
2
RADAR
1
LB1
1
X3 C1
2
X4 VC1 3
A
X5 ZG1 4
VC1
1
ZG1
2 POS
3 TABELLA COLORI / COLOURS TABLE
VC1
VC1 1
1 V Verde/Green A Azzurro/Blue
2 R
2 L Z Viola/Violet B Bianco/White
C1
C1 3
3 N Nero/Black L Blu/Dark Blue
D0034260
0.013.9307.4/70
40-82
CONNECTOR POSITIONS
CONNECTOR POSITIONS
1
TK2
F0114670
2
L
F0114680
X50
F0101310
40-83
CONNECTOR POSITIONS
4 GND2
F0114780
5 RADAR
X51
F0114700
6
NLSE
NLSA
F0101270
40-84
CONNECTOR POSITIONS
RL42
F0114710
8
X52
18 BAR
F0114760
9
EVP
NHK
F0101300
40-85
CONNECTOR POSITIONS
10
GEAR TEMP
F0114730
11
NAB EV DT
F0101240
12 S
EV LOCK
F0101201
40-86
CONNECTOR POSITIONS
13
D3-D4
R
F0114740
14
EV PTO2
EV DF
F0101250
15
POS
F0114750
40-87
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
CONNECTOR POSITIONS RIGHT-HAND TRANSMISSION WIRING
RIGHT-HAND TRANSMISSION WIRING

DIRECTIONAL CONTROL VALVES WIRING 2/4
16 RADAR
X51
OIL TEMP X49

2 EVPTO 1
17
16 9 6
F0114700
15
13
14
G10
12
10 7
11
3
8 4
F0104770
0.013.9307.4/70
0.013.2588.4/10
40-89
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
0.013.9308.4/70
LEFT-HAND TRANSMISSION WIRING (1/2)

X59 EVF
EVR
GND2 X58 2
1
2 1
1
TRAILER
2
1 2 3 4
G19
X57
1 2
3 4
D1-D2
+50
1 2 3 4
5 6
MS1
G13
X53
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
A
PTO
1
2
1 2
X56 EV DW
EV UP
2
1
1
2
3
4 X54
D+
D0034270 X55
+50 Starter motor EV UP Lift up solenoid valve X53 Trailer socket

A To right-hand transmission wiring G13 To front axle suspensions wiring X54 Air conditioning pressure switch
D+ Alternator G19 To engine hood wiring X55 Steering angle sensor
D1-D2 To control valve wiring GND2 Earthing point 2 X56 Air conditioning system compressor
EV DW Lift down solenoid valve MS1 To central wiring X57 Brake fluid level sensor
EV F "FIELD" mode solenoid valve PTO Rear PTO speed sensor X58 Fuel level sensor
EV R "ROAD" mode solenoid valve TRAILER To trailer braking wiring X59 Field/road sensor
0.013.9308.4/70
40-91
0.013.9308.4/70
4
G13
54
5
VC1 58L
MS1 6
58R
AN1.5 L X53
RIGHT DIRECTION
A7 41 R
LEFT DIRECTION A1.5 M1.5
B7 40 31
GN1.5
POSITION
C7 39
POSITION G1.5
D7 38
NR1.5 M2.5
STOP
E7 37
R1.5 C1
+12 VOLT (30) 2
A6 36
VG1
+12 VOLT (30) R1.5 3
B6 35 ZG1
4
A
EV DOWN+ NZ1.5
C6 34 1 LB1
1
33
EV DOWN- N1
2
EV DW
D6
EV UP+ MB1.5
E6 32 4 1
FRONT AXLE POS.SENSOR RM1 ZG1 2 EV UP

F1 1 2
E1 2
ASM SIGNAL MV1
1 X55 1
EV DOWN ZB1 VC1
M1
X58
D1 3 3 2
TANK INDICATOR GL1
C1 4
PRESS.SWITCH
HR1.5
B1 5 1
A1 6
EV UP BG1 H1.5 2
X54
LOW BEAM LIGHT H1.5
F2 7
HN1.5
E2 8
LOW BEAM LIGHT 1
X56
EV UP- B1
D2 9
EXT.TEMPERTURE SENSOR V1 M1 4
C2 10
FIELD/STREET SIGNAL (T18) VGB1
3
B2 11
HORN VBN1 X59
A2 12 2
FIELD/STREET COM (T37) CM1

1
F3 13
TRAILER INDICATOR Z1
E3 14 4
EV TRAILER HV1.5
D3 15 3
C3 16
+12 VOLT TRAILER VL1
2 TRAILER M1.5
1
TRAILER LIGHT SN1
B3 17 1 2
EVR-SIGNAL (T54) VB1.5
A3 18 2 3
F4 19
CORNER LIGHT NBL1 LB1
1
EVR
4
+15 D1-D2/PTO SENSOR BVR1
E4 20 5
EVF-SIGNAL (T50) BVL1
D4 21 2 6
GH1
C4 22
SPEED PTO SIGNAL X1 1 EVF 7
D+ L1 LB1
B4 23 8
HIGH BEAM LIGHT VN1.5
9
G19
A4 24
BRAKES OIL LEVEL SB 1 M1.5
F5 25 10
E5 26 M1.5
11
D2
ML1
D5 27 12
D1 S1
C5 28 13
EXTERNAL TEMP.SENSOR C1
B5 29 BVR1 3 14
START MOTOR RN1.5 2
A5 30 15
START MOTOR RN1.5 50 +50 M1 1
F6 31 16
PTO 17
18
19
M1.5 20
D+ D+
GND2

M1
1
2
X57
M1 V Verde/Green A Azzurro/Blue
4
3
D1-D2 N Nero/Black L Blu/Dark Blue
2 S Rosa/Pink G Giallo/Yellow
BVR1
1 D0034280
0.013.9308.4/70
40-92
0.013.2588.4/10
CONTROL VALVES WIRING 2/4
CONTROL VALVES WIRING 2/4
D1 - D3 D2-D4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 D1-D3 D2-D4
D1/D3
D2/D4
MB 1
SN 1
SN 1
M1
M1
S1
M 1ND)
MB 1
SN 1
S1
D1-D2 M Marrone/Brown C Arancio/Orange
D3-D4 V Verde/Green A Azzurro/Blue
4 3 2 1
D0034290
D1-D2
D3-D4
D1-D2 To left transmission wiring

D3-D4 To right transmission wiring
0.013.2588.4/10
40-93
0.013.2588.4/10
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
40-94
CONNECTOR POSITIONS
CONNECTOR POSITIONS
1
MS1
F0114800
2
A
F0114830
3
X53
F0114810
40-95
CONNECTOR POSITIONS
D1
D2
F0114880
5
EV UP
EV DW
F0103170
D1-D2
F0114870
40-96
CONNECTOR POSITIONS
7
X58
F0101050
8
X59
F0101090
9
EVF
EVR
F0101160
40-97
CONNECTOR POSITIONS
10 G13
F0114840
11
+50
F0101150
12
GND2
F0114690
40-98
CONNECTOR POSITIONS
13
X55
F0114850
14
D+
F0101110
15
X56
F0101120
40-99
16
X54
F0101070
17 X57
F0101130
18
G19
F0103070
CONNECTOR POSITIONS CEFT-HAND TRANSMISSION WIRING
CEFT-HAND TRANSMISSION WIRING CONTROL VALVES WIRING 2/4
19 1
3
17 18
2 4
TRAILER 19
F0114860
15 16 6
PTO
9 7
11 10 8
14 12
13
F0104890
0.013.9308.4/70
0.013.2588.4/10
40-101
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
0443.7356.4
TRAILER BRAKE WIRING (ITALY)
TRAILER BRAKE WIRING (ITALY)
X68
1
2
3
2
TRILER X69
3
4
TRAILER
1 2 3 4
AN 1
HN 1.5
Z 1.5
HV 1.5
X70
AN 1
HN 1 HN 1.5
Z 1.5
HN 1.5
HV 1.5
X70
X68
1 2
X69
D0030030
TRAILER To left-hand transmission wiring

X68 Trailer braking pressure sensor
X69 Trailer parking brake solenoid valve
X70 Trailer braking low pressure switch
0443.7356.4
40-103
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
0443.7355.4/10
TRAILER BRAKE WIRING (GERMANY)
TRAILER BRAKE WIRING (GERMANY)
1
2
TRAILER X68
3
4
Z1
4
X68
3
TRAILER V Verde/Green A Azzurro/Blue
2
1
D0030040
TRAILER To left-hand transmission wiring

X68 Trailer braking pressure sensor
0443.7355.4/10
40-105
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
0.013.9327.4/40
FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION WIRING
FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION WIRING
DW
2
DW
1
6
5
UP
4
G13
2
UP
3
1
2
1
G13
1 3 2 6 5 4
3 2 1
M1
X1
X64
C1
ZB 1
VR 1
BG 1
RM 1
M1
M1
S Rosa/Pink G Giallo/Yellow 1 2 1 2 1 2 3
D0029870
UP DW X64
DW Front axle down solenoid valve

G13 To left transmission wiring
UP Front axle up solenoid valve
X64 Front axle suspension position sensor
0.013.9327.4/40
40-107
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
0.014.5132.4/10- 0.014.5144.4/10
GND2 GND1
+30 +30C
D0030050 D0034300
+30 Battery GND1 Battery

+30C Starter motor GND2 Earthing point 2
0.014.5132.4/10- 0.014.5144.4/10
40-109
0.014.3658.4/10
BATTERY POSITIVE WIRING - BATTERY NEGATIVE WIRING
BATTERY POSITIVE WIRING -

BATTERY NEGATIVE WIRING
FU2
+30B RL42A
N25
+30B RL42A
D0034310
+30B Battery
FU2 Preheating relay supply fuse
RL42A Preheating relay
0.014.3658.4/10
40-110
0.014.1563.4/10 - 0.014.1564.4
POWER SUPPLY WIRING (1/2)
4 CYLINDERS 6 CYLINDERS
RL42B X67 RL42B X67
N25 N25
RL42B X67 RL42B X67
+30C +B +30C +B
N16 N25
+30C +B +30C +B
TABELLA COLORI / COLOURS TABLE TABELLA COLORI / COLOURS TABLE
Arancio/Orange M Marrone/Brown C Arancio/Orange

M Marrone/Brown C
V Verde/Green A Azzurro/Blue V Verde/Green A Azzurro/Blue
Z Viola/Violet B Bianco/White Z Viola/Violet B Bianco/White
N Nero/Black L Blu/Dark Blue N Nero/Black L Blu/Dark Blue
S Rosa/Pink G Giallo/Yellow S Rosa/Pink G Giallo/Yellow
R Rosso/Red H R Rosso/Red H Grigio/Gray

Grigio/Gray
D0029910 D0029900
+30C Starter motor +30C Starter motor

B+ Alternator B+ Alternator
RL42B Preheating relay RL42B Preheating relay
X67 Preheating device X67 Preheating device
0.014.1563.4/10 - 0.014.1564.4
40-111
0.014.8351.4
GND4 GND2
N25
GND4 GND2
D0034320
0.014.8351.4
40-112
CAB EARTH WIRING
CAB EARTH WIRING
GND2 Earthing point 2

40-113
CONNECTOR POSITIONS
CONNECTOR POSITIONS
1
+30
+30B
F0114910
RL42B
RL42A
F0114920
3
GND4
F0103921
40-113
CONNECTOR POSITIONS
4
76X
0113010F
5
+30C
F0104130
6
B+
F0103120
40-114
CONNECTOR POSITIONS BATTERY POSITIVE WIRING - BATTERY NEGATIVE WIRING - POWER SUPPLY WIRING - CAB EARTH WIRING
BATTERY POSITIVE WIRING - BATTERY NEGATIVE WIRING -

POWER SUPPLY WIRING - CAB EARTH WIRING
7
3 4
GND1
2
F0114930
8
GND2 7
FU2
8
1
F0104950
F0114940
0.014.5132.4/10
0.014.5144.4/10
0.014.3658.4/10
0.014.1563.4/10
0.014.1564.4
0.014.8351.4
40-115
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
0.014.3649.4/40
INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRING (1/2)

AS4 To lights selector switch wiring
G1 To central wiring
AS4 G2 To central wiring
X17 G3 To central wiring
X19
G9 Not utilised
X15 G11 To upper lights/worklights wiring on arm
G5 X18
G15 G14 To fenders wiring
G14 G15 To fenders wiring
X16 G33 To wiring for lights on arms
G35 To wiring for lights on arms
X22
G4 X21
3
12
GND3
X23
RLX100 Windscreen wiper motor relay
X12 Compressed air pressure gauge
G3
X13 Compressed air pressure gauge
X34 X14 Rear PTO engagement switch
L
X15 AUTO PTO engagement switch
X35 X24
R
X16 Accelerator pedal position sensor
G2 G9 X17 Infocenter
X18 Infocenter
X25 X19 Not utilised
X26
X20 Lift control switch
X42 D0029790
X47 X21 Clutch pedal depressed proximity sensor
G1
1 2
X36 X22 Front worklights switch
X23 Hazard lights switch
X48 X41 X24 Sidelights switch
X14
X25 Cigar lighter
X26 Clutch pedal position sensor
X20 X27 Left-hand tweeter
X37
X13 X38 X30 Right-hand tweeter
X40
X39
X12 G11 X33 Transmission display
X34 Left brake pedal switch
X35 Right brake pedal switch
X27 X36 Not utilised
X37 Front PTO engagement switch
L G33
X38 Starter switch
X39 ASM switch
X43 X40 Differential lock switch
R
G36
X41 4WD engagement control switch
X42 Front axle suspensions switch
1
2
X46
X30
X43 Hazard warning lights control unit
RLX100 X45 Gearbox control lever
X46 Gearbox control lever
1 2 34 5 6
G35
X45 G37 X47 Lift control console
X48 Lift lock control switch
X33 D0029810
0.014.3649.4/40
40-117
0.014.3649.4/40

GND3 G0.5
G0.75 +58 10
ø10.5 M0.5 GV0.5
49
2
3 AN0.75 N10 X42 -31
F.AXLE SW
9
2
ZB0.5 S0.5
1
2
ESCAPE
ENTER
STEERING PRESS.SENS. 4 -31 4 M0.5 HR0.5 3
BN0.75 DECREMENT
49A 5 SG0.5 4 INCREMENT
BN0.75 L0.5 L0.5
49A 6 1 5
X17 DIRECTION LAMP LEFT 7
A0.75 CAN H 1
B0.5 B0.5
CAN H
B0.5
2
L0.5
A0.75 XLF CAN L 2 6 CAN L
DIRECTION LAMP LEFT 8 4 4
B0.5 V0.5
CAN L 7 RX INSTRUMENT
DIR.COM 9 BV0.75 L0.5 CB0.5
3 CAN H 3 8 TX INSTRUMENT
10 BN0.75 MB0.5
49A 5 EXT.TEMP.SENSOR 5 9
G9
BN0.75 AIR FILTER
49A 11 6 EXT.TEMP.SENSOR 6 AG0.5 10
AN0.75 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
DIRECTION LAMP RIGHT 12 X49A 7 +CAB TEMP.SENSOR MOT 7 AN0.5 11
XRH TRAILER BREKE LIGHT
8
9
-CAB TEMP.SENSOR MOT
SENSOR IN-TERMO FUSE
8
9
GL1
SN0.5
12
13
FUEL INDICATOR
LIFT STATUS STD
G1
1
VN0.5 10 10 RN0.5
TRAILER2 SENSOR OUT 14 PARKING BRAKE LIGHT
LB0.5 11 VN0.5 A1.5
TRAILER1 2 CAB SUN SENSOR+ 11
HV0.5 VB0.5 15 DIRECTION LAMP LEFT
DIRECTION LEFT 3 12 CAB SUN SENSOR- 12 AN1 16
HN0.5 DIRECTION LAMP RIGHT
DIRECTION RIGHT 4 SN0.75
M0.75 17 DT SW STD
-31 5 SN0.5 18 ASM SW STD
6
G0.5 NRG0.5
+58 19 DF SW STD
7 L0.5 ZB0.5
GENARATOR LIGHT 20 F.AXLE SW
AIR FILTER 8 RV0.5 21 CENTRAL W.LIGHTS
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE 9
1 CAB SENSOR+
TRAILER BREKE LIGHT
CAN RES
10
11
B0.5 2 CAB SENSOR- X19 SG0.5
12 BR0.5 1 LOWER LED STD
+15 V1
FUEL INDICATOR 13 2 EXT.TEMP.SENSOR
L0.5 C1
CAN H 3 EXT.TEMP.SENSOR
14 V1.5
X18 CAN L
FULL BEAM LIGHT
15
16
B0.5
B0.5 HN1.5
4
5
FRONT FULL BEAM
FRONT HALF BEAM
XCAN B0.5
6 RAISE LED STD
LB1.5 31B WIPER SETTING
PARKING BRAKE LIGHT 18 7
S0.5 LN1.5 1ST SPEED
COLD START 19 8
L1.5
RX 20 9 +15 FRONT WIPER
RN0.75 Z1 10 FRONT GLASS WIPER POUMP
+30 21 BVN1
TX
ESCAPE
22
23
RL0.5
11
12
HORN
HMLDOWN
G2
HN0.5 HML UP
ENTER 24 13
BV1
INCREMENT 25 14 BRAKE SW RIGHT
BN1.5
DECREMENT 26 15 BRAKE SW LEFT
RG1.5
16 BRAKE LIGHT
RN1.5
BV0.75 17 STOP LIGHT
DIRECTIONS COM 1 B0.5 EXTERNAL PTO SW
HN1 18
RIGHT 2 X49B V0.5
HV1 19 EXTERNAL SW UP
LEFT 3 XDR L0.5
20 EXTERNAL SW DOWN
8 XDL RV1
21 CONFORT CLUTCH
5
6
-31
M1
7 RN0.5
NM1 1 SENOR GND
+30 FULL BEAM 4
X2
VN1 ANGLE CLUTCH SW SIGNAL
BN1 2
+15 HALF BEAM 9
G1 C0.5 3 N LEVER
HALF BEAM LIGHTS 10 BV0.5
FULL BEAM LIGHTS
B1 X3 4 R LEVER
11 V0.5
AS4 +15V FRONT GLASS WIPER 12
FRONT GLASS WIPER POUMP 13
Z1 SG0.5
5
6
F LEVER
F/S SW
BR1 GB0.5 7
INTERMITTANCE 14 CLUTCH ON/OFF SIGNAL
GN0.5 GND COM TRANSMISSION
8
SIDE FUSES BOX W.H.

1 SPEED 15 GN0.5 9 +12V TRANSMISSION
ZERO SETTING FR.WIPER 16 CM1 10 +12V CLUTCH
HORN
FRONT
17
18
V0.5
BV0.5
HL0.5
BN0.5
11 DEPHT SET
LOWER LED
G3
REVERSE 19 12
LBL0.5 HN0.5
+15V DRIVE DIRECTION 13 RAISE LED
20 L0.5
NEUTRAL 21
C0.5 14 LIFT LED
GB0.5 15 +12V GEAR LEVER
RV0.5 16 INTERMIX
MB0.5
LIFT STATUS STD 15 17 MAX HEIGHT
HL0.5 AG0.5 18
DEPHT SET 1 LOWERING SPEED
BN0.5 BR0.5 19 SLIPAGE
LOWER LED 2
RAISE LED HN0.5 V0.5 +5V
3 20
L0.5 B0.5 21
LIFT LED 4 DISPLAY SIGNAL
REISE LED STD 13
INTERMIX 6
X47 MAX HEIGHT
LOWERING SPEED
7
8
AG0.5
Z1
RN0.5
1
2
TRAILER AIR INDICATOR
LIFT DOWN STD
SLIPAGE
BR0.5 VR0.5
9 3 GNDCOM HLHP
+5V 10
V0.5 MN0.5
4 GNDCOM MOTOR
M0.5 LBL0.5
-31 11 5 +12V REVERSE LEVER
LOWER LED STD 14 VN0.5 SIGANAL PEDAL GAS
6
RB0.5
7 +5V MOTOR
BR0.5 XI S0.5 COLD START LIGHT
+15 + 8
M0.5 BVR1 9 COM LIFT UP/DW(+15)
-
X13
-31 RN0.75
AIR PRESSURE SIGNAL S 10 +30 INSTRUMENT
BN2.5
11 +30 HAZARD
-31
M0.5
B2.5
GN1.5
12 +15 HAZARD G4
X12 +58
G0.5 XL XL XL XL XL XL XL XL XL XL G1.5
L0.5
13
14
RIGHT POSITION LIGHT
LEFT POSITION LIGHT
15 GENARATOR LIGHT
R2.5
16 +30 KEY
+5V 1 R2.5
RN0.5 XW 17 +30 KEY
SG0.5
X26
GND COM 2
18 FRONT PTO SW
ANGLE CLUTCH SIGNAL 4 SN0.5
19 REAR PTO AUTO SW
BR0.5 20 +15 INSTRUMENT/DISPLAY
GND COM 1 S0.5 21 REAR PTO SW
X21 CLUTCH SIGNAL
+12V
2
3
GN1 XFS
L2.5 1 +15 KEY

+5V MOTOR 1 L0.5
2 2 ENGINE START RELAY 86
X16
GNDCOM MOTOR R2.5
4
VN0.5 3 LIGHTER
SIGNAL PEDAL GAS
RN0.5
MB0.5 4 LEFT TWEETER-

RN0.5
MN0.5 5 LEFT TWEETER+

N1.5 VH0.5
G36 -31
V1.5 WORK/FULL BEAM TOP
HN0.5
6
7
RIGHT TWEETER-
RIGHT TWEETER+
VG0.5
8 LIFT UP STD
GN1 POSITION TOP XL V1.5
9 FULL BEAM FUSE
G35 AN1 DIRECTION LIGHT HN1.5
VN1.5
10
11
HALF BEAM FUSE
+30 RELAY LOW WORK LIGHT G5
H1.5 HALF BEAM TOP B1
12 FULL BEAM LIGHTS RELAY 86
G1
13 HALF BEAM LIGHT RELAY 86
V1.5 WORK/FULL BEAM TOP X3 NM1
X49
14 +30 POS./FULL BEAM LIGHT

G1 POSITION TOP B1 +15 LIGHT
15
G33 A1 DIRECTION LIGHT
H1.5 HALF BEAM TOP
G0.5
C0.5
16
17
POSITION LIGHT RELAY 86
STEERING PRESS.SWITCH
MG0.5
18 LIFT STOP
RV1
M1.5 V0.5
G37
510 ohm
160 ohm
19 ROOF WORK LIGHT RELAY 86

-31 GR1
X1 20 CORNER WORK LIGHT RELAY 86
RG0.5 21 +15 FRONT WORK SW
XL XP
LB1.5
BR1
MB1
SN0.75
RV0.5
M1
L1
Z1
BN2.5
RB0.5
SG0.5
SN0.5
BV0.5
GB0.5
GB0.5
GB0.5
RG0.5
RN0.5
M0.5
M0.5
M0.5
M0.5
G0.5
G0.5
M2.5
M0.5
M0.5
M0.5
M0.5
M0.5
M0.5
M0.5
M0.5
M0.5
M0.5
M0.5
M0.5
M0.5
G0.5
G0.5
G2.5
G0.5
G2.5
G0.5
G0.5
G0.5
G0.5
G0.5
R2.5
B0.5
B0.5
NM1
GR1
S0.5
BR1
L0.5
HN1
BN1
HV1
AN1 DIRECTION LIGHT
GN1 POSITION LIGHT
RV1
M1
M1
M1
M1
B1
COM LIFT SW (+15)
4
5
6
8
1
15
50
10
10
10
30
12
10
10
9
10
10
10
10
6
2
4
2
4
1
9
2
7
5
2
1
6
3
2
1
6
4
2
1
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
GND
UP
4
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
3
3
RG0.5

STOP LIGHT
PTO
M1.5
G0.5
H0.5
DW
REAR PTO AUTO COMAND

+50 ENGINE START RELAY
V0.5
M1.5
11
FRONT WIPER POUMP

B0.5
10
CORNER WORK LIGHT
CORNER WORK LIGHT

8
3
9
4
7
2
1
+15 HALF BEAM LIGHT
31 B SETTING MOTOR
+15 FRONT WORK SW
FRONT PTO COMAND

L0.5
+30 POSITION LIGHT
POSITION LIGHT SW
REAR PTO COMAND

CANTRAL W.LIGHTS
ROOF WORK LIGHT

CONFORT CLUTCH
CONFORT CLUTCH
+15 FRONT WIPER

SETTING F.WIPER
COM UP/DW (+15)
COM UP/DW (+15)

DISPLAY SIGNAL
INTERMITTANCE
+FULL BEAM TOP/LOW W.L.
BRIDGE BRAKE
BRIDGE BRAKE
BRAKE RIGHT
BRAKE LIGHT
+30 LIGHTER
BRAKE LEFT
+30 HAZARD
+15 HAZARD
+15 SW.LOW W.LIGHTS
TWEETER +
TWEETER +
HML DOWN
TWEETER -
TWEETER -

HALF BEAM NORMAL
+15 LIGHT
+15 LIGHT
FULL BEAM NORMAL
TREILER2
TREILER1
+30 RELAY LOW W.L.
DIR COM
ASM SW
HML UP
+12V TOP SWITCH
F/S SW
F/S SW
HALF BEAM FUSE
DF SW
FULL BEAM FUSE
DT SW
RIGHT
G14 G15
HALF BEAM TOP
LEFT
49A
+58
+58
+58
+15
+58
+30
+15
+58
+58
+58
+58
+58
+58
-31
-31
-31
-31
-31
-31
-31
-31
-31
-31
-31
-31
-31
-31
-31
-31
-31
-31
-31
-31
-31
-31
-31
49
49
X25 X33 X46 X45 X27 X30 X34 X35 X38 X43 X23 X22 X24 X39 X40 X37 X15 X41 X14 RLX100
+58
D0034380
-31
11
10
6
8
M0.5
9
4
7
2
1
VR0.5
H1.5
V1.5
G11
1
1
2
2
3
4
1
2
SENSOR IN
MOTOR-
SENSOR OUT
MOTOR+
GNDCOM HLHP
GND COM
+5 VOLT
DOWN
+58
-31
UP
X36 X20 X48

0.014.3649.4/40
40-118
0.013.9309.4/30
FENDERS WIRING
FENDERS WIRING
L0.5
1
DWSX BVR1 BVR1 TABELLA COLORI / COLOURS TABLE
2
DWDX X1 B0.5 G14 - G17 M Marrone/Brown C Arancio/Orange
3
V0.5
1 N Nero/Black L Blu/Dark Blue

PTOSX BVR15 S Rosa/Pink G Giallo/Yellow
2
PTODX 3
D0029890
1
UPSX ZG0.5BVR1
2
UPDX 3
DWSX
X65SX 1 AN1
DWDX M1
M1
X65DX 2
X2
G15 - G18
R1
GN1T
1
2
3
1
M1
DW
X66SX 2
X66DX 3
PTO
PTOSX
1
G14 - G17
2
PTODX
3
P
U
G15 - G18
1
2
3
UPSX
UPDX
1
2
1 2 3
X65SX
X65DX
X66SX
X66DX
DW DX RH rear lift down button PTO DX RH rear PTO button (on fender) X66 DX RH rear sidelight and brake light
DW SX LH rear lift down button PTO SX LH rear PTO button (on fender) X66 SX LH rear sidelight and brake light
G14 To instrument panel wiring UP DX RH rear lift up button
G15 To instrument panel wiring UP SX LH rear lift up button
G17 To central wiring X65 DX RH rear direction indicator
G18 To central wiring X65 SX LH rear direction indicator 0.013.9309.4/30
40-119
0.014.0732.4/10
WIRING FOR LIGHTS ON ARMS
WIRING FOR LIGHTS ON ARMS
V1
G33 - G35
G32 - G34
G1
M1
H1
M1
G36 - G37
G1
A1 M Marrone/Brown C Arancio/Orange
D0030090
X114 - X115
G32 - G34
G36 - G37
X114 - X115
G33 - G35
G32 Left front light on arms

G33 To instrument panel wiring
G34 Right front light on arms
X114 Left sidelight and direction indicator
X115 Right sidelight and direction indicator
0.014.0732.4/10
40-120
0.014.0002.4
WIRING FOR SUPPLEMENTARY LIGHTS ON ARMS
WIRING FOR SUPPLEMENTARY LIGHTS ON ARMS
V1
X116 - X117 G32 - G34 M Marrone/Brown C Arancio/Orange

M1
D0030100
X116 - X117 G32 - G34
G32 To wiring for front lights on arms

G34 To wiring for front lights on arms
X116 Left-hand supplementary light
X117 Right-hand supplementary light
0.014.0002.4
40-121
0.014.1875.4/10
UPPER LIGHTS WIRING (VERSION WITH LIFT)
UPPER LIGHTS WIRING (VERSION WITH LIFT)

RL21 RL22
NO NO
86 NC 85 86 NC 85 FRL21
30 30 15A
M0.5
HN1.5
11
VN1.5
FULL BEAM NORMAL
10
HN1.5
HALF BEAM NORMAL
V1.5
FULL BEAM FUSE 9
H1.5
HALF BEAM FUSE 8
+58 7
G11 6
M0.5
-31 5
BN0.5
TOP SWITCH 4
3
AR1.5
HALF BEAM TOP 2
1
VR1.5
+FULL BEAM TOP
G0.5 Z Viola/Violet B Bianco/White

+58 10
M0.5 N Nero/Black L Blu/Dark Blue
-31 9
X12 TOP LIGHTS SW 2
L0.5 R Rosso/Red H Grigio/Gray
RELAY COMAND 4 L0.5
D0029980
RL21
FRL21
15
A
RL22
G11 X12
FRL21 Low beam headlights relay supply fuse

RL21 Relay for low beam headlights
RL22 Relay for full beam headlights
X112 Low/full beam headlights switch
0.014.1875.4/10
40-122
0.014.1874.4/20
WIRING FOR WORKLIGHTS ON ARMS (VERSION WITHOUT LIFT)
WIRING FOR WORKLIGHTS ON ARMS (VERSION WITHOUT LIFT)

RL20
G11 X111
RL20
VN1.5
NO
86 NC 85
30
V1.5
FULL BEAM NORMAL 11
HALF BEAM NORMAL 10
FULL BEAM FUSE 9

HR1.5
HALF BEAM FUSE 8
G0.5
+58 7
G11 +30 LOW W.L. 6
RN1.5
M0.5
-31 5
4
RG0.5
LOW WORK LIGHT 3
2
TABELLA COLORI / COLOURS TABLE VN1.5
+LOW WORK LIGHT 1
S Rosa/Pink G Giallo/Yellow +58 10

M0.5
R Rosso/Red H Grigio/Gray -31 9
X111 LOW W.L.SW 2

L0.5
D0034390 RELAY COMAND 4

RL20 Relay for worklights on arms
X111 Switch for worklights on arms
0.014.1874.4/20
40-123
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
CONNECTOR POSITIONS
CONNECTOR POSITIONS
1 X27
G33
X30
X36
G37
X35
F0103260
2
X18
X17
F0103220
3 X21
X19
RLX100 X36
X43
F0103180
40-125
CONNECTOR POSITIONS
4
X33
F0103250
5 X37 X42
X40
X39
X41
X38
F0103210
6
X48
X46
X20
X45
F0114960
40-126
CONNECTOR POSITIONS
7
X13
X47
X12
F0114970
8
G14
G15
F0101370
9
X15
X14
F0101390
40-127
CONNECTOR POSITIONS
10
G9
VERSION
WHIT MANUAL AIR
CONDITIONER
F0101350
11
X66DX
X65DX
F0103970
12
UP DX DW DX
PTO DX
F0103990
40-128
CONNECTOR POSITIONS
13 G3 G2
G4
G5
G1
F0104110
14
DW SX
PTO SX
UP SX
F0104000
15
X65SX
X66SX
F0103980
40-129
CONNECTOR POSITIONS
16
X16
F0101340
17
G17 G18
F0103280
18
GND4
F0104011
40-130
CONNECTOR POSITIONS
19 X34
X35
F0103240
20
X23
X22
X25 X24
F0103270
21 RL21
FRL21
RL22
WITH LIFT F0103950
40-131
CONNECTOR POSITIONS
21
RL20
WITHOUT LIFT F0114980
22
X112
F0103300
23
X26
F0103190
40-132
CONNECTOR POSITIONS INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRING - FENDERS WIRING WIRING FOR HEADLIGHTS ON ARMS - WIRING FOR SUPPLEMENTARY LIGHTS ON ARMS - UPPER LIGHTS WIRING - WIRING FOR WORKLIGHTS ON ARMS
INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRING -

FENDERS WIRING
WIRING FOR HEADLIGHTS ON ARMS -
24 WIRING FOR SUPPLEMENTARY LIGHTS ON ARMS -
UPPER LIGHTS WIRING -
WIRING FOR WORKLIGHTS ON ARMS
X26
X115
X117
G34
2 1
8
X116 G32 25 4
7 9
F0103190
X114 1 3 6
5
25
3 10
24
AS4
23
3 11
22
21 20
18
13
19
17 12
16
F0103230
D0030621
15
14
0.014.3649.4/40
0.013.9309.4/30
0.014.0732.4/10
0.014.0002.4
0.014.1875.4/10
0.014.1874.4/20
40-133
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
0.014.0007.4
LIGHTS SELECTOR SWITCH WIRING
LIGHTS SELECTOR SWITCH WIRING
AS4
DIRECTION LOW BEAM

LIGHT HIGH BEAM
CONTROL CONTROL
L
FRONT WIPER
X63 CONTROL
0
R Ø LB HB 1
Int.
0
FRONT WASHER
PUMP CONTROL
HORN
CONTROL
X63
1
3
4
15/1
56b
56a
49a
MB0.75 31b
53c
56
5
53
30
L
R
NG0.75 H
NR0.75 J
NGL0.75
BV0.75
RV0.75
6
G0.75
G0.75
B0.75
NBV1
N0.75
Z0.75
C0.75
V0.75
NB1
BN1
NV1
R1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 AS4
D0030080
AS4 To the instrument panel wiring

X63 Shuttle control lever
0.014.0007.4
40-135
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
0.013.9301.4/50
CENTRAL WIRING (1/2)
CENTRAL WIRING (1/2) X28
3 2 18
X10
FU1 +30A
HLHP1 X9
GEAR BOX
FRL9
FX38
1
RL9
G8
G7
FOUR RELAY DUBBLE
G18
CONTACT
CONTACT NORMAL OPEN
40A 125 DEGREE RL1 ÷ RL4
G1
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X X X
G17
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X X X
G2
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
MX1 Engine control unit
X X X X
SEVEN MINI-RELAY DUBBLE

CONTACT
CONTACT NORMAL OPEN
30A 125 DEGREE
RLM1 ÷ RLM7 MX2 Engine control unit
G3
RL1 Front worklights relay
RL2 Rear worklights relay
HLHP2
RL3 Ignition controlled power supply relay
MS1 TK2 RL4 Ignition controlled power supply relay
G4 RL9 Engine starting relay
RLM1 Preheating relay
X2 RLM2 Brake lights relay
G5
X1 1
RLM3 Relay for sidelights
2
RLM4 Relay for full beam headlights
2 1
X11
RLM5 Relay for low beam headlights
G6
RLM6 Side worklights relay
G16 G16
RLM7 Air conditioning compressor relay
STOLL Not utilised
TK2 To right-hand transmission wiring
X1 Rear screenwasher pump
X3
X2 Windscreen washer pump
1 2 34
D0034330
X3 Supplementary CANBUS socket
X4 Diagnostic socket
1
G38 GND4
G38
X5 Creeper engagement sensor
X6 Not utilised
X8 X7 Driver's seat
X5
21
X8 Handbrake switch
MX2 X9 ISO4 socket
X4 1 2 (Power for external implements)
1
2
X10 Power socket

3
3
1 2
1 2
GAS HOLD
X11 Armrest
MX1 G30
X28 Not utilised
1 2 3
X7 STOLL
X6
+30A Battery G3 To instrument panel wiring G16 Wiring connector GEAR BOX Transmission control unit
FRL9 Engine starting relay supply fuse G4 To instrument panel wiring G17 To fenders wiring GND4 Earthing point 4
FU1 Battery main fuse (125A) G5 To instrument panel wiring G18 To fenders wiring HLHP1 HLHP control unit
FX38 Starter switch supply fuse G6 To engine wiring G30 To control valves wiring HLHP2 HLHP control unit
G1 To instrument panel wiring G7 To roof line wiring G38 Wiring connector HOLD "HOLD" button
G2 To instrument panel wiring G8 To roof line wiring GAS Hand throttle position sensor MS1 To left transmission wiring
0.013.9301.4/50
40-137
SIDE CONSOLE W.H.
X28
G7
G5
G4
G3
G2
G1
TX
RX
+58
UP
-31
+5V
+58
+12V
CAN L
HORN
CAN H
DOWN
F/S SW
ENTER
HML UP
SLIPAGE
+15 KEY
+30 KEY
+30 KEY
LIFT LED
ESCAPE
F LEVER
R LEVER
N LEVER
LIGHTER
INTERMIX
+30 RADIO
+15 LIGHT
RAISE LED
AIR FILTER
HMLDOWN
DEPHT SET
DF SW STD
+5V MOTOR
DT SW STD
1ST SPEED
LOWER LED
LOWER LED
STOP LIGHT
INCREMENT
LIFT UP STD
MAX HEIGHT
SENOR GND
+15 HAZARD
+30 HAZARD
FRONT AXLE
ASM SW STD
DECREMENT
+30 FLASHER
BRAKE LIGHT
REAR PTO SW
+12V CLUTCH
COMPRESSOR
RAISE LED STD
LIFT STOP STD

FRONT PTO SW
LIFT DOWN STD
LEFT TWEETER-
BRAKE SW LEFT
+15 WIPER REAR

LEFT TWEETER+
DISPLAY SIGNAL
GNDCOM MOTOR
FUEL INDICATOR
LIFT STATUS STD
+15 RADIO/PLAFO
RIGHT TWEETER-
FULL BEAM FUSE

+30 INSTRUMENT
HALF BEAM FUSE

BRAKE SW RIGHT
+53 FRONT WIPER
+15 WIPER FRONT

RIGHT TWEETER+
+12V GEAR LEVER
EXTERNAL SW UP
LOWERING SPEED
+15 FRONT WIPER
EXT.TEMP.SENSOR
EXT.TEMP.SENSOR
CONFORT CLUTCH
FRONT FULL BEAM
SIGNAL PEDAL GAS

FRONT HALF BEAM
GENERATOR LIGHT
COLD START LIGHT
EXTERNAL PTO SW
CENTRAL W.LIGHTS
31B WIPER SETTING
REAR PTO AUTO SW
+15 REAR WORK SW

31B WIPER SETTING
+15 HEATING GROUP
+12V TRANSMISSION
+15 HEATING GROUP

EXTERNAL SW DOWN
+15 FRONT WORK SW

+12V REVERSE LEVER
LEFT POSITION LIGHT
87 REAR WPRK LIGHT
+15 MIRROR DEFROST

TRAILER BREKE LIGHT
DIRECTION LAMP LEFT
87 FRONT WORK LIGHT

PARKING BRAKE LIGHT
RIGHT POSITION LIGHT

ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
COM LIFT SWITCH (+15)

CLUTCH ON/OFF SIGNAL
LEFT FRONT TWEETER -

TRAILER AIR INDICATOR
LEFT FRONT TWEETER +

ENGINE START RELAY 86
GND COM TRANSMISSION
RIGHT FRONT TWEETER -
RIGHT FRONT TWEETER +

POSITION LIGHT RELAY 86
+15 INSTRUMENT/DISPLAY
STEERING PRESS.SWITCH
REAR GLASS WATER PUMP

GNDCOM HLHP PEDAL GAS
+30 POS./FULL BEAM LIGHT

ANGLE CLUTCH SW SIGNAL
HALF BEAM LIGHT RELAY 86
ROOF WORK LIGHT RELAY 86

+30 RELAY LOW WORK LIGHT
FULL BEAM LIGHTS RELAY 86
FRONT GLASS WIPER POUMP
REAR W.LIGHT 86SW COMAND

RM1
+5V HLHP
5
4
5
4
5
4
4
5
4
6
3
6
3
6
3
6
3
6
3
8
2
8
2
8
2
8
8
2
6
1
1
1
1
1
1
9
9
9
9
9
8
3
1
7
5
4
3
2
7
1
7
7
7
7
7
9
2
14
14
14
14
14
18
18
18
18
18
18
20
12
CORNER WORK LIGHT RELAY 86 20
12
20
20
15
13
15
13
13
12
10
10
15
13
12
10
15
13
12
10
21
19
17
11
21
19
17
11
21
19
17
11
21
19
11
21
19
17
11
16
16
16
16
16
15
12
20
17
13
21
11
19
16
14
10
1 +5V HLHP
G38
G38
Z1
A1
V1
C1
G1
B1
B1
G1
GL1
V0.5
L0.5
VR1
2 VN1
G0.5
AN1
V0.5
L0.5
L0.5
RH1
L1.5
BN1
S0.5
GR1
S0.5
L0.5
L1.5
5 V0.5
V0.5
V1.5
S0.5
V0.5
B0.5
A0.5
B2.5
20 B0.5
10 CM1
C0.5
V0.5
B0.5
V2.5
R2.5
R2.5
L0.5
L2.5
B0.5
C1.5
B2.5
G1.5
B0.5
C1.5
GR1
V0.5
V1.5
G1,5
NM1
R2.5
G0.5
BR0.5
ZB0.5
BVR1
RV0.5
SN0.5
BVR1
BVN1
RN0.5
RL0.5
LB1.5
AN0.5
HL0.5
CB0.5
AG0.5
15 RV0.5
LB1.5
LN1.5
VR0.5
BV0.5
SN0.5
C0.75
SG0.5
HR0.5
GV0.5
SG0.5
BN2.5
RN0.5
RB0.5
RN0.5
RN0.5
BN1.5
HN0.5
SG0.5
VN0.5
MB0.5
BR0.5
HN0.5
BN0.5
BR0.5
SG0.5
17 AG0.5
GB0.5
GN0.5
GN1.5
GN0.5
GB0.5
RN1.5
RG1.5
VH0.5
VG0.5
VN1.5
GR1.5
RG0.5
MN0.5
HN0.5
MB0.5
SLIPAGE
RG0.5
MN0.5
MB0.5
MG0.5
LBL0.5
NRG0.5
1 AG0.5
LOWERING SPEED 2
MAX HEIGHT
MB0.5 8 DEPHT SET
3
INTERMIX
RV0.5 LOWER LED STD
4 7
LIFT LED STD 5 6 RAISE LED
RAISE LED STD 5 LIFT STATUS STD
G16
6
LOWER LED STD 7 4 INTERMIX
DEPHT SET
RV0.5 3 MAX HEIGHT
8
G16
MB0.5 LOWERING SPEED

2
AG0.5 1 SLIPAGE
BR0.5
22 HML-
67 HML+
RN0.75 68 +30
XFW
M1 57 Y2
-31 1 55 Y1
PARKING BRAKE LIGHT 2 RN0.5 56 EV PROPORTIONAL
-31 3 M1
X8
54 EVR
EV TRAILER 4
50 VEF
GN1
XT1
66 +15
XT GN1 45 +15
+15 2
Z2.5 62 NAB B4
GND 1
M2.5 44 CLUTCH ON/OFF SIGNAL
X7
63 FRONT
65 NEUTRAL
XED
40 NLSA B3
L0.5 DW 39 GEAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
XFSC
38 ANGLE CLUTCH SW SIGNAL

BVR COM LIFT SW CM1 37 +CLUTCH-F/S SENSOR
B0.5 PTO XEP RV1 49 CONFORT CLUTCH
V0.5 xx AC ENGAGEMENT
V0.5 UP
G17
XLT
XEU
32 Y3
S0.5 31 START CONSENT
XI
A1 DIRECTION LIGHT 30 F/S SWITCH
29 18 BAR PRESSURE SW
M1.5 GND
R1 STOP LIGHT B0.5 27 CAN RES
B0.5
G18
XCAN1 26 CAN L
XGND2
G1 POSITION LIGHT A0.5 25 CAN H
RN1 24 GND COM
SLIPAGE 64 RN0.75 +30
23
LOWERING SPEED 69
MAX HEIGHT 76
INTERMIX 55 20 REVERSE
GEAR BOX
+30 1
RN1.5
GND
M1.5 18 F/S SIGNAL
2
R.PTO SW 58 17 POWER SHIFT SENSOR B1
R.TPO AUTO SW 18 16 MAIN CLUTCH SENSOR B9
LIFT LED STD 15 ISO4191
53 B1 14 DISPLAY
EXTERNAL PTO SW 60
13 EV LOCKER
RADAR 7
F,PTO SW STD
12 VPS1+
65 XCF
D3 HL/LIFT DOWN STD
11 Y4
16 B0.5 10
RAISE LED STD EV LOCKER
35 V0.5
EXTERNAL SW UP 11 VR0.5 8 VPS2+
GNDCOM 12
XCOM
LOWER LED STD
SG0.5
45 VR0.5
GNDCOM 14
DEPTH SET SDT 56
OIL TEMPERATURE SENS 68 4 GND COM SENSOR ON/OFF
MB1 3 GND SENSOR
DF SW STD 21 M1 2 -VCC
M1 1 -VCC
PTO SPEDD SIGNAL 8
BRAKE PRESENCE 38
EXTERNAL SW DOWN 22 S0.5 1 CREEPER RELAY

BV1
XCOM
BRAKE SW RIGHT 23 M0.5
X5
VR0.5 2 GND
XEW
GNDCOM 24 MG0.5
D1 HL/LIFT STOP STD 5 VG0.5 M0.5
D2 HL/LIFT UP STD 17 26 GND
RN1.5 XCZ
+30
XE
27 M1.5 22 FRONT PTO
GND 28 MN0.5 27 ISO 9141
EV UP COM 29 REAR PTO
8
XHLHP
3 PTO AUTO
23 +5V
XP
AC ENGAGEMENT V0.5 21
54 SLIPAGE
EV DOWN FRONT AXLE 33 13 LOWERING SPEED
EV DT
XCO
34 12 MAX HEIGHT
11 INTERMIX
HLHP1
REAR PTO EV 36
25 LIFT LED
CAN H
A0.5
40 17 RAISE LED
CAN L 39
B0.5
24 LOWER LED
X11
BR0.5 7 +15
+15
Z1
41 6 DEPHT SET
X2
EV DOWN COM 42 B0.5 20 CAN L

EV DIFF LOCK 43 A0.5 CAN H
28
FRONT PTO EV 44 ENTER
4
MB4 MB4 MB4 5 DECREMEMTN
L0.5
87
87
M0.5 M0.5 9 ESCAPE
EV UP FRONT AXLE 47
M0.5 M0.5 10 INCREMENT
a
a
a
86
85
87
86
85
86
85
85
87 87
87 87
MN0.5 33 HAND GAS GND

BRAKE LEFT 49 MB4 RB0.5
L0.5
+5V HANDGAS
R1
32
30
R4
ISO 9141
30
30
30
+15
ZM0.5
R2
86 R3
L0.5
50 MR0.5
+8V 30 HOLD HANDGAS GND
51
RL1
RL2
MR0.5
RL3
R6
HOLD HAND GAS

R6
+FRONT AXLE STD SW B2.5 RL4 29

6 V2.5 MR0.5 31 HAND GAS SIGNAL
+15 ISO D3/D4 STD +15 SENSOR R3-R4
16
13
MB1
7.5A 7.5A 3A 3A
ASM SW STD
SN0.5
MB1
48 VB0.5
LIFT 2 SIGNAL 57
1
A
12
GN0.5
BVR1
+15
3A
5A
3A
5A
3A
15A
15A
20A
15A
10A
POSITION SENSOR LIFT

7.5A
7.5A
62
MIRROR
+15HLHP
+15 RADIO
+15 ELET.1
HLHP SENS
MB4
30A
+5V
RN1
FM2
67 MB4
XLF
+30 LIGHT
+15 +15
16
13
LEFT DRAFT SIGNAL

MB0.5 L1
70 5A 30A 7.5A 7.5A
HLHP2
FRONT AXLE POITION
R6
71
L1
R4
+30
R4
EV UP SIGNAL 72
SEAT CONSENT
+30 START
61 VG0.5
D4 HL 4
XL
FRL9
ASM POSITION SENSOR 75 SN0.75

DT SW STD 10
+30
+30
RIGHT DRAF SIGNAL

XR
77
1
B
R1
EV DOWN SIGNAL 78
G1.5
12
GN1.5+15
DIN
30A
20A
20A
MB1.5
7.5A
7.5A
7.5A
7.5A
7.5A
+15 ISO 7.5A
+30 ISO 25A

R2.5 25 CHARGE AIR PRESSURE +5V (M25)
COMPRESSOR
GND
M2.5 24 CHARGE AIR PRESSURE SIGNAL (M24)
X10
23 CHARGE AIR PRESSURE GND (M23)
R2.5
R2.5
GN0.5
HN1.5
XCOM
19 ATTUATOR (M19)
R4
ATTUATOR (M18)
X8V
VR0.5 18
BG1
GND OCM 1 R6 ATTUATOR (M17)

XS 17
X9 LIFT 2 SIGNAL 2 15 ATTUATOR (M15)
+8V 3
REV.LEVER/NAB 14 ATTUATOR (M14)
4 PICK-UP+ (M13)
16
MB1.5
GN0.5 13
13
MB1.5
15A 1A 15A 1A 12 PICK-UP- (M12)

RN2.5 16 GND SCREEN
+30 HLHP GEAR LEVER NO.5 9 WATER TEMPERATURE (M9)
MX1
-31
M0.5
2 8 WATER TEMPERATURE (M8) GND
BR0.5
R4
30A
+15 1
R4
5 FUEL TEMP (M5)

R4
FM1
L0.5
R4
X3 CAN H 3
40-138
B0.5 3 H.D.COMAND (M3)
1
C
CAN L 4
XHG
MR0.5 2 GND MOTOR PEDAL GAS

XSW
ZM0.5
12 G
1 GND COM 24
1N4007
G
XHB
R4
5A
15A
15A
25A
15A
25A
15A
10A
15A
20A
HOLD
15A
XHZ
7.5A
STOP
1 +5V 24
+30 ECU
+30 RADIO
RB0.5 2 HAND GAS SIGNAL

FX38
MN0.5 3 GND COM 24

+30 ENGINE START RELAY
R4
30
GAS
XHX XHV
ENGINE START RELAY O

SN0.5 SN0.5 COLD START RELAY
LV2.5
85 3
BN2.5
ENGINE START RELAY 86 M1 2 GND

XST
ENGINE COMAND 87 M1 1 GND

ENGINE COMAND 87a RB0.5 25 +5V 24
RN0.5 24 SIGNAL PEDAL GAS
MN0.5 GND COM 24
23
HN0.5 HAND GAS SIGNAL
V1.5
RM4
20
RM5
RM1
H1.5
RM6
STOP
RM3
M16 ZM0.5 HOLD

MR0.5 18
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
GND COM
NO
17
S0.5 CREEPER
6
86 NC 85
86 NC 85
86 NC 85
86 NC 85
86 NC 85
86 NC 85
86 NC 85
BR1
N4
+15
RLM1
14
RM7
RM2
MX2
G1.5
B0.5 13 CAN L
A0.5
HN1.5
BR1
12 CAN H
V0.5
VN1.5
BR1
M0.5
M0.5
M0.5
M0.5
VB0.5
BV0.5
11 ISO K
N0.5 A0.5 ISO L
+12V 1 10
EV3/4 DISTRIBUTOR
VG1
2 M1 AN0.75
RLM7
17 TRAILER LIGHT (HYDR.) B3
RL9 GND4 G30

-31 3 VB1.5
18 EVR-SIGNAL (T54) A3
VH1.5
15 EV TRAILER/HAND BRAKE) D3
VL1.5
16 +12 VOLT TRAILER PRESSURE C3
RLM6
RLM4
RLM3
RLM5
RLM2
Z1
14 TRAILER INDICATOR E3
M0.5
1 0.5 CM1
13 +5V FIELD/STREET COM (T37) F3
X6
XCOM
SEAT SENSOR SIGNAL 2 VR0.5 BVL1 21 EVF-SIGNAL (T50) D4

SEAT SENSOR GND 3 VGB1
11 FIELD/STREET SIGNAL (T18) B2
MV1
2 ASM SIGNAL E1
NBL1
19 CORNER LIGHT F4
HN1.5 E2
8 LOW BEAM LIGHT
FU1 H1.5
7 LOW BEAM LIGHT F2
125A
X1
R1.5
R25
R25 35 +12 VOLT (30) B6

R1.5 A6
X6
36 +12 VOLT (30)

AN1 41 RIGHT DIRECTION A7
MMEGA VAL
+30A
A1 LEFT DIRECTION B7
GN1.5 40
39 POSITION C7
G1.5 D7
38 POSITION
RN1.5 STOP E7
Z1 B1 37
FRONT WIPER POUMP 1
M1 9 EV UP- D2
-31 2 MB1.5 E6
XM 32 EV UP+
NZ1.5 33 EV DOWN- D6
NZ1.5 C6
34 EV DOWN+
MS1
REAR WATER POUMP 1 MG0.5 C5

M1 28 D1
-31 2 RN0.75 BRAKES OIL LEVEL F5
X2 X1
25
10 EXT.TEMP.SENSOR+ C2
D+ B4
RN1.5 23
-31
M0.5
1 RN1.5 31 START MOTOR F6
+15 2
BR0.5
A0.5
VN1.5 30 START MOTOR A5
ISO L ENGINE 3 24 HIGH BEAM LIGHT A4
ISO K ENGINE 4
VB0.5 E5
26
BVR1 20 +15 RADAR/PTO SENSOR E4
A2
VBN1 12 HORN
X4
G0.5 GL1 4 TANK INDICATOR C1

TRANSMISSION ISO4191 8 HR1.5
BN0.5 5 PRESSURE SWITCH COMPRESSOR B1
HLHP ISO9141 9 GH1 22 SPEED PTO SIGNAL (HLHP-19) C4
A1
6 EV UP
TX INSTRUMENT 11 3 EV DOWN D1
RX INSTRUMENT 12 1 FRONT AXLE POS.SENS. F1
ARMREST ISO9141 13 B5
29 EXT.TEMP.SENSOR
27 D2 D5
REAR WATER POUMP 1 ZG1

2 M1.5 35 +5 VOLT POSITION SENSOR B6
-31 VR1.5 34 SENSOR GND HLHP C6
C1 33 +8 VOLT DRAFT SENSOR D6
STOLL
CN1 32 E6
EV LOCK SIGNAL (T10) CN1
S1 31 START CONSENT (SW) F6
GH1 30 H.D.COMAND (M3) A5
CL1 29 EV LOCK+ (T12-13) B5
ZB1 C5
28 RADAR SIGNAL
BVR1 D5
27 +15 RADAR/PTO SENSOR
S1.5 26 EVP- (T56) E5
LN1.5 25 EV.GV1 (T57) Y2 F5
XTR VG0.75 24 D4 HL-D3-D4 STD A4
L1.5 B4
Z
S
V
R
N
23 EV.GV2 (T11) Y4
M
22 D3 C4
ZR1.5 21 EV.MVR (T55) Y1 D4
ZB1.5 20 EV.MVV (T32) Y3 E4
19 STEERING PRESS.SENSOR F4
BR1.5 A3
D0034340
18 COLD START+ (F14)

RL1.5 EV DF B3
MN1.5 17
16 EV DT SIGNAL C3
L1.5
Rosa/Pink
TK2
15 EV PTO D3
Nero/Black
Rosso/Red
Viola/Violet
Verde/Green
XS1 14 ENGINR PRESSURE (ST2-9- 26VIE) E3

V1.5 13 FRONT PTO EV F3
Marrone/Brown
CL1.5 A2
12 +12V EVP/EV GROUP (T12)
Z1
V1
V1
H1
B2
B1
M1
11 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR NAB(T62)

LR1
R1.5
R1.5
R1.5
VN1
HR1
N0.5
HN1
CB1
BN1
RG1
RN1
R1.5
VG1
10 GEAR TEMPERATURE SENS.(T39) C2
C1.5
7
9
8
1
3
5
2
D2
12
20
21
14
13
16
11
10
18
15
17
9
19
GR1.5 EV POWER SUPPLY (T8)

8 NLSE SIGNAL (T17) E2
CV1 7 F2
RN1 NLSA SIGNAL (T40)
6 TEMP- (T24) A1
SCREEN
MB1
5 GND SENSOR (T3) B1
L
B
A
H
C
Z0.5 4 C1
OIL TEMEPRATURE SENSOR
VB1 D1
PICK-UP- (M12)
PICK-UP+ (M13)
3 NHK SIGNAL (T16)

ATTUATOR (M14)
ATTUATOR (M15)
ATTUATOR (M19)
ATTUATOR (M17)
ATTUATOR (M18)
GN1 2 +15 TRANSMISSION (7.5A) E1

MN1 1 GEAR BOX PRESSURE SWITCH (T29) F1
HV1
FUEL TEMP (M5 - ANAL)
38 RIGHT DRAFT SIGNAL D7

HN1 37 LEFT DRAFT SIGNAL E7
+30 HEATING GROUP FAN2
+30 HEATING GROUP FAN 1
RV1 36 POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL A6

39 AIR FILTER C7
40 +12V NAB SENSOR A6
Grigio/Gray
LBL1 41 CENTRAL W.LIGHTS A7

Giallo/Yellow
Azzurro/Blue
Bianco/White
Blu/Dark Blue
Arancio/Orange
G8
G6
0.013.9301.4/50
0.013.9301.4/50
0.014.3650.4/10
ENGINE WIRING
ENGINE WIRING
G20
G6
5 FUEL TEMP (M5 - ANAL)
12 PICK-UP- (M12)
23 CHARGE AIR PRESSURE GND (M23)
14 ATTUATOR (M14)
XSCH
18 ATTUATOR (M18)
17 ATTUATOR (M17)
19 ATTUATOR (M19)
8 WATER TEMPERATURE (M8) G20

15 ATTUATOR (M15)
9 WATER TEMPERATURE (M9)
25 CHARGE AIR PRESSURE +5V (M25)
13 PICK-UP+ (M13)
24 CHARGE AIR PRESSURE SIGNAL (M24)

RG1
HR1
HN1
CB1
RN1
BN1
VN1
LR1
M1
B1
N1
H1
V1
Z1
21
15
13
18
10
14
12
20
17
16
11
19
6
7
9
1
3
5
2
4
FUEL TEMP (M5 - ANAL)

ATTUATOR (M14)
SCREEN

PICK-UP+ (M13)
ATTUATOR (M15)
PICK-UP- (M12)
ATTUATOR (M19)
ATTUATOR (M18)
ATTUATOR (M17)
D0029950
G6
0.014.3650.4/10
40-139
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
CONNECTOR POSITIONS
CONNECTOR POSITIONS
1
+30A
F0114990
2 G20
F0103150
3
G8
G7
F0104100
40-141
CONNECTOR POSITIONS
4 RLM7
RL4 RL9
RL3 FRL9
RLM6
RLM5
RL2
RLM4
RL1 FX38
RLM3
RLM2
RLM1
F0103320
5
X10
X9
F0115000
6 G3 G2
G4
G5
G1
G6
F0103310
40-142
CONNECTOR POSITIONS
7 X4
G16
X5
HOLD
G30 STOLL
GAS
X3
F0115010
8
MS1
TK2
X11
F0100990
9
MX1
MX2
F0103330
40-143
CONNECTOR POSITIONS
10
G17 G18
F0103280
11
GEARBOX
HLHP1
HLHP2
F0103350
12
X8
F0103340
40-144
CONNECTOR POSITIONS CENTRAL WIRING - ENGINE WIRING
CENTRAL WIRING - ENGINE WIRING

3
13
5
X7
4
X6 X28
7 6
7
F0101020
8 9
14 12
7 10
GND4 14
13
X2 11
X1
2
F0101381
FU1
D0030610
0.013.9301.4/50
0.014.3650.4/10
40-145
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
0.013.9304.4/40
ROOF LINE WIRING (1/2)

X77
X76 X78
X75
2 1
G26
X74
G24
X73
X82 X81 G25

X72
1
2
X80
X79
X71 1
2
X83 G21
G22
G23
X84
RLAC4 RLAC5 RLAC3 RLAC2 RLAC1 X92
X86
X85
X87
G12
G7
G12 To front wipers wiring
G21 To worklights wiring X91 GND5
G22 To worklights wiring
G23 To wiring for worklights, defrost mirror on cab G27
G24 To worklights wiring G8
G25 To worklights wiring
G26 To wiring for worklights on cab and mirror D0034350
defrost
G27
B A
To rotating beacon wiring

G31 To manual air conditioner X90
B
A
X83 Door open warning light switch

GND5 Earthing point 5 X84 Right-hand woofer
X88
RLAC1 Relay for fan speed 3 X85 Courtesy light
RLAC2 Relay for fan speed 4a X86 Rear window wiper switch
G31
RLAC3 Relay for fan speed 4b X73 Right-hand recirculation motor X78 Manual air conditioner control panel lights X87 Rearview mirror demister switch
RLAC4 Relay for recirculation 1 X74 Left-hand recirculation motor X79 Recirculation switch X88 Left-hand fan motor
RLAC5 Relay for recirculation 2 X75 Courtesy light X80 Fan speed selector switch X90 Right-hand fan motor
X71 Number plate light X76 Left-hand woofer X81 Rotating beacon on/off switch X91 Rear window wiper motor
X72 Number plate light X77 Fan speed selector switch X82 Rear worklights switch X92 Radio 0.013.9304.4/40
40-147
0.013.9304.4/40

G12
X91 G27
X86
H1.5
AN1.5
A1.5
X84 X76 G31
BA1.5
POS.
X82 X81 X87 X85 G88 X90
M1.5
1
(53a/+12V)
AN1
BN1
0 2
(31b/ZERO)
A1.5
X92
(53/1SP)
M
(-31/GND)
M
(-31/GND)
(53a/+12V)
(53/1Sp)
(31b/ZERO)
10
G0.5 10
10
12
10
13
10
10
12
11
13
16
8
2
2
9
2
14
15
8
2
5
7
6
11
7
4
5
B
3
A
4
1
9
4
4
5
6
4
3
8
3
2
M0.5
BN1
G0.5
G0.5
RH1
G0.5
M0.5
N0.5
G0.5
M0.5
G0.5
N0.5
Z1
M1
RG 1.5
RN 1.5
HN 1.5
A 1.5
RZ 2.5
HN 1.5
RN 1.5
RZ 1.5
A 1.5
RG2.5
VN1.5
R1
C1
M1
VR1
M 1.5
M 2.5
M 2.5
VN1
VH1
MN1
MB1
BN1
-RIGHT
+RIGHT
+LEFT
-LEFT
+58
GND
+30
+15
VN1.5 REAR GLASS WATER PUMP
1
53 FRONT WIPER
2
MB1 LEFT FRONT TWEETER -
3 2
VH1 RIGHT FRONT TWEETER -
C1
4 1
MN1
5
LEFT FRONT TWEETER +
3 X77
HN1 RIGHT FRONT TWEETER +
M0.5
6 4
V0.5 COMPRESSOR X9
7
M 0.5 1
X1 G0.5 2
X78
C
C 1.5 1
X11
X10 RN1.5 1
2
A 1.5
3
2
X80
G7 8
C1.5 +15 HEATING GROUP HN 0.5
4
3
V2.5 87 REAR WPRK LIGHT X4 RH 0.5 4
9 5
B2.5 87 REAR WPRK LIGHT
10
G1 +58
11 R1
BN1 +15 WIPER REAR X6 A
12 M1
(53a)
13
+15 WIPER FRONT D
X75
31b ZERO
14 C
RH1 +15 MIRROR DEFROST
15
RG0.5 +15 REAR WORK SW
16 B1
17
VN1.5 +30 FLASHER
M0.5
X83
R1 +30 RADIO
18
R1 +15 RADIO/PLAFO
19
C1.5 +15 HEATING GROUP
20 5
B0.5 86 REAR W.LIGHT COM
21 4
C 0.5
3 X79
V1.5 REAR WORK LIGHT1
1
M1.5 GND RB 1
2
G22 V1.5 REAR WORK LIGHT2
M1.5 GND
M1
GND5 M6
1
M6
X2 G1
2
X72
RB1 MIRROR DEFROST
G23 M1 GND
M6
B1.5 REAR WORK LIGHT1 X5
1
M1.5 GND
G1 2
X71
G21 B1.5 REAR WORK LIGHT2
M1.5 GND
V1.5 REAR WORK LIGHT1
M1.5 GND
G25 V1.5 REAR WORK LIGHT2

X3
M1.5 GND
RB1 MIRROR DEFROST
G26 M1.5 GND
B1.5 FRONT WORK LIGHT1
M1.5 GND
G24 B1.5 FRONT WORK LIGHT2
M1.5 GND
R1.5 +30 HETING GROUP

1
2
G8 3

5
X7 M Marrone/Brown C Arancio/Orange
RG2.5
RG1.5
RH0.5
CB0.5
HN0.5
RH0.5
CB0.5
RZ1.5
RZ2.5
M0.5
M0.5
G2.5
M0.5
M0.5
M0.5
C0.5
C2.5
M0.5
M0.5
C0.5
R2.5
C0.5
R2.5
C0.5
RB1
RB1
87
87
87
86
86
86
30
85
30
85
30
85
6
4
4
5
5
2
2
3
2
4
1
1
1
M M
X73 X74 D0034360

RLAC1 RLAC2 RLAC3 RLAC4 RLAC5
0.013.9304.4/40
40-148
0.013.9310.4/20
WIRING FOR WORKLIGHTS, DEFROST MIRROR ON CAB (HL VERSION)
WIRING FOR WORKLIGHTS, DEFROST MIRROR ON CAB (HL VERSION)
RB1.5
1
X101 - X102 M1.5 G23 - G26

2
B1.5
X101 - X102
M1.5
B1.5 G21 - G24
1
1
2
X103 - X104 2
M1.5
X105- X106 2
G23 - G26
X103 - X104
G21 - G24
X105- X106
G21 To roof line wiring

G21 - G24
X107- X108 G24 To roof line wiring
X101 Right-hand rearview mirror with electric
demisting
X102 Left-hand rearview mirror with electric
demisting
X103 Right-hand front worklight on cab
M Marrone/Brown C Arancio/Orange X104 Left-hand front worklight on cab
X109- X110
V1.5
1
X107- X108 M1.5
2
G21 - G24
N
S
Nero/Black
Rosa/Pink
L
G
Blu/Dark Blue
Giallo/Yellow
X106 Left-hand front worklight on cab
V1.5
R Rosso/Red H Grigio/Gray X107 Right-hand rear worklight on cab
M1.5
D0029930 X108 Left-hand rear worklight on cab
1
X109 Right-hand rear worklight on cab
X109- X110 2 X110 Left-hand rear worklight on cab
0.013.9310.4/20
40-149
0.014.1565.4/10
WIRING FOR WORKLIGHTS ON CAB (STANDARD VERSION)
WIRING FOR WORKLIGHTS ON CAB (STANDARD VERSION)
X103 - X104 G21 - G22

X107 - X108 G24 - G25
VB1
1
X103 - X104 M1
X107 - X108 2
G21 - G22
G24 - G25
D0029960

X104 Left-hand front worklight on cab
X107 Right-hand rear worklight on cab
X108 Left-hand rear worklight on cab
0.014.1565.4/10
40-150
0.014.1567.4/10
WINDSCREEN WIPER WIRING
WINDSCREEN WIPER WIRING
X100
H1
A1
G12
X100
AB1
AN1
G12 N Nero/Black L Blu/Dark Blue
D0029940

X100 Windscreen wiper motor
0.014.1567.4/10
40-151
0.011.3824.4
ROTATING BEACON WIRING
ROTATING BEACON WIRING
X99 G27
VG 1 VG 1
4 4
N1
X99 3
2 G27
N1
3
1
D0030060

X99 Rotating light
0.011.3824.4
40-152
CONNECTOR POSITIONS
CONNECTOR POSITIONS
1 X86
X87
X92
X85
F0100960
2 G12
G8 GND
G7
F0100980
3
G21
G22 G23
F0100970
40-153
CONNECTOR POSITIONS
4
X84
F0100940
5 RLAC2
RLAC1
RLAC3
RLAC5
RLAC4
F0100890
6 X73
X91
F0100920
40-154
CONNECTOR POSITIONS
7 G31
X90
F0100860
8
X88
F0100870
9
G27
F0100880
40-155
CONNECTOR POSITIONS
10
X74
F0100930
11 G24
G26
G25
F0100950
12 X82
X81
X76
X75
F0100900
40-156
CONNECTOR POSITIONS ROOF LINE WIRING - WORKLIGHTS WIRING, MIRROR DEFROST ON CAB - WIRING FOR WORKLIGHTS ON CAB - WINSCREEN WIPER WIRING - ROTARY BEACON WIRING
ROOF LINE WIRING -

WORKLIGHTS WIRING, MIRROR DEFROST ON CAB -
WIRING FOR WORKLIGHTS ON CAB -
13 WINSCREEN WIPER WIRING -
ROTARY BEACON WIRING
X107 X109
X71
X77
X78
2
3 8
X72
5 X99
7
X80 2
X79
6
X101
1
X103
F0100910
13
X110
4
12
1
9 X108
X105 10
11
12
X83
X102
X106
X104
X100
0.013.9304.4/40
0.013.9310.4/20
0.014.1565.4/10
0.014.1567.4/10
0.011.3824.4
40-157
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
Der Nachdruck des Textes und der Abbildungen ist, auch auszugsweise, verboten.
La reproduction du présent ouvrage, du texte et des ìllustratìons, mème partìelle est interdite.
Text and illustrations herewith enclosed may not be reproduced, not even in part and by any means.
E’ vietata la riproduzione, anche parziale, del testo e delle illustrazioni.
Se prohibe la reproducciòn total o parcial del texto y de las ilustraciones.
A proibida a reproduçào, até mesmo parcial, do texto e das ilustracòes.
Der zeitliche Unterschied zwischen der Aktualisierung der Druckschriften und der Durchführung technischer Verände-
rungen (die ständig vorgenommen werden, um immer hochwertigere Erzeugnisse auf den Markt zu bringen) erfordern
aus Gründen der Korrektheit des Hinweises, dass die in dieser Ausgabe enthaltenen Daten jederzeit geändert werden
können und deshalb unverbindlich sind.
Le temps qui s’écoule entre la mise à jour en impression et les modifications techniques (ces dernières changeant con-
tinuellement afin d’offrir aux utilisateurs des produits toujours plus qualifiés) nous oblige a vous signaler que les
données de la présente publication pourraient être susceptibles de variations. Elles sont données sans engagement de
notre part.
Because of the possible time lag between the introduction of technical modifications (an on-going process the aim of
which is to offer products which are being continually improved) and the latest update of the manual, we must point out,
for the sake of correctness,that the data contained in this edition are liable to change at any time and are therefore not
binding.
La differenza tra i tempi di aggiornamento in stampa e i tempi delle modifiche tecniche (variando queste ultime conti-
nuamente, ciò al fine di offrire prodotti sempre più qualificati) impongono di dichiarare, per correttezza, che i dati con-
tenuti nella presente edizione sono suscettibili di variazione in qualsiasi momento e che quindi non sono impegnativi.
La diferencia entre los tiempos necesarios para poner al dia la impresiòn y los tiempos de las modificaciones tècnicas
(las que se verifican continuamente, con el objeto de ofrecer productos cada vez màs calificados) nos imponen
declarar, por corrección, que los datos contenidos en la presente ediciòn estàn sujetos a variaciones en cualquier mo-
mento y que portanto no son obligativos.
A diferença entre os tempos necessãrrios para actualizar a impressão e os tempos das modificacões técnicas (que se
verificam continuamente, a fim de oferecer um produto cada vez mais qualificado), obrigam-nos a declarar, que os da-
dos contidos neste manuel são susceptiveis de variacão em qualquer momento e que portanto não são vinculatórios.
NOTES
07 - 2006 cod. 307.1132.3.6

By Personal computing Technical Publications Dep.
07-2006
307. 1132. 3. 6

Sm-Deutz Fahr Agrotron k90 k100 k110 k120 Profiline Tractor

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sm-Deutz Fahr Agrotron k90 k100 k110 k120 Profiline Tractor

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sm-Deutz Fahr Agrotron k90 k100 k110 k120 Profiline Tractor

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SAME DEUTZ-FAHR DEUTSCHLAND GmbH

SAME DEUTZ-FAHR DEUTSCHLAND GmbH

GENERAL SAFETY RULES

24 - To lift heavy components, use a hoist or crane. Check that

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR REMOVAL AND REFITTING

★ When removing or refitting parts, always take the following safety

1. PRECAUTIONS FOR REMOVAL OPERATIONS

2. PRECAUTIONS FOR REFITTING OPERATIONS

3. PRECAUTIONS TO BE TAKEN ON COMPLETION OF REMOVAL/REFITTING OPERATIONS

WIRE ROPES - SLINGS

WIRE ROPES POLYESTER SLINGS

8 650 620 500 25 500 400 860 700

NOTE. Lifting capacities are calculated with a safety coefficient.

30° 60° 90° 120° 150°

HOW THE MANUAL IS STRUCTURED

SECTION 10 Contains technical descriptions and information regarding the

SECTION 40 Contains information and diagrams regarding the machine's electrical

HOW TO CONSULT THE MANUAL

1. Removal and refitting of assembled units

1 :.......................................................................Technique to be applied during refitting.

3. List of special tools

HOW TO USE AND UPDATE THE MANUAL

1. UPDATING THE MANUAL

Progressive page number

30-5-2 Existing page

3. SYMBOLS USED IN THE MANUAL

1. BOLTS AND NUTS

SCREW SIZE 8.8 10.9 12.9

Hex plugs Threaded plugs with hex socket head

4. FITTINGS WITH SEAL AT 37°

Thread size Wrench Torque Thread size Wrench Torque

5. FITTINGS FOR PIPES WITH BANJO UNION

Thread size Wrench Torque Wrench Torque Wrench Torque

THREADLOCKERS, ADHESIVES, SEALANTS AND

FUNCTION DESIGNATION DESCRIPTION

conventional mechanical locking systems.

FUNCTION DESIGNATION DESCRIPTION

on flexible joints, filling gaps greater than 1 mm.

One-part silicone adhesive/sealant, shrinking, ready for use.

Polyurethane prepolymer based adhesive/sealant, high viscosity, suitable for permanent,

Loctite 601 Anaerobic, fast-curing, high-strength adhesive.

Anaerobic structural adhesive, quick-curing, high-strength; suitable for bonding cylindrical

Loctite 986/AVX Anaerobic sealant/retaining compound for metal cylindrical parts.

1. TRANSMISSION ................................................................. 1 3. FRONT AXLE HYDRAULIC SUSPENSION...................... 33

• The transmission can be divided into the following sections:

1.1 POWER SHUTTLE TRANSMISSION

1.1.1 MAIN COMPONENTS

13. Left brake cylinder

22. Power lift shaft

1.1.2 TRANSMISSION HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

1 - Lubrication circuit pressure 8 - Four wheel drive 14 - Differential lock

1. Flywheel damper 9. Mechanical gearbox 17. Creeper unit synchronizer

1.1.4 MAIN CLUTCH

1.1.5 HYDRAULIC GEARBOX AND SHUTTLE CONTROL VALVE

Pilot pressure valve

Trasmission lubrification Control and lubricating pump

A. GEARBOX CONTROL VALVE

PRESSURE TEST POINTS

Range Function Thread size Pressure

1 General pressure M10x1 18 bar